2013 Buick Regal Owner Manual M...Buick Regal Owner Manual - 2013 - crc - 11/5/12 Black plate (3,1)...

Black plate (1,1)Buick Regal Owner Manual - 2013 - crc - 11/5/12

2013 Buick Regal Owner Manual M

In Brief . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2Initial Drive Information . . . . . . . . 1-4Vehicle Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14eAssist Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19Performance andMaintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21

Keys, Doors, andWindows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1Keys and Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11Vehicle Security. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13Exterior Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15Interior Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19

Seats and Restraints . . . . . . . . . 3-1Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8Airbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29

Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1Storage Compartments . . . . . . . . 4-1Additional Storage Features . . . 4-3

Instruments and Controls . . . . 5-1Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2Warning Lights, Gauges, andIndicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8

Information Displays . . . . . . . . . . 5-24Vehicle Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28Vehicle Personalization . . . . . . . 5-34Universal Remote System . . . . 5-39

Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1Exterior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1Interior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4Lighting Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6

Infotainment System . . . . . . . . . 7-1Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9Audio Players . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-22Trademarks and LicenseAgreements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-34

Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1Climate Control Systems . . . . . . 8-1Air Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6

Driving and Operating . . . . . . . . 9-1Driving Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2Starting and Operating . . . . . . . 9-14Engine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-26Automatic Transmission . . . . . . 9-27Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . 9-30Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-31Ride Control Systems . . . . . . . . 9-35Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-41Object Detection Systems . . . . 9-43Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-45Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-51Conversions and Add-Ons . . . 9-51

Vehicle Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1General Information . . . . . . . . . . 10-2Vehicle Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3Headlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . 10-29Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-30Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-34Wheels and Tires . . . . . . . . . . . 10-41


2013 Buick Regal Owner Manual M

Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-85Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-89Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . 10-92

Service and Maintenance . . . 11-1General Information . . . . . . . . . . 11-1Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . 11-3Special ApplicationServices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8

Additional Maintenanceand Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-9

Recommended Fluids,Lubricants, and Parts . . . . . . 11-12

Maintenance Records . . . . . . . 11-15

Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1Vehicle Identification . . . . . . . . . 12-1Vehicle Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2

Customer Information . . . . . . . 13-1Customer Information . . . . . . . . 13-2Reporting Safety Defects . . . . 13-17Vehicle Data Recording andPrivacy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-19

OnStar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1OnStar Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1OnStar Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2OnStar AdditionalInformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-5

Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i-1


Introduction iii

The names, logos, emblems,slogans, vehicle model names, andvehicle body designs appearing inthis manual including, but not limitedto, GM, the GM logo, BUICK, theBUICK Emblem, and REGAL aretrademarks and/or service marks ofGeneral Motors LLC, itssubsidiaries, affiliates, or licensors.

This manual describes features thatmay or may not be on your specificvehicle either because they areoptions that you did not purchase ordue to changes subsequent to theprinting of this owner manual.Please refer to the purchasedocumentation relating to yourspecific vehicle to confirm each ofthe features found on your vehicle.For vehicles first sold in Canada,substitute the name “GeneralMotors of Canada Limited” for BuickMotor Division wherever it appearsin this manual.

Keep this manual in the vehicle forquick reference.

Canadian Vehicle Owners

Propriétaires Canadiens

A French language manual can beobtained from your dealer, atwww.helminc.com, or from:

On peut obtenir un exemplaire dece guide en français auprès duconcessionnaire ou à l'adressesavant:

Helm, IncorporatedAttention: Customer Service47911 Halyard DrivePlymouth, MI 48170

Litho in U.S.A.Part No. 22771250 B Second Printing ©2012 General Motors LLC. All Rights Reserved.


iv Introduction

Using this ManualTo quickly locate information aboutthe vehicle, use the Index in theback of the manual. It is analphabetical list of what is in themanual and the page number whereit can be found.

Danger, Warnings, andCautionsWarning messages found on vehiclelabels and in this manual describehazards and what to do to avoid orreduce them.

Danger indicates a hazard with ahigh level of risk which will result inserious injury or death.

Warning or Caution indicates ahazard that could result in injury ordeath.

{ WARNING

These mean there is somethingthat could hurt you or otherpeople.

Notice: This means there issomething that could result inproperty or vehicle damage. Thiswould not be covered by thevehicle's warranty.

A circle with a slash through it is asafety symbol which means “DoNot,” “Do not do this,” or “Do not letthis happen.”

SymbolsThe vehicle has components andlabels that use symbols instead oftext. Symbols are shown along withthe text describing the operation orinformation relating to a specificcomponent, control, message,gauge, or indicator.

M : This symbol is shown whenyou need to see your owner manualfor additional instructions orinformation.

* : This symbol is shown whenyou need to see a service manualfor additional instructions orinformation.


Introduction v

Vehicle Symbol Chart

Here are some additional symbolsthat may be found on the vehicleand what they mean. For moreinformation on the symbol, refer tothe Index.

9 : Airbag Readiness Light

# : Air Conditioning

! : Antilock Brake System (ABS)

% : Audio Steering Wheel Controlsor OnStar®

$ : Brake System Warning Light

" : Charging System

I : Cruise Control

B : Engine Coolant Temperature

O : Exterior Lamps

g : First Responder

# : Fog Lamps

. : Fuel Gauge

+ : Fuses

3 : Headlamp High/Low-BeamChanger

( : Heated Steering Wheel

j : LATCH System ChildRestraints

* : Malfunction Indicator Lamp

: : Oil Pressure

} : Power

/ : Remote Vehicle Start

> : Safety Belt Reminders

7 : Tire Pressure Monitor

d : Traction Control/StabiliTrak®

M : Windshield Washer Fluid


vi Introduction

2 NOTES


In Brief 1-1

In Brief

Instrument PanelInstrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2

Initial Drive InformationInitial Drive Information . . . . . . . . 1-4Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4

Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . 1-4Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5Trunk Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6Heated Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7Head Restraint Adjustment . . . . 1-8Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8Passenger Sensing System . . . 1-8Mirror Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9Steering Wheel Adjustment . . . 1-9Interior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9Exterior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10

Windshield Wiper/Washer . . . . 1-11Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13

Vehicle FeaturesRadio(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15Portable Audio Devices . . . . . . 1-15Bluetooth® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16Steering Wheel Controls . . . . . 1-16Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16Infotainment System . . . . . . . . . 1-17Driver InformationCenter (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17

Vehicle Personalization . . . . . . 1-17Ultrasonic Parking Assist . . . . 1-18Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18Universal Remote System . . . 1-18Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18

eAssist FeatureseAssist® Overview . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19High Voltage SafetyInformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20

Driver Efficiency Gauge . . . . . . 1-20Automatic Engine Start/StopFeature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20

Regenerative Braking . . . . . . . . 1-21Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21

Performance and MaintenanceTraction ControlSystem (TCS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21

StabiliTrak® System . . . . . . . . . 1-22Tire Pressure Monitor . . . . . . . . 1-22Tire Sealant andCompressor Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22

Engine Oil Life System . . . . . . 1-23Fuel E85 (85% Ethanol) . . . . . 1-23Driving for Better FuelEconomy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23

Roadside AssistanceProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24

OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24


1-2 In Brief

Instrument Panel


In Brief 1-3

1. Exterior Lamp Controls onpage 6‑1.

Fog Lamps on page 6‑4.

Instrument Panel IlluminationControl on page 6‑4.

2. Air Vents on page 8‑6.

3. Turn and Lane-Change Lever.See Turn and Lane-ChangeSignals on page 6‑3.

Driver Information CenterButtons. See Driver InformationCenter (DIC) on page 5‑24.

4. Cruise Control on page 9‑41.

5. Instrument Cluster on page 5‑9.

6. Horn on page 5‑3.

Driver Airbag. See Where Arethe Airbags? on page 3‑19.

7. Driver Information CenterDisplay. See Driver InformationCenter (DIC) on page 5‑24.

8. Steering Wheel Controls onpage 5‑2.

9. Windshield Wiper/Washer onpage 5‑3.

10. Keyless Ignition Button (IfEquipped). See IgnitionPositions (Keyless Access) onpage 9‑17 or Ignition Positions(Key Access) on page 9‑15.

11. Infotainment on page 7‑1.

12. Traction Control System (TCS)on page 9‑35 (If Equipped).

StabiliTrak® System onpage 9‑36 (If Equipped).

13. Infotainment Display.

14. Power Door Locks onpage 2‑10.

Hazard Warning Flashers onpage 6‑3.

Passenger Sensing System onpage 3‑23.

15. Ultrasonic Parking Assist onpage 9‑43.

16. Front Passenger Airbag. SeeWhere Are the Airbags? onpage 3‑19.

17. Hood Release. See Hood onpage 10‑4.

18. Data Link Connector (Out ofView). See MalfunctionIndicator Lamp on page 5‑15.

19. Instrument Panel Fuse Blockon page 10‑39.

Instrument Panel Storage onpage 4‑1.

20. Steering Wheel Adjustment onpage 5‑2.

21. Ignition Positions (KeylessAccess) on page 9‑17 orIgnition Positions (Key Access)on page 9‑15.

22. Heated Front Seats onpage 3‑6.

23. Storage Compartment.

24. Shift Lever. See AutomaticTransmission on page 9‑27 orManual Transmission onpage 9‑30.

25. Dual Automatic Climate ControlSystem on page 8‑1.


1-4 In Brief

Initial DriveInformationThis section provides a briefoverview about some of theimportant features that may or maynot be on your specific vehicle.

For more detailed information, referto each of the features which can befound later in this owner manual.

Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) SystemThe Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter may work up to 60 m(195 ft) away from the vehicle.

RKE without Remote Start

Press the button to extend the key.The key can be used for all locks.This key is also used for theignition, if the vehicle does not havepushbutton start.

K : Press to unlock the driver dooror all doors.

Q : Press to lock all doors.

Lock and unlock feedback can bepersonalized.

V : Press and hold to release thetrunk.

7 : Press and release one time toinitiate vehicle locator. Press andhold for at least three seconds tosound the panic alarm. Press againto cancel the panic alarm.

See Keys on page 2‑1 and RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) SystemOperation on page 2‑3.

Remote Vehicle StartFor vehicles with this feature, theengine can be started from outsidethe vehicle.

Starting the Vehicle

1. Aim the RKE transmitter at thevehicle.

2. Press and release Q.3. Immediately after completing

Step 2, press and hold/ for atleast two seconds or until theturn signal lamps flash.


In Brief 1-5

When the engine starts, the parkinglamps will turn on and remain on aslong as the engine is running. Thedoors will be locked and the climatecontrol system may come on.

The engine will continue to run for10 minutes. Repeat the steps for a10-minute time extension. Remotestart can be extended only once.

Canceling a Remote Start

To cancel a remote start, do one ofthe following:. Aim the RKE transmitter at the

vehicle and press and hold/until the parking lamps turn off.

. Turn on the hazard warningflashers.

. Turn the vehicle on and then off.

See Remote Vehicle Start onpage 2‑8.

Door LocksTo lock or unlock the door, use theRemote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter or the key from outsidethe vehicle, and the door lock knobor switch from inside the vehicle.

From inside the vehicle, pull thedoor handle once to unlock it and asecond time to open it. See DoorLocks on page 2‑10.

Power Door Locks

K : Press to unlock the doors.

Q : Press to lock the doors.

See Vehicle Personalization onpage 5‑34.

Trunk Release

To open the trunk, pressV on theRemote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter or press the touch padunder the vehicle emblem.

See Trunk on page 2‑11 foradditional information.


1-6 In Brief

Windows

The power window switches arelocated on the driver door. Eachpassenger door has a switch thatcontrols only that window.

Press the switch to lower thewindow. Pull the front of the switchup to raise it. See Power Windowson page 2‑17.

Seat Adjustment

Manual Seats

1. Seatback Recline Lever

2. Height Adjustment Switch

3. Seat Position Handle

To adjust the seat position:

1. Pull the handle (3) under thefront of the seat cushion.

2. Slide the seat to the desiredposition and release thehandle (3).

3. Try to move the seat back andforth to be sure it is locked inplace.

Press and hold the top or bottom ofthe switch (2) to raise or lower theseat. Release the switch (2) whenthe desired height is reached.

To raise or recline the seatback, usethe lever (1) on the outboard side ofthe seat.

See Seat Adjustment on page 3‑3and Reclining Seatbacks onpage 3‑5.


In Brief 1-7

Power Seats

1. Seat Adjustment Control

2. Reclining Seatbacks

3. Lumbar Adjustment

To adjust a power seat, if equipped:. Move the seat forward or

rearward by sliding thecontrol (1) forward or rearward.

. Raise or lower the front or rearpart of the seat cushion bymoving the front or rear of thecontrol (1) up or down.

. Raise or lower the entire seat bymoving the control (1) upor down.

See Power Seat Adjustment onpage 3‑4.

To raise or recline the seatback, tiltthe top of the control (2) forward orrearward. See Reclining Seatbackson page 3‑5.

Press the front or rear of thecontrol (3) to increase or decreaselumbar support. Press and hold thetop or bottom of the control (3) toraise or lower lumbar support. SeeLumbar Adjustment on page 3‑4.

Heated Seats

Uplevel Buttons Shown, BaseButtons Similar

If available, the buttons are on theclimate control panel. To operate,the ignition must be on.

Press M or L to heat the driver orpassenger seat cushion andseatback. Indicator lights on thebutton or on the climate controldisplay show the current setting.

See Heated Front Seats onpage 3‑6.


1-8 In Brief

Head RestraintAdjustmentDo not drive until the head restraintsfor all occupants are installed andadjusted properly.

To achieve a comfortable seatingposition, change the seatbackrecline angle as little as necessarywhile keeping the seat and the headrestraint height in the properposition.

See Head Restraints on page 3‑2and Seat Adjustment on page 3‑3.

Safety Belts

Refer to the following sections forimportant information on how to usesafety belts properly:. Safety Belts on page 3‑8.. How to Wear Safety Belts

Properly on page 3‑10.. Lap-Shoulder Belt on page 3‑11.. Lower Anchors and Tethers for

Children (LATCH System) onpage 3‑37.

Passenger SensingSystem

The passenger sensing systemturns off the front outboardpassenger frontal airbag undercertain conditions. No other airbagis affected by the passengersensing system.

The passenger airbag statusindicator will be visible on theinstrument panel when the vehicle isstarted. See Passenger SensingSystem on page 3‑23 for importantinformation.


In Brief 1-9

Mirror Adjustment

Exterior Mirrors

1. Turn the control knob to the L(Left) or R (Right) selecting thedriver or passenger mirror.

2. Push the control knob to the left,right, up, or down to adjust themirror.

See Power Mirrors on page 2‑16.

Interior Mirror

The vehicle has an automaticdimming inside rearview mirror.Automatic dimming reduces theglare from the headlamps of thevehicle behind you.

See Automatic Dimming RearviewMirror on page 2‑16.

Steering WheelAdjustment

To adjust the steering wheel:

1. Pull the lever down.

2. Move the steering wheel upor down.

3. Pull or push the steering wheelcloser or away from you.

4. Pull the lever up to lock thesteering wheel in place.

Do not adjust the steering wheelwhile driving.

Interior LightingDome Lamps

The interior lamps control located inthe overhead console controls boththe front and rear interior lamps.

( : Turns the lamps off.


1-10 In Brief

H : Turns the lamps on when anydoor is opened.

' : Keeps the lamps on allthe time.

Reading Lamps

There are front and rear readinglamps.

The front reading lamps are locatedin the overhead console.

The rear reading lamps are locatedin the headliner.

# or$ : Press to turn each lampon or off.

For more information, see:. Dome Lamps on page 6‑5.

Exterior Lighting

The exterior lamp control is on theinstrument panel on the outboardside of the steering wheel.

O : Turns off the exterior lamps.The knob returns to the AUTOposition after it is released. Turn toO again to reactivate theAUTO mode.

In Canada, the headlamps willautomatically reactivate once thevehicle is shifted out of P (Park).

AUTO: Automatically turns theexterior lamps on and off,depending on outside lighting.


In Brief 1-11

; : Turns on the parking lampstogether with the following:. Sidemarker Lamps. Taillamps. License Plate Lamps. Instrument Panel Lights

2 : Turns on the headlampstogether with the following:. Sidemarker Lamps. Taillamps. License Plate Lamps. Instrument Panel Lights. Parking Lamps

See:. Exterior Lamp Controls on

page 6‑1. Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)

on page 6‑2. Fog Lamps on page 6‑4, If

Equipped.

Windshield Wiper/Washer

The windshield wiper/washer leveris on the right side of the steeringcolumn. With the ignition in ACC/ACCESSORY or ON/RUN, movethe windshield wiper lever to selectthe wiper speed.

HI: Use for fast wipes.

LO: Use for slow wipes.

INT: Move the lever up to INT forintermittent wipes, then turn the3 INT band up for more frequentwipes or down for less frequentwipes.

OFF: Use to turn the wipers off.

8 : For a single wipe, briefly movethe wiper lever down. For severalwipes, hold the wiper lever down.

nL : Pull the windshield wiperlever toward you to spray windshieldwasher fluid and activate the wipers.

See Windshield Wiper/Washer onpage 5‑3.


1-12 In Brief

Climate ControlsThe heating, cooling, and ventilation for the vehicle can be controlled withthese systems.

Dual Automatic Climate Control System for Non-eAssist Vehicles

1. Air Conditioning

2. Driver and PassengerTemperature Controls

3. Heated Seats

4. Air Delivery Modes

5. Climate Display

6. Defrost

7. Recirculation

8. Fan Controls

9. AUTO (Automatic Operation)

10. Rear Defogger


In Brief 1-13

Dual Automatic Climate Control System for eAssist Vehicles

1. Eco/Comfort Air Conditioning


3. Heated Seats


5. Climate Display

6. Defrost

7. Recirculation

8. Fan Controls


10. Rear Defogger

See Dual Automatic Climate ControlSystem on page 8‑1.

Transmission

Automatic Transmission

P: Park

R: Reverse

N: Neutral

D: Drive


1-14 In Brief

Manual Mode

Driver Shift Control (DSC) allowsyou to shift an automatictransmission similar to a manualtransmission. To use the DSCfeature:

1. Move the shift lever to the leftfrom D (Drive) into the side gatemarked with (+) and (−).

2. Press the shift lever forward toupshift or rearward to downshift.

See Automatic Transmission onpage 9‑27.

Vehicle Features

Radio(s)3 / O : Press to turn the systemon and off. Turn to increase ordecrease the volume.

SRCE: Press to choose betweenFM, AM, SiriusXM®,if equipped, or CD.

Multifunction Knob: Turn to selectradio stations.

s © : Press to seek the previousstation or track.

¨ \ : Press to seek the nextstation or track.

Buttons 1 to 6: Press to save andselect favorite stations.

INFO: Press to show availableinformation about the current stationor track, or to display the time whenthe ignition is off.

For more information about theseand other radio features, seeOverview on page 7‑2.

Storing a Favorite Station

Stations from all bands can bestored in the favorite lists in anyorder. Up to six stations can bestored in each favorite page and thenumber of available favorite pagescan be set.

To store the station to a position inthe list, press the correspondingnumeric button 1 to 6 until a beep isheard. The stored station will beginplayback.

For more information, see “Storing aStation as a Favorite” in AM-FMRadio on page 7‑9.

Setting the Clock (Radiowith CD)

Setting the Time and Date

1. Press the CONFIG button andselect Time and Date Settings.

2. Select Set Time or Set Date.

3. Turn the Multifunction knob toadjust the highlighted value.


In Brief 1-15

4. Press the Multifunction knob toselect the next value.

5. To save the time and return tothe Time Settings menu, pressthe BACK button at any time orpress the Multifunction buttonafter adjusting the minutes.

Setting the 12/24 Hour Format


2. Highlight 12/24 Hour Format.

3. Press the Multifunction knob toselect the 12 hour or 24 hourdisplay format.

Setting the Clock (Radio withCD and Touchscreen)

From the Time and Date Settingsscreen button, press to display theTime and Date Settings menu.

Set Time: Press + or − to increaseor decrease the Hours and Minutesdisplayed on the clock.

Set Date: Press + or − to increaseor decrease the day.

Set Time Format: Press the 12 HRscreen button for standard time;press the 24 HR screen button formilitary time.

Set Date Format: Depending onthe region, the following dateformats may be available:MM/DD/YYYY, DD.MM.YYYY,or YYYY/MM/DD.

See Clock on page 5‑5.

Satellite RadioVehicles with a SiriusXM® satelliteradio tuner and a valid SiriusXMsatellite radio subscription canreceive SiriusXM programming.

SiriusXM Satellite RadioService

SiriusXM is a satellite radio servicebased in the 48 contiguous UnitedStates and 10 Canadian provinces.

SiriusXM satellite radio has a widevariety of programming andcommercial-free music, coast tocoast, and in digital-quality sound.A fee is required to receive theSiriusXM service.

Refer to:. www.siriusxm.com or call

1-866-635-2349 (U.S.).. www.xmradio.ca or call

1-877-209-0079 (Canada).

See Satellite Radio on page 7‑11.

Portable Audio DevicesSome vehicles have a 3.5 mm(1/8 in) auxiliary input and a USBport in the center console bin.External devices such as iPods®,laptop computers, MP3 players, CDchangers, and USB drives may beconnected, depending on the audiosystem.

See Auxiliary Devices on page 7‑18.


1-16 In Brief

Bluetooth®

The Bluetooth® system allows userswith a Bluetooth-enabled mobilephone to make and receivehands-free calls using the vehicleaudio system and controls.

The Bluetooth-enabled mobilephone must be paired with thein-vehicle Bluetooth system before itcan be used in the vehicle. Not allphones will support all functions.

See Bluetooth (Overview) onpage 7‑22 or Bluetooth(Infotainment Controls) onpage 7‑24 or Bluetooth (VoiceRecognition) on page 7‑27.

Steering Wheel Controls

For vehicles with audio steeringwheel controls, some audio controlscan be adjusted at the steeringwheel.

b / g : Press to interact with theavailable Bluetooth, OnStar,or navigation system.

$ /i : Press to silence thevehicle speakers only. Press againto turn the sound on. For vehicleswith OnStar or Bluetooth systems,press to reject an incoming call,or to end a current call.

_ SRC ^ : Move the thumbwheelup or down to select an audiosource.

Press _ or ^ to select the next orprevious favorite radio station, CD,or MP3 track.

+ x −: Press + to increase or − todecrease the volume.

For more information, see SteeringWheel Controls on page 5‑2.

Cruise Control


In Brief 1-17

5 : Press to turn the cruise controlsystem on and off.

* : Press to disengage cruisecontrol without erasing the setspeed from memory.

RES/+: Move the thumbwheel up tomake the vehicle resume to apreviously set speed or toaccelerate.

SET/−: Move the thumbwheel downtoward SET/- to set a speed andactivate cruise control, or to makethe vehicle decelerate.

See Cruise Control on page 9‑41.

Infotainment SystemSee the infotainment manual forinformation on the radio, audioplayers, phone, navigation system,and voice or speech recognition.There is also information on settingsand downloadable applications (ifequipped).

Driver InformationCenter (DIC)The DIC display is in the center ofthe instrument cluster. It shows thestatus of many vehicle systems. Thecontrols for the DIC are on the turnsignal lever.

1. SET/CLR: Press to set, or pressand hold to clear, the menu itemdisplayed.

2. w / x : Use the thumbwheel toscroll through the items ineach menu.

3. MENU: Press to display the DICmenus. This button is also usedto return to or exit the lastscreen displayed on the DIC.

See Driver Information Center (DIC)on page 5‑24.

Vehicle PersonalizationThe audio system controls are usedto access the personalizationmenus for customizing vehiclefeatures.

To enter the personalization menus:

1. Press CONFIG to access theConfiguration Settings menu.

2. Turn the Multifunction knob tohighlight Vehicle Settings.

3. Press the center of theMultifunction knob to select theVehicle Settings menu.

The following list of menu items willbe available:. Climate and Air Quality. Comfort and Convenience. Language. Lighting. Power Door Locks. Remote Lock/Unlock/Start. Return to Factory Settings


1-18 In Brief

See Vehicle Personalization onpage 5‑34.

Ultrasonic Parking AssistIf available, this system usessensors on the rear bumper toassist with parking and avoidingobjects while in R (Reverse).It operates at speeds less than8 km/h (5 mph). URPA uses audiblebeeps to provide distance andsystem information.

Keep the sensors on the vehicle'srear bumper clean to ensure properoperation.

See Ultrasonic Parking Assist onpage 9‑43.

Power OutletsThe accessory power outlet can beused to plug in electrical equipment,such as a cell phone or MP3 player.

This outlet is located under thearmrest inside the center consolestorage.

The outlet is powered when theignition is in ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY, or until the driverdoor is opened within 10 minutes ofturning off the vehicle. See RetainedAccessory Power (RAP) onpage 9‑23.

Open the protective cover to use theaccessory power outlet.

See Power Outlets on page 5‑6.

Universal Remote System

This system provides a way toreplace up to three remote controltransmitters used to activatedevices such as garage dooropeners, security systems, andhome automation devices.

Read the instructions completelybefore attempting to program theUniversal Remote system. Becauseof the steps involved, it may behelpful to have another personavailable to assist with programmingthe Universal Remote system.

See Universal Remote System onpage 5‑39.

Sunroof

For vehicles with a sunroof, thesunroof only operates when theignition is in ON/RUN or ACC/


In Brief 1-19

ACCESSORY or in RetainedAccessory Power (RAP). SeeRetained Accessory Power (RAP)on page 9‑23.

To open or close the sunroof, pressswitch (1) to the first detent position.

To express open or close thesunroof with the safety functionenabled, press the open or closesunroof switch (1) to the seconddetent position and release. To stopthe movement, press the switchagain.

To automatically tilt or close thesunroof, press the tilt open or closesunroof switch (2).

If an object is in the path of thesunroof while it is closing, theanti-pinch feature will detect theobject and stop the sunroof. Thesunroof will then return to thefull-open or vent position.

The sunroof glass panel cannot beopened or closed if the vehicle hasan electrical failure.

See Sunroof on page 2‑19.

eAssist Features

eAssist® OverviewIf the vehicle has eAssist, there areseveral additional features whichcontribute to increased efficiency.

Vehicles with eAssist have anautomatic engine start/stop feature.This feature saves fuel by shuttingthe engine off when the vehicle isstopped. When the engine shuts offautomatically, all the accessorieswill continue to operate normally. Invery hot or cold conditions, theengine will only shut offautomatically part of the time. SeeStarting the Engine on page 9‑19.

There are two air conditioningsettings available. The comfortsetting maximizes cabin comfort.The eco setting maximizesefficiency allowing more frequent,and longer engine stops than thecomfort setting. See Dual AutomaticClimate Control System onpage 8‑1.

This vehicle has a Hill Start Assist(HSA) feature, which may be usefulwhen the vehicle is stopped on agrade. See Hill Start Assist (HSA)on page 9‑35.

Vehicles with eAssist have a slightlydifferent instrument cluster, whichincludes an efficiency gauge, andan AUTO STOP indicator on thetachometer. See Instrument Clusteron page 5‑9. There is also a PowerFlow Gauge in the DriverInformation Center (DIC). SeeDriver Information Center (DIC) onpage 5‑24.

The eAssist system uses a highvoltage battery, which is cooled withair drawn from the vehicle interior.


1-20 In Brief

The cold air intake for the battery islocated behind the rear seat, on thefiller panel. Do not cover the intake.See Battery on page 10‑26.

High Voltage SafetyInformationVehicles with eAssist have astandard 12-volt battery and a highvoltage battery. Only a trainedservice technician with the properknowledge and tools should inspect,test, or replace the high voltagebattery. See your dealer if the highvoltage battery needs service.

In emergency situations, firstresponders can cut the two clearlylabeled cut points in the enginecompartment to disable the highvoltage battery and air bag systems— do not cut the high voltage cable.

Driver Efficiency Gauge

This gauge assists in drivingefficiently and may vary duringnormal operation.

To maximize efficiency, keep thegauge pointed in the solid greenzone in the center of the gauge.

See Driver Efficiency Gauge onpage 5‑12 for more information.

Automatic Engine Start/Stop FeatureVehicles with eAssist have anautomatic engine start/stop feature.After the engine is started and hasreached operating temperature, theauto stop feature may cause theengine to turn off when the brakepedal is applied and the vehiclecomes to a complete stop. Whenthe brake pedal is released, or theaccelerator pedal is applied, theengine will restart. The engine willcontinue to run until the nextauto stop.

To restart the engine during the autostop, release the brake pedal orpress the accelerator pedal. Theengine starts immediately. Thevehicle continues to run until thenext stop.


In Brief 1-21

AUTO STOP on the tachometersignifies that the engine is in autostop mode. See Tachometer onpage 5‑11 for more information.A chime will sound when the driverdoor is opened while in auto stopmode. Remember to shift to P (Park)and turn the ignition to LOCK/OFFbefore exiting the vehicle.

See Starting the Engine onpage 9‑19.

Regenerative BrakingRegenerative braking takes some ofthe energy from the moving vehicleand turns it into electrical energy.This energy is then stored in thevehicle's high voltage batterysystem, contributing to increasedfuel efficiency.

The system works whenever theaccelerator pedal is released, andincreases the energy captured asmore brake pedal is applied.

BatteryThis vehicle has a standard 12-voltbattery. Refer to the replacementnumber on the original battery labelwhen a new standard 12-volt batteryis needed.

Vehicles with eAssist also have ahigh voltage battery. Only a trainedservice technician with the properknowledge and tools should inspect,test, or replace the high voltagebattery. See your dealer if the highvoltage battery needs service. SeeBattery on page 10‑26.

ServiceNever try to do your own service oneAssist components. You can beinjured and the vehicle can bedamaged if you try to do your ownservice work. Service and repair ofthese high voltage componentsshould only be performed by atrained service technician with theproper knowledge and tools. SeeDoing Your Own Service Work onpage 10‑3.

Performance andMaintenance

Traction ControlSystem (TCS)The vehicle may have a tractioncontrol system that limits wheel slip.The system turns on automaticallyevery time the vehicle is started.. To turn off traction control, press

and release the TCS/StabiliTrakbutton, on the center stack. iilluminates and the appropriateDIC message is displayed. SeeRide Control System Messageson page 5‑32.

. Press and release the TCS/StabiliTrak button again to turnon traction control.

See Traction Control System (TCS)on page 9‑35.


1-22 In Brief

StabiliTrak® SystemThe StabiliTrak system assists withdirectional control of the vehicle indifficult driving conditions. Thesystem turns on automatically everytime the vehicle is started.. To turn off both traction control

and StabiliTrak, press and holdthe TCS/StabiliTrak button, onthe center stack, until i and gilluminate in the instrumentcluster and the appropriate DICmessage is displayed. See RideControl System Messages onpage 5‑32.

. Press and release the TCS/StabiliTrak button to turn on bothsystems.

See StabiliTrak® System onpage 9‑36.

Tire Pressure MonitorThis vehicle may have a TirePressure Monitor System (TPMS).

The low tire pressure warning lightalerts to a significant loss inpressure of one of the vehicle'stires. If the warning light comes on,stop as soon as possible and inflatethe tires to the recommendedpressure shown on the Tire andLoading Information label. SeeVehicle Load Limits on page 9‑10.The warning light will remain on untilthe tire pressure is corrected.

The low tire pressure warning lightmay come on in cool weather whenthe vehicle is first started, and thenturn off as the vehicle is driven. Thismay be an early indicator that thetire pressures are getting low andthe tires need to be inflated to theproper pressure.

The TPMS does not replace normalmonthly tire maintenance. Maintainthe correct tire pressures.

See Tire Pressure Monitor Systemon page 10‑50.

Tire Sealant andCompressor KitThis vehicle may come with a sparetire and tire changing equipment ora tire sealant and compressor kit.The kit can be used to temporarilyseal small punctures in the treadarea of the tire. See Tire Sealantand Compressor Kit on page 10‑64or Tire Sealant and Compressor Kiton page 10‑71.

If the vehicle came with a spare tireand tire changing equipment, see Ifa Tire Goes Flat on page 10‑62.


In Brief 1-23

Engine Oil Life SystemThe engine oil life system calculatesengine oil life based on vehicle useand displays the CHANGE ENGINEOIL SOON message when it is timeto change the engine oil and filter.The oil life system should be resetto 100% only following an oilchange.

Resetting the Oil Life System

1. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN withthe engine off.

2. Press the DIC MENU button onthe turn signal lever to enter theVehicle Information Menu. Usethe thumbwheel to scroll throughthe menu items until you reachREMAINING OIL LIFE.

3. Press the SET/CLR button toreset the oil life at 100%.

4. Turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF.

See Engine Oil Life System onpage 10‑12.

Fuel E85 (85% Ethanol)Vehicles with a yellow fuel cap canuse either unleaded gasoline orethanol fuel containing up to 85%ethanol (E85). See Fuel E85 (85%Ethanol) on page 9‑48. For all othervehicles, use only the unleadedgasoline described underRecommended Fuel on page 9‑46.

Driving for Better FuelEconomyDriving habits can affect fuelmileage. Here are some driving tipsto get the best fuel economypossible.. Avoid fast starts and accelerate

smoothly.. Brake gradually and avoid

abrupt stops.. Avoid idling the engine for long

periods of time.

. When road and weatherconditions are appropriate, usecruise control.

. Always follow posted speedlimits or drive more slowly whenconditions require.

. Keep vehicle tires properlyinflated.

. Combine several trips into asingle trip.

. Replace the vehicle's tires withthe same TPC Spec numbermolded into the tire's sidewallnear the size.

. Follow recommended scheduledmaintenance.


1-24 In Brief

Roadside AssistanceProgramU.S.: 1-800-252-1112

TTY Users (U.S. Only):1-888-889-2438

Canada: 1-800-268-6800

Mexico: 01-800-466-0818

As the owner of a new Buick, youare automatically enrolled in theRoadside Assistance program.

See Roadside Assistance Program(Mexico) on page 13‑7 or RoadsideAssistance Program (U.S. andCanada) on page 13‑11.

OnStar®

If equipped, this vehicle has acomprehensive, in-vehicle systemthat can connect to a live Advisorfor Emergency, Security, Navigation,Connection, and DiagnosticServices. See OnStar Overview onpage 14‑1.


Keys, Doors, and Windows 2-1

Keys, Doors, andWindows

Keys and LocksKeys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2

Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System Operation . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3

Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . 2-8Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10Power Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11

DoorsTrunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11

Vehicle SecurityVehicle Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13Vehicle Alarm System . . . . . . . 2-13Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14Immobilizer Operation (KeyAccess) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14

Immobilizer Operation(Keyless Access) . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14

Exterior MirrorsConvex Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15Power Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16Folding Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16

Interior MirrorsAutomatic Dimming RearviewMirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16

WindowsWindows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17Sun Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19

RoofSunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19

Keys and Locks

Keys

{ WARNING

Leaving children in a vehicle withan ignition key or RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) transmitter isdangerous and children or otherscould be seriously injured orkilled. They could operate thepower window or other controls ormake the vehicle move. Thewindows will function with the keyin the ignition or with the RKEtransmitter in the vehicle, andchildren or others could be caughtin the path of a closing window.Do not leave children in a vehiclewith the ignition key or an RKEtransmitter.


2-2 Keys, Doors, and Windows

The key that is part of the RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) transmitter canbe used for the ignition and all locksif the vehicle is a key accessvehicle. If the vehicle has thekeyless ignition, the key can beused for the locks.

Press the button on the RKEtransmitter to extend the key. Pressthe button and the key blade toretract the key.

If the vehicle has an ignition and itbecomes difficult to turn the key,inspect the key blade for debris.Periodically clean with a brushor pick.

See your dealer if a new key isneeded.

If locked out of the vehicle, seeRoadside Assistance Program(Mexico) on page 13‑7 or RoadsideAssistance Program (U.S. andCanada) on page 13‑11.

With an active OnStar subscription,an OnStar Advisor may remotelyunlock the vehicle. See OnStarOverview on page 14‑1.

Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) SystemSee Radio Frequency Statement onpage 13‑20 for informationregarding Part 15 of the FederalCommunications Commission (FCC)rules and Industry CanadaStandards RSS-GEN/210/220/310.

If there is a decrease in the RKEoperating range:. Check the distance. The

transmitter may be too far fromthe vehicle.



. Check the location. Othervehicles or objects may beblocking the signal.

. Check the transmitter's battery.See “Battery Replacement” laterin this section.

. If the transmitter is still notworking correctly, see yourdealer or a qualified technicianfor service.

Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) System OperationThe transmitter functions may workup to 60 m (195 ft) away from thevehicle.

Keep in mind that other conditions,such as those previously stated, canimpact the performance of thetransmitter.

RKE without Remote Start Shown

K (Unlock): Press to unlock thedriver door or all doors. See “AutoDoor Unlock” under VehiclePersonalization on page 5‑34.

The turn signal indicators may flashand/or the horn may sound toindicate unlocking. See “RemoteUnlock Light Feedback” underVehicle Personalization onpage 5‑34.

Pressing K will disarm thetheft-deterrent system. See VehicleAlarm System on page 2‑13.

Q (Lock): Press to lock all doors.

The turn signal indicators may flashand/or the horn may sound toindicate locking. See “Remote LockFeedback” under VehiclePersonalization on page 5‑34.

If the driver door is open when Q ispressed, all doors lock except thedriver door, if Unlocked Door AntiLock Out is enabled through vehiclepersonalization.

If the passenger door is open whenQ is pressed, all doors lock.

Pressing Q may also arm thetheft-deterrent system. See VehicleAlarm System on page 2‑13.

V (Remote Trunk Release):Press and hold to release the trunk.

7 (Vehicle Locator/PanicAlarm): Press and release onetime to initiate vehicle locator. Theexterior lamps flash and the hornchirps three times.



Press and hold 7 for at leastthree seconds to sound the panicalarm. The horn sounds and theturn signals flash for about30 seconds until 7 is pressed againor the vehicle is started.

/ (Remote Vehicle Start): Forvehicles with this feature, press tooperate the remote start feature.See Remote Vehicle Start onpage 2‑8 for additional information.

The buttons on the keys aredisabled when there is a key in theignition, if equipped.

Keyless Access Operation

Some vehicles have a keylessaccess system that lets you lockand unlock the doors and accessthe trunk without removing the RKEtransmitter from your pocket, purse,

briefcase, etc. The RKE transmittershould be within 1 m (3 ft) of thedoor or trunk being opened. If thevehicle has this feature, there will bebuttons on the outside front doorhandles.

The keyless access can beprogrammed to unlock all doors onthe first lock/unlock press from thedriver door. See VehiclePersonalization on page 5‑34.

Keyless Unlocking/Locking fromthe Driver Door

When the doors are locked and theRKE transmitter is within 1 m (3 ft)of the driver door handle, pressingthe lock/unlock button on the driverdoor handle will unlock the driverdoor. If the lock/unlock button ispressed again within five seconds,all passenger doors will unlock. Pullthe door handle to unlatch the door.

Driver Side Shown, PassengerSimilar

Pressing the lock/unlock button willcause all doors to lock if any of thefollowing occur:. It has been more than

five seconds since the first lock/unlock button press.

. Two lock/unlock button presseswere used to unlock all doors.

. Any vehicle door has openedand all doors are now closed.



Keyless Unlocking/Locking fromthe Passenger Doors

When the doors are locked and theRKE transmitter is within 1 m (3 ft)of the passenger door handle,pressing the lock/unlock button onthe passenger door handle willunlock all doors.

Pressing the lock/unlock button willcause all doors to lock if any of thefollowing occur:. The lock/unlock button was used

to unlock all doors.. Any vehicle door has opened

and all doors are now closed.

Passive Locking

If the vehicle has the keylessaccess system, this feature allowsyou to select whether the doorsautomatically lock during normalvehicle exit. When the vehicle isturned off and all doors are closed,

the vehicle will determine how manyRKE transmitters remain in thevehicle interior. If at least one RKEtransmitter has been removed fromthe interior of the vehicle, the doorswill lock after eight seconds.

Temporarily disable the lockingfeature by pressing and holding thepower door switch for severalseconds with a door open. Passivelocking will then remain disableduntil the door switch is pressed,or until the vehicle is turned on.

To customize whether the doorsautomatically lock when exiting thevehicle, see “Remote Locking,Unlocking, Starting” under VehiclePersonalization on page 5‑34.

Keyless Trunk Opening

Lift up on the touch pad locatedabove the license plate to open thetrunk if the RKE transmitter is within1 m (3 ft).

Programming Transmitters tothe Vehicle

Only RKE transmitters programmedto the vehicle will work. If atransmitter is lost or stolen, areplacement can be purchased andprogrammed through your dealer.The vehicle can be reprogrammedso that lost or stolen transmitters nolonger work. Any remainingtransmitters will need to bereprogrammed. Each vehicle canhave up to eight transmittersmatched to it.

Programming with a RecognizedTransmitter (Keyless AccessVehicles Only)

A new transmitter can beprogrammed to the vehicle whenthere is one recognized transmitter.To program, the vehicle must be offand all of the transmitters, bothcurrently recognized and new, mustbe with you.



1. Place the recognizedtransmitter(s) in the cupholder.The cupholder liner will need tobe pulled out to access thetransmitter pocket.

2. Insert the vehicle key of the newtransmitter into the key lockcylinder located on the outsideof the driver door and turn thekey to the unlock position fivetimes within 10 seconds.

The Driver Information Center(DIC) displays READY FORREMOTE #2, 3, 4 or 5.

3. Place the new transmitter intothe transmitter pocket with thebuttons facing up. Thetransmitter pocket is locatedinside the center consolecupholder.

4. Press the START STOP button.When the transmitter is learned,the DIC will show that it is readyto program the next transmitter.

5. Remove the transmitter from thetransmitter pocket and press K.

To program additionaltransmitters, repeat Steps 3–5.

When all additional transmittersare programmed, press and holdthe ignition for 10 seconds toexit programming mode.

Reinstall the rubber cupliner.

Programming without aRecognized Transmitter (KeylessAccess Vehicles Only)

If there are no currently recognizedtransmitters available, follow thisprocedure to program up to eight

transmitters. This feature is notavailable in Canada. This procedurewill take approximately 30 minutesto complete. The vehicle must be offand all of the transmitters you wishto program must be with you.

1. Insert the vehicle key of thetransmitter into the key lockcylinder located on the outsideof the driver door and turn thekey to the unlock position,counterclockwise, five timeswithin 10 seconds.

The Driver Information Center(DIC) displays REMOTE LEARNPENDING, PLEASE WAIT.

2. Wait for 10 minutes until the DICdisplays PRESS ENGINESTART BUTTON TO LEARNand then press the STARTbutton.

The DIC display will again showREMOTE LEARN PENDING,PLEASE WAIT.



3. Repeat Step 2 two additionaltimes. After the third time allpreviously known transmitterswill no longer work with thevehicle. Remaining transmitterscan be relearned during the nextsteps.

The DIC display should nowshow READY FOR REMOTE# 1.

4. Place the new transmitter intothe transmitter pocket with thebuttons facing up. Thetransmitter pocket is locatedinside the center console

cupholder. The cupholder linerwill need to be pulled out toaccess the transmitter pocket.

5. Press the START STOP button.When the transmitter is learned,the DIC will show that it is readyto program the next transmitter.

6. Remove the transmitter from thetransmitter pocket and press K.

To program additionaltransmitters, repeat Steps 4–6.

When all additional transmittersare programmed, press and holdthe START STOP button for10 seconds to exitprogramming mode.

Starting the Vehicle with a LowTransmitter Battery

If the transmitter battery is weak, theDIC may display NO REMOTEDETECTED when you try to startthe vehicle. The REPLACEBATTERY IN REMOTE KEYmessage may also be displayed atthis time.

To start the vehicle:

1. Remove the cupholder liner fromthe center console cupholder.

2. Place the transmitter in thetransmitter pocket with thebuttons facing up.



3. With the vehicle in P (Park) orN (Neutral), press the brakepedal and the START STOPbutton. See Starting the Engineon page 9‑19 for additionalinformation about the vehicle'skeyless ignition with pushbuttonstart.

Replace the transmitter batteryas soon as possible.

Battery Replacement

Replace the battery if the REPLACEBATTERY IN REMOTE KEYmessage displays in the DIC. See“Replace Battery in Remote Key”under Key and Lock Messages onpage 5‑31.

The battery is not rechargeable. Toreplace the battery:

1. Push the button on thetransmitter to extend the key.

2. Remove the battery cover byprying it with a finger.

3. Remove the battery by pushingon the battery and sliding ittoward the key blade.

4. Insert the new battery, positiveside facing up. Push the batterydown until it is held in place.Replace with a CR2032 orequivalent battery.

5. Snap the battery cover back onto the transmitter.

Remote Vehicle StartThe vehicle may have this featurethat allows you to start the enginefrom outside the vehicle.

/ (Remote Vehicle Start): Thisbutton will be on the RKEtransmitter if the vehicle has remotestart.

The climate control system will usethe previous settings during aremote start. The rear defog maycome on during remote start basedon cold ambient conditions. Therear fog indicator light does notcome on during remote start. If the

vehicle has heated seats, they maycome on during a remote start. SeeHeated Front Seats on page 3‑6.

Laws in some local communitiesmay restrict the use of remotestarters. For example, some lawsrequire a person using remote startto have the vehicle in view. Checklocal regulations for anyrequirements.

Other conditions can affect theperformance of the transmitter. SeeRemote Keyless Entry (RKE)System on page 2‑2.

Starting the Vehicle

To start the engine using the remotestart feature:

1. Aim the RKE transmitter at thevehicle.

2. Press and release Q.



3. Immediately after completingStep 2, press and hold/ for atleast two seconds or until theturn signal lamps flash. The turnsignal lamps flashing confirmsthe request to remote start thevehicle has been received.

When the engine starts, the parkinglamps will turn on and remain on aslong as the engine is running. Thedoors will be locked and the climatecontrol system may come on.

The engine will continue to run for10 minutes. Repeat the steps for a10-minute time extension. Remotestart can be extended only once.

Start the vehicle before driving.

Extending Engine Run Time

For a 10-minute extension, repeatSteps 1–3 while the engine is stillrunning. The remote start can beextended once.

When the remote start is extended,the second 10 minutes will startimmediately.

For example, if the engine has beenrunning for five minutes, and10 minutes are added, the enginewill run for a total of 15 minutes.

A maximum of two remote starts,or a single start with an extension,is allowed between ignition cycles.

The vehicle's ignition must beturned on and then back off beforethe remote start procedure can beused again.

Canceling a Remote Start

To cancel a remote start, do one ofthe following:. Aim the RKE transmitter at the

vehicle and press and hold/until the parking lamps turn off.

. Turn on the hazard warningflashers.

. Turn the vehicle on and then off.

Conditions in Which Remote StartWill Not Work

The remote vehicle start feature willnot operate if:. The key is in the ignition (key

access) or if the key is in thevehicle (keyless access).

. The hood is not closed.

. The hazard warning flashersare on.

. The malfunction indicator lampis on.

. The engine coolant temperatureis too high.

. The oil pressure is low.

. Two remote vehicle starts, or asingle remote start with anextension, have alreadybeen used.

. The vehicle is not in P (Park).



Door Locks

{ WARNING

Unlocked doors can bedangerous.

. Passengers, especiallychildren, can easily open thedoors and fall out of a movingvehicle. The chance of beingthrown out of the vehicle in acrash is increased if thedoors are not locked. So, allpassengers should wearsafety belts properly and thedoors should be lockedwhenever the vehicle isdriven.

. Young children who get intounlocked vehicles may beunable to get out. A child canbe overcome by extreme heatand can suffer permanentinjuries or even death fromheat stroke. Always lock thevehicle whenever leaving it.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

. Outsiders can easily enterthrough an unlocked doorwhen slowing or stopping thevehicle. Lock the doors tohelp prevent this fromhappening.

To lock and unlock the door, use theRemote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter or the key from theoutside, and the door lock knob orswitch from the inside.

From inside the vehicle with thedoors locked, pull once on the doorhandle to unlock it, and a secondtime to open it.

Manually locking the driver dooralso automatically locks all otherdoors.

For more information see:. Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)

System Operation on page 2‑3.

. Power Door Locks onpage 2‑10.

. Vehicle Personalization onpage 5‑34.

Power Door Locks

K (Unlock): Press to unlock thedoors.

Q (Lock): Press to lock the doors.

See “Power Door Locks” in VehiclePersonalization on page 5‑34.



Safety LocksThe vehicle has power safety locks.Power safety locks will lock the rearwindows and not allow the reardoors to be opened from the inside.

Power Safety Locks

Pressv to activate the safety lockson the rear doors. The indicator lightwill illuminate.

This switch also disables the powerwindow controls on the rear doors.

Pressv again to deactivate thesafety locks on the rear doors.

If a rear door handle is pulled whenthe safety lock is deactivated, thatdoor will remain locked and theindicator light may flash. Releasethe handle, then press the safetylock twice to deactivate the safetylocks. See “Rear Window Lockout”under Power Windows onpage 2‑17.

Doors

Trunk

{ WARNING

Exhaust gases can enter thevehicle if it is driven with theliftgate, trunk/hatch open, or withany objects that pass through theseal between the body and thetrunk/hatch or liftgate. Engineexhaust contains carbonmonoxide (CO) which cannot beseen or smelled. It can causeunconsciousness and even death.

If the vehicle must be driven withthe liftgate, or trunk/hatch open:

. Close all of the windows.

. Fully open the air outlets onor under the instrumentpanel.

(Continued)



WARNING (Continued)

. Adjust the climate controlsystem to a setting thatbrings in only outside air andset the fan speed to thehighest setting. See “ClimateControl Systems” in theIndex.

. If the vehicle has a powerliftgate, disable the powerliftgate function.

For more information aboutcarbon monoxide, see EngineExhaust on page 9‑26.

Trunk Release

To open the trunk, press the touchpad under the vehicle emblem.

To close the trunk, use the pull cupas an aid.

Remote Trunk Release

To open the trunk, pressV on theRemote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter.

Emergency Trunk ReleaseHandle

Notice: Do not use theemergency trunk release handleas a tie-down or anchor pointwhen securing items in the trunkas it could damage the handle.The emergency trunk releasehandle is only intended to aid aperson trapped in a latched trunk,enabling them to open the trunkfrom the inside.



There is an emergency trunkrelease handle located inside thetrunk on the trunk latch. On somevehicles, the release handle can beaccessed by folding the rear seatcenter seatback. See Rear Seats onpage 3‑7. Pull the release handle toopen the trunk from the inside.

Vehicle SecurityThis vehicle has theft-deterrentfeatures; however, they do not makethe vehicle impossible to steal.

Vehicle Alarm SystemThis vehicle has an anti-theft alarmsystem.

Arming the System

To arm the system, press Q on theRKE transmitter.

The alarm automatically arms afterabout 30 seconds. The securitylight, on the instrument cluster,flashes.

PressV on the RKE transmitter toopen the trunk without setting off thealarm. The system rearms when thetrunk is closed.

Disarming the System

To disarm the system, do one of thefollowing:

. Press K on the RKE transmitter.

. Approach the vehicle with theRKE transmitter (keylessaccess).

. Start the engine.

The alarm automatically disarms.

How to Detect a TamperCondition

If K is pressed and the hornsounds, an attempted break-inoccurred while the system wasarmed.

If the alarm has been activated, amessage will appear on the DIC.See Security Messages onpage 5‑33.



ImmobilizerSee Radio Frequency Statement onpage 13‑20 for informationregarding Part 15 of the FederalCommunications Commission (FCC)rules and Industry CanadaStandards RSS-GEN/210/220/310.

Immobilizer Operation(Key Access)This vehicle has a passivetheft-deterrent system.

The system does not have to bemanually armed or disarmed.

The vehicle is automaticallyimmobilized when the key isremoved from the ignition.

The system is automaticallydisarmed when the vehicle isstarted with the correct key. The keyuses a transponder that matches animmobilizer control unit in thevehicle and automatically disarmsthe system. Only the correct keystarts the vehicle. The vehicle maynot start if the key is damaged.

The security light in the instrumentcluster comes on if there is aproblem with arming or disarmingthe theft-deterrent system.

When trying to start the vehicle, thesecurity light comes on briefly whenthe ignition is turned on.

If the engine does not start and thesecurity light stays on, there is aproblem with the system. Turn theignition off and try again.

If the engine still does not start, andthe key appears to be undamagedor the light continues to stay on, tryanother ignition key.

If the engine still does not start withthe other key, the vehicle needsservice. If the vehicle does start, thefirst key may be damaged. See your

dealer who can service thetheft-deterrent system and have anew key made.

Do not leave the key or device thatdisarms or deactivates thetheft-deterrent system in the vehicle.

Immobilizer Operation(Keyless Access)This vehicle has a passivetheft-deterrent system.

The system does not have to bemanually armed or disarmed.

The vehicle is automaticallyimmobilized when the transmitterleaves the vehicle.

The immobilization system isdisarmed when the ignition button ispushed in and a valid transmitter isfound in the vehicle.



The security light in the instrumentcluster comes on when there is aproblem with arming or disarmingthe theft-deterrent system.

The system has one or moretransmitters matched to animmobilizer control unit in yourvehicle. Only a correctly matchedtransmitter will start the vehicle.If the transmitter is ever damaged,you may not be able to start yourvehicle.

When trying to start the vehicle, thesecurity light comes on briefly whenthe ignition is turned on.

If the vehicle does not start and thesecurity light stays on, there is aproblem with the system. Turn thevehicle off and try again.

If the RKE transmitter appears to beundamaged, try another transmitter,or place the transmitter in thetransmitter pocket in the centerconsole. See “Starting the Vehiclewith a Low Transmitter Battery”under Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System Operation on page 2‑3.

If the vehicle does not start with theother transmitter or when thetransmitter is in the pocket in thecenter console, your vehicle needsservice. See your dealer who canservice the theft-deterrent systemand have a new transmitterprogrammed to the vehicle.

Do not leave the transmitter ordevice that disarms or deactivatesthe theft-deterrent system in thevehicle.

Exterior Mirrors

Convex Mirrors

{ WARNING

A convex mirror can make things,like other vehicles, look fartheraway than they really are. If youcut too sharply into the right lane,you could hit a vehicle on theright. Check the inside mirror orglance over your shoulder beforechanging lanes.

The passenger side mirror is convexshaped. A convex mirror's surface iscurved so more can be seen fromthe driver seat.



Power Mirrors

Controls for the outside powermirrors are located on thedriver door.

1. Turn the control knob to the L(Left) or R (Right) selecting thedriver or passenger mirror.

2. Push the control knob to the left,right, up, or down to adjust themirror.

Folding Mirrors

Manual Folding Mirrors

The vehicle has manual foldingmirrors. These mirrors can be foldedinward to prevent damage whengoing through an automatic carwash. To fold, pull the mirror towardthe vehicle. Push the mirror outwardto return it to the original position.

Heated MirrorsThe vehicle has heated mirrors:

1 (Rear Window Defogger):Press to heat the mirrors.

See “Rear Window Defogger” underDual Automatic Climate ControlSystem on page 8‑1.

Interior Mirrors

Automatic DimmingRearview MirrorThe vehicle has an automaticdimming inside rearview mirror.Automatic dimming reduces theglare from the headlamps of thevehicle behind you.

Vehicles with OnStar® have threecontrol buttons located at thebottom of the mirror. See yourdealer for more information aboutOnStar and how to subscribe to it.See OnStar Overview on page 14‑1.

Cleaning the Mirror

Do not spray glass cleaner directlyon the mirror. Use a soft toweldampened with water.



Windows

{ WARNING

Never leave a child, a helplessadult, or a pet alone in a vehicle,especially with the windowsclosed in warm or hot weather.They can be overcome by theextreme heat and sufferpermanent injuries or even deathfrom heat stroke.

The vehicle aerodynamics aredesigned to improve fuel economyperformance. This may result in apulsing sound when either rearwindow is down and the frontwindows are up. To reduce thesound, open either a front windowor the sunroof, if equipped.

Power Windows

{ WARNING

Children could be seriouslyinjured or killed if caught in thepath of a closing window. Neverleave keys in a vehicle withchildren. When there are childrenin the rear seat, use the windowlockout button to preventoperation of the windows. SeeKeys on page 2‑1.

The power window switches locatedon the driver door control all fourwindows. The passenger doorshave a window switch that controlsthat window. Push the switch downto open the window. Pull the front ofthe switch up to close it.

The switches work when the ignitionis in ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY, or in RetainedAccessory Power (RAP). SeeRetained Accessory Power (RAP)on page 9‑23.



Express Window Operation

Windows with an express-up ordown feature allow the frontwindows to be lowered or raisedwithout holding the switch. Rearwindows only have express down.Pull a window switch up or push itdown all the way, release it, and thewindow goes up or downautomatically. Stop the window bypushing or pulling the switch.

Rear Window Lockout

This feature prevents the rearpassenger windows from operating,except from the driver position.

Pressv { to activate the rearwindow lockout switch. An indicatorlight comes on when activated.

This switch also disables the doorlocks on the rear doors. See SafetyLocks on page 2‑11.

Pressv { again to deactivate thelockout switch.

If the indicator light flashes, thefeature may not be working properly.

Programming the PowerWindows

If the battery on the vehicle hasbeen recharged, disconnected, or isnot working, you will need toreprogram each front power windowfor the express-up feature to work.Before reprogramming, replace orrecharge the vehicle's battery.

To program each front window:

1. The ignition is in ACC/ACCESSORY or ON/RUN,or Retained AccessoryPower (RAP).

2. Press and hold the powerwindow switch until the windowis fully open.

3. Pull the power window switch upuntil the window is fully closed.

4. Continue holding the switch upfor approximately two secondsafter the window is completelyclosed.

The window is now reprogrammed.Repeat the process for the otherwindows.



Sun Visors

Pull the sun visor down to blockglare. If equipped, detach the sunvisor from the center mount to pivotto the side window or to extendalong the rod.

Roof

Sunroof

For vehicles with a sunroof, thesunroof only operates when theignition is in ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY or in RetainedAccessory Power (RAP). SeeRetained Accessory Power (RAP)on page 9‑23.

To open or close the sunroof, pressthe switch (1) to the first detentposition.

To express open or close thesunroof with the safety functionenabled, press the open or closesunroof switch (1) to the seconddetent position and release. To stopthe movement, press the switchagain.

To automatically tilt or close thesunroof, press the tilt open or closesunroof switch (2).

If an object is in the path of thesunroof while it is closing, theanti-pinch feature will detect theobject and stop the sunroof. Thesunroof will then return to thefull-open or vent position.

The sunroof glass panel cannot beopened or closed if the vehicle hasan electrical failure.

Initializing

After a power failure, the sunroofoperation may be limited. Have thesystem initialized by a dealertechnician.



Dirt and debris may collect on thesunroof seal or in the track. Thiscould cause an issue with sunroofoperation or noise. It could also plugthe water drainage system.Periodically open the sunroof andremove any obstacles or loosedebris. Wipe the sunroof seal androof sealing area using a cleancloth, mild soap, and water. Do notremove grease from the sunroof.

Sunshade

The sunshade is manually operated.Close or open the sunshade bysliding. When the sunroof isopened, the sunshade isalways open.

Safety Function

If the sunroof has any resistanceduring automatic closing, it willimmediately stop and reverse.

To override the safety function,press and hold the close sunroofswitch. The sunroof closes withoutthe safety function. To stop themovement, release the switch.


Seats and Restraints 3-1

Seats andRestraints

Head RestraintsHead Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2

Front SeatsSeat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3Power Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . 3-4Lumbar Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . 3-5Heated Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6

Rear SeatsRear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7

Safety BeltsSafety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8How to Wear Safety BeltsProperly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10

Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11

Safety Belt Use DuringPregnancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15

Safety Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . 3-15Safety System Check . . . . . . . . 3-15Safety Belt Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16Replacing Safety Belt SystemParts after a Crash . . . . . . . . . 3-16

Airbag SystemAirbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17Where Are the Airbags? . . . . . 3-19When Should an AirbagInflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20

What Makes an AirbagInflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21

How Does an AirbagRestrain? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21

What Will You See after anAirbag Inflates? . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21

Passenger SensingSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23

Servicing the Airbag-EquippedVehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27

Adding Equipment to theAirbag-Equipped Vehicle . . . 3-27

Airbag System Check . . . . . . . . 3-28Replacing Airbag SystemParts after a Crash . . . . . . . . . 3-28

Child RestraintsOlder Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29Infants and YoungChildren . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31

Child Restraint Systems . . . . . 3-34Where to Put the Restraint . . . 3-35Lower Anchors and Tethersfor Children (LATCHSystem) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-37

Replacing LATCH SystemParts After a Crash . . . . . . . . . 3-44

Securing Child Restraints(Rear Seat) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-44

Securing Child Restraints(Front Passenger Seat) . . . . 3-46


3-2 Seats and Restraints

Head RestraintsThe vehicle's front and rear seatshave adjustable head restraints inthe outboard seating positions.

{ WARNING

With head restraints that are notinstalled and adjusted properly,there is a greater chance thatoccupants will suffer a neck/spinal injury in a crash. Do notdrive until the head restraints forall occupants are installed andadjusted properly.

Adjust the head restraint so that thetop of the restraint is at the sameheight as the top of the occupant'shead. This position reduces thechance of a neck injury in a crash.

Front Seat

To raise or lower the head restraint,press the release button located onthe side of the head restraint andpull up or push the head restraintdown and release the button.

Pull and push on the head restraintafter the button is released to makesure that it is locked in place.

The front head restraints are notdesigned to be removed.



Rear Seat

Pull the head restraint up to raise it.To lower the head restraint, pressthe release button, located on thehead restraint post on the top of theseatback, while you push the headrestraint down.

Push down on the head restraintafter the button is released to makesure that it is locked in place.

If you are installing a child restraintin the rear seat, see “Securing aChild Restraint Designed for theLATCH System” under LowerAnchors and Tethers for Children(LATCH System) on page 3‑37.

Front Seats

Seat AdjustmentSeat Position

{ WARNING

You can lose control of thevehicle if you try to adjust a driverseat while the vehicle is moving.Adjust the driver seat only whenthe vehicle is not moving.



To adjust the seat position:

1. Pull the handle under the front ofthe seat cushion.

2. Slide the seat to the desiredposition and release the handle.

3. Try to move the seat back andforth to be sure it is locked inplace.

Height Adjustment

Press and hold the top or bottom ofthe switch to raise or lower the seat.Release the switch when thedesired height is reached.

Power Seat Adjustment

To adjust a power seat:. Move the seat forward or

rearward by sliding the controlforward or rearward.

. Raise or lower the front or rearpart of the seat cushion bymoving the front or rear of thecontrol up or down.

. Raise or lower the entire seat bymoving the entire control upor down.

Lumbar Adjustment

To adjust the lumbar support:. Press and hold the front or rear

of the control to increase ordecrease lumbar support.

. Press and hold the top or bottomof the control to raise or lowerlumbar support.

Release the control when thedesired level of support is reached.



Reclining Seatbacks

{ WARNING

Sitting in a reclined position whenthe vehicle is in motion can bedangerous. Even when buckledup, the safety belts cannot dotheir job.

The shoulder belt will not beagainst your body. Instead, it willbe in front of you. In a crash, youcould go into it, receiving neck orother injuries.

The lap belt could go up overyour abdomen. The belt forceswould be there, not at your pelvicbones. This could cause seriousinternal injuries.

For proper protection when thevehicle is in motion, have theseatback upright. Then sit wellback in the seat and wear thesafety belt properly.

Do not have a seatback reclined ifthe vehicle is moving.

Manual Reclining Seatbacks

{ WARNING

If either seatback is not locked, itcould move forward in a suddenstop or crash. That could causeinjury to the person sitting there.Always push and pull on theseatbacks to be sure they arelocked.

To recline the seatback:

1. Lift the lever.

2. Move the seatback to thedesired position, and thenrelease the lever to lock theseatback in place.

3. Push and pull on the seatback tomake sure it is locked.

To return the seatback to the uprightposition:

1. Lift the lever fully withoutapplying pressure to theseatback, and the seatback willreturn to the upright position.



2. Push and pull on the seatback tomake sure it is locked.

Power Reclining Seatbacks

To adjust a power seatback,if equipped:. Tilt the top of the control

rearward to recline.. Tilt the top of the control forward

to raise.

Heated Front Seats

{ WARNING

If you cannot feel temperaturechange or pain to the skin, theseat heater may cause burns. Toreduce the risk of burns, peoplewith such a condition should usecare when using the seat heater,especially for long periods oftime. Do not place anything onthe seat that insulates againstheat, such as a blanket, cushion,cover, or similar item. This maycause the seat heater tooverheat. An overheated seatheater may cause a burn or maydamage the seat.

Uplevel Buttons Shown, BaseButtons Similar

If available, the buttons are on theclimate control panel. To operate,the ignition must be on.

Press M or L to heat the driver orpassenger seat cushion andseatback. Indicator lights on thebutton or on the climate controldisplay show the current setting.

Press the button once for thehighest setting. With each press ofthe button, the heated seat willchange to the next lower setting,



and then to the off setting. Thelights indicate three for the highestsetting and one for the lowest.

The passenger seat may takelonger to heat up.

Remote Start Heated Seats

When it is cold outside, the heatedseats can be turned onautomatically during a remotevehicle start. The heated seats willbe canceled when the ignition isturned on. Press the button to usethe heated seats after the vehicle isstarted.

The heated seat indicator lights donot turn on during a remote start.

The temperature performance of anunoccupied seat may be reduced.This is normal.

The heated seats will not turn onduring a remote start unless theheated seat feature is enabled inthe vehicle personalization menu.See Remote Vehicle Start onpage 2‑8 and VehiclePersonalization on page 5‑34.

Rear SeatsFolding the Seatback

Either side of the seatback can befolded down for more cargo space.Fold a seatback only when thevehicle is not moving.

Notice: Folding a rear seat withthe safety belts still fastened maycause damage to the seat or thesafety belts. Always unbuckle thesafety belts and return them totheir normal stowed positionbefore folding a rear seat.

To fold the seatback down:

1. Pull on the lever on the top ofthe seatback to unlock it.

A tab near the seatback leverraises when the seatback isunlocked.

2. Fold the seatback down.

Repeat the steps to fold theother seatback, if desired.



Raising the Seatback

{ WARNING

If either seatback is not locked, itcould move forward in a suddenstop or crash. That could causeinjury to the person sitting there.Always push and pull on theseatbacks to be sure they arelocked.

{ WARNING

A safety belt that is improperlyrouted, not properly attached,or twisted will not provide theprotection needed in a crash. Theperson wearing the belt could beseriously injured. After raising therear seatback, always check to besure that the safety belts areproperly routed and attached, andare not twisted.

To raise a seatback:

1. Lift the seatback up and push itrearward to lock it in place.Make sure the safety belt is nottwisted or caught in theseatback.

A tab near the seatback leverretracts when the seatback islocked in place.

2. Push and pull the top of theseatback to be sure it is lockedinto position.

3. Repeat the steps to raise theother seatback, if necessary.

When the seat is not in use, itshould be kept in the upright, lockedposition.

Safety BeltsThis section of the manualdescribes how to use safety beltsproperly. It also describes somethings not to do with safety belts.

{ WARNING

Do not let anyone ride where asafety belt cannot be wornproperly. In a crash, if you or yourpassenger(s) are not wearingsafety belts, injuries can be muchworse than if you are wearingsafety belts. You can be seriouslyinjured or killed by hitting thingsinside the vehicle harder or bybeing ejected from the vehicle. Inaddition, anyone who is notbuckled up can strike otherpassengers in the vehicle.

(Continued)



WARNING (Continued)

It is extremely dangerous to ridein a cargo area, inside or outsideof a vehicle. In a collision,passengers riding in these areasare more likely to be seriouslyinjured or killed. Do not allowpassengers to ride in any area ofthe vehicle that is not equippedwith seats and safety belts.

Always wear a safety belt, andcheck that all passenger(s) arerestrained properly too.

This vehicle has indicators as areminder to buckle the safety belts.See Safety Belt Reminders onpage 5‑13.

Why Safety Belts Work

When riding in a vehicle, you travelas fast as the vehicle does. If thevehicle stops suddenly, you keepgoing until something stops you.It could be the windshield, theinstrument panel, or the safety belts!

When you wear a safety belt, youand the vehicle slow down together.There is more time to stop becauseyou stop over a longer distance and,when worn properly, your strongestbones take the forces from the

safety belts. That is why wearingsafety belts makes such goodsense.

Questions and Answers AboutSafety Belts

Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicleafter a crash if I am wearing asafety belt?

A: You could be— whether you arewearing a safety belt or not.Your chance of being consciousduring and after a crash, so youcan unbuckle and get out, ismuch greater if you are belted.

Q: If my vehicle has airbags, whyshould I have to wear safetybelts?

A: Airbags are supplementalsystems only; so they work withsafety belts— not instead ofthem. Whether or not an airbagis provided, all occupants stillhave to buckle up to get themost protection.



Also, in nearly all states and inall Canadian provinces, the lawrequires wearing safety belts.

How to Wear Safety BeltsProperlyThis section is only for people ofadult size.

There are special things to knowabout safety belts and children. Andthere are different rules for smallerchildren and infants. If a child will beriding in the vehicle, see OlderChildren on page 3‑29 or Infantsand Young Children on page 3‑31.Follow those rules for everyone'sprotection.

It is very important for all occupantsto buckle up. Statistics show thatunbelted people are hurt more oftenin crashes than those who arewearing safety belts.

There are important things to knowabout wearing a safety belt properly.

. Sit up straight and always keepyour feet on the floor in frontof you.

. Always use the correct bucklefor your seating position.

. Wear the lap part of the belt lowand snug on the hips, justtouching the thighs. In a crash,this applies force to the strongpelvic bones and you would beless likely to slide under the lapbelt. If you slid under it, the beltwould apply force on yourabdomen. This could causeserious or even fatal injuries.

. Wear the shoulder belt over theshoulder and across the chest.These parts of the body are bestable to take belt restrainingforces. The shoulder belt locks ifthere is a sudden stop or crash.

{ WARNING

You can be seriously injured,or even killed, by not wearingyour safety belt properly.

. Never allow the lap orshoulder belt to becomeloose or twisted.

. Never wear the shoulder beltunder both arms or behindyour back.

. Never route the lap orshoulder belt over anarmrest.



Lap-Shoulder BeltAll seating positions in the vehiclehave a lap-shoulder belt.

The following instructions explainhow to wear a lap-shoulder beltproperly.

1. Adjust the seat, if the seat isadjustable, so you can sit upstraight. To see how, see “Seats”in the Index.

2. Pick up the latch plate and pullthe belt across you. Do not let itget twisted.

The lap-shoulder belt may lock ifyou pull the belt across you veryquickly. If this happens, let thebelt go back slightly to unlock it.Then pull the belt across youmore slowly.

If the shoulder portion of apassenger belt is pulled out allthe way, the child restraintlocking feature may be engaged.If this happens, let the belt goback all the way and start again.

3. Push the latch plate into thebuckle until it clicks.

Pull up on the latch plate tomake sure it is secure. If the beltis not long enough, see SafetyBelt Extender on page 3‑15.

Position the release button onthe buckle so that the safety beltcould be quickly unbuckled ifnecessary.

If equipped with a shoulder beltheight adjuster, move it to theheight that is right for you. See“Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster”



later in this section forinstructions on use andimportant safety information.

4. To make the lap part tight, pullup on the shoulder belt.

To unlatch the belt, push the buttonon the buckle. The belt shouldreturn to its stowed position.

Before a door is closed, be sure thesafety belt is out of the way. If adoor is slammed against a safetybelt, damage can occur to both thesafety belt and the vehicle.

Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster

The vehicle has a shoulder beltheight adjuster for the driver andright front passenger seatingpositions.

Adjust the height so the shoulderportion of the belt is on the shoulderand not falling off of it. The beltshould be close to, but notcontacting, the neck. Impropershoulder belt height adjustmentcould reduce the effectiveness ofthe safety belt in a crash. See Howto Wear Safety Belts Properly onpage 3‑10.



Press down on the release buttonand move the height adjuster to thedesired position. After the adjusteris set to the desired position, try tomove it down without pushing therelease button to make sure it haslocked into position.

Safety Belt Pretensioners

This vehicle has safety beltpretensioners for front outboardoccupants. Although the safety beltpretensioners cannot be seen, theyare part of the safety belt assembly.They can help tighten the safetybelts during the early stages of a

moderate to severe frontal, nearfrontal, or rear crash if the thresholdconditions for pretensioneractivation are met.

And, if the vehicle has side impactairbags, safety belt pretensionerscan help tighten the safety belts in aside crash or a rollover event.

Pretensioners work only once. If thepretensioners activate in a crash,they will need to be replaced. Otherparts of the vehicle's safety beltsystem may need to be replaced aswell. See Replacing Safety BeltSystem Parts after a Crash onpage 3‑16.

Rear Safety Belt ComfortGuides

This vehicle may have rear safetybelt comfort guides. If not, they areavailable through your dealer. Theguides may provide added safetybelt comfort for older children whohave outgrown booster seats andfor some adults. When installed and

properly adjusted, the comfort guidepositions the shoulder belt awayfrom the neck and head.

There is one guide for each outsidepassenger position in the rear seat.To install a comfort guide to thesafety belt:

1. Remove the guide from itsstorage pocket on the side ofthe seat.



2. Place the guide over the belt,and insert the two edges of thebelt into the slots of the guide.

3. Be sure that the belt is nottwisted and it lies flat. Theelastic cord must be under thebelt and the guide on top.

{ WARNING

A safety belt that is not properlyworn may not provide theprotection needed in a crash. Theperson wearing the belt could beseriously injured. The shoulderbelt should go over the shoulderand across the chest. These partsof the body are best able to takebelt restraining forces.



4. Buckle, position, and release thesafety belt as describedpreviously in this section. Makesure the shoulder portion of thebelt is on the shoulder and notfalling off of it. The belt shouldbe close to, but not contacting,the neck.

To remove and store the comfortguide, squeeze the belt edgestogether so that the safety belt canbe removed from the guide. Storethe guide in its storage pocket onthe side of the seatback.

Safety Belt Use DuringPregnancySafety belts work for everyone,including pregnant women. Like alloccupants, they are more likely tobe seriously injured if they do notwear safety belts.

A pregnant woman should wear alap-shoulder belt, and the lapportion should be worn as low aspossible, below the rounding,throughout the pregnancy.

The best way to protect the fetus isto protect the mother. When a safetybelt is worn properly, it is more likelythat the fetus will not be hurt in acrash. For pregnant women, as foranyone, the key to making safetybelts effective is wearing themproperly.

Safety Belt ExtenderIf the vehicle's safety belt will fastenaround you, you should use it.

But if a safety belt is not longenough, your dealer will order youan extender. When you go in toorder it, take the heaviest coat youwill wear, so the extender will belong enough for you. To help avoidpersonal injury, do not let someoneelse use it, and use it only for theseat it is made to fit. The extenderhas been designed for adults. Neveruse it for securing child seats. Towear it, attach it to the regular safetybelt. See the instruction sheet thatcomes with the extender.

Safety System CheckNow and then, check that the safetybelt reminder light, safety belts,buckles, latch plates, retractors, andanchorages are all working properly.Look for any other loose ordamaged safety belt system partsthat might keep a safety belt systemfrom doing its job. See your dealer



to have it repaired. Torn or frayedsafety belts may not protect you in acrash. They can rip apart underimpact forces. If a belt is torn orfrayed, get a new one right away.

Make sure the safety belt reminderlight is working. See Safety BeltReminders on page 5‑13.

Keep safety belts clean and dry.See Safety Belt Care on page 3‑16.

Safety Belt CareKeep belts clean and dry.

{ WARNING

Do not bleach or dye safety belts.It may severely weaken them. Ina crash, they might not be able toprovide adequate protection.Clean safety belts only with mildsoap and lukewarm water.

Replacing Safety BeltSystem Parts after aCrash

{ WARNING

A crash can damage the safetybelt system in the vehicle.A damaged safety belt systemmay not properly protect theperson using it, resulting inserious injury or even death in acrash. To help make sure thesafety belt systems are workingproperly after a crash, have theminspected and any necessaryreplacements made as soon aspossible.

After a minor crash, replacement ofsafety belts may not be necessary.But the safety belt assemblies thatwere used during any crash mayhave been stressed or damaged.See your dealer to have the safetybelt assemblies inspected orreplaced.

New parts and repairs may benecessary even if the safety beltsystem was not being used at thetime of the crash.

Have the safety belt pretensionerschecked if the vehicle has been in acrash, or if the airbag readiness lightstays on after you start the vehicleor while you are driving. See AirbagReadiness Light on page 5‑14.



Airbag SystemThe vehicle has the followingairbags:. A frontal airbag for the driver.. A frontal airbag for the front

outboard passenger.. A seat-mounted side impact

airbag for the driver.. A seat-mounted side impact

airbag for the front outboardpassenger.

. A roof-rail airbag for the driverand the passenger seateddirectly behind the driver.

. A roof-rail airbag for the frontoutboard passenger and thepassenger seated directlybehind the front outboardpassenger.

The vehicle may have the followingairbags:. Seat-mounted side impact

airbags for the second rowoutboard passengers.

All of the airbags have the wordAIRBAG embossed on the trim oron a label near the deploymentopening.

For frontal airbags, the wordAIRBAG is on the center of thesteering wheel for the driver and onthe instrument panel for the frontoutboard passenger.

For seat-mounted side impactairbags, the word AIRBAG is on theside of the seatback closest tothe door.

For roof-rail airbags, the wordAIRBAG is on the ceiling or trim.

Airbags are designed to supplementthe protection provided by safetybelts. Even though today's airbagsare also designed to help reducethe risk of injury from the force of aninflating bag, all airbags must inflatevery quickly to do their job.

Here are the most important thingsto know about the airbag system:

{ WARNING

You can be severely injured orkilled in a crash if you are notwearing your safety belt, evenwith airbags. Airbags aredesigned to work with safetybelts, not replace them. Also,airbags are not designed to inflatein every crash. In some crashessafety belts are the only restraint.See When Should an AirbagInflate? on page 3‑20.

Wearing your safety belt during acrash helps reduce the chance ofhitting things inside the vehicle orbeing ejected from it. Airbags are“supplemental restraints” to thesafety belts. Everyone in thevehicle should wear a safety beltproperly, whether or not there isan airbag for that person.



{ WARNING

Because airbags inflate with greatforce and faster than the blink ofan eye, anyone who is upagainst, or very close to anyairbag when it inflates can beseriously injured or killed. Do notsit unnecessarily close to anyairbag, as you would be if sittingon the edge of the seat or leaningforward. Safety belts help keepyou in position before and duringa crash. Always wear a safetybelt, even with airbags. The drivershould sit as far back as possiblewhile still maintaining control ofthe vehicle.

Occupants should not lean on orsleep against the door or sidewindows in seating positions withseat-mounted side impact airbagsand/or roof-rail airbags.

{ WARNING

Children who are up against,or very close to, any airbag whenit inflates can be seriously injuredor killed. Airbags pluslap-shoulder belts offer protectionfor adults and older children, butnot for young children and infants.Neither the vehicle's safety beltsystem nor its airbag system isdesigned for them. Youngchildren and infants need theprotection that a child restraintsystem can provide. Alwayssecure children properly in thevehicle. To read how, see OlderChildren on page 3‑29 or Infantsand Young Children onpage 3‑31.

There is an airbag readiness lighton the instrument cluster, whichshows the airbag symbol. Thesystem checks the airbag electricalsystem for malfunctions. The lighttells you if there is an electricalproblem. See Airbag ReadinessLight on page 5‑14 for moreinformation.



Where Are the Airbags?

The driver frontal airbag is in thecenter of the steering wheel.

The front outboard passengerfrontal airbag is in the passengerside instrument panel.

Driver Side Shown, PassengerSide Similar

The driver and front outboardpassenger seat-mounted sideimpact airbags are in the side of theseatbacks closest to the door.

The roof-rail airbags for the driver,front outboard passenger, andsecond row outboard passengersare in the ceiling above the sidewindows.

Rear Seat Driver Side Shown,Passenger Side Similar

On vehicles with second rowseat-mounted side impact airbags,they are in the sides of the rearseatback closest to the door.



{ WARNING

If something is between anoccupant and an airbag, theairbag might not inflate properlyor it might force the object intothat person causing severe injuryor even death. The path of aninflating airbag must be keptclear. Do not put anythingbetween an occupant and anairbag, and do not attach or putanything on the steering wheelhub or on or near any otherairbag covering.

Do not use seat accessories thatblock the inflation path of aseat-mounted side impact airbag.

Never secure anything to the roofof a vehicle with roof-rail airbagsby routing a rope or tie‐downthrough any door or windowopening. If you do, the path of aninflating roof-rail airbag will beblocked.

When Should an AirbagInflate?Frontal airbags are designed toinflate in moderate to severe frontalor near frontal crashes to helpreduce the potential for severeinjuries, mainly to the driver's orfront outboard passenger's headand chest. However, they are onlydesigned to inflate if the impactexceeds a predetermineddeployment threshold. Deploymentthresholds are used to predict howsevere a crash is likely to be in timefor the airbags to inflate and helprestrain the occupants.

Whether the frontal airbags will orshould inflate is not based primarilyon how fast the vehicle is traveling.It depends on what is hit, thedirection of the impact, and howquickly the vehicle slows down.

Frontal airbags may inflate atdifferent crash speeds depending onwhether the vehicle hits an objectstraight on or at an angle, and

whether the object is fixed ormoving, rigid or deformable, narrowor wide.

Thresholds can also vary withspecific vehicle design.

Frontal airbags are not intended toinflate during vehicle rollovers, rearimpacts, or in many side impacts.

In addition, the vehicle hasdual-stage frontal airbags.Dual-stage airbags adjust therestraint according to crash severity.

The vehicle has electronic frontalsensors, which help the sensingsystem distinguish between amoderate frontal impact and a moresevere frontal impact. For moderatefrontal impacts, dual-stage airbagsinflate at a level less than fulldeployment. For more severe frontalimpacts, full deployment occurs.

The vehicle has seat-mounted sideimpact airbags and roof-rail airbags.See Airbag System on page 3‑17.



Seat-mounted side impact androof-rail airbags are intended toinflate in moderate to severe sidecrashes depending on the locationof the impact. In addition, theseroof‐rail airbags are intended toinflate during a rollover or in asevere frontal impact. Seat-mountedside impact and roof-rail airbags willinflate if the crash severity is abovethe system's designed thresholdlevel. The threshold level can varywith specific vehicle design.

Seat‐mounted side impact airbagsare not intended to inflate in frontalimpacts, near frontal impacts,rollovers, or rear impacts. Roof‐railairbags are not intended to inflate inrear impacts. A seat-mounted sideimpact airbag is intended to inflateon the side of the vehicle that isstruck. Both roof‐rail airbags willinflate when either side of thevehicle is struck or if the sensingsystem predicts that the vehicle isabout to roll over on its side, or in asevere frontal impact.

In any particular crash, no one cansay whether an airbag should haveinflated simply because of thevehicle damage or repair costs.

What Makes an AirbagInflate?In a deployment event, the sensingsystem sends an electrical signaltriggering a release of gas from theinflator. Gas from the inflator fills theairbag causing the bag to break outof the cover. The inflator, the airbag,and related hardware are all part ofthe airbag module.

For airbag locations, see Where Arethe Airbags? on page 3‑19.

How Does an AirbagRestrain?In moderate to severe frontal ornear frontal collisions, even beltedoccupants can contact the steeringwheel or the instrument panel. In

moderate to severe side collisions,even belted occupants can contactthe inside of the vehicle.

Airbags supplement the protectionprovided by safety belts bydistributing the force of the impactmore evenly over theoccupant's body.

But airbags would not help in manytypes of collisions, primarilybecause the occupant's motion isnot toward those airbags. See WhenShould an Airbag Inflate? onpage 3‑20.

Airbags should never be regardedas anything more than a supplementto safety belts.

What Will You See afteran Airbag Inflates?After the frontal airbags andseat-mounted side impact airbagsinflate, they quickly deflate, soquickly that some people may noteven realize an airbag inflated.



Roof-rail airbags may still be at leastpartially inflated for some time afterthey inflate. Some components ofthe airbag module may be hot forseveral minutes. For location of theairbags, see Where Are theAirbags? on page 3‑19.

The parts of the airbag that comeinto contact with you may be warm,but not too hot to touch. There maybe some smoke and dust comingfrom the vents in the deflatedairbags. Airbag inflation does notprevent the driver from seeing out ofthe windshield or being able to steerthe vehicle, nor does it preventpeople from leaving the vehicle.

{ WARNING

When an airbag inflates, theremay be dust in the air. This dustcould cause breathing problemsfor people with a history ofasthma or other breathing trouble.To avoid this, everyone in the

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

vehicle should get out as soon asit is safe to do so. If you havebreathing problems but cannotget out of the vehicle after anairbag inflates, then get fresh airby opening a window or a door.If you experience breathingproblems following an airbagdeployment, you should seekmedical attention.

The vehicle has a feature that mayautomatically unlock the doors, turnon the interior lamps, turn on thehazard warning flashers, and shutoff the fuel system after the airbagsinflate. You can lock the doors, turnoff the interior lamps, and turn offthe hazard warning flashers byusing the controls for thosefeatures.

{ WARNING

A crash severe enough to inflatethe airbags may have alsodamaged important functions inthe vehicle, such as the fuelsystem, brake and steeringsystems, etc. Even if the vehicleappears to be drivable after amoderate crash, there may beconcealed damage that couldmake it difficult to safely operatethe vehicle.

Use caution if you should attemptto restart the engine after a crashhas occurred.

In many crashes severe enough toinflate the airbag, windshields arebroken by vehicle deformation.Additional windshield breakage mayalso occur from the front outboardpassenger airbag.. Airbags are designed to inflate

only once. After an airbaginflates, you will need some new



parts for the airbag system.If you do not get them, theairbag system will not be thereto help protect you in anothercrash. A new system will includeairbag modules and possiblyother parts. The service manualfor the vehicle covers the needto replace other parts.

. The vehicle has a crash sensingand diagnostic module whichrecords information after acrash. See Vehicle DataRecording and Privacy onpage 13‑19 and Event DataRecorders on page 13‑19.

. Let only qualified technicianswork on the airbag systems.Improper service can mean thatan airbag system will not workproperly. See your dealer forservice.

Passenger SensingSystemThe vehicle has a passengersensing system for the frontoutboard passenger position. Thepassenger airbag status indicatorwill light on the instrument panelwhen the vehicle is started.

The words ON and OFF will bevisible during the system check.If you use remote start, if equipped,to start the vehicle from a distanceyou may not see the system check.When the system check iscomplete, either the word ON or theword OFF will be visible. SeePassenger Airbag Status Indicatoron page 5‑14.

The passenger sensing systemturns off the front outboardpassenger frontal airbag undercertain conditions. No other airbagis affected by the passengersensing system.

The passenger sensing systemworks with sensors that are part ofthe front outboard passenger seat.The sensors are designed to detectthe presence of a properly-seatedoccupant and determine if the frontoutboard passenger frontal airbagshould be allowed to inflate or not.

According to accident statistics,children are safer when properlysecured in a rear seat in the correctchild restraint for their weightand size.

We recommend that children besecured in a rear seat, including: aninfant or a child riding in arear-facing child restraint; a childriding in a forward-facing child seat;an older child riding in a boosterseat; and children, who are largeenough, using safety belts.



Never put a rear-facing child seat inthe front. This is because the risk tothe rear-facing child is so great,if the airbag inflates.

{ WARNING

A child in a rear-facing childrestraint can be seriously injuredor killed if the passenger frontalairbag inflates. This is becausethe back of the rear-facing childrestraint would be very close tothe inflating airbag. A child in aforward-facing child restraint canbe seriously injured or killed if thepassenger frontal airbag inflatesand the passenger seat is in aforward position.

Even if the passenger sensingsystem has turned off thepassenger frontal airbag, nosystem is fail-safe. No one canguarantee that an airbag will not

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

inflate under some unusualcircumstance, even though theairbag is off.

Secure rear-facing child restraintsin a rear seat, even if the airbagis off. If you secure aforward-facing child restraint inthe front outboard passengerseat, always move the seat as farback as it will go. It is better tosecure the child restraint in arear seat.

The passenger sensing system isdesigned to turn off the frontoutboard passenger frontal airbag if:. The front outboard passenger

seat is unoccupied.. The system determines that an

infant is present in a childrestraint.

. A front outboard passengertakes his/her weight off of theseat for a period of time.

. There is a critical problem withthe airbag system or thepassenger sensing system.

When the passenger sensingsystem has turned off the frontoutboard passenger frontal airbag,the off indicator will light and stay litas a reminder that the airbag is off.See Passenger Airbag StatusIndicator on page 5‑14.

The passenger sensing system isdesigned to turn on the frontoutboard passenger frontal airbaganytime the system senses that aperson of adult size is sittingproperly in the front outboardpassenger seat. When thepassenger sensing system hasallowed the airbag to be enabled,the on indicator will light and stay litas a reminder that the airbag isactive.



For some children, includingchildren in child restraints and forvery small adults, the passengersensing system may or may not turnoff the front outboard passengerfrontal airbag, depending upon theperson's seating posture and bodybuild. Everyone in the vehicle whohas outgrown child restraints shouldwear a safety belt properly —whether or not there is an airbag forthat person.

{ WARNING

If the airbag readiness light evercomes on and stays on, it meansthat something may be wrongwith the airbag system. To helpavoid injury to yourself or others,have the vehicle serviced rightaway. See Airbag ReadinessLight on page 5‑14 for moreinformation, including importantsafety information.

If the On Indicator Is Lit for aChild Restraint

If a child restraint has been installedand the on indicator is lit:

1. Turn the vehicle off.

2. Remove the child restraint fromthe vehicle.

3. Remove any additional itemsfrom the seat such as blankets,cushions, seat covers, seatheaters, or seat massagers.

4. Reinstall the child restraintfollowing the directions providedby the child restraintmanufacturer and refer toSecuring Child Restraints (RearSeat) on page 3‑44 or SecuringChild Restraints (FrontPassenger Seat) on page 3‑46.

5. If, after reinstalling the childrestraint and restarting thevehicle, the on indicator is still lit,turn the vehicle off. Then slightlyrecline the vehicle seatback andadjust the seat cushion,if adjustable, to make sure thatthe vehicle seatback is notpushing the child restraint intothe seat cushion.

Also make sure the childrestraint is not trapped under thevehicle head restraint. If thishappens, adjust the headrestraint. See Head Restraintson page 3‑2.

6. Restart the vehicle.

The passenger sensing system mayor may not turn off the airbag for achild in a child restraint dependingupon the child's seating posture andbody build. It is better to secure thechild restraint in a rear seat.



If the Off Indicator Is Lit for anAdult-Size Occupant

If a person of adult-size is sitting inthe front outboard passenger seat,but the off indicator is lit, it could bebecause that person is not sittingproperly in the seat. Use thefollowing steps to allow the systemto detect that person and enable thefront outboard passenger frontalairbag :

1. Turn the vehicle off.

2. Remove any additional materialfrom the seat, such as blankets,cushions, seat covers, seatheaters, seat massagers, alaptop, or other electronicdevices.

3. Place the seatback in the fullyupright position.

4. Have the person sit upright inthe seat, centered on the seatcushion, with legs comfortablyextended.

5. Restart the vehicle and have theperson remain in this position fortwo to three minutes after the onindicator is lit.

Additional Factors AffectingSystem Operation

Safety belts help keep thepassenger in position on the seatduring vehicle maneuvers andbraking, which helps the passengersensing system maintain thepassenger airbag status. See“Safety Belts” and “Child Restraints”

in the Index for additionalinformation about the importance ofproper restraint use.

A thick layer of additional material,such as a blanket or cushion,or aftermarket equipment such asseat covers, seat heaters, and seatmassagers can affect how well thepassenger sensing systemoperates. We recommend that younot use seat covers or otheraftermarket equipment except whenapproved by GM for your specificvehicle. See Adding Equipment tothe Airbag-Equipped Vehicle onpage 3‑27 for more informationabout modifications that can affecthow the system operates.

A wet seat can affect theperformance of the passengersensing system. Here is how:. The passenger sensing system

may turn off the passengerfrontal airbag when liquid issoaked into the seat. If thishappens, the off indicator will be



lit, and the airbag readiness lighton the instrument panel will alsobe lit.

. Liquid pooled on the seat thathas not soaked in may make itmore likely that the passengersensing system will turn on thepassenger frontal airbag while achild restraint or child occupantis on the seat. If the passengerfrontal airbag is turned on, theon indicator will be lit.

If the passenger seat gets wet, drythe seat immediately. If the airbagreadiness light is lit, do not install achild restraint or allow anyone tooccupy the seat. See AirbagReadiness Light on page 5‑14 forimportant safety information.

The on indicator may be lit if anobject, such as a briefcase,handbag, grocery bag, laptop orother electronic device, is put on anunoccupied seat. If this is notdesired remove the object fromthe seat.

{ WARNING

Stowing of articles under thepassenger seat or between thepassenger seat cushion andseatback may interfere with theproper operation of the passengersensing system.

Servicing theAirbag-Equipped VehicleAirbags affect how the vehicleshould be serviced. There are partsof the airbag system in severalplaces around the vehicle. Yourdealer and the service manual haveinformation about servicing thevehicle and the airbag system. Topurchase a service manual, seeService Publications OrderingInformation on page 13‑16.

{ WARNING

For up to 10 seconds after thevehicle is turned off and thebattery is disconnected, an airbagcan still inflate during improperservice. You can be injured if youare close to an airbag when itinflates. Avoid yellow connectors.They are probably part of theairbag system. Be sure to followproper service procedures, andmake sure the person performingwork for you is qualified to do so.

Adding Equipment to theAirbag-Equipped VehicleAdding accessories that change thevehicle's frame, bumper system,height, front end, or side sheetmetal, may keep the airbag systemfrom working properly. Theoperation of the airbag system canalso be affected by changing ormoving any parts of the front seats,safety belts, the airbag sensing and



diagnostic module, steering wheel,instrument panel, roof-rail airbagmodules, ceiling headliner or pillargarnish trim, front sensors, sideimpact sensors, or airbag wiring.

Your dealer and the service manualhave information about the locationof the airbag sensors, sensing anddiagnostic module, and airbagwiring.

In addition, the vehicle has apassenger sensing system for thefront outboard passenger position,which includes sensors that are partof the passenger seat. Thepassenger sensing system may notoperate properly if the original seattrim is replaced with non-GMcovers, upholstery, or trim; or withGM covers, upholstery, or trimdesigned for a different vehicle. Anyobject, such as an aftermarket seatheater or a comfort‐enhancing pador device, installed under or on topof the seat fabric, could alsointerfere with the operation of thepassenger sensing system. Thiscould either prevent proper

deployment of the passengerairbag(s) or prevent the passengersensing system from properlyturning off the passenger airbag(s).See Passenger Sensing System onpage 3‑23.

If your vehicle needs to be modifiedbecause you have a disability andyou have questions about whetherthe modifications will affect thevehicle's airbag system, or if youhave questions about whether theairbag system will be affected if thevehicle is modified for any otherreason, call Customer Assistance.See Customer Assistance Offices(U.S. and Canada) on page 13‑5 orCustomer Assistance Offices(Mexico) on page 13‑5.

Airbag System CheckThe airbag system does not needregularly scheduled maintenance orreplacement. Make sure the airbagreadiness light is working. SeeAirbag Readiness Light onpage 5‑14.

Notice: If an airbag covering isdamaged, opened, or broken, theairbag may not work properly. Donot open or break the airbagcoverings. If there are anyopened or broken airbag covers,have the airbag covering and/orairbag module replaced. For thelocation of the airbags, seeWhere Are the Airbags? onpage 3‑19. See your dealer forservice.

Replacing Airbag SystemParts after a Crash

{ WARNING

A crash can damage the airbagsystems in the vehicle.A damaged airbag system maynot work properly and may notprotect you and yourpassenger(s) in a crash, resultingin serious injury or even death. Tohelp make sure the airbag

(Continued)



WARNING (Continued)

systems are working properlyafter a crash, have theminspected and any necessaryreplacements made as soon aspossible.

If an airbag inflates, you will need toreplace airbag system parts. Seeyour dealer for service.

If the airbag readiness light stays onafter the vehicle is started or comeson when you are driving, the airbagsystem may not work properly. Havethe vehicle serviced right away. SeeAirbag Readiness Light onpage 5‑14 for more information.

Vehicles with eAssist have a highvoltage battery and a standard 12‐volt battery. If an airbag inflates orthe vehicle has been in a crash, thevehicle's sensing system may shutdown the high voltage system.When this occurs, the high voltagebattery is disconnected and thevehicle is not charging the 12‐voltbattery or the electrical system. Thevehicle may start but it shuts downonce the 12‐volt battery is depleted.When the 12‐volt battery isdepleted, the vehicle will not startand the on‐board jump start featureis disabled. The airbag readinesslight and/or the 12‐volt batterywarning light are displayed. Beforethe vehicle can be operated again, itmust be serviced at your dealer.

Child Restraints

Older Children

Older children who have outgrownbooster seats should wear thevehicle safety belts.



The manufacturer instructions thatcome with the booster seat state theweight and height limitations for thatbooster. Use a booster seat with alap-shoulder belt until the childpasses the fit test below:. Sit all the way back on the seat.

Do the knees bend at the seatedge? If yes, continue. If no,return to the booster seat.

. Buckle the lap-shoulder belt.Does the shoulder belt rest onthe shoulder? If yes, continue.If no, try using the rear safetybelt comfort guide. See “RearSafety Belt Comfort Guides”under Lap-Shoulder Belt onpage 3‑11. If the shoulder beltstill does not rest on theshoulder, then return to thebooster seat.

. Does the lap belt fit low andsnug on the hips, touching thethighs? If yes, continue. If no,return to the booster seat.

. Can proper safety belt fit bemaintained for the length of thetrip? If yes, continue. If no,return to the booster seat.

Q: What is the proper way towear safety belts?

A: An older child should wear alap-shoulder belt and get theadditional restraint a shoulderbelt can provide. The shoulderbelt should not cross the face orneck. The lap belt should fitsnugly below the hips, justtouching the top of the thighs.This applies belt force to thechild's pelvic bones in a crash.It should never be worn over theabdomen, which could causesevere or even fatal internalinjuries in a crash.

Also see “Rear Safety Belt ComfortGuides” under Lap-Shoulder Belt onpage 3‑11.

According to accident statistics,children and infants are safer whenproperly restrained in a childrestraint system or infant restraintsystem secured in a rear seatingposition.

In a crash, children who are notbuckled up can strike other peoplewho are buckled up, or can bethrown out of the vehicle. Olderchildren need to use safety beltsproperly.

{ WARNING

Never allow more than one childto wear the same safety belt. Thesafety belt cannot properly spreadthe impact forces. In a crash, theycan be crushed together andseriously injured. A safety beltmust be used by only one personat a time.



{ WARNING

Never allow a child to wear thesafety belt with the shoulder beltbehind their back. A child can beseriously injured by not wearingthe lap-shoulder belt properly. In acrash, the child would not berestrained by the shoulder belt.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

The child could move too farforward increasing the chance ofhead and neck injury. The childmight also slide under the lapbelt. The belt force would then beapplied right on the abdomen.That could cause serious or fatalinjuries. The shoulder belt shouldgo over the shoulder and acrossthe chest.

Infants and YoungChildrenEveryone in a vehicle needsprotection! This includes infants andall other children. Neither thedistance traveled nor the age andsize of the traveler changes theneed, for everyone, to use safetyrestraints. In fact, the law in everystate in the United States and inevery Canadian province sayschildren up to some age must berestrained while in a vehicle.

{ WARNING

Children can be seriously injuredor strangled if a shoulder belt iswrapped around their neck andthe safety belt continues totighten. Never leave childrenunattended in a vehicle and neverallow children to play with thesafety belts.



Airbags plus lap-shoulder belts offerprotection for adults and olderchildren, but not for young childrenand infants. Neither the vehicle'ssafety belt system nor its airbagsystem is designed for them. Everytime infants and young children ridein vehicles, they should have theprotection provided by appropriatechild restraints.

Children who are not restrainedproperly can strike other people,or can be thrown out of the vehicle.

{ WARNING

Never hold an infant or a childwhile riding in a vehicle. Due tocrash forces, an infant or a childwill become so heavy it is notpossible to hold it during a crash.For example, in a crash at only40 km/h (25 mph), a 5.5 kg (12 lb)infant will suddenly become a110 kg (240 lb) force on a person's

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

arms. An infant should besecured in an appropriaterestraint.

{ WARNING

Children who are up against,or very close to, any airbag whenit inflates can be seriously injuredor killed. Never put a rear-facing

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

child restraint in the right frontseat. Secure a rear-facing childrestraint in a rear seat. It is alsobetter to secure a forward-facingchild restraint in a rear seat. If youmust secure a forward-facingchild restraint in the right frontseat, always move the frontpassenger seat as far back as itwill go.



Q: What are the different types ofadd-on child restraints?

A: Add-on child restraints, whichare purchased by the vehicleowner, are available in four basictypes. Selection of a particularrestraint should take intoconsideration not only the child'sweight, height, and age but alsowhether or not the restraint willbe compatible with the motorvehicle in which it will be used.

For most basic types of childrestraints, there are manydifferent models available. Whenpurchasing a child restraint, besure it is designed to be used ina motor vehicle. If it is, therestraint will have a label sayingthat it meets federal motorvehicle safety standards.

The restraint manufacturerinstructions that come with therestraint state the weight andheight limitations for a particularchild restraint. In addition, thereare many kinds of restraintsavailable for children withspecial needs.

{ WARNING

To reduce the risk of neck andhead injury during a crash, infantsneed complete support. In acrash, if an infant is in arear-facing child restraint, thecrash forces can be distributedacross the strongest part of aninfant's body, the back andshoulders. Infants should alwaysbe secured in rear-facing childrestraints.

{ WARNING

A young child's hip bones are stillso small that the vehicle's regularsafety belt may not remain low onthe hip bones, as it should.Instead, it may settle up aroundthe child's abdomen. In a crash,the belt would apply force on abody area that is unprotected byany bony structure. This alonecould cause serious or fatalinjuries. To reduce the risk ofserious or fatal injuries during acrash, young children shouldalways be secured in appropriatechild restraints.



Child Restraint Systems

Rear-Facing Infant Seat

A rear-facing infant seat providesrestraint with the seating surfaceagainst the back of the infant.

The harness system holds the infantin place and, in a crash, acts tokeep the infant positioned in therestraint.

Forward-Facing Child Seat

A forward-facing child seat providesrestraint for the child's body with theharness.

Booster Seats

A booster seat is a child restraintdesigned to improve the fit of thevehicle's safety belt system.A booster seat can also help a childto see out the window.



Securing an Add-On ChildRestraint in the Vehicle

{ WARNING

A child can be seriously injured orkilled in a crash if the childrestraint is not properly secured inthe vehicle. Secure the childrestraint properly in the vehicleusing the vehicle safety belt orLATCH system, following theinstructions that came with thatchild restraint and the instructionsin this manual.

To help reduce the chance of injury,the child restraint must be securedin the vehicle. Child restraintsystems must be secured in vehicleseats by lap belts or the lap beltportion of a lap-shoulder belt, or bythe LATCH system. See LowerAnchors and Tethers for Children(LATCH System) on page 3‑37.

Children can be endangered in acrash if the child restraint is notproperly secured in the vehicle.

When securing an add-on childrestraint, refer to the instructionsthat come with the restraint whichmay be on the restraint itself or in abooklet, or both, and to this manual.The child restraint instructions areimportant, so if they are notavailable, obtain a replacementcopy from the manufacturer.

Keep in mind that an unsecuredchild restraint can move around in acollision or sudden stop and injurepeople in the vehicle. Be sure toproperly secure any child restraint inthe vehicle— even when no child isin it.

In some areas, Certified ChildPassenger Safety Technicians(CPSTs) are available to inspectand demonstrate how to correctlyuse and install child restraints. Inthe U.S., refer to the NationalHighway Traffic SafetyAdministration (NHTSA) website to

locate the nearest child safety seatinspection station. For CPSTavailability in Canada, check withTransport Canada or the ProvincialMinistry of Transportation office.

Securing the Child within theChild Restraint

{ WARNING

A child can be seriously injured orkilled in a crash if the child is notproperly secured in the childrestraint. Secure the childproperly following the instructionsthat came with that child restraint.

Where to Put theRestraintAccording to accident statistics,children and infants are safer whenproperly restrained in a childrestraint system or infant restraintsystem secured in a rear seatingposition.



We recommend that children andchild restraints be secured in a rearseat, including: an infant or a childriding in a rear-facing child restraint;a child riding in a forward-facingchild seat; an older child riding in abooster seat; and children, who arelarge enough, using safety belts.

A label on your sun visor says,“Never put a rear-facing child seat inthe front.” This is because the risk tothe rear-facing child is so great if theairbag deploys.

{ WARNING

A child in a rear-facing childrestraint can be seriously injuredor killed if the right frontpassenger airbag inflates. This isbecause the back of therear-facing child restraint wouldbe very close to the inflatingairbag. A child in a forward-facingchild restraint can be seriouslyinjured or killed if the right front

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

passenger airbag inflates and thepassenger seat is in a forwardposition.

Even if the passenger sensingsystem has turned off the rightfront passenger frontal airbag, nosystem is fail-safe. No one canguarantee that an airbag will notdeploy under some unusualcircumstance, even though it isturned off.

Secure rear-facing child restraintsin a rear seat, even if the airbagis off. If you secure aforward-facing child restraint inthe right front seat, always movethe front passenger seat as farback as it will go. It is better tosecure the child restraint in arear seat.

See Passenger Sensing Systemon page 3‑23 for additionalinformation.

When securing a child restraint in arear seating position, study theinstructions that came with yourchild restraint to make sure it iscompatible with this vehicle.

Child restraints and booster seatsvary considerably in size, and somemay fit in certain seating positionsbetter than others. Always makesure the child restraint is properlysecured.

Depending on where you place thechild restraint and the size of thechild restraint, you may not be ableto access adjacent safety beltassemblies or LATCH anchors foradditional passengers or childrestraints. Adjacent seatingpositions should not be used if thechild restraint prevents access to orinterferes with the routing of thesafety belt.

Wherever a child restraint isinstalled, be sure to secure the childrestraint properly.



Keep in mind that an unsecuredchild restraint can move around in acollision or sudden stop and injurepeople in the vehicle. Be sure toproperly secure any child restraint inyour vehicle — even when no childis in it.

Lower Anchors andTethers for Children(LATCH System)The LATCH system secures a childrestraint during driving or in a crash.LATCH attachments on the childrestraint are used to attach the childrestraint to the anchors in thevehicle. This system is designed tomake installation of a child restrainteasier.

Make sure that a LATCH-compatiblechild restraint is properly installedusing the anchors, or use thevehicle's safety belts to secure therestraint, following the instructionsthat came with that restraint, andalso the instructions in this manual.

When installing a child restraint witha top tether, you must also useeither the lower anchors or thesafety belts to properly secure thechild restraint. A child restraint mustnever be installed using only the toptether and anchor.

In order to use the LATCH system inthe vehicle, you need a childrestraint that has LATCHattachments. The child restraintmanufacturer will provide you withinstructions on how to use the childrestraint and its attachments. Thefollowing explains how to attach achild restraint with theseattachments in the vehicle.

Not all vehicle seating positions orchild restraints have lower anchorsand attachments or top tetheranchors and attachments.

Lower Anchors

Lower anchors (1) are metal barsbuilt into the vehicle. There are twolower anchors for each LATCHseating position that willaccommodate a child restraint withlower attachments (2).



Top Tether Anchor

A top tether (3, 4) anchors the top ofthe child restraint to the vehicle.A top tether anchor is built into thevehicle. The top tetherattachment (2) on the child restraintconnects to the top tether anchor inthe vehicle in order to reduce theforward movement and rotation ofthe child restraint during driving or ina crash.

The child restraint may have asingle tether (3) or a dual tether (4).Either will have a singleattachment (2) to secure the toptether to the anchor.

Some child restraints that have atop tether are designed for use withor without the top tether beingattached. Others require the toptether always to be attached. InCanada, the law requires thatforward-facing child restraints havea top tether, and that the tether beattached. Be sure to read and followthe instructions for the childrestraint.

Lower Anchor and Top TetherAnchor Locations

Rear Seat

I (Top Tether Anchor): Seatingpositions with top tether anchors.

H (Lower Anchor): Seatingpositions with two lower anchors.



To assist in locating the loweranchors, each rear anchor positionhas a label, near the creasebetween the seatback and the seatcushion.

To assist in locating the top tetheranchors, the top tether anchorsymbol is on the cover.

The top tether anchors are underthe covers, behind the rear seat, onthe filler panel. Be sure to use ananchor on the same side of thevehicle as the seating positionwhere the child restraint will beplaced.

Do not secure a child restraint in aposition without a top tether anchorif a national or local law requiresthat the top tether be attached, or ifthe instructions that come with thechild restraint say that the top tethermust be attached.

According to accident statistics,children and infants are safer whenproperly restrained in a childrestraint system or infant restraintsystem secured in a rear seatingposition. See Where to Put theRestraint on page 3‑35 foradditional information.

Securing a Child RestraintDesigned for the LATCHSystem

{ WARNING

If a LATCH-type child restraint isnot attached to anchors, the childrestraint will not be able to protectthe child correctly. In a crash, thechild could be seriously injured orkilled. Install a LATCH-type childrestraint properly using theanchors, or use the vehicle safetybelts to secure the restraint,following the instructions thatcame with the child restraint andthe instructions in this manual.



{ WARNING

Do not attach more than one childrestraint to a single anchor.Attaching more than one childrestraint to a single anchor couldcause the anchor or attachmentto come loose or even breakduring a crash. A child or otherscould be injured. To reduce therisk of serious or fatal injuriesduring a crash, attach only onechild restraint per anchor.

{ WARNING

Children can be seriously injuredor strangled if a shoulder belt iswrapped around their neck andthe safety belt continues totighten. Buckle any unused safetybelts behind the child restraint sochildren cannot reach them. Pullthe shoulder belt all the way out

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

of the retractor to set the lock,if the vehicle has one, after thechild restraint has been installed.

Notice: Do not let the LATCHattachments rub against thevehicle’s safety belts. This maydamage these parts. If necessary,move buckled safety belts toavoid rubbing the LATCHattachments.

Do not fold the empty rear seatwith a safety belt buckled. Thiscould damage the safety belt orthe seat. Unbuckle and return thesafety belt to its stowed position,before folding the seat.

If you need to secure more than onechild restraint in the rear seat, seeWhere to Put the Restraint onpage 3‑35.

You cannot secure three childrestraints using the LATCH anchorsin the rear seat at the same time,

but you can install two of them.If you want to do this, install oneLATCH child restraint in the rightrear seating position, and install theother one either in the left rearseating position or in the centerseating position. If you need toinstall child restraints in both thecenter and left rear seatingpositions, the one in the centerseating position will need to besecured using the vehicle safetybelts instead of the LATCH anchors.

Refer to the following illustration tolearn which anchors to use.



There are five lower LATCH anchorsin the rear seat.. Use anchors 1 and 2 when

installing a child restraint usingLATCH in the right rear seatingposition.

. Use anchors 3 and 4 wheninstalling a child restraint usingLATCH in the center rear seatingposition.

. Use anchors 4 and 5 wheninstalling a child restraint usingLATCH in the left rear seatingposition.

Installing child restraints usingLATCH in the center and left rearseating positions at the same time isprohibited.

Make sure to attach the childrestraint at the proper anchorlocation.

This system is designed to makeinstallation of child restraints easier.When using lower anchors, do notuse the vehicle's safety belts.

Instead use the vehicle's anchorsand child restraint attachments tosecure the restraints. Somerestraints also use another vehicleanchor to secure a top tether.

1. Attach and tighten the lowerattachments to the loweranchors. If the child restraintdoes not have lowerattachments or the desiredseating position does not havelower anchors, secure the childrestraint with the top tether andthe safety belts. Refer to thechild restraint manufacturerinstructions and the instructionsin this manual.

1.1. Find the lower anchors forthe desired seatingposition.

1.2. Put the child restraint onthe seat.

If the head restraintinterferes with the properinstallation of the childrestraint, the head restraintmay be removed. See“Head Restraint Removaland Reinstallation” at theend of this section.

1.3. Attach and tighten the lowerattachments on the childrestraint to the loweranchors.

2. If the child restraint manufacturerrecommends that the top tetherbe attached, attach and tightenthe top tether to the top tetheranchor, if equipped. Refer to thechild restraint instructions andthe following steps:

2.1. Find the top tether anchor.

Open the cover to exposethe anchor.



2.2. Route, attach, and tightenthe top tether according tothe child restraintinstructions and thefollowing instructions:

If the position you are usingdoes not have a headrestor head restraint, or theheadrest or head restrainthas been removed, and youare using a single tether,route the tether over theseatback.

If the position you are usingdoes not have a headrestor head restraint, or theheadrest or head restrainthas been removed, and youare using a dual tether,route the tether over theseatback.

If the position you are usinghas an adjustable headrestor head restraint and youare using a single tether,route the tether under theheadrest or head restraintand in between theheadrest or head restraintposts.

If the position you are usinghas an adjustable headrestor head restraint and youare using a dual tether,route the tether around theheadrest or head restraint.



3. Before placing a child in thechild restraint, make sure it issecurely held in place. To check,grasp the child restraint at theLATCH path and attempt tomove it side to side and backand forth. There should be nomore than 2.5 cm (1 in) ofmovement, for properinstallation.

Head Restraint Removal andReinstallation

The rear outboard head restraintscan be removed if they interfere withthe proper installation of the childrestraint.

To remove the head restraint:

1. Partially fold the seatbackforward. See Rear Seats onpage 3‑7 for additionalinformation.

2. Press both buttons on the headrestraint posts at the same time,and pull up on the headrestraint.

3. Store the head restraint in thetrunk of the vehicle.

4. When the child restraint isremoved, reinstall the headrestraint before the seatingposition is used.

{ WARNING

With head restraints that are notinstalled and adjusted properly,there is a greater chance thatoccupants will suffer a neck/spinal injury in a crash. Do notdrive until the head restraints forall occupants are installed andadjusted properly.

To reinstall the head restraint:



1. Insert the head restraint postsinto the holes in the top of theseatback. The notches on theposts must face the driver sideof the vehicle.

2. Push the head restraint down.

If necessary, press the heightadjustment release button tofurther lower the head restraint.See Head Restraints onpage 3‑2.

3. Try to move the head restraint tomake sure that it is locked inplace.

Replacing LATCH SystemParts After a Crash

{ WARNING

A crash can damage the LATCHsystem in the vehicle. A damagedLATCH system may not properlysecure the child restraint,resulting in serious injury or even

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

death in a crash. To help makesure the LATCH system isworking properly after a crash,see your dealer to have thesystem inspected and anynecessary replacements made assoon as possible.

If the vehicle has the LATCH systemand it was being used during acrash, new LATCH system partsmay be needed.

New parts and repairs may benecessary even if the LATCHsystem was not being used at thetime of the crash.

Securing Child Restraints(Rear Seat)When securing a child restraint in arear seating position, study theinstructions that came with the childrestraint to make sure it iscompatible with this vehicle.

If the child restraint has the LATCHsystem, see Lower Anchors andTethers for Children (LATCHSystem) on page 3‑37 for how andwhere to install the child restraintusing LATCH. If a child restraint issecured in the vehicle using asafety belt and it uses a top tether,see Lower Anchors and Tethers forChildren (LATCH System) onpage 3‑37 for top tether anchorlocations.

Do not secure a child seat in aposition without a top tether anchorif a national or local law requiresthat the top tether be anchored, or ifthe instructions that come with thechild restraint say that the top strapmust be anchored.

If the child restraint does not havethe LATCH system, you will beusing the safety belt to secure thechild restraint in this position. Besure to follow the instructions thatcame with the child restraint. Securethe child in the child restraint whenand as the instructions say.



If more than one child restraintneeds to be installed in the rearseat, be sure to read Where to Putthe Restraint on page 3‑35.

1. Put the child restraint onthe seat.

If the head restraint interfereswith the proper installation of thechild restraint, the head restraintmay be removed. See “HeadRestraint Removal andReinstallation” under LowerAnchors and Tethers forChildren (LATCH System) onpage 3‑37.

2. Pick up the latch plate, and runthe lap and shoulder portions ofthe vehicle's safety belt throughor around the restraint. The childrestraint instructions will showyou how.



4. Pull the shoulder belt all the wayout of the retractor to set thelock. When the retractor lock isset, the belt can be tightened butnot pulled out of the retractor.



5. To tighten the belt, push downon the child restraint, pull theshoulder portion of the belt totighten the lap portion of the belt,and feed the shoulder belt backinto the retractor. When installinga forward-facing child restraint, itmay be helpful to use your kneeto push down on the childrestraint as you tighten the belt.

Try to pull the belt out of theretractor to make sure theretractor is locked. If theretractor is not locked, repeatSteps 4 and 5.

6. If the child restraint has a toptether, follow the child restraintmanufacturer's instructionsregarding the use of the toptether. See Lower Anchors andTethers for Children (LATCHSystem) on page 3‑37 for moreinformation.

7. Before placing a child in thechild restraint, make sure it issecurely held in place. To check,grasp the child restraint at thesafety belt path and attempt tomove it side to side and backand forth. When the childrestraint is properly installed,there should be no more than2.5 cm (1 in) of movement.

To remove the child restraint,unbuckle the vehicle safety belt andlet it return to the stowed position.If the top tether is attached to a toptether anchor, disconnect it. If thehead restraint was removed,reinstall it before the seatingposition is used. See “Head

Restraint Removal andReinstallation” under Lower Anchorsand Tethers for Children (LATCHSystem) on page 3‑37 for additionalinformation on installing the headrestraint properly.

Securing Child Restraints(Front Passenger Seat)This vehicle has airbags. A rearseat is a safer place to secure aforward-facing child restraint. SeeWhere to Put the Restraint onpage 3‑35.

In addition, the vehicle has apassenger sensing system which isdesigned to turn off the right frontpassenger frontal airbag and seat‐mounted side impact airbag undercertain conditions. See PassengerSensing System on page 3‑23 andPassenger Airbag Status Indicatoron page 5‑14 for more information,including important safetyinformation.



A label on the sun visor says,“Never put a rear-facing child seat inthe front.” This is because the risk tothe rear-facing child is so great if theairbag deploys.

{ WARNING

A child in a rear-facing childrestraint can be seriously injuredor killed if the right frontpassenger airbag inflates. This isbecause the back of therear-facing child restraint wouldbe very close to the inflatingairbag. A child in a forward-facingchild restraint can be seriouslyinjured or killed if the right frontpassenger airbag inflates and thepassenger seat is in a forwardposition.

Even if the passenger sensingsystem has turned off the rightfront passenger frontal airbag, nosystem is fail-safe. No one canguarantee that an airbag will not

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

deploy under some unusualcircumstance, even though it isturned off.

Secure rear-facing child restraintsin a rear seat, even if the airbagis off. If you secure aforward-facing child restraint inthe right front seat, always movethe front passenger seat as farback as it will go. It is better tosecure the child restraint in arear seat.

See Passenger Sensing Systemon page 3‑23 for additionalinformation.

If the child restraint has the LATCHsystem, see Lower Anchors andTethers for Children (LATCHSystem) on page 3‑37 for how andwhere to install the child restraintusing LATCH. If a child restraint issecured using a safety belt and ituses a top tether, see Lower

Anchors and Tethers for Children(LATCH System) on page 3‑37 fortop tether anchor locations.

Do not secure a child seat in aposition without a top tether anchorif a national or local law requiresthat the top tether be anchored, or ifthe instructions that come with thechild restraint say that the top strapmust be anchored.

In Canada, the law requires thatforward-facing child restraints havea top tether, and that the tether beattached.

You will be using the lap-shoulderbelt to secure the child restraint inthis position. Follow the instructionsthat came with the child restraint.

1. Move the seat as far back as itwill go before securing theforward-facing child restraint.

When the passenger sensingsystem has turned off the rightfront passenger frontal airbagand seat‐mounted side airbag,the off indicator on the



passenger airbag statusindicator should light and stay litwhen you start the vehicle. SeePassenger Airbag StatusIndicator on page 5‑14.

2. Put the child restraint onthe seat.

3. Pick up the latch plate, and runthe lap and shoulder portions ofthe vehicle's safety belt throughor around the restraint. The childrestraint instructions will showyou how.



5. Pull the shoulder belt all the wayout of the retractor to set thelock. When the retractor lock isset, the belt can be tightened butnot pulled out of the retractor.

6. To tighten the belt, push downon the child restraint, pull theshoulder portion of the belt totighten the lap portion of the belt,and feed the shoulder belt backinto the retractor. When installinga forward-facing child restraint, itmay be helpful to use your kneeto push down on the childrestraint as you tighten the belt.

Try to pull the belt out of theretractor to make sure theretractor is locked. If theretractor is not locked, repeatSteps 5 and 6.



7. Before placing a child in thechild restraint, make sure it issecurely held in place. To check,grasp the child restraint at thesafety belt path and attempt tomove it side to side and backand forth. When the childrestraint is properly installed,there should be no more than2.5 cm (1 in) of movement.

If the airbags are off, the offindicator in the passenger airbagstatus indicator will come on andstay on when the vehicle is started.

If a child restraint has been installedand the on indicator is lit, see “If theOn Indicator Is Lit for a ChildRestraint” under Passenger SensingSystem on page 3‑23 for moreinformation.

To remove the child restraint,unbuckle the vehicle safety belt andlet it return to the stowed position.



2 NOTES


Storage 4-1

Storage

Storage CompartmentsInstrument Panel Storage . . . . . 4-1Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1Rear Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2Center Console Storage . . . . . . 4-3

Additional Storage FeaturesCargo Net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3Convenience Net . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3

StorageCompartments

Instrument Panel Storage

There is a storage compartmentlocated on the driver side of theinstrument panel. Lift latch to open.

Glove BoxLift up the handle to open the glovebox. It contains a pen holder.

Cupholders

Two cupholders are in the centerconsole.


4-2 Storage

Slide the door to access them. Cupholders may be located in thesecond row seat armrest. Toaccess, pull the armrest down.

Rear Storage

Pull down the armrest. Push thebutton to lift the cover. Close thecover before folding the armrest up.


Storage 4-3

Center Console Storage

Push the button to access thestorage or accessory power outletunder the armrest. See PowerOutlets on page 5‑6.

Some vehicles might also haveinput jacks for auxiliary devices. SeeAuxiliary Devices on page 7‑18.

Additional StorageFeatures

Cargo Net

There is a cargo net for storingitems on the side of the trunk.

Convenience Net

For vehicles with a convenience net,it is located in the trunk and used tostore small loads. The net shouldnot be used to store heavy loads.Attach the loops on each side of thenet to the hooks located on thesides of the trunk.


4-4 Storage

2 NOTES


Instruments and Controls 5-1

Instruments andControls

ControlsSteering Wheel Adjustment . . . 5-2Steering Wheel Controls . . . . . . 5-2Heated Steering Wheel . . . . . . . 5-3Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3Windshield Wiper/Washer . . . . . 5-3Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6

Warning Lights, Gauges, andIndicatorsWarning Lights, Gauges, andIndicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8

Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11Fuel Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11Driver Efficiency Gauge . . . . . . 5-12Engine Coolant TemperatureGauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12

Safety Belt Reminders . . . . . . . 5-13

Airbag Readiness Light . . . . . . 5-14Passenger Airbag StatusIndicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14

Charging System Light . . . . . . 5-15MalfunctionIndicator Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15

Brake System WarningLight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18

Electric Parking BrakeLight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18

Service Electric Parking BrakeLight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19

Antilock Brake System (ABS)Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19

Up-Shift Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20Traction Off Light . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20StabiliTrak® OFF Light . . . . . . . 5-20Traction Control System(TCS)/StabiliTrak® Light . . . . 5-20

Engine Coolant TemperatureWarning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21

Tire Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . 5-22Engine Oil Pressure Light . . . . 5-22Low Fuel Warning Light . . . . . . 5-23Security Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . 5-23Front Fog Lamp Light . . . . . . . . 5-23

Lamps On Reminder . . . . . . . . . 5-24Cruise Control Light . . . . . . . . . 5-24Door Ajar Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24

Information DisplaysDriver InformationCenter (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24

Vehicle MessagesVehicle Messages . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28Battery Voltage and ChargingMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-29

Brake System Messages . . . . 5-29Compass Messages . . . . . . . . . 5-29Door Ajar Messages . . . . . . . . . 5-30Engine Cooling SystemMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30

Engine Oil Messages . . . . . . . . 5-31Engine Power Messages . . . . 5-31Fuel System Messages . . . . . . 5-31Key and Lock Messages . . . . . 5-31Object Detection SystemMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-32

Ride Control SystemMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-32

Security Messages . . . . . . . . . . 5-33Starting the VehicleMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-33


5-2 Instruments and Controls

Tire Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-33Transmission Messages . . . . . 5-34Window Messages . . . . . . . . . . . 5-34

Vehicle PersonalizationVehicle Personalization . . . . . . 5-34

Universal Remote SystemUniversal Remote System . . . 5-39Universal Remote SystemProgramming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-39

Universal Remote SystemOperation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-42

Controls

Steering WheelAdjustment

To adjust the steering wheel:

1. Pull the lever down.

2. Move the steering wheel upor down.

3. Pull or push the steering wheelcloser or away from you.

4. Pull the lever up to lock thesteering wheel in place.

Do not adjust the steering wheelwhile driving.


For vehicles with audio steeringwheel controls, some audio controlscan be adjusted at the steeringwheel.



b / g (Push to Talk): For vehicleswith a Bluetooth, OnStar,or navigation system, press tointeract with those systems. SeeBluetooth (Overview) on page 7‑22or Bluetooth (Infotainment Controls)on page 7‑24 or Bluetooth (VoiceRecognition) on page 7‑27, OnStarOverview on page 14‑1, or theseparate navigation manual formore information.

$ /i (Mute/End Call): Press tosilence the vehicle speakers only.Press again to turn the sound on.For vehicles with OnStar orBluetooth systems, press to rejectan incoming call, or end acurrent call.

_ SRC ^ (Rotary Control): Movethe thumbwheel up or down toselect an audio source.

Press _ or ^ to select the next orprevious favorite radio station, CD,or MP3 track.

+ x − (Volume): Press + toincrease the volume. Press − todecrease the volume.

Heated Steering Wheel

( (Heated Steering Wheel): Forvehicles with a heated steeringwheel, press to turn on or off. A lighton the button displays when thefeature is turned on.

The steering wheel takes aboutthree minutes to start heating.

Horn

Pressa on the steering wheel padto sound the horn.

Windshield Wiper/Washer

The windshield wiper/washer leveris on the right side of the steeringcolumn. With the ignition in ACC/ACCESSORY or ON/RUN, movethe windshield wiper lever to selectthe wiper speed.

HI: Use for fast wipes.

LO: Use for slow wipes.



INT: (Intermittent Wipes): Movethe lever up to INT for intermittentwipes, then turn the3 INT bandup for more frequent wipes or downfor less frequent wipes.

OFF: Use to turn the wipers off.

8 (Mist): For a single wipe, brieflymove the wiper lever down. Forseveral wipes, hold the wiperlever down.

nL (Windshield Washer): Pullthe windshield wiper lever towardyou to spray windshield washer fluidand activate the wipers. The wiperswill continue until the lever isreleased or the maximum wash timeis reached. When the windshieldwiper lever is released, additional

wipes may occur depending on howlong the windshield washer hadbeen activated. See Washer Fluidon page 10‑23 for information onfilling the windshield washer fluidreservoir.

{ WARNING

In freezing weather, do not usethe washer until the windshield iswarmed. Otherwise the washerfluid can form ice on thewindshield, blocking your vision.

Clear snow and ice from the wiperblades and windshield before usingthem. If frozen to the windshield,carefully loosen or thaw them.Damaged blades should bereplaced. See Wiper BladeReplacement on page 10‑28.

Heavy snow or ice can overload thewiper motor.

Wipe Parking

If the ignition is turned to LOCK/OFF while the wipers are on LO, HI,or INT, they will immediately stop.

If the windshield wiper lever is thenmoved to off before the driver dooris opened or within 10 minutes, thewipers will restart and move to thebase of the windshield.

If the ignition is turned to LOCK/OFF while the wipers are performingwipes due to windshield washing,the wipers continue to run until theyreach the base of the windshield.

CompassThere is a compass display in theDriver Information Center (DIC). Thecompass receives its heading andother information from the GlobalPositioning System (GPS) antenna,StabiliTrak, and vehicle speedinformation.



Avoid covering the GPS antenna forlong periods of time with objectsthat may interfere with the antenna'sability to receive a satellite signal.See Backglass Antenna onpage 7‑14 and Satellite RadioAntenna on page 7‑15 for thelocation of the vehicle's antennas.The compass system is designed tooperate for a certain number ofmiles or degrees of turn beforeneeding a signal from the GPSsatellites. When the compassdisplay shows CAL, drive thevehicle for a short distance in anopen area where it can receive aGPS signal. The compass systemwill automatically determine whenthe GPS signal is restored andprovide a heading again. SeeCompass Messages on page 5‑29for more information on themessages that may be displayed forthe compass.

ClockThe infotainment system controlsare used to access the time anddate settings through the menusystem. See Overview on page 7‑2for information about how to use themenu system.

Setting the Clock (Radiowith CD)

Setting the Time and Date


2. Select Set Time or Set Date.

3. Turn the Multifunction knob toadjust the highlighted value.

4. Press the Multifunction knob toselect the next value.

5. To save the time and return tothe Time Settings menu, pressthe BACK button at any time orpress the Multifunction knobafter adjusting the minutes.

Setting the 12/24 Hour Format


2. Highlight 12/24 HR Format.

3. Press the Multifunction knob toselect the 12 hour or 24 hourdisplay format.

Setting the Month and Day Format


2. Highlight Month & Day format.

3. Press the Multifunction knob toselect the DD/MM/YYYY (day/month/year), MM/DD/YYYY(month/day/year), or YYYY/MM/DD (year/month/day) displayformat.



Setting the Clock (Radio withCD and Touchscreen)





Set Date Format: Depending onthe region, the following dateformats may be available: MM/DD/YYYY, DD.MM.YYYY, or YYYY/MM/DD.

Power OutletsThe accessory power outlet can beused to plug in electrical equipment,such as a cell phone or MP3 player.

This outlet is located under thearmrest inside the center consolestorage.

The outlet is powered when theignition is in ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY, or until the driverdoor is opened within 10 minutes ofturning off the vehicle. See RetainedAccessory Power (RAP) onpage 9‑23.

Open the protective cover to use theaccessory power outlet.

Certain electrical accessories maynot be compatible with theaccessory power outlet and couldoverload vehicle or adapter fuses.If there is a problem, see yourdealer.

When adding electrical equipment,be sure to follow the installationinstructions included with theequipment. See Add-On ElectricalEquipment on page 9‑51.

Notice: Hanging heavyequipment from the power outletcan cause damage not coveredby the vehicle warranty. Thepower outlets are designed foraccessory power plugs only, suchas cell phone charge cords.

Power Outlet 110 Volt AlternatingCurrent

The vehicle may have a poweroutlet that can be used to plug inelectrical equipment with amaximum limit of 150 watts.



The power outlet is on the rear ofthe center console.

An indicator light on the outletcomes on when in use. The lightcomes on when the ignition is inON/RUN, equipment requiring lessthan 150 watts is plugged into theoutlet, and no system fault isdetected.

The indicator light does not come onwhen the ignition is in LOCK/OFF orif the equipment is not fully seatedinto the outlet.

If you try to connect equipmentusing more than 150 watts or asystem fault is detected, theequipment may operate for a shortperiod and turn itself off.A protection circuit shuts off thepower supply and the indicator lightturns off. To reset the circuit, unplugthe item and plug it back in or turnthe Remote Accessory Power (RAP)off and then back on. See RetainedAccessory Power (RAP) onpage 9‑23. Prolonged usage of thepower outlet at the maximum load of150 watts may cause the outlet tooverheat and automatically shutdown. The power restarts whenequipment that operates within thelimit is plugged into the outlet and asystem fault is not detected.

The power outlet is not designed forthe following equipment, and maynot work properly if any of thefollowing is plugged in:. Equipment with high initial peak

wattage such as:compressor-driven refrigeratorsand electric power tools.

. Other equipment requiring anextremely stable power supplysuch as:microcomputer-controlledelectric blankets, touch sensorlamps, etc.



Warning Lights,Gauges, andIndicatorsWarning lights and gauges cansignal that something is wrongbefore it becomes serious enoughto cause an expensive repair orreplacement. Paying attention to thewarning lights and gauges couldprevent injury.

Warning lights come on when therecould be a problem with a vehiclefunction. Some warning lights comeon briefly when the engine is startedto indicate they are working.

Gauges can indicate when therecould be a problem with a vehiclefunction. Often gauges and warninglights work together to indicate aproblem with the vehicle.

When one of the warning lightscomes on and stays on whiledriving, or when one of the gaugesshows there may be a problem,check the section that explains whatto do. Follow this manual's advice.Waiting to do repairs can be costlyand even dangerous.



Instrument Cluster

English Automatic Transmission Shown, Manual and Metric Similar



English eAssist Automatic Transmission Shown, Manual and Metric Similar



SpeedometerThe speedometer shows thevehicle's speed in either kilometersper hour (km/h) or miles perhour (mph).

OdometerThe odometer shows how far thevehicle has been driven, in eitherkilometers or miles.

This vehicle has a tamper‐resistantodometer. The digital odometer willread 999,999 if it is turned back.

If the vehicle needs a new odometerinstalled, it must be set to themileage total of the old odometer.If that is not possible, then it mustbe set at zero and a label must beput on the driver door to show theold mileage reading when the newodometer was installed.

Trip OdometerThe trip odometer can show how farthe vehicle has been driven sincethe trip odometer was last reset.

The trip odometer is accessed andreset through the Driver InformationCenter (DIC). See DriverInformation Center (DIC) onpage 5‑24.

TachometerThe tachometer displays the enginespeed in revolutions perminute (rpm).

For eAssist vehicles, when theignition is in ON/RUN, thetachometer indicates the vehiclestatus. When pointing to AUTOSTOP, the engine is off but thevehicle is on and can move. Theengine could auto start at any time.When the indicator points to OFF,the vehicle is off.

When the engine is on, thetachometer will indicate the engine’srevolutions per minute (rpm). Thetachometer may vary by severalhundred rpm’s, during auto stopmode, when the engine is shuttingoff and restarting.

A slight bump may be felt when thetransmission is determining themost fuel efficient operating range.

Fuel Gauge

When the ignition is on, the fuelgauge shows about how much fuelis left in the tank.

An arrow on the fuel gaugeindicates the side of the vehicle thefuel door is on.

When the vehicle's fuel levelbecomes low, a message appearsin the Driver Information Center



(DIC) and a single chime sounds.See Fuel System Messages onpage 5‑31 for more information.

Here are four things that someowners ask about. None of theseshow a problem with the fuel gauge:. At the service station, the fuel

pump shuts off before the gaugereads full.

. It takes a little more or less fuelto fill up than the gaugeindicated. For example, thegauge may have indicated thetank was half full, but it actuallytook a little more or less thanhalf the tank's capacity to fillthe tank.

. The gauge moves a little whileturning a corner or speeding up.

. The gauge takes a few secondsto stabilize after the ignition isturned on, and will go back toempty when the ignition isturned off.

Driver Efficiency Gauge

For eAssist vehicles, this gaugeassists in driving efficiently and mayvary based on driver input.

To maximize efficiency, keep thegauge pointed in the solid greenzone in the center of the gauge.

The gauge moves to the left whenbraking and to the right whenaccelerating. When either is doneaggressively, the vehicle is beingdriven less efficiently and the gaugewill move further from the center.

Engine CoolantTemperature Gauge

Metric



English

This gauge shows the enginecoolant temperature.

If the indicator needle moves to thehot side of the gauge toward theshaded area, the engine is too hot.

In eAssist vehicles, the enginecoolant warning light will come onwhen the engine is too hot. SeeEngine Coolant TemperatureWarning Light on page 5‑21 formore information.

If the vehicle has been operatedunder normal driving conditions, pulloff the road, stop the vehicle, andturn off the engine as soon aspossible.

Safety Belt Reminders

Driver Safety Belt ReminderLight

There is a driver safety beltreminder light on the instrumentcluster.

When the vehicle is started, thislight flashes and a chime may comeon to remind the driver to fastentheir safety belt. Then the light stayson solid until the belt is buckled.This cycle may continue several

times if the driver remains orbecomes unbuckled while thevehicle is moving.

If the driver safety belt is buckled,neither the chime nor the lightcomes on.

Passenger Safety BeltReminder Light

There is a passenger safety beltreminder light near the passengerairbag status indicator. SeePassenger Sensing System onpage 3‑23.

When the vehicle is started, thislight flashes and a chime may comeon to remind passengers to fastentheir safety belt. Then the light stayson solid until the belt is buckled.This cycle continues several times if



the passenger remains or becomesunbuckled while the vehicle ismoving.

If the passenger safety belt isbuckled, neither the chime nor thelight comes on.

The front passenger safety beltwarning light and chime may turn onif an object is put on the seat suchas a briefcase, handbag, grocerybag, laptop, or other electronicdevice. To turn off the warning lightand/or chime, remove the objectfrom the seat or buckle thesafety belt.

Airbag Readiness LightThis light shows if there is anelectrical problem with the airbagsystem. The system check includesthe airbag sensor(s), passengersensing system, the pretensioners,the airbag modules, the wiring, andthe crash sensing and diagnosticmodule. For more information on theairbag system, see Airbag Systemon page 3‑17.

The airbag readiness light comes onfor several seconds when thevehicle is started. If the light doesnot come on then, have it fixedimmediately.

{ WARNING

If the airbag readiness light stayson after the vehicle is started orcomes on while driving, it meansthe airbag system might not beworking properly. The airbags inthe vehicle might not inflate in acrash, or they could even inflatewithout a crash. To help avoidinjury, have the vehicle servicedright away.

Passenger Airbag StatusIndicatorThe vehicle has a passengersensing system. See PassengerSensing System on page 3‑23 forimportant safety information. Theinstrument panel has a passengerairbag status indicator.

When the vehicle is started, thepassenger airbag status indicatorwill light ON and OFF for severalseconds as a system check.

If you are using remote start,if equipped, to start the vehicle froma distance, you may not see thesystem check. Then, after severalmore seconds, the status indicator



will light either ON or OFF to let youknow the status of the frontoutboard passenger frontal airbag.

If the word ON is lit on thepassenger airbag status indicator, itmeans that the front outboardpassenger frontal airbag is allowedto inflate.

If the word OFF is lit on the airbagstatus indicator, it means that thepassenger sensing system hasturned off the front outboardpassenger frontal airbag.

If, after several seconds, both statusindicator lights remain on, or if thereare no lights at all, there may be aproblem with the lights or thepassenger sensing system. Seeyour dealer for service.

{ WARNING

If the airbag readiness light evercomes on and stays on, it meansthat something may be wrong

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

with the airbag system. To helpavoid injury to yourself or others,have the vehicle serviced rightaway. See Airbag ReadinessLight on page 5‑14 for moreinformation, including importantsafety information.

Charging System Light

The charging system light comes onbriefly when the ignition is turnedon, but the engine is not running, asa check to show the light is working.The light turns off when the engineis started. If it does not, have thevehicle serviced by your dealer.

If the light stays on, or comes onwhile driving, there could be aproblem with the electrical chargingsystem. Have it checked by yourdealer. Driving while this light is oncould drain the battery.

If a short distance must be drivenwith the light on, be sure to turn offall accessories, such as the radioand air conditioner.

MalfunctionIndicator LampA computer system called OBD II(On-Board Diagnostics-SecondGeneration) monitors the operationof the vehicle to ensure emissionsare at acceptable levels, helping tomaintain a clean environment. Themalfunction indicator lamp comeson when the vehicle is placed inON/RUN for key access or ServiceOnly Mode for keyless access, as acheck to show it is working. If itdoes not, have the vehicle serviced



by your dealer. See IgnitionPositions (Keyless Access) onpage 9‑17 or Ignition Positions (KeyAccess) on page 9‑15 for moreinformation.

If the malfunction indicator lampcomes on while the engine isrunning, this indicates that the OBDII system has detected a problemand diagnosis and service might berequired.

Malfunctions often are indicated bythe system before any problem isapparent. Being aware of the lightcan prevent more serious damageto the vehicle. This system alsoassists the dealer technician incorrectly diagnosing anymalfunction.

Notice: If the vehicle iscontinually driven with this lighton, the emission controls mightnot work as well, the vehicle fueleconomy might not be as good,and the engine might not run assmoothly. This could lead tocostly repairs that might not becovered by the vehicle warranty.

Notice: Modifications made to theengine, transmission, exhaust,intake, or fuel system of thevehicle or the replacement of theoriginal tires with other thanthose of the same TirePerformance Criteria (TPC) canaffect the vehicle's emissioncontrols and can cause this lightto come on. Modifications tothese systems could lead tocostly repairs not covered by thevehicle warranty. This could alsoresult in a failure to pass arequired Emission Inspection/Maintenance test. SeeAccessories and Modifications onpage 10‑3.

This light comes on during amalfunction in one of two ways:

Light Flashing: A misfire conditionhas been detected. A misfireincreases vehicle emissions andcould damage the emission controlsystem on the vehicle. Diagnosisand service might be required.

To prevent more serious damage tothe vehicle:. Reduce vehicle speed.. Avoid hard accelerations.. Avoid steep uphill grades.

If the light continues to flash, find asafe place to stop and park thevehicle. Turn the vehicle off, wait atleast 10 seconds, and restart theengine. If the light is still flashing,follow the previous steps and seeyour dealer for service as soon aspossible.

Light On Steady: An emissioncontrol system malfunction hasbeen detected on the vehicle.Diagnosis and service might berequired.



The following may correct anemission control systemmalfunction:. Check that the fuel cap is fully

installed. See Filling the Tank onpage 9‑49. The diagnosticsystem can determine if the fuelcap has been left off orimproperly installed. A loose ormissing fuel cap allows fuel toevaporate into the atmosphere.A few driving trips with the capproperly installed should turn thelight off.

. Check that good quality fuel isused. Poor fuel quality causesthe engine not to run asefficiently as designed and maycause stalling after start-up,stalling when the vehicle ischanged into gear, misfiring,hesitation on acceleration,or stumbling on acceleration.These conditions might go awayonce the engine is warmed up.

If one or more of these conditionsoccurs, change the fuel brand used.It may require at least one full tankof the proper fuel to turn the light off.

See Recommended Fuel onpage 9‑46.

If none of the above have made thelight turn off, your dealer can checkthe vehicle. The dealer has theproper test equipment anddiagnostic tools to fix anymechanical or electrical problemsthat might have developed.

Emissions Inspection andMaintenance Programs

Depending on where you live, yourvehicle may be required toparticipate in an emission controlsystem inspection and maintenanceprogram. For the inspection, theemission system test equipment willlikely connect to the vehicle's DataLink Connector (DLC).

The DLC is under the instrumentpanel to the next to the steeringwheel. See your dealer if assistanceis needed.

The vehicle may not passinspection if:. The malfunction indicator lamp is

on while the vehicle is running.The vehicle is in ON/RUN forkey access, or Service OnlyMode for keyless access and themalfunction indicator lamp doesnot come on. See your dealer forassistance in verifying properoperation of the malfunctionindicator lamp.

. The OBD II (On-BoardDiagnostics) system determinesthat critical emission controlsystems have not beencompletely diagnosed. The



vehicle would be considered notready for inspection. This canhappen if the 12-volt battery hasrecently been replaced or rundown. The diagnostic system isdesigned to evaluate criticalemission control systems duringnormal driving. This can takeseveral days of routine driving.If this has been done and thevehicle still does not pass theinspection for lack of OBD IIsystem readiness, your dealercan prepare the vehicle forinspection.

Brake System WarningLightThe vehicle brake system consistsof two hydraulic circuits. If onecircuit is not working, the remainingcircuit can still work to stop thevehicle. For normal brakingperformance, both circuits need tobe working.

If the warning light comes on, thereis a brake problem. Have the brakesystem inspected right away.

Metric English

The brake system warning lightshould come on briefly as theengine is started. If it does not comeon, have the vehicle serviced byyour dealer.

{ WARNING

The brake system might not beworking properly if the brakesystem warning light is on.Driving with the brake systemwarning light on can lead to acrash. If the light is still on afterthe vehicle has been pulled off

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

the road and carefully stopped,have the vehicle towed forservice.

If the light comes on while driving, achime sounds. Pull off the road andstop. The pedal might be harder topush or go closer to the floor.It might also take longer to stop.If the light is still on, have thevehicle towed for service. SeeTowing the Vehicle on page 10‑89.

Electric Parking BrakeLight

Metric English



The parking brake status lightcomes on when the brake isapplied. If the light continuesflashing after the parking brake isreleased, or while driving, there is aproblem with the electric parkingbrake system. A message may alsodisplay on the Driver InformationCenter (DIC). See Brake SystemMessages on page 5‑29 for moreinformation.

If the light does not come on,or remains flashing, see your dealer.

Service Electric ParkingBrake Light

The service electric parking brakelight should come on briefly whenthe vehicle is in ON/RUN. If it does

not come on, have it fixed so it willbe ready to warn if there is aproblem.

If this light stays on, there is aproblem with a system on thevehicle that is causing the parkingbrake system to work at a reducedlevel. The vehicle can still be driven,but should be taken to a dealer assoon as possible. See ParkingBrake on page 9‑32 for moreinformation.

Antilock Brake System(ABS) Warning Light

The Antilock Brake System (ABS)light comes on briefly when theengine is started.

If the light does not come on, have itfixed so it will be ready to warn ifthere is a problem.

If the ABS light stays on, turn theignition off. If the light comes onwhile driving, stop as soon as it issafely possible and turn the ignitionoff. A chime may also sound whenthe light comes on steady. Thenstart the engine again to reset thesystem. If the ABS light stays on,or comes on again while driving, thevehicle needs service. If the regularbrake system warning light is noton, the vehicle still has brakes, butnot antilock brakes. If the regularbrake system warning light is alsoon, the vehicle does not haveantilock brakes and there is aproblem with the regular brakes.See Brake System Warning Light onpage 5‑18.

See Driver Information Center (DIC)on page 5‑24 for all brake relatedDIC messages.



Up-Shift Light

For manual transmission vehicles,there is an up-shift light that comeson in the lower DIC area. It showswhen to shift to the next higher gearfor best fuel economy.

See Manual Transmission onpage 9‑30.

Traction Off Light

This light comes on when theTraction Control System (TCS) hasbeen turned off by pressing andreleasing the TCS/StabiliTrakbutton.

This light also comes on and thesystem turns off if there is a problemwith the traction control system.

If the light comes on and stays onfor an extended period of time whilethe system is turned on, the vehicleneeds service.

See Traction Control System (TCS)on page 9‑35 and StabiliTrak®

System on page 9‑36 for moreinformation.

StabiliTrak® OFF Light

This light comes on when theStabiliTrak system is turned off.If the Traction Control System (TCS)is off, wheel spin is not limited.If StabiliTrak is off, the system doesnot assist in controlling the vehicle.Turn on the TCS and the StabiliTraksystem and the warning lightturns off.

See Traction Control System (TCS)on page 9‑35 and StabiliTrak®

System on page 9‑36 for moreinformation.

Traction Control System(TCS)/StabiliTrak® Light

The Traction Control System (TCS)/StabiliTrak light comes on brieflywhen the engine is started.



If the light does not come on, havethe vehicle serviced by the dealer.If the system is working normally,the indicator light turns off.

If the light is on while certain DICmessages display, this indicatesthat the TCS and StabiliTraksystems are not working or aredisabled.

If the light is on and not flashing, theTCS and potentially the StabiliTraksystem have been disabled. Checkthe DIC messages to determinewhich feature(s) is no longerfunctioning and whether it isbecause of the driver turning off thefeature(s), or because the system isnot working properly and the vehiclerequires service.

If the TCS is disabled, wheel spin isnot limited. If the StabiliTrak systemis disabled, the system does not aidin maintaining directional control ofthe vehicle.

If the indicator/warning light is onand flashing, the TCS or theStabiliTrak system is activelyworking.

See StabiliTrak® System onpage 9‑36 and Traction ControlSystem (TCS) on page 9‑35 formore information.

See Ride Control System Messageson page 5‑32 for more informationon the messages associated withthis light.

Engine CoolantTemperature WarningLight

For eAssist vehicles, this lightcomes on briefly while starting thevehicle.

If it does not, have the vehicleserviced by the dealer. If the systemis working normally, the indicatorlight goes off.

Notice: Driving with the enginecoolant temperature warning lighton could cause the vehicle tooverheat. See Engine Overheatingon page 10‑20. The vehicle'sengine could be damaged, and itmight not be covered by thevehicle warranty. Never drive withthe engine coolant temperaturewarning light on.

The engine coolant temperaturewarning light comes on when theengine has overheated.

If this happens, pull over and turnoff the engine as soon as possible.See Engine Overheating onpage 10‑20.



Tire Pressure Light

For vehicles with the Tire PressureMonitor System (TPMS), this lightcomes on briefly when the engine isstarted. It provides informationabout tire pressures and the TPMS.

When the Light Is On Steady

This indicates that one or more ofthe tires are significantlyunderinflated.

A Driver Information Center (DIC)tire pressure message may alsodisplay. See Tire Messages onpage 5‑33. Stop as soon aspossible, and inflate the tires to thepressure value shown on the Tireand Loading Information label. SeeTire Pressure on page 10‑48.

When the Light Flashes First andThen Is On Steady

If the light flashes for about a minuteand then stays on, there may be aproblem with the TPMS. If theproblem is not corrected, the lightwill come on at every ignition cycle.See Tire Pressure MonitorOperation on page 10‑51.

Engine Oil Pressure LightNotice: Lack of proper engine oilmaintenance can damage theengine. Driving with the engineoil low can also damage theengine. The repairs would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.Check the oil level as soon aspossible. Add oil if required, butif the oil level is within theoperating range and the oilpressure is still low, have thevehicle serviced. Always followthe maintenance schedule forchanging engine oil.

The oil pressure light should comeon briefly as the engine is started.If it does not come on, have thevehicle serviced by your dealer.

If the light comes on and stays on, itmeans that oil is not flowing throughthe engine properly. The vehiclecould be low on oil and might havesome other system problem. Seeyour dealer.



Low Fuel Warning Light

This light comes on for a fewseconds when the ignition is turnedon as a check to indicate it isworking. If it does not come on,have it fixed.

The low fuel warning light comes onand a chime sounds periodicallywhen the vehicle is low on fuel. Thelight turns off when fuel is added tothe fuel tank.

Security Light

The security light should come onbriefly as the engine is started. If itdoes not come on, have the vehicleserviced by your dealer. If thesystem is working normally, theindicator light turns off.

If the light stays on and the enginedoes not start, there could be aproblem with the theft-deterrentsystem. See Immobilizer Operation(Key Access) on page 2‑14 orImmobilizer Operation (KeylessAccess) on page 2‑14.

High-Beam On Light

The high‐beam on light comes onwhen the high-beam headlamps arein use.

See Headlamp High/Low-BeamChanger on page 6‑2 for moreinformation.

Front Fog Lamp Light

For vehicles with fog lamps, thislight comes on when the fog lampsare on.



The light goes out when the foglamps are turned off. See FogLamps on page 6‑4 for moreinformation.

Lamps On Reminder

For vehicles with the lamps onreminder light, it comes on when thelights are in use.

Cruise Control Light

For vehicles with cruise control, thecruise control light is white when thecruise control is on and ready, andturns green when the cruise controlis set and active.

The light turns off when the cruisecontrol is turned off. See CruiseControl on page 9‑41.

Door Ajar Light

When the ignition is on, this lightstays on until all doors are closedand completely latched.

If a door is not closed properly, achime sounds after the engine isstarted and the vehicle is not inP (Park).

Information Displays

Driver InformationCenter (DIC)The Driver Information Center (DIC)displays information about thevehicle. It also displays warningmessages if a system problem isdetected. See Vehicle Messages onpage 5‑28. All messages appear inthe DIC display in the center of theinstrument cluster.

On some models, the DIC may havesome warning lights or indicators inthe top portion of the display. SeeWarning Lights, Gauges, andIndicators on page 5‑8.

The vehicle may also have featuresthat can be customized through thecontrols on the radio. See VehiclePersonalization on page 5‑34.

DIC Operation and Displays

The DIC has different displayswhich can be accessed by using theDIC buttons on the turn signal lever,



on the left side of the steeringwheel. The DIC displays trip, fuel,and vehicle system information, andwarning messages if a systemproblem is detected.

The bottom of the DIC displayshows the position of the shift leverand the odometer. It may also showthe direction the vehicle is driving.

In cold weather the DIC display maychange slowly. This is normal andwill move more quickly as thevehicle's interior temperature rises.

DIC Buttons

1. SET/CLR (Set/Clear): Press toset, or press and hold to clear,the menu item displayed.

2. w / x (Thumbwheel): Use toscroll through the items ineach menu.

3. MENU: Press to display the Trip/Fuel Menu and the VehicleInformation Menu. On somevehicles, there is also an ECOMenu. This button is also usedto return to or exit the lastscreen displayed on the DIC.

Trip/Fuel Menu (TRIP) Items

Press MENU on the turn signallever until TRIP menu is displayed.Usew / x to scroll through thefollowing menu items:. Speed. Timer. Navigation. Speed, Fuel Range,

Instantaneous Fuel Economy. Trip 1 or Trip 2, Average Fuel

Economy, Average VehicleSpeed

. Power Flow (eAssist Only)

Speed

The speedometer shows how fastthe vehicle is moving in eitherkilometers per hour (km/h) or milesper hour (mph). The speedometercannot be reset.

Timer

This display can be used as a timer.To start the timer, press SET/CLRwhile Timer is displayed. Thedisplay will show the amount of timethat has passed since the timer waslast reset, not including time theignition is off. Time will continue tobe counted as long as the ignition ison, even if another display is beingshown on the DIC. The timer willrecord up to 99 hours, 59 minutes,and 59 seconds (99:59:59) afterwhich the display will return to zero.To stop the timer, press SET/CLRbriefly while Timer is displayed. Toreset the timer to zero, press andhold SET/CLR.



Navigation

This display is used for thenavigation system Turn-by-Turnguidance. See the navigationmanual, if the vehicle hasnavigation, for more information.

Speed, Fuel Range, InstantaneousFuel Economy

The top of this display includes adigital speedometer. Thespeedometer shows how fast thevehicle is moving in eitherkilometers per hour (km/h) or milesper hour (mph). The speedometercannot be reset.

In the center of the page is the fuelrange display. This shows theapproximate distance the vehiclecan be driven without refueling. Thefuel range estimate is based on anaverage of the vehicle's fueleconomy over recent driving historyand the amount of fuel remaining inthe fuel tank. This display is shownas l . km (mi). Fuel range cannotbe reset.

Also included on this page is aninstantaneous fuel economy display.The instantaneous fuel economydisplay shows the current fueleconomy in liters per 100 kilometers(L/100 km) or miles pergallon (mpg). This number reflectsonly the fuel economy that thevehicle has right now and changesfrequently as driving conditionschange. This display is shown as .L/100 km (mpg). This display cannotbe reset.

Trip 1 or Trip 2, Average FuelEconomy, Average Vehicle Speed

This displays the current distancetraveled, in either kilometers (km) ormiles (mi), from the last reset for thetrip odometer. The trip odometer canbe reset to zero by pressing andholding the SET/CLR button whilethe trip odometer display isshowing.

The Average Fuel Economy displayshows the approximate averageliters per 100 kilometers (L/100 km)or miles per gallon (mpg). Thisnumber is based on the number ofL/100 km (mpg) recorded since thelast time this menu item was reset.This display is shown as . cL/100 km (mpg). Reset the averageconsumption by pressing SET/CLRwhen it is displayed.

This screen also displays theaverage vehicle speed of thevehicle in kilometers per hour (km/h)or miles per hour (mph). Thisaverage is based on the variousvehicle speeds recorded since thelast reset. This display is shown asc km/h (mph). Reset the averagespeed by pressing SET/CLR when itis displayed.

Power Flow (eAssist Only)

This display shows the operatingmode of the eAssist system and thehigh voltage battery charge level.The animation indicates thedirection of energy flow.



Vehicle Information Menu(OPTION) Items

Press MENU on the turn signallever until the OPTION menu isdisplayed. Usew / x to scrollthrough the following menu items:. Unit. Tire Pressure. Remaining Oil Life. Jump Start (eAssist Only)

Unit

Movew / x to switch betweenmetric or US when the Unit displayis active. Press SET/CLR to confirmthe setting. This will change thedisplays on the cluster and DIC toeither metric or English (US)measurements.

Tire Pressure

The display will show a vehicle withthe approximate pressures of allfour tires. Tire pressure is displayed

in either kilopascal (kPa) or poundsper square inch (psi). See TirePressure Monitor System onpage 10‑50 and Tire PressureMonitor Operation on page 10‑51 formore information.

Remaining Oil Life

This display shows an estimate ofthe oil's remaining useful life.If REMAINING OIL LIFE 99% isdisplayed, that means 99% of thecurrent oil life remains.

When the remaining oil life is low,the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOONmessage will appear on the display.See Engine Oil Messages onpage 5‑31. The oil should bechanged as soon as possible. SeeEngine Oil on page 10‑10. Inaddition to the Engine Oil LifeSystem monitoring the oil life,additional maintenance isrecommended in the MaintenanceSchedule in this manual. SeeMaintenance Schedule onpage 11‑3 for more information.

Remember, the Remaining Oil Lifedisplay must be reset after each oilchange. It will not reset itself. Also,be careful not to reset theRemaining Oil Life displayaccidentally at any time other thanwhen the oil has just been changed.It cannot be reset accurately untilthe next oil change. To reset theEngine Oil Life System, press SET/CLR while the Remaining Oil Lifedisplay is active. See Engine OilLife System on page 10‑12.

Jump Start (eAssist Only)

This display allows for on-boardjump starting of the vehicle. See“Jump Starting (On-board witheAssist Only)” for more information.

ECO Drive Assist Menu (ECO)Items

This menu is only available on somevehicles. Press MENU on the turnsignal lever until ECO Menu isdisplayed. Usew / x to scrollthrough the following menu items:. Best Average Fuel Economy



. ECO Index

. Top Consumers

Best Average Fuel Economy

The right hand side displays thebest average fuel economy (AFE)that is achieved for a selecteddistance. The left hand side displaysa running average of fuel economyfor the most recently traveledselected distance. The center bargraph displays the instantaneousfuel economy. Quickly press theSET/CLR button to display a pagefor selecting one of the distanceoptions. Move the up/down arrow tochoose the selection, and SET/CLRto change the setting.

When viewing best AFE, a severalsecond press and hold of SET/CLRwill reset the best value. The bestvalue will show “-.-“ until theselected distance has beentraveled.

The display provides feedback onhow current driving behavior in thebar graph affects the running

average in the left display and howwell recent driving compares to thebest that has been achieved.

ECO Index

This display shows a bar graph thatindicates how efficiently the vehicleis being driven. For the mostefficient use of fuel, only the lowerportion of the graph should be filled.Instant economy is also shown in L/100 km (mpg). If the vehicle has amanual transmission, this displayalso includes an up-shift indicator.

Top Consumers

This display shows a list of thefeatures that are currently impactingthe fuel economy, in order fromhighest to lowest. If a feature isturned off, it will be removed fromthe list.

Compass

The vehicle has a compass displayin the DIC. See Compass onpage 5‑4 for more information.

Vehicle MessagesMessages displayed on the DICindicate the status of the vehicle orsome action that may be needed tocorrect a condition. Multiplemessages may display one after theother.

The messages that do not requireimmediate action can beacknowledged and cleared bypressing SET/CLR. The messagesthat require immediate action cannotbe cleared until that action isperformed. All messages should betaken seriously and clearing themessages does not correct theproblem.

The following are some of thevehicle messages that may bedisplayed depending on yourvehicle content.



Battery Voltage andCharging Messages

BATTERY SAVER ACTIVE

This message displays when thevehicle has detected that the batteryvoltage is dropping beyond areasonable point. The battery saversystem starts reducing features ofthe vehicle that may be noticed. Atthe point that features are disabled,this message displays. Turn offunnecessary accessories to allowthe battery to recharge.

LOW BATTERY

This message is displayed when thebattery voltage is low. See Batteryon page 10‑26.

SERVICE BATTERYCHARGING SYSTEM

This message is displayed whenthere is a fault in the batterycharging system. Take the vehicle toyour dealer for service.

Brake System Messages

BRAKE FLUID LOW

This message is displayed when thebrake fluid level is low. See BrakeFluid on page 10‑24.

STEP ON BRAKE TORELEASE PARK BRAKE

This message is displayed if youattempt to release the electricparking brake without the brakepedal applied. See Parking Brakeon page 9‑32 for more information.

RELEASE PARK BRAKESWITCH

This message is displayed if theelectric parking brake is on while thevehicle is in motion. Release itbefore you attempt to drive. SeeParking Brake on page 9‑32 formore information.

SERVICE BRAKE ASSIST

This message may be displayedwhen there is a problem with thebrake boost assist system. When

this message is displayed, the brakeboost assist motor might be heardoperating and you might noticepulsation in the brake pedal. This isnormal under these conditions. Takethe vehicle to your dealer forservice.

SERVICE PARKING BRAKE

This message is displayed whenthere is a problem with the electricparking brake. See Parking Brakeon page 9‑32 for more information.Take the vehicle to your dealer.

Compass Messages

CAL

This message is displayed when thecompass needs to be calibrated.See Compass on page 5‑4.

– –Dashes will be displayed if thecompass needs service. See yourdealer for service.



Door Ajar Messages

DRIVER DOOR OPEN

This message will display when thedriver door is open. Close the doorcompletely.

HOOD OPEN

This message will display when thehood is open. Close the hoodcompletely.

LEFT REAR DOOR OPEN

This message will display when thedriver side rear door is open. Closethe door completely.

PASSENGER DOOR OPEN

This message will display when thefront passenger door is open. Closethe door completely.

RIGHT REAR DOOR OPEN

This message will display when thepassenger side rear door is open.Close the door completely.

TRUNK OPEN

This message will display when thetrunk is open. Close the trunkcompletely.

Engine Cooling SystemMessages

A/C OFF DUE TO HIGHENGINE TEMP

This message displays when theengine coolant becomes hotter thanthe normal operating temperature.To avoid added strain on a hotengine, the air conditioningcompressor automatically turns off.When the coolant temperaturereturns to normal, the airconditioning compressor turns backon. The vehicle can continue to bedriven.

If this message continues to appear,have the system repaired by yourdealer as soon as possible to avoiddamage to the engine.

COOLANT LEVEL LOW ADDCOOLANT

This message will display if thecoolant is low. See Engine Coolanton page 10‑17.

ENGINE OVERHEATED —IDLE ENGINE

This message displays when theengine coolant temperature is toohot. Stop and allow the vehicle toidle until it cools down.

ENGINE OVERHEATED —STOP ENGINE

This message displays and acontinuous chime sounds if theengine cooling system reachesunsafe temperatures for operation.Stop and turn off the vehicle assoon as it is safe to do so to avoidsevere damage. This messageclears when the engine has cooledto a safe operating temperature.



HIGH COOLANTTEMPERATURE

This message displays if the coolanttemperature is hot. See EngineOverheating on page 10‑20.

Engine Oil Messages

CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON

This message displays when theengine oil needs to be changed.When you change the engine oil, besure to reset the Oil Life System.See Engine Oil Life System onpage 10‑12, Driver InformationCenter (DIC) on page 5‑24, EngineOil on page 10‑10, and MaintenanceSchedule on page 11‑3.

ENGINE OIL HOT, IDLEENGINE

This message displays when theengine oil temperature is too hot.Stop and allow the vehicle to idleuntil it cools down.

ENGINE OIL LOW — ADD OIL

On some vehicles, this messagemay display when the engine oillevel is too low. Check the oil level.See Engine Oil on page 10‑10.

OIL PRESSURE LOW — STOPENGINE

This message displays if low oilpressure levels occur. Stop thevehicle as soon as safely possibleand do not operate it until the causeof the low oil pressure has beencorrected. Check the oil as soon aspossible and have the vehicleserviced by your dealer.

Engine Power Messages

ENGINE POWER IS REDUCED

This message displays when thevehicle's engine power is reduced.Reduced engine power can affectthe vehicle's ability to accelerate.If this message is on, but there is noreduction in performance, proceedto your destination. Theperformance may be reduced the

next time the vehicle is driven. Thevehicle may be driven at a reducedspeed while this message is on, butmaximum acceleration and speedmay be reduced. Anytime thismessage stays on, the vehicleshould be taken to your dealer forservice as soon as possible.

Fuel System Messages

FUEL LEVEL LOW

This message displays when thevehicle is low on fuel. Refuel assoon as possible.

Key and Lock Messages

NO REMOTE DETECTED

This message displays when thetransmitter battery is weak onvehicles with keyless access. See“Starting the Vehicle with a LowTransmitter Battery” under RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) SystemOperation on page 2‑3.



REPLACE BATTERY INREMOTE KEY

This message displays when thebattery in the Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) transmitter needs to bereplaced. See “BatteryReplacement” under RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) SystemOperation on page 2‑3.

Object Detection SystemMessages

PARK ASSIST OFF

This message displays when theparking assist system has beenturned off or when there is atemporary condition causing thesystem to be disabled. SeeUltrasonic Parking Assist onpage 9‑43.

SERVICE PARKING ASSIST

This message displays if there is aproblem with the parking assistsystem. Do not use this system tohelp you park. See UltrasonicParking Assist on page 9‑43 formore information.

Ride Control SystemMessages

SERVICE TRACTIONCONTROL

This message displays when thereis a problem with the TractionControl System (TCS). When thismessage is displayed, the systemwill not limit wheel spin. Adjust yourdriving accordingly. See your dealerfor service.

SERVICE STABILITRAK

This message displays if there is aproblem with the StabiliTrak system.If this message appears, try to resetthe system. Stop; turn off the enginefor at least 15 seconds; then start

the engine again. If this messagestill comes on, it means there is aproblem. See your dealer forservice. The vehicle is safe to drive;however, you do not have thebenefit of StabiliTrak, so reduceyour speed and drive accordingly.

SPORT MODE ON

This message displays when usingthe interactive drive control. SeeInteractive Drive Control System(except GS) on page 9‑38 orInteractive Drive Control System(GS Only) on page 9‑40 for moreinformation.

TRACTION CONTROL OFF

This message displays when theTraction Control System (TCS) isturned off. Adjust your drivingaccordingly.

TRACTION CONTROL ON

This message displays when theTraction Control System (TCS) isturned on.



Security Messages

THEFT ATTEMPTED

This message displays if the vehicledetects a tamper condition.

Starting the VehicleMessages

JUMP START ACTIVE WAIT TOSTART

This message displays whileperforming an on-board jump startof the vehicle. See “Jump Starting(On-board with eAssist Only).”

JUMP START COMPLETEATTEMPT START

This message displays whileperforming an on-board jump startof the vehicle. See “Jump Starting(On-board with eAssist Only).”

JUMP START DISABLED SEEOWNERS MANUAL

This message displays if there is aproblem with the on-board jumpstart system, or the 12 volt battery istoo low to perform an on-board jumpstart. Try using jumper cables andperforming a normal jump start. See“Jump Starting (On-board witheAssist Only).” Take the vehicle toyour dealer for service if thismessage continues to be displayed.

Tire Messages

SERVICE TIRE MONITORSYSTEM

This message displays if there is aproblem with the Tire PressureMonitor System (TPMS). See TirePressure Monitor Operation onpage 10‑51.

TIRE LEARNING ACTIVE

This message displays when thesystem is learning new tires. SeeTire Pressure Monitor Operation onpage 10‑51.

TIRE PRESSURE LOW ADDAIR TO TIRE

On vehicles with the Tire PressureMonitor System (TPMS), thismessage displays when thepressure in one or more of thevehicle's tires is low.

The low tire pressure warning lightwill also come on. See TirePressure Light on page 5‑22.

If a tire pressure message appearson the DIC, stop as soon as youcan. Inflate the tires by adding airuntil the tire pressure is equal to thevalues shown on the Tire andLoading Information label. See Tireson page 10‑41, Vehicle Load Limitson page 9‑10, and Tire Pressure onpage 10‑48.



You can receive more than one tirepressure message at a time. Toread the other messages that mayhave been sent at the same time,press the SET/CLR button. The DICalso shows the tire pressure values.See Driver Information Center (DIC)on page 5‑24.

Transmission Messages

SERVICE TRANSMISSION

This message displays if there is aproblem with the transmission. Seeyour dealer.

SHIFT TO PARK

This message displays when thetransmission needs to be shifted toP (Park). This may appear whenattempting to remove the key fromthe ignition or from the vehicle if thevehicle is not in P (Park).

TRANSMISSION HOT — IDLEENGINE

This message displays and a chimesounds if the transmission fluid inthe vehicle gets hot. Driving with thetransmission fluid temperature highcan cause damage to the vehicle.Stop the vehicle and let it idle toallow the transmission to cool. Thismessage clears when the fluidtemperature reaches a safe level.

Window Messages

OPEN, THEN CLOSE DRIVER/PASSENGER WINDOW

This message is displayed when thewindow needs to be reprogrammed.If the vehicle's battery has beenrecharged or disconnected, you willneed to reprogram each frontwindow for the express-up feature towork. See Power Windows onpage 2‑17.

VehiclePersonalizationThe audio system controls are usedto access the personalizationmenus for customizing vehiclefeatures.

CONFIG (Configuration): Press toaccess the ConfigurationSettings menu.

Multifunction Knob: Press thecenter of this knob to enter themenus and select menu items. Turnthe knob to scroll through themenus.

BACK: Press to exit or movebackward in a menu.

Entering the PersonalizationMenus

1. Press CONFIG to access theConfiguration Settings menu.

2. Turn the Multifunction knob tohighlight Vehicle Settings.



3. Press the center of theMultifunction knob to select theVehicle Settings menu.

The following list of menu items willbe available:. Climate and Air Quality. Comfort and Convenience. Languages. Lighting. Power Door Locks. Remote Lock/Unlock/Start. Return to Factory Settings

Turn the Multifunction knob tohighlight the menu. Press the knobto select it. Each of the menus isdetailed in the following information.

Climate and Air Quality

Select the Climate and Air Qualitymenu and the following may bedisplayed:. Auto Fan Speed. Auto Compartment Zone Temp

. Remote Start Auto Heat Seats

. Auto Defog

. Auto Rear Defog

Auto Fan Speed

This allows selection of theautomatic fan speed to run lower orhigher than normal.

Press the Multifunction knob whenAuto Fan Speed is highlighted toopen the menu. Turn the knob tohighlight High, Medium, or Low.Press the knob to confirm theselection and move back to thelast menu.

Auto Compartment Zone Temp

This allows the selection of how theclimate control system will operateupon vehicle start. Selecting SingleZone automatically resets thepassenger temperature setting thesame as the driver's for everyvehicle start. The climate controlsystem will operate using only thedriver's setting until the passengertemperature setting is changed.

Selecting Dual Zone or Last Settingwill keep the passenger temperatureadjustment separate from thedriver's setting all the time.

Press the Multifunction knob whenAuto Compartment Zone Temp ishighlighted. Turn the knob tohighlight Single Zone, Dual Zone,or Last Setting. Press the knob toconfirm the selection and go back tothe last menu.

Remote Start Auto Heat Seats

When on, this feature will turn theheated seats on when using remotestart on cold days.

Press the Multifunction knob whenRemote Start Auto Heat Seats ishighlighted. Turn the knob tohighlight On or Off. Press the knobto confirm the selection and go backto the last menu.

Auto Defog

This allows the auto defog functionto be turned on or off.



Press the Multifunction knob whenAuto Defog is highlighted to selectOn or Off. Turn the knob to confirmthe selection and move back to thelast menu.

Auto Rear Defog

This allows the auto rear defog tobe turned on or off. This feature willautomatically turn on the reardefogger when it is cold outside.

Press the Multifunction knob whenAuto Rear Defog is highlighted toselect On or Off. Turn the knob toconfirm the selection and moveback to the last menu.

Comfort and Convenience

Select the Comfort andConvenience menu and thefollowing will be displayed:. Chime Volume. Button Chime

Chime Volume

This allows the selection of thechime volume level.

Press the Multifunction knob whenChime Volume is highlighted. Turnthe knob to select Normal or High.Press the knob to confirm and goback to the last menu.

Button Chime

This allows Button Chime to beturned on or off.

Press the Multifunction knob whenButton Chime is highlighted toselect On or Off. Turn the knob toconfirm the selection and moveback to the last menu.

Language

Select the Language menu and thefollowing will be displayed:. English. Francais Canadien. Espanol Mexicano

Turn the Multifunction knob to selectthe language. Press BACK to returnto the last menu.

Lighting

Select the Lighting menu and thefollowing will be displayed:. Vehicle Locator Lights. Exit Lighting

Vehicle Locator Lights

This allows the vehicle locator lightsto be turned on or off.

Press the Multifunction knob whenVehicle Locator Lights is highlightedto select On or Off. Turn the knob toconfirm and go back to thelast menu.

Exit Lighting

This allows the selection of howlong the exterior lamps stay onwhen leaving the vehicle when it isdark outside.

Press the Multifunction knob whenExit Lighting is highlighted. Turn theknob to select Off, 30 Seconds,1 Minute, or 2 Minutes. Press theknob to confirm and go back to thelast menu.



Power Door Locks

Select Power Door Locks and thefollowing will be displayed:. Open Door Anti Lock Out. Auto Door Unlock. Delay Door Lock

Open Door Anti Lock Out

When on, this feature will keep thedriver door from locking when thedoor is open. If Off is selected, theDelayed Door Lock menu will beavailable and the door will lock asprogrammed through this menu.

Press the Multifunction knob whenOpen Door Anti Lock Out ishighlighted to select On or Off. Turnthe knob to confirm and go back tothe last menu.

Auto Door Unlock

This allows selection of which doorswill automatically unlock when thevehicle is shifted into P (Park).

Press the Multifunction knob whenAuto Door Unlock is highlighted.Turn the knob to select All Doors,Driver Door, or Off. Press the knobto confirm and go back to thelast menu.

Delay Door Lock

When on, this feature will delay thelocking of the doors untilfive seconds after the last door isclosed. You will hear three chimesto signal delayed locking is in use.Press either the power door lockbutton or Q on the RKE transmittertwice to override the delayed lockingfeature and immediately lock all ofthe doors.

Press the Multifunction knob whenDelay Door Lock is highlighted toselect On or Off. Press BACK toreturn to the last menu.

Remote Lock/Unlock/Start

Select Remote Lock/Unlock/Startand the following will be displayed:. Remote Unlock Light Feedback. Remote Lock Feedback. Remote Door Unlock. Passive Door Unlock. Passive Door Lock. Remote Left In Vehicle

Remote Unlock Light Feedback

When on, the exterior lamps willflash when unlocking the vehiclewith the RKE transmitter.

Press the Multifunction knob whenRemote Unlock Light Feedback ishighlighted to select On or Off. Turnthe knob to confirm and go back tothe last menu.

Remote Lock Feedback

This allows selection of what type offeedback is given when locking thevehicle with the RKE transmitter.



Press the Multifunction knob whenRemote Lock Feedback ishighlighted. Turn the knob to selectLights and Horn, Lights Only, HornOnly, or Off. Press the knob toconfirm and go back to thelast menu.

Remote Door Unlock

This allows selection of which doorswill unlock when pressing K on theRKE transmitter.

Press the Multifunction knob whenRemote Door Unlock is highlighted.Turn the knob to select Driver Dooror All Doors. When set to DriverDoor, the driver door will unlock thefirst time K is pressed and all doors

will unlock when K is pressed asecond time. When set to All Doors,all of the doors will unlock at the firstpress of K. Press the Multifunctionknob to confirm and go back to thelast menu.

Passive Door Unlock

This allows selection of which doorsare unlocked by pressing the buttonon the outside door handle.

Press the Multifunction knob whenPassive Door Unlock is highlighted.Turn the knob to select All Doors orDriver Door. Press the knob toconfirm and go back to thelast menu.

Passive Door Lock

This allows selection of what type offeedback is given when locking thevehicle.

Press the Multifunction knob whenPassive Door Lock is highlighted.Turn the knob to select On withHorn Chirp, ON, or OFF. Press theknob to confirm and go back to thelast menu.

Remote Left In Vehicle

This allows the Remote Left InVehicle reminder feature to beturned on or off. If on, the horn willchirp if a remote is left in thevehicle.

Press the Multifunction knob whenRemote Left In Vehicle ishighlighted. Turn the knob to selectOn or Off. Press the knob to confirmand go back to the last menu.

Return to Factory Settings

Select Return to Factory Settings toreturn all of the vehiclepersonalization to the defaultsettings. Turn the knob to select Yesor No. Press the knob to confirmand go back to the last menu.



Universal RemoteSystemSee Radio Frequency Statement onpage 13‑20 for informationregarding Part 15 of the FederalCommunications Commission (FCC)rules and Industry CanadaStandards RSS-GEN/210/220/310.

Universal Remote SystemProgramming

If the vehicle has this feature, youwill see these buttons with oneindicator light next to them in theoverhead console.

This system provides a way toreplace up to three remote controltransmitters used to activate

devices such as garage dooropeners, security systems, andhome automation devices.

Do not use the Universal Remotesystem with any garage door openerthat does not have the stop andreverse feature. This includes anygarage door opener modelmanufactured before April 1,1982.

Read the instructions completelybefore attempting to program theUniversal Remote system. Becauseof the steps involved, it may behelpful to have another personavailable to assist with programmingthe Universal Remote system.

Keep the original hand-heldtransmitter for use in other vehiclesas well as for future UniversalRemote system programming. It isalso recommended that upon thesale of the vehicle, the programmedUniversal Remote system buttonsbe erased for security purposes.See “Erasing Universal RemoteSystem Buttons” later in thissection.

When programming a garage door,park outside of the garage. Parkdirectly in line with and facing thegarage door opener motor-head orgate motor-head. Be sure thatpeople and objects are clear of thegarage door or gate beingprogrammed.

It is recommended that a newbattery be installed in the hand-heldtransmitter for quicker and moreaccurate transmission of theradio-frequency signal.

Programming the UniversalRemote System

For questions or help programmingthe Universal Remote system, call1-800-355-3515 or go towww.homelink.com.

Programming a garage door openerinvolves time-sensitive actions, soread the entire procedure beforestarting. Otherwise, the device willtime out and the procedure will haveto be repeated.



To program up to three devices:

1. Hold the end of the hand-heldtransmitter about 3 to 8 cm (1 to3 in) away from the UniversalRemote system buttons whilekeeping the indicator light inview. The hand-held transmitterwas supplied by themanufacturer of the garage dooropener receiver(motor-head unit).

2. At the same time, press andhold both the hand-heldtransmitter button and one of thethree Universal Remote systembuttons to be used to operatethe garage door. Do not releasethe Universal Remote systembutton or the hand-heldtransmitter button until theindicator light changes from aslowly to a rapidly flashing light.You now may release bothbuttons.

Some entry gates and garagedoor openers may requiresubstitution of Step 2 with theprocedure noted in “GateOperator and CanadianProgramming” later in thissection.

3. Press and hold for five secondsthe newly trained UniversalRemote system button (thebutton selected in Step 2) whileobserving the indicator light andgarage door activation.. If the indicator light stays on

continuously or the garagedoor starts to move whenthe Universal Remotesystem button is pressedand released, then theprogramming is complete.There is no need tocontinue programmingSteps 4–6.

. If the Universal Remotesystem indicator light blinksrapidly for two seconds,then turns to a constantlight and the garage doordoes not move, continuewith programmingSteps 4–6.

It may be helpful to haveanother person assist withthe remaining Steps 4–6.

“Learn” or “Smart” Button

4. After Steps 1–3 have beencompleted, locate the “Learn” or“Smart” button inside the garageon the garage door openerreceiver (motor-head unit). Thename and color of the buttonmay vary by manufacturer.



5. Firmly press and release the“Learn” or “Smart” button. Afterpressing this button, you willhave 30 seconds to completeStep 6.

6. Immediately return to thevehicle. Firmly press and holdfor two seconds the UniversalRemote system button, selectedin Step 2 to control the garagedoor, and then release it. If thegarage door does not move orthe lamp on the garage dooropener receiver (motor-headunit) does not flash, press andhold the same button a secondtime for two seconds, thenrelease it. Again, if the doordoes not move or the garagedoor lamp does not flash, pressand hold the same button a thirdtime for two seconds, thenrelease.

The Universal Remote systemshould now activate thegarage door.

To program the remaining twoUniversal Remote system buttons,begin with Step 1 of “Programmingthe Universal Remote System.”

Gate Operator and CanadianProgramming

If you have questions or need helpprogramming the Universal Remotesystem, call 1-800-355-3515 or goto www.homelink.com.

Canadian radio-frequency lawsrequire transmitter signals to timeout or quit after several seconds oftransmission. This may not be longenough for the Universal Remotesystem to pick up the signal duringprogramming. Similarly, some U.S.gate operators are manufactured totime out in the same manner.

If you live in Canada, or you arehaving difficulty programming a gateoperator or garage door opener byusing the “Programming theUniversal Remote System”procedures, regardless of whereyou live, replace Step 2 under“Programming the Universal RemoteSystem” with the following:

Continue to press and hold theUniversal Remote system buttonwhile you press and release everytwo seconds (cycle) the hand-heldtransmitter button until thefrequency signal has beensuccessfully accepted by theUniversal Remote system. TheUniversal Remote system indicatorlight will flash slowly at first and thenrapidly. Proceed with Step 3 under“Programming the Universal RemoteSystem” to complete.



Universal Remote SystemOperation

Using the Universal RemoteSystem

Press and hold the appropriateUniversal Remote system button forat least half of a second. Theindicator light will come on while thesignal is being transmitted.

Erasing Universal RemoteSystem Buttons

All programmed buttons should beerased when the vehicle is sold orthe lease ends.

To erase all programmed buttons onthe Universal Remote systemdevice:

1. Press and hold down the twooutside buttons until theindicator light begins to flash.This should take about10 seconds.

2. Release both buttons.

Reprogramming a SingleUniversal Remote SystemButton

To reprogram any of the threeUniversal Remote system buttons:

1. Press and hold the desiredUniversal Remote systembutton. Do not release thebutton.

2. The indicator light will begin toflash after 20 seconds. Withoutreleasing the button, proceedwith Step 1 under “Programmingthe Universal Remote System.”

If you have questions or need helpprogramming the Universal Remotesystem, call 1-800-355-3515 or goto www.homelink.com. You mayalso call the customer assistancephone number under CustomerAssistance Offices (U.S. andCanada) on page 13‑5 or CustomerAssistance Offices (Mexico) onpage 13‑5.


Lighting 6-1

Lighting

Exterior LightingExterior Lamp Controls . . . . . . . . 6-1Exterior Lamps OffReminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

Headlamp High/Low-BeamChanger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2Daytime RunningLamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

Automatic HeadlampSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . 6-3Turn and Lane-ChangeSignals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3

Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4

Interior LightingInstrument Panel IlluminationControl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4

Dome Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5Reading Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5

Lighting FeaturesEntry Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6Exit Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6Battery Power Protection . . . . . . 6-6

Exterior Lighting

Exterior Lamp Controls

The exterior lamp control is on theinstrument panel on the outboardside of the steering wheel.

Turn the control to the followingpositions:

O (Off): Turns off the exteriorlamps. The knob returns to theAUTO position after it is released.Turn to O again to reactivate theAUTO mode.

In Canada, the headlamps willautomatically reactivate when thevehicle is shifted out of P (Park) on

automatic transmission vehicles,and when the parking brake isreleased on manual transmissionvehicles.

AUTO (Automatic): Automaticallyturns the exterior lamps on and off,depending on outside lighting.

; (Parking Lamps): Turns on theparking lamps together with thefollowing:. Sidemarker Lamps. Taillamps. License Plate Lamps. Instrument Panel Lights

2 (Headlamps): Turns on theheadlamps together with thefollowing:. Sidemarker Lamps. Taillamps. License Plate Lamps. Instrument Panel Lights. Parking Lamps


6-2 Lighting

Exterior Lamps OffReminderA warning chime sounds if the driverdoor is opened while the ignition isoff and the exterior lamps are on.

Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer23 (Headlamp High/Low-BeamChanger): Push the turn signallever away from you and release, toturn the high beams on. To return tolow beams, push the lever again orpull it toward you and release.

This indicator light turns on in theinstrument cluster when thehigh-beam headlamps are on.

Flash-to-PassTo flash the high beams, pull theturn signal lever toward you, andrelease.

Daytime RunningLamps (DRL)Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) canmake it easier for others to see thefront of your vehicle during the day.Fully functional daytime runninglamps are required on all vehiclesfirst sold in Canada.

The DRL system turns on thelow-beam headlamps at a reducedbrightness. For vehicles with HighIntensity Discharge (HID)headlamps, the dedicated DRL willcome on when all of the followingconditions are met:. The ignition is on.. The exterior lamps control is

in AUTO.. The light sensor determines it is

daytime.

. The parking brake is released orthe vehicle is not in P (Park).

When the DRL are on, thelow-beam headlamps will be on.The taillamps, sidemarker lamps,instrument panel lights, and otherlamps will not be on.

The DRL turn off when theheadlamps are turned to O or theignition is off.

This vehicle may have a DRLdisabling function. When the DRLare on and a turn signal is activated,the DRL on that side will be off untilthe turn signal goes off.

Automatic HeadlampSystemWhen the exterior lamp control isset to AUTO and it is dark enoughoutside, the headlamps come onautomatically.


Lighting 6-3

There is a light sensor on top of theinstrument panel. Do not cover thesensor. Otherwise the headlampswill come on when they are notneeded.

The system may also turn on theheadlamps when driving through aparking garage or tunnel.

When it is bright enough outside,the headlamps will turn off or maychange to daytime runninglamps (DRL).

The automatic headlamp systemturns off when the exterior lampcontrol is turned to O or the ignitionis off.

Lights On with Wipers

If the windshield wipers areactivated in daylight with the engineon, and the exterior lamp control isin AUTO, the headlamps, parkinglamps, and other exterior lampscome on. The transition time for thelamps coming on varies based onwiper speed. When the wipers arenot operating, these lamps turn off.Move the exterior lamp control toPor; to disable this feature.

Hazard Warning Flashers

| (Hazard Warning Flashers):Press this button on the instrumentpanel above the audio system, tomake the front and rear turn signallamps flash on and off. Press againto turn the flashers off.

The hazard warning flashers turn onautomatically if the airbags deploy.

Turn and Lane-ChangeSignals

Move the lever all the way up ordown to signal a turn.

An arrow on the instrument clusterflashes in the direction of the turn orlane change.

Raise or lower the lever until thearrow starts to flash to signal a lanechange. Hold it there until the lane


6-4 Lighting

change is completed. If the lever isbriefly pressed and released, theturn signal flashes three times.

The turn and lane-change signalcan be turned off manually bymoving the lever back to its originalposition.

If after signaling a turn or lanechange, the arrow flashes rapidly ordoes not come on, a signal bulbmay be burned out.

Replace any burned out bulbs. If abulb is not burned out, check thefuse. See Fuses and CircuitBreakers on page 10‑35.

Fog Lamps

To turn on the fog lamps,if equipped, the ignition and theheadlamps or parking lamps mustbe on.

If the fog lamps are turned on whilethe exterior lamp control is in theAUTO position, the headlampscome on automatically.

# (Fog Lamps, If Equipped):Press to turn on or off. An indicatorlight on the instrument clustercomes on when the fog lampsare on.

Some localities have laws thatrequire the headlamps to be onalong with the fog lamps.

Interior Lighting

Instrument PanelIllumination Control

The brightness of the instrumentpanel lighting and steering wheelcontrols can be adjusted.

D (Instrument PanelIllumination): Move and hold thethumbwheel up or down to brightenor dim the lights.


Lighting 6-5

Dome Lamps

The interior lamps control located inthe overhead console controls boththe front and rear interior lamps.

To operate:

( (Off): Turns the lamps off.

H (Door): Turns the lamps onwhen any door is opened.

' (On): Keeps the lamps on allthe time.

The interior lamps turn onautomatically if the airbags aredeployed.

Reading LampsThere are front and rear readinglamps.

The front reading lamps are locatedin the overhead console.

The rear reading lamps are locatedin the headliner.

# or$ (Reading Lamps): Pressto turn each lamp on or off.


6-6 Lighting

Lighting Features

Entry LightingThe headlamps, taillamps, licenseplate lamps, back-up lamps, domelamp, and most of the interior lightsturn on briefly when K is pressedon the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter. See Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) System Operation onpage 2‑3. When the driver door isopened, all control lights, DriverInformation Center (DIC) lights, anddoor pocket lights turn on. Afterabout 30 seconds the exterior lampsturn off, then the dome lamp andremaining interior lights dim to off.Entry lighting can be disabledmanually by changing the ignitionout of the OFF position, or bypressing Q on the RKE transmitter.

This feature can be changed. See“Vehicle Locator Lights” underVehicle Personalization onpage 5‑34.

Exit LightingThe headlamps, taillamps, parkinglamps, back-up lamps, and licenseplate lamps come on at night, or inareas with limited lighting, when thekey is removed from the ignition.The dome lamps also come onwhen the key is removed from theignition. The exterior lights anddome lamps remain on after thedoor is closed for a set amount oftime, then automatically turn off.

For vehicles with keyless access,the exterior lamps and dome lampsautomatically turn on when a door isopened after the ignition is turnedoff. See Ignition Positions (KeylessAccess) on page 9‑17 or IgnitionPositions (Key Access) onpage 9‑15.

The exterior lamps turn offimmediately by turning the exteriorlamps control off.

This feature can be changed. SeeVehicle Personalization onpage 5‑34.

Battery Power ProtectionThe battery saver feature isdesigned to protect the vehicle'sbattery.

To prevent battery discharge whiledriving, the following systems arereduced automatically in two stagesand then turned off:. Heated rear window and mirrors. Heated seats. Fan

In the second stage, a DriverInformation Center (DIC) messageis displayed confirming theactivation of the battery dischargeprotection. See Battery Voltage andCharging Messages on page 5‑29.

If the exterior lamps or any interiorlights are left on and the ignition isturned off, the battery powerprotection system automaticallyturns the lamp off after about10 minutes.


Infotainment System 7-1

InfotainmentSystem

IntroductionInfotainment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1Theft-Deterrent Feature . . . . . . . 7-2Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2

RadioAM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11Radio Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13Backglass Antenna . . . . . . . . . . 7-14Satellite Radio Antenna . . . . . . 7-15

Audio PlayersCD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15MP3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-16Auxiliary Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18

PhoneBluetooth (Overview) . . . . . . . . 7-22Bluetooth (InfotainmentControls) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-24

Bluetooth (VoiceRecognition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-27

Trademarks and LicenseAgreementsTrademarks and LicenseAgreements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-34

Introduction

InfotainmentRead the following pages tobecome familiar with the audiosystem's features.

{ WARNING

Taking your eyes off the road forextended periods could cause acrash resulting in injury or deathto you or others. Do not giveextended attention to infotainmenttasks while driving.

This system provides access tomany audio and non-audio listings.


7-2 Infotainment System

To minimize taking your eyes off theroad while driving, do the followingwhile the vehicle is parked:. Become familiar with the

operation and controls of theaudio system.

. Set up the tone, speakeradjustments, and preset radiostations.

For more information, see DefensiveDriving on page 9‑3.

Notice: Contact your dealerbefore adding any equipment.

Adding audio or communicationequipment could interfere withthe operation of the engine, radio,or other systems, and coulddamage them. Follow federalrules covering mobile radio andtelephone equipment.

The vehicle has RetainedAccessory Power (RAP). With RAP,the audio system can be playedeven after the ignition is turned off.See Retained Accessory Power(RAP) on page 9‑23.

The vehicle may have a base radiothat is included in this manual. Seethe separate infotainment manualfor information on the connectiveradio and the navigation system,audio players, phone, and voicerecognition. There is alsoinformation on settings anddownloadable applications (ifequipped).

Theft-Deterrent FeatureThe theft-deterrent feature works bylearning a portion of the VehicleIdentification Number (VIN) to theinfotainment system. Theinfotainment system does notoperate if it is stolen or moved to adifferent vehicle.

OverviewKeeping your eyes on the road andyour mind on the drive is importantfor safe driving. The infotainmentsystem has built-in featuresintended to help with this bydisabling some features whendriving. A grayed-out function is notavailable when the vehicle ismoving.

All functions are available when thevehicle is parked. Do the followingbefore driving:. Become familiar with the

infotainment system operation,buttons on the faceplate, andtouch-sensitive screen buttons.

. Set up the audio by presettingfavorite stations, setting thetone, and adjusting thespeakers.



. Set up phone numbers inadvance so they can be calledeasily by pressing a singlebutton or a single voicecommand for vehicles equippedwith phone capability.

{ WARNING

Taking your eyes off the road toolong or too often while using thenavigation system could cause acrash and you or others could beinjured or killed. Focus yourattention on driving and limitglances at the moving map on thenavigation screen. Use voiceguidance whenever possible.

The infotainment system iscontrolled by using the buttons onthe faceplate and the touch screen.

See “Infotainment Control Buttons”in this section for more information.

1. HOME. Press to go to the Home

Page. See “Home Page” inthis section.

2. SRCE (Source). Press to change the audio

source to AM, FM, XM (ifequipped), Pandora,Stitcher, CD, USB, AUX,or Bluetooth Audio.



3. s © (Previous/Reverse)

. CD, USB, Bluetooth Audio:Press to seek to thebeginning of the current orprevious track.

. CD, USB, Bluetooth Audio:Press and hold to quicklyreverse through a track.Release the button to returnto playing speed. See CDPlayer on page 7‑15 orAuxiliary Devices onpage 7‑18.

. AM, FM, XM (if equipped):Press to seek to theprevious strong station.

4. CONFIG (Configuration Menu). Press to adjust features for

Languages, Time and Date,Radio Settings, PhoneSettings, Display Settings,and Vehicle Settings.

5. ¨\ (Next/Forward)

. CD, USB, Bluetooth Audio:Press to seek the nexttrack.

. CD, USB, Bluetooth Audio:Press and hold to fastforward through a track.Release the button to returnto playing speed. See CDPlayer on page 7‑15 orAuxiliary Devices onpage 7‑18.

. AM, FM, XM (if equipped):Press to seek to theprevious strong station.

6. 3 / O (Volume/Power)

. Press to turn the system onand off.

. Turn to adjust the volume.

7. Buttons 1−6. When using AM, FM, or XM

(if equipped), the presetbuttons can be used toselect stored stations.

8. H (Clock Menu)

. Press to set the time. Press+ or − to increase ordecrease the hours andminutes displayed on theclock. See “Clock” in theowner manual.

9. INFO (Information). Press to display available

source information.

10. V / $ (Phone/Mute)

. Press to enter the phonemain screen. SeeBluetooth (Overview) onpage 7‑22 or Bluetooth(Infotainment Controls) onpage 7‑24 or Bluetooth(Voice Recognition) onpage 7‑27 or OnStarOverview on page 14‑1.

. Press and hold to muteand unmute theinfotainment system.



11. TONE. Press to access the Tone

Settings menu screen toadjust Bass, Mid(Midrange), Treble, EQ,Fade, and Balance. Tonesettings are specific toeach source. See AM-FMRadio on page 7‑9.

12. BACK. Press to return to the

previous screen ina menu.

13. CD Slot

14. Multifunction Knob. Press to enter the menu

for the current band ormedia.

. Turn to highlight a feature.

. Press to activate thehighlighted feature.

. Turn to manually changethe radio station.

15. w j (Play/Pause). Press to pause or resume

playback. This feature isunavailable for AM, FM,and XM (if equipped). SeeCD Player on page 7‑15or Auxiliary Devices onpage 7‑18.

16. Z (Eject)

. Press to eject a disc fromthe CD player. See CDPlayer on page 7‑15.

17. FAV 1/2/3 (Favorite Pages). Press to display or change

the current favorite pagenumber above the presetbuttons. Keep pressing toscroll through the favoritespages. The stored stationsfor each list display on thebottom of the screen. Thenumber of preset FavoritePages can be changed bypressing the Config buttonon the Home Page, then

pressing Radio Settings,and then pressing Numberof Favorite Pages.

18. AS 1/2 (Autostore)

Autostore

Autostore searches and stores sixFM and six AM stations with thestrongest signal.

To use autostore:

1. Press SRCE to select FM or AM.

2. Press AS 1/2 for at leasttwo seconds. The radio thensearches for available stations.

3. The radio automatically storesthe six strongest stations foundas autostore presets

Press the AS 1/2 button to alternatebetween the autostore stations andfavorites.

AS displays on the radio when usingautostore presets.

Autostore does not deletepreviously stored favorite stations.



Autostore does not function with XMradio stations, if equipped.

Infotainment Control Buttons

The buttons on the faceplate areused to start primary functions whileusing the infotainment system.

Touch Screen Buttons

Touch screen buttons are on thescreen and highlighted when afeature is available. Some togglescreen buttons highlight when activeand gray out when inactive.

Home Page

The infotainment system displays ahome page that makes it easy toaccess.

Back: If on page 2 of the HomePage, press Back to return to page1 of the Home Page. If on page 1,Back serves no function.

Home: While navigating throughother menus, press to go back tothe Home Page to start a differentfeature.

Fav: Press to display a page ofstored (favorite) AM, FM, or XM (ifequipped) stations. Keep pressingFav to scroll through the favoritepages.

Info: Press to toggle through anaudio information screen.

The Home Page Menu lists theoptions Customize Home Page andRestore Home Page Defaults.

Out of all available Home Pageicons, up to eight icons can beselected and sorted for the firstHome Page screen.

Home Page Features

Various functions are disabled whenthe vehicle is moving.

Press the Now Playing screenbutton to display the active sourcepage. The sources available areAM, FM, XM (if equipped), CD,USB/iPod, and AUX.

See AM-FM Radio on page 7‑9,Satellite Radio on page 7‑11, CDPlayer on page 7‑15, and AuxiliaryDevices on page 7‑18.

Press the Phone screen button todisplay the Phone main page. SeeBluetooth (Overview) on page 7‑22or Bluetooth (Infotainment Controls)on page 7‑24 or Bluetooth (VoiceRecognition) on page 7‑27.

Press the Config screen button todisplay the Config main page. Fromthis display, you can adjust featuressuch as time and date, radio,phone, vehicle, and display.

Press the Tone screen button todisplay the Tone main page. Adjustthe tone and speakers by pressing



the screen buttons to change thelevels of sound for treble, midrange,bass, fade, and balance. SeeAM-FM Radio on page 7‑9.

Press the FM screen button todisplay the FM main page and playthe current or last tuned FM station.See AM-FM Radio on page 7‑9.

Press the AM screen button todisplay the AM main page and playthe current or last tuned AM station.See AM-FM Radio on page 7‑9.

Press the XM screen button (ifequipped) to display the XM mainpage and play the current or lasttuned XM channel. See SatelliteRadio on page 7‑11.

Press the CD screen button todisplay the CD main page and playthe current or last CD trackselected. See CD Player onpage 7‑15.

Press the USB screen button todisplay the USB main page and playthe current or last track selected.See Auxiliary Devices on page 7‑18.

Press the AUX screen button toaccess any connected auxiliarydevice. See Auxiliary Devices onpage 7‑18.

For eAssist vehicles, press theEnergy screen button to display thePower Flow display. The PowerFlow display indicates the energyflow direction, the high voltagebattery charge level, and the currenteAssist operating mode.

Press the Energy screen button todisplay the Power Flow displayindicates the energy flow direction,the high voltage battery chargelevel, and the current eAssistoperating mode.

The Configuration Menu is used toadjust features and preferences,such as Sound, Radio, Nav(Navigation), Display, or ClockSettings.

1. Press the Config screen buttonon the Home Page or theCONFIG button on the faceplate.

2. Touch-tap the scroll bar until thedesired option displays. Selectthe desired settings to change.

Languages

The vehicle supports English,French (Canadian), and Spanish.The default language is English.

To change the display language,see Vehicle Personalization onpage 5‑34 for more information.

Time and Date Settings







Set Date Format: Depending onthe region, the following dateformats may be available: MM/DD/YYYY, DD.MM.YYYY, or YYYY/MM/DD.

Radio Settings

Press the Config button on theHome Page or the CONFIG buttonon the faceplate to enter the menuoptions. Turn the Multifunction knobor touch-tap the scroll bar to scrollthrough the available options. Pressthe Multifunction knob or pressRadio Settings to display the radiosettings menu. Press this feature tomake changes for radio informationdisplayed, preset pages, AutoVolume Control, and XM CategoriesRestore. See Satellite Radio onpage 7‑11 (if equipped), for moreinformation about XM Categories.

The Radio Settings are:

Speed Dependent Volume: SelectOFF, Low, Medium, or Highsensitivity to automatically adjustthe volume to minimize the effectsof unwanted background noise that

can result from changing roadsurfaces, driving speeds, or openwindows. This feature works best atlower volume settings wherebackground noise is typically louderthan the sound system volume.

Startup Volume: Press to set themaximum volume level for startupthat will be used even if a highervolume had been set when the radiowas turned off.

Radio Favorites: Press to selectthe number of FAV pages to beused in the system.

Add/Remove XM Categories:Press to customize which availableXM Categories are used anddisplayed in the system.

Phone Settings

See Bluetooth (Overview) onpage 7‑22 or Bluetooth(Infotainment Controls) onpage 7‑24 or Bluetooth (VoiceRecognition) on page 7‑27 in the“Phone” section for moreinformation on phone settings.

Vehicle Settings

See Vehicle Personalization onpage 5‑34 for more information.

Display Settings

Press the Config button on theHome Page or the CONFIG buttonon the faceplate, then select DisplaySettings from the list.

The following options may display:

Dimming Mode: Press to changethe screen background. TheAutomatic setting adjusts the screenbackground automaticallydepending on the exterior lightingconditions.

To change the overall brightnesssetting for the display, use thevehicle interior lighting instrumentpanel illumination control.



English and Metric UnitConversion

To change the display units betweenEnglish and metric units, see DriverInformation Center (DIC) onpage 5‑24 for more information.

Cleaning the Display

Notice: Using abrasive cleanerswhen cleaning glass surfacescould scratch the glass. Use onlya soft cloth and do not spraycleaner directly on the system asit could affect the mechanicalparts.

Do not wipe the panel with a hardcloth or use a volatile liquid such aspaint thinner; it could scratch thesurface or erase the characters onthe buttons.

Radio

AM-FM Radio

Control Buttons

The buttons used to control theradio are:

SRCE: Press to choose betweenAM, FM, XM™, if equipped,and CD.

Multifunction Knob: Turn tosearch for stations and press tonavigate the available menus.

INFO: Press to display additionalinformation that may be available forthe current song.

s © or ¨ \ : Press to searchfor stations.

Buttons 1 to 6: Press to selectpreset stations.

FAV 1/2/3: Press to open thefavorites list and select favoritespages.

AS 1/2: Press to open theautostore list and select autostorepages.

RDS (Radio Data System)

The radio may have RDS. The RDSfeature is available for use only onFM stations that broadcast RDSinformation. This feature only workswhen the information from the radiostation is available. In rare cases, aradio station could broadcastincorrect information that causes theradio features to work improperly.If this happens, contact the radiostation.

While the radio is tuned to anFM-RDS station, the station nameor call letters display.

Radio Menus

Radio menus are available for AMand FM.

Push the Multifunction knob to openthe main radio menu for that band.



Selecting a Band

Press the SRCE button to chooseAM, FM, XM, if equipped, or CD.The last station that was playingstarts playing again.

Selecting a Station

Seek Tuning

If the radio station is not known:

Briefly presss © or ¨ \ toautomatically search for the nextavailable station. If a station is notfound, the radio switches to a moresensitive search level. If a stationstill is not found, the frequency thatwas last active begins to play.

If the radio station is known:

Press and holds © or ¨ \ untilthe station on the display isreached, then release the button.

Manual Tuning

Turn the Multifunction knob to selectthe frequency on the display.

Favorites List

1. Press the Multifunction knob.

2. Select Favorites List.

3. Select the station.

Station Lists


2. Select AM or FM Station List. Allreceivable stations in the currentreception area are displayed. If astation list has not been created,an automatic station searchis done.


Category Lists

Most stations that broadcast anRDS program-type code specify thetype of programming transmitted.Some stations change the programtype code depending on thecontent. The system stores the RDSstations sorted by program type inthe FM category list.

To search for a programming typedetermined by station:


2. Select FM Category List. A list ofall programming types availabledisplays.

3. Select the programming type.A list of stations that transmitprogramming of the selectedtype displays.


The category lists are updatedwhen the station lists areupdated.

Updating Station and CategoryLists

If stations stored in the station listcan no longer be received:


2. Select Update AM or FM StationList, if the stations stored in thestation list are no longerreceived. A station search will becompleted and the first station inthe updated list will play.



To cancel the station search, pressthe Multifunction knob.

Storing a Station as a Favorite

Stations from all bands can bestored in any order in the favoritepages.

Up to six stations can be stored ineach favorite page and the numberof available favorite pages canbe set.

Storing Stations

To store the station to a position inthe list, press the correspondingnumeric button 1 to 6 until a beep isheard. The stored station will beginplayback.

Retrieving Stations

Press the FAV 1/2/3 button to opena favorite page or to switch toanother favorite page. Briefly pressone of the 1 to 6 buttons to retrievethe station.

Autostore Stations

AS 1/2 (Autostore): Autostoresearches and stores six FM andsix AM stations with the strongestsignal. To use autostore:

1. Press SRCE to select FM or AM.

2. Press AS 1/2 for at leasttwo seconds. The radio thensearches for available stations.

3. The radio automatically storesthe six strongest stations foundas autostore presets.

Press the AS 1/2 button to alternatebetween the autostore stations andfavorites.

AS displays on the radio when usingautostore presets.

Autostore does not deletepreviously stored favorite stations.

Autostore does not function with XMradio stations.

Satellite RadioVehicles with an SiriusXM SatelliteRadio tuner and a valid SiriusXMSatellite Radio subscription canreceive SiriusXM programming.

SiriusXM Satellite RadioService

SiriusXM is a satellite radio servicebased in the 48 contiguous UnitedStates and 10 Canadian provinces.SiriusXM Satellite Radio has a widevariety of programming andcommercial-free music, coast tocoast, and in digital-quality sound.A service fee is required to receivethe SiriusXM service. If SiriusXMService needs to be reactivated, theradio will display "No SubscriptionPlease Renew" on channel XM1.For more information, contactSiriusXM at www.xmradio.com or1-800-929-2100 in the U.S. andwww.xmradio.ca or1-877-438-9677 in Canada.



Control Buttons

The buttons used to control theSiriusXM radio are:

SRCE: Press to choose betweenAM, FM, XM, if equipped, and CD.

Multifunction Knob: Turn tosearch for channels and press tonavigate the available menus.

INFO: Press to display additionalinformation that may be availableabout the current song.

s © or ¨ \ : Press to go to theprevious or next channel.

FAV 1/2/3: Press to open thefavorites list and select favoritepages.

Buttons 1 to 6: Press to selectpreset stations.

Adding or Removing Categories

1. From the Home Page press theConfig screen button or theCONFIG button on the faceplate.

2. Select Radio Settings from theConfig Menu list.

3. Select Add/Remove XMCategories.

4. From the Add/Remove XMCategories screen, select ordeselect any category to beused in SiriusXM mode.A checkmark will indicate thatthe category is selected.

Turning SiriusXM Album Art Onor Off

1. From the Home Page press theConfig screen button or theCONFIG button on the faceplate.

2. Select Radio Settings from theConfig Menu list.

3. Select XM Album Art to turn onor off.

SiriusXM Messages

XL (Explicit LanguageChannels): These channels, or anyothers, can be blocked by request,by calling 1-800-929-2100 in theU.S. and 1-877-438-9677 inCanada.

XM Updating: The encryption codein the receiver is being updated. Noaction is required. This processshould take no longer than30 seconds.

Loading XM: The audio system isacquiring and processing audio andtext data. No action is needed. Thismessage should disappear shortly.

Channel Off Air: This channel isnot currently in service. Tune in toanother channel.

Channel Unauth: This channel isblocked or cannot be received withyour SiriusXM subscription package.

Channel Unavailable: Thispreviously assigned channel is nolonger assigned. Tune to anotherstation.

No Artist Info: The system isworking properly. No artistinformation is available at this timeon this channel.



No Title Info: The system isworking properly. No song titleinformation is available at this timeon this channel.

No CAT Info: The system isworking properly. No categoryinformation is available at this timeon this channel.

No Information: The system isworking properly. No text orinformational messages areavailable at this time on thischannel.

No Subscription Please Renew:The SiriusXM subscription needs tobe reactivated. Contact SiriusXM atwww.xmradio.com or1-800-929-2100 in the U.S. andwww.xmradio.ca or1-877-438-9677 in Canada.

No XM Signal: The system isworking properly. The vehicle maybe in a location where the SiriusXMsignal is being blocked. When thevehicle is moved into an open area,the signal should return.

CAT Not Found: The system isworking properly. There are nochannels available for the selectedcategory.

XM Radio ID: If tuned to channel 0,this message alternates with theSiriusXM Radio eight-digit radio IDlabel. This label is needed toactivate the service.

Unknown: If this message isreceived when tuned to channel 0,there could be a receiver fault.Consult with your dealer.

Check Antenna: If this messagedoes not clear within a short periodof time, the receiver could have afault. Consult with your dealer.

XM Not Available: If this messagedoes not clear within a short periodof time, the receiver could have afault. Consult with your dealer.

Radio ReceptionFrequency interference and staticcan occur during normal radioreception if items such as cellularphone chargers, vehicleconvenience accessories, andexternal electronic devices areplugged into the accessory poweroutlet. If there is interference orstatic, unplug the item from theaccessory power outlet.

FM

FM signals only reach about16 to 65 km (10 to 40 mi). Althoughthe radio has a built-in electroniccircuit that automatically works toreduce interference, some static canoccur, especially around tallbuildings or hills, causing the soundto fade in and out.



AM

The range for most AM stations isgreater than for FM, especially atnight. The longer range can causestation frequencies to interfere witheach other. For better radioreception, most AM radio stationsboost the power levels during theday, and then reduce these levelsduring the night. Static can alsooccur when things like storms andpower lines interfere with radioreception. When this happens, tryreducing the treble on the radio.

SiriusXM® Satellite RadioService

SiriusXM satellite radio servicegives digital radio reception fromcoast to coast in the 48 contiguousUnited States, and in Canada. Justas with FM, tall buildings or hills caninterfere with satellite radio signals,

causing the sound to fade in andout. In addition, traveling or standingunder heavy foliage, bridges,garages, or tunnels may cause lossof the SiriusXM signal for a periodof time.

Cellular Phone Usage

Cellular phone usage may causeinterference with the vehicle's radio.This interference may occur whenmaking or receiving phone calls,charging the phone's battery,or simply having the phone on. Thisinterference can cause an increasedlevel of static while listening to theradio. If static is received whilelistening to the radio, unplug thecellular phone and turn it off.

Backglass AntennaThe AM-FM antenna is integratedwith the rear window defogger in therear window. Do not scratch theinside surface or damage the linesin the glass. If the inside surface isdamaged, it could interfere withradio reception. For proper radio

reception, the antenna connectorneeds to be properly attached to thepost on the glass.

If attaching a cell phone antenna tothe glass, attach it between the gridlines.

Notice: Using a razor blade orsharp object to clear the insiderear window can damage the rearwindow antenna and/or the rearwindow defogger. Repairs wouldnot be covered by the vehiclewarranty. Do not clear the insiderear window with sharp objects.

Notice: Do not apply aftermarketglass tinting with metallic film.The metallic film in some tintingmaterials will interfere with ordistort the incoming radioreception. Any damage caused tothe backglass antenna due tometallic tinting materials will notbe covered by the vehiclewarranty.



Satellite Radio AntennaFor vehicles with SiriusXM satelliteradio service, the antenna is on theroof of the vehicle. Keep theantenna clear of obstructions forclear radio reception.

Audio Players

CD PlayerThe CD player can play audio CDsand MP3 CDs.

The CD player will not play8 cm (3 in) CDs.

Care of CDs

Sound quality can be reduced dueto disc quality, recording method,quality of the music recorded, anddisc handling. Handle discs carefullyand store them in their originalcases or other protective casesaway from direct sunlight and dust.If the bottom surface of a disc isdamaged, the disc may not playproperly or at all. Do not touch thebottom surface of a disc whilehandling it; this could damage thesurface. Pick up discs by graspingthe outer edges or the edge of thehole and the outer edge.

If the bottom surface of a disc isdirty, take a soft lint-free cloth,or dampen a clean soft cloth in a

mild neutral detergent solutionmixed with water, and clean it. Wipethe disc from the center to theouter edge.

Care of the CD Player

Do not add a label to a disc; it couldget caught in the CD player. If alabel is needed, write on the top ofthe recorded disc with amarking pen.

Do not use disc lens cleanersbecause they could contaminate thelens of the disc optics and damagethe CD player.

Notice: If a label is added to aCD, more than one CD is insertedinto the slot at a time, or anattempt is made to play scratchedor damaged CDs, the CD playercould be damaged. While usingthe CD player, use only CDs ingood condition without any label,load one CD at a time, and keepthe CD player and the loading slotfree of foreign materials, liquids,and debris.



Control Buttons

The buttons used to control the CDplayer are:

SRCE (Source): Press to use theCD player.

s © or ¨ \ : Press to selecttracks or to fast rewind or forwardwithin a track.

INFO: Press to display additionalinformation about the current trackthat may be available.

Multifunction Knob: Turn to selecttracks. Press to enter the CD menuand select items.

Z (Eject): Press to eject the disc.

Playing an Audio CD

1. Press the CD screen button onthe Home Page or select CDfrom the source pop-up todisplay the CD main page.

2. From the CD screen, press theMenu screen button to displaythe menu options.

3. Press to select the desiredoption.

On the CD main page a tracknumber displays at the beginning ofeach track. Song, Artist, and Albuminformation displays when available.

Use the following controls to playthe disc:

w / j (Play/Pause): Use to start,pause, or resume play.

s © (Seek/Previous):. Press to seek to the beginning of

the current or previous track.If the track has been playing forless than five seconds, it seeksto the previous track. If longerthan five seconds, the currenttrack starts from the beginning.

. Press and hold to fast reversethrough a track. Release thebutton to return to playingspeed. Elapsed time displays.

\ ¨ (Seek/Next):. Press to seek to the next track.. Press and hold to fast forward

through a track. Release thebutton to return to playingspeed. Elapsed time displays.

Multifunction Knob: Turn to theright or left to select the next orprevious track. Press this knob toselect the menu. If a track isselected from the list, the systemplays the track and returns to theCD screen.

MP3

Playing an MP3 CD

To play an MP3 CD, follow the sameinstructions as “Playing anAudio CD.”

The following guidelines must bemet when creating an MP3 disc,otherwise the CD might not play:. Sampling rate: 16 kHz,

22.05 kHz, 24 kHz, 32 kHz,44.1 kHz, and 48 kHz.



. Bit rates supported: 8, 16, 24,32, 40, 48, 56, 64, 80, 96, 112,128, 144, 160, 192, 224, 256,and 320 kbps.

. Maximum number of folders:eight folders with 255 files perfolder.

. Maximum of 1,000 files ona disc.

. Recorded on a CD-R or CD-RWwith a maximum capacity of700 MB.

. The Artist/Album/Song Titles/Genre information requires a CDto be fully scanned before themusic navigator works withthese menus.

MP3 Music Menu

Press the Menu screen button whilethat source is active to accessthe menu.

Press any of the following buttonson the MP3 Menu:

Shuffle Songs: Press to play thetracks randomly. Press again to stopshuffle.

Playlists: Press to view theplaylists stored on the disc. Select aplaylist to view the list of all songs inthat playlist. There might be a delaybefore the list displays. Select asong from the list to begin playback.

Artists: Press to view the list ofartists stored on the disc. Select anartist name to view a list of all songsby the artist. There might be a delaybefore the list displays. Select asong from the list to begin playback.

Albums: Press to view the albumson the disc. Select the album toview a list of all songs on the album.There might be a delay before thelist displays. Select a song from thelist to begin playback.

Song Titles: Press to display a listof all songs on the disc. Songs aredisplayed as stored on the disc.

There might be a delay before thelist displays. To begin playback,select a song from the list.

Genres: Press to view the genres.Select a genre to view a list of allsongs of that genre. Select a songfrom the list to begin playback.

Folders: Press to open a folder listto access the files within the folderstructure.

Root Directory

The root directory is treated as afolder. All files contained directlyunder the root directory areaccessed prior to any root directoryfolders.

Empty Folders

If a root directory or folder is emptyor contains only folders, the playeradvances to the next folder in thefile structure that contains acompressed audio file. The emptyfolder(s) are not displayed ornumbered.



No Folder

When the CD only containscompressed audio files without anyfolders or playlists, all files areunder the root folder.

File System and Naming

The song titles, artists, albums, andgenres are taken from the file's ID3tag and are only displayed if presentin the tag. If a song title is notpresent in the ID3 tag, the radiodisplays the file name as thetrack name.

Preprogrammed Playlists

The radio recognizespreprogrammed playlists; however,there is no editing capability. Theseplaylists are treated as specialfolders containing compressedaudio song files.

Auxiliary DevicesThis vehicle has an auxiliary inputjack in the center console. Possibleauxiliary audio sources include:. Laptop computer. MP3 player

This jack is not an audio output. Donot plug headphones into theauxiliary input jack. Drivers areencouraged to set up any auxiliarydevice while the vehicle is inP (Park).

Connect a 3.5 mm (1/8 in) cablefrom the auxiliary device to theauxiliary input jack. When a deviceis connected, the systemautomatically begins playing audiofrom the device over the vehiclespeakers.

If an auxiliary device has alreadybeen connected, but a differentsource is currently active, press theNow Playing screen button on theHome Page, then press Source

repeatedly to cycle through all of theavailable audio source screens, untilthe AUX source screen is selected.

Portable devices are controlled byusing the menu system described inOverview on page 7‑2.

Using the 3.5mm (1/8 in)Auxiliary Input Jack

Connect a 3.5 mm (1/8 in) cable tothe 3.5 mm (1/8 in) auxiliary inputjack to use a portable audio player.

Playback of an audio device that isconnected to the 3.5 mm (1/8 in)auxiliary input jack can only becontrolled using the controls on thedevice.

Adjusting the Volume

Turn the3 / O knob to adjust thevolume of the infotainment systemafter the volume level has been seton the portable audio device.



USB Port

For vehicles with a USB port, thefollowing devices may be connectedand controlled by the infotainmentsystem:. iPods. PlaysForSure Devices (PFDs). USB Drives. Zunes®

Not all iPods, PFDs, USB Drives,and Zunes are compatible with theinfotainment system.

Playing from a USB

A USB mass storage device orMicrosoft Transfer Protocol (MTP)device can be connected to theUSB port.

The USB port is in the centerconsole.

The USB icon displays when theUSB device is connected.

USB MP3 Player and USB Drives. The USB MP3 players and USB

drives connected must complywith the USB Mass StorageClass specification (USB MSC).

. Only USB MP3 players and USBdrives with a sector size or512 bytes and a cluster sizesmaller or equal to 32 kbytes inthe FAT32 file system aresupported.

. Hard disk drives are notsupported.

. The following restrictions applyfor the data stored on a USBMP3 player or USB device:

‐ Maximum folder structuredepth: 11 levels.

‐ Maximum number of MP3/WMA files that can bedisplayed: 1,000

. WMA with Digital RightsManagement (DRM) from onlinemusic shops cannot be played.WMA files can only be played

back safely if they were createdwith Windows Media Playerversion 8 or later.

‐ Applicable playlist extensionsare: .m3u, .pls.

‐ Playlist entries must be in theform of relative paths.

‐ The system attribute forfolders/files that contain audiodata must not be set.

To play a USB device, do one of thefollowing:. Connect the USB and it begins

to play.. Press the Now Playing screen

button on the Home Page, thenpress the SRCE button on thefaceplate repeatedly to cyclethrough all of the available audiosource screens, until the USBsource screen is selected.



While the USB source is active, usethe following to operate USBfunction:

w / j (Play/Pause): Press to start,pause, or resume play of the currentmedia source.

s © (Seek/Previous):1. Press to seek to the beginning of

the current or previous track.If the track has been playing forless than five seconds, theprevious track plays. If playinglonger than five seconds, thecurrent track restarts.

2. Press and hold to reversequickly through playback.

3. Release to return to playingspeed. Elapsed time displays.

\ ¨ (Seek/Next):1. Press to seek to the next track.

2. Press and hold to advancequickly through playback.Release to return to playingspeed. Elapsed time displays.

USB Menu

Press any of the following buttonson the USB Menu:


Playlists: Press to view theplaylists stored on the USB. Selecta playlist to view the list of all songsin that playlist. There might be adelay before the list displays. Selecta song from the list to beginplayback.

Artists: Press to view the list ofartists stored on the USB. Select anartist name to view a list of allalbums by the artist. There might bea delay before the list displays. Toselect a song, touch All Songs thenselect a song or touch an albumthen select a song from the list tobegin playback.

Albums: Press to view the albumson the USB. Select the album toview a list of all songs on the album.

There might be a delay before thelist displays. Select a song from thelist to begin playback.

Song Titles: Press to display a listof all songs on the USB. Songs aredisplayed as stored on the disc.There might be a delay before thelist displays. To begin playback,select a song from the list.

Genres: Press to view the genreson the USB. Select a genre to viewa list of all songs of that genre.Select a song from the list to beginplayback.

Folders: Press to open a folder listto access the files within the folderstructure.

File System and Naming

The song titles, artists, albums, andgenres are taken from the file's ID3tag and are only displayed if presentin the tag. If a song title is notpresent in the ID3 tag, the radiodisplays the file name as thetrack name.



Playing from an iPod®

This feature supports the followingiPod models:. iPod nano® (1st, 2nd, 3rd, and

4th generation). iPod® with video (5.0 and 5.5

generation). Video is not shown;only audio is supported.

. iPod classic® (6th generation)

. iPod touch® (1st and 2ndgeneration)

There may be problems withoperation and function in thefollowing situations:. When connecting an iPod on

which a more recent version ofthe firmware is installed than issupported by the infotainmentsystem.

. When connecting an iPod onwhich firmware from otherproviders is installed.

To connect and control an iPod,connect one end of the standardiPod USB cable to the iPod's dockconnector. Connect the other end tothe USB port in the center console.

iPod music information displays onthe radio’s display and beginsplaying through the vehicle’s audiosystem.

The iPod battery rechargesautomatically while the vehicle is on.When the vehicle is off while aniPod is connected using the iPodUSB cable, the iPod battery stopscharging and the iPod automaticallyturns off.

If the iPod is an unsupported model,it can still be listened to in thevehicle by connecting to theauxiliary input jack using a standard3.5 mm (1/8 in) stereo cable.

iPod Menu


Press any of the following buttonson the iPod Menu:

Playlists:

1. Press to view the playlists storedon the iPod.

2. Select a playlist name to view alist of all songs in the playlist.

3. Select the desired song from thelist to begin playback.

Artists:

1. Press to view the artists storedon the iPod.

2. Select an artist name to view alist of all songs by the artist.


Albums:

1. Press to view the albums storedon the iPod.

2. Select an album name to view alist of all songs on the album orselect All Songs to view allsongs by the artist.




Song Titles:

1. Press to view a list of all songsstored on the iPod.


Genres:

1. Press to view the genres storedon the iPod.

2. Select a genre name to view alist of artists of that genre.

3. Select an artist to view albumsor All Songs to view all songs ofthat genre.

4. Select album to view songs.


Podcasts:

1. Press to view the podcastsstored on the iPod.

2. Select a podcast name to playthe desired podcast.

Composers:

1. Press to view the composersstored on the iPod.

2. Select a composer name to viewa list of all songs by thatcomposer.


Audio Books:

1. Press to view the audio booksstored on the iPod.

2. Select an audio book name toview a list of all audio books.

3. Select the desired audio bookfrom the list to begin playback.

Playing from an iPhone®

This feature supports the followingiPhone model:. iPhone (3G – 3GS)

To use the iPhone, follow the sameinstructions as stated earlier forusing an iPod.

Phone

Bluetooth (Overview)For vehicles equipped withBluetooth capability, the system caninteract with many cell phones,allowing:. Placement and receipt of calls in

a hands-free mode.. Sharing of the cell phone’s

address book or contact list withthe vehicle.

To minimize driver distraction,before driving, and with the vehicleparked:. Become familiar with the

features of the cell phone.Organize the phone book andcontact lists clearly and deleteduplicate or rarely used entries.If possible, program speed dialor other shortcuts.

. Review the controls andoperation of the infotainmentsystem.



. Pair cell phone(s) to the vehicle.The system may not work withall cell phones. See “Pairing” inthis section for more information.

. If the cell phone has voicedialing capability, learn to usethat feature to access theaddress book or contact list. See“Voice Pass-Thru” in this sectionfor more information.

. See “Storing and Deleting PhoneNumbers” in this section formore information.

{ WARNING

When using a cell phone, it canbe distracting to look too long ortoo often at the screen of thephone or the infotainment(navigation) system. Taking youreyes off the road too long or toooften could cause a crashresulting in injury or death. Focusyour attention on driving.

Vehicles with a Bluetooth systemcan use a Bluetooth-capable cellphone with a Hands-Free Profile tomake and receive phone calls. Theinfotainment system and voicerecognition are used to control thesystem. The system can be usedwhile in ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY. The range of theBluetooth system can be up to 9.1 m(30 ft). Not all phones support allfunctions and not all phones workwith the Bluetooth system. Seewww.gm.com/bluetooth for moreinformation about compatiblephones.

Bluetooth Controls

Use the buttons located on theinfotainment system and thesteering wheel to operate theBluetooth system.


b / g (Push To Talk): Press toanswer incoming calls, confirmsystem information, and start voicerecognition.

$ /i (End Call/Mute): Press toend a call, reject a call, or cancel anoperation.

Infotainment System Controls

If equipped, the infotainment systemallows certain controls to beselected on the infotainment display.

For information about how tonavigate the menu system using theinfotainment controls, see Overviewon page 7‑2.

V / $ (Phone/Mute): Press toenter the Phone main menu. Pressto mute audio.

Voice Recognition

The voice recognition system usescommands to control the systemand dial phone numbers.

Noise: The system may notrecognize voice commands if thereis too much background noise.

When to Speak: A tone sounds toindicate that the system is ready fora voice command. Wait for the toneand then speak.



How to Speak: Speak clearly in acalm and natural voice.

Audio System

When using the Bluetooth system,sound comes through the vehicle'sfront audio system speakers andoverrides the audio system. Use the3 / O knob during a call tochange the volume level. Theadjusted volume level remains inmemory for later calls. The systemmaintains a minimum volume level.

Other Information

The Bluetooth® word mark andlogos are owned by the Bluetooth®

SIG, Inc. and any use of such marksby General Motors is under license.Other trademarks and trade namesare those of their respective owners.

See Radio Frequency Statement onpage 13‑20 for informationregarding Part 15 of the FederalCommunications Commission (FCC)rules and Industry CanadaStandards RSS-GEN/210/220/310.

Bluetooth (InfotainmentControls)For information about how tonavigate the menu system using theinfotainment controls, see Overviewon page 7‑2.

Pairing

A Bluetooth-enabled cell phonemust be paired to the Bluetoothsystem and then connected to thevehicle before it can be used. Seeyour cell phone manufacturer's userguide for Bluetooth functions beforepairing the cell phone. If a Bluetoothphone is not connected, calls will bemade using OnStar Hands-FreeCalling, if available. See Overviewon page 7‑2.

Pairing Information. A Bluetooth phone with MP3

capability cannot be paired tothe vehicle as a phone and anMP3 player at the same time.

. Up to five cell phones can bepaired to the Bluetooth system.

. The pairing process is disabledwhen the vehicle is moving.

. Pairing only needs to becompleted once, unless thepairing information on the cellphone changes or the cell phoneis deleted from the system.

. Only one paired cell phone canbe connected to the Bluetoothsystem at a time.

. If multiple paired cell phones arewithin range of the system, thesystem connects to the firstavailable paired cell phone in theorder that they were first pairedto the system. To link to adifferent paired phone, see“Linking to a Different Phone”later in this section.

Pairing a Phone

1. Press the CONFIG button.

2. Select Phone Settings orBluetooth Settings.

3. Select Bluetooth.



4. Select Pair Device (Phone).A four-digit PersonalIdentification Number (PIN)appears on the display. The PINis used in Step 6.

5. Start the pairing process on thecell phone to be paired to thevehicle. See the cell phonemanufacturer's user guide forinformation on this process.

6. Locate the device named “YourVehicle” in the list on the cellphone. Follow the instructionson the cell phone to enter thePIN provided in Step 4. After thePIN is successfully entered, thesystem prompts you to provide aname for the paired cell phone.This name will be used toindicate which phones arepaired and connected to thevehicle. The system respondswith “<Phone name> has beensuccessfully paired” after thepairing process is complete.

7. Repeat Steps 1– 6 to pairadditional phones.

Listing All Paired and ConnectedPhones




4. Select Device List.

Deleting a Paired Phone





5. Select the phone to delete andfollow the on-screen prompts.

Linking to a Different Phone

To link to a different phone, the newphone must be in the vehicle andavailable to be connected to theBluetooth system before theprocess is started.





5. Select the new phone to link toand follow the on-screenprompts.

If delete is selected, thehighlighted phone will bedeleted.

Making a Call UsingPhone Book

For cell phones that support thephone book feature, the Bluetoothsystem can use the contacts storedon your cell phone to make calls.See your cell phone manufactureruser's guide or contact your wirelessprovider to find out if this feature issupported by your phone.

When a cell phone supports thephone book feature, the PhoneBook and Call Lists menus areautomatically available.



The Phone Book menu allows youto access the phone book stored inthe cell phone to make a call.

The Call Lists menu allows you toaccess the phone numbers from theIncoming Calls, Outgoing Calls, andMissed Calls menus on your cellphone to make a call.

To make a call using the PhoneBook menu:

1. PressV / $ once or twice(depending on radio).

2. Select Phone Book.

3. Search through the list byselecting the letter group thephone book entry begins with,or press the Multifunction buttonto scroll through the entire list ofnames/numbers in thephone book.

4. Select the name or number youwant to call.

To make a call using the CallLists menu:


2. Select Call Lists.

3. Select the Incoming Calls,Outgoing Calls, or MissedCalls list.

4. Select the name or number youwant to call.

Making a Call

To make a call:


2. Enter the character sequence.See “Entering a CharacterSequence” in Overview onpage 7‑2.

3. Select Call to start dialing thenumber.

Accepting or Declining a Call

When an incoming call is received,the infotainment system mutes anda ring tone is heard in the vehicle.

Accepting a Call

Turn the Multifunction knob to“Answer” and press theMultifunction knob to accept the call.

Declining a Call

Turn the Multifunction knob to“Decline” and press theMultifunction knob to declinethe call.

Call Waiting

Call waiting must be supported onthe Bluetooth phone and enabled bythe wireless service carrier to work.

Accepting a Call

Turn the Multifunction knob to“Answer” and press theMultifunction knob to accept the call.



Declining a Call

Turn the Multifunction knob to“Decline” and press theMultifunction knob to declinethe call.

Switching Between Calls (CallWaiting Calls Only)

To switch between calls:

1. Turn or press theMultifunction knob.

2. Select Switch Call fromthe menu.

Conference Calling

Conference calling and three-waycalling must be supported on theBluetooth phone and enabled by thewireless service carrier to work.

To start a conference while in acurrent call:

1. Turn or press theMultifunction knob.

2. Select Enter Number.

3. Enter the character sequencethen select Call. See “Entering aCharacter Sequence” inOverview on page 7‑2.

4. After the call has been placed,turn or press the Multifunctionknob and choose Merge Calls.

5. To add more callers to theconference call, repeat Steps 1–4. The number of callers thatcan be added is limited by yourwireless service carrier.

Ending a Call

Turn or press the Multifunction knoband select Hang Up.

Muting a Call

Turn or press the Multifunction knoband select Mute Call.

To Cancel Mute

Turn or press the Multifunction knoband select Mute Call.

Dual Tone Multi-Frequency(DTMF) Tones

The in-vehicle Bluetooth system cansend numbers during a call. This isused when calling a menu-drivenphone system.

1. Turn or press the Multifunctionknob and select Enter Number.

2. Enter the character sequence.See “Entering a CharacterSequence” in Overview onpage 7‑2.

Bluetooth (VoiceRecognition)

Using Voice Recognition

To use voice recognition, press theb / g button on the steering wheel.Use the commands below for thevarious voice features. Foradditional information, say "Help"while you are in a voicerecognition menu.



Pairing

A Bluetooth-enabled cell phonemust be paired to the Bluetoothsystem and then connected to thevehicle before it can be used. Seeyour cell phone manufacturer's userguide for Bluetooth functions beforepairing the cell phone. If a Bluetoothphone is not connected, calls will bemade using OnStar Hands-FreeCalling, if available. See OnStarOverview on page 14‑1 for moreinformation.

Pairing Information. A Bluetooth phone with MP3

capability cannot be paired tothe vehicle as a phone and anMP3 player at the same time.

. Up to five cell phones can bepaired to the Bluetooth system.

. The pairing process is disabledwhen the vehicle is moving.

. Pairing only needs to becompleted once, unless thepairing information on the cellphone changes or the cell phoneis deleted from the system.

. Only one paired cell phone canbe connected to the Bluetoothsystem at a time.

. If multiple paired cell phones arewithin range of the system, thesystem connects to the firstavailable paired cell phone in theorder that they were first pairedto the system. To link to adifferent paired phone, see“Linking to a Different Phone”later in this section.

Pairing a Phone

1. Press b / g. The systemresponds “Ready,” followed bya tone.

2. Say “Bluetooth.” This commandcan be skipped.

3. Say “Pair.” The system respondswith instructions and a four-digitPersonal Identification Number(PIN). The PIN is used in Step 5.

4. Start the pairing process on thecell phone that you want to pair.For help with this process, seeyour cell phone manufacturer'suser guide.

5. Locate the device named “YourVehicle” in the list on the cellphone. Follow the instructionson the cell phone to enter thePIN provided in Step 3. After thePIN is successfully entered, thesystem prompts you to provide aname for the paired cell phone.This name will be used toindicate which phones arepaired and connected to thevehicle. The system respondswith “<Phone name> has beensuccessfully paired” after thepairing process is complete.

6. Repeat Steps 1–5 to pairadditional phones.



Listing All Paired and ConnectedPhones

The system can list all cell phonespaired to it. If a paired cell phone isalso connected to the vehicle, thesystem responds with “is connected”after that phone name.


2. Say “Bluetooth.”

3. Say “List.”

Deleting a Paired Phone

If the phone name you want todelete is unknown, see “Listing AllPaired and Connected Phones.”



3. Say “Delete.” The system asksfor which phone to delete.

4. Say the name of the phone youwant to delete.

Connecting to a Different Phone

To connect to a different cell phone,the Bluetooth system looks for thenext available cell phone in theorder in which all available cellphones were paired. Depending onwhich cell phone you want toconnect to, you may have to usethis command several times.



3. Say “Change phone.”. If another cell phone is

found, the response will be“<Phone name> is nowconnected.”

. If another cell phone is notfound, the original phoneremains connected.

Storing and Deleting PhoneNumbers

The system can store up to 30phone numbers as name tags in theHands-Free Directory that is sharedbetween the Bluetooth and OnStarsystems.

The following commands are usedto delete and store phone numbers.

Store: This command will store aphone number, or a group ofnumbers as a name tag.

Digit Store: This command allowsa phone number to be stored as aname tag by entering the digits oneat a time.

Delete: This command is used todelete individual name tags.

Delete All Name Tags: Thiscommand deletes all stored nametags in the Hands-Free CallingDirectory and the DestinationsDirectory.



Using the “Store” Command


2. Say “Store.”

3. Say the phone number or groupof numbers you want to store allat once with no pauses, thenfollow the directions given by thesystem to save a name tag forthis number.

Using the “Digit Store” Command

If an unwanted number isrecognized by the system, say“Clear” at any time to clear the lastnumber.

To hear all of the numbersrecognized by the system, say“Verify” at any time.


2. Say “Digit Store.”

3. Say each digit, one at a time,that you want to store. Aftereach digit is entered, the systemrepeats back the digit it heardfollowed by a tone. After the lastdigit has been entered, say“Store,” and then follow thedirections given by the system tosave a name tag for this number.

Using the “Delete” Command


2. Say “Delete.”

3. Say the name tag you want todelete.

Using the “Delete All Name Tags”Command

This command deletes all storedname tags in the Hands-FreeCalling Directory and theDestinations Directory.

To delete all name tags:


2. Say “Delete all name tags.”

Listing Stored Numbers

The list command will list all storednumbers and name tags.

Using the “List” Command


2. Say “Directory.”

3. Say “Hands-Free Calling.”

4. Say “List.”

Making a Call

Calls can be made using thefollowing commands.

Dial or Call: The dial or callcommand can be usedinterchangeably to dial a phonenumber or a stored name tag.



Digit Dial: This command allows aphone number to be dialed byentering the digits one at a time.

Re-dial: This command is used todial the last number used on the cellphone.

Using the “Dial” or “Call”Command


2. Say “Dial” or “Call.”

3. Say the entire number withoutpausing or say the name tag.

Once connected, the person calledwill be heard through the audiospeakers.

Calling 911 Emergency


2. Say “Dial” or “Call.”

3. Say “911” without pausing. Say“Dial” or “Call.”


Using the “Digit Dial” Command

The digit dial command allows aphone number to be dialed byentering the digits one at a time.After each digit is entered, thesystem repeats back the digit itheard followed by a tone.

If an unwanted number isrecognized by the system, say“Clear” at any time to clear the lastnumber.

To hear all of the numbersrecognized by the system, say“Verify” at any time.


2. Say “Digit Dial.”

3. Say each digit, one at a time,that you want to dial. After eachdigit is entered, the systemrepeats back the digit it heardfollowed by a tone. After the lastdigit has been entered,say “Dial.”


Using the “Re-dial” Command


2. After the tone, say “Re-dial.” Thesystem dials the last numbercalled from the connected cellphone.


Receiving a Call

When an incoming call is received,the audio system mutes and a ringtone is heard in the vehicle.



. Press b / g to answer the call.

. Press $ /i to ignore a call.

Call Waiting

Call waiting must be supported onthe cell phone and enabled by thewireless service carrier.

. Press b / g to answer anincoming call when another callis active. The original call isplaced on hold.

. Press b / g again to return tothe original call.

. To ignore the incoming call, noaction is required.

. Press $ /i to disconnect thecurrent call and switch to the callon hold.

Three-Way Calling

Three-way calling must besupported on the cell phone andenabled by the wireless servicecarrier.

1. While on a call, press b / g.2. Say “Three-way call.”

3. Use the dial or call command todial the number of the third partyto be called.

4. Once the call is connected,press b / g to link all callerstogether.

Ending a Call

Press $ /i to end a call.

Muting a Call

During a call, all sounds from insidethe vehicle can be muted so that theperson on the other end of the callcannot hear them.

To mute a call, press b / g , andthen say “Mute Call.”

To cancel mute, press b / g , andthen say “Un-mute Call.”

Transferring a Call

Audio can be transferred betweenthe Bluetooth system and the cellphone.

The cell phone must be paired andconnected with the Bluetoothsystem before a call can betransferred. The connection processcan take up to two minutes after theignition is turned to ON/RUN.

To Transfer Audio from theBluetooth System to a Cell Phone

During a call with the audio in thevehicle:

1. Press b / g.2. Say “Transfer Call.”

To Transfer Audio to the BluetoothSystem from a Cell Phone

During a call with the audio on thecell phone, press b / g. The audiotransfers to the vehicle. If the audiodoes not transfer to the vehicle, usethe audio transfer feature on the cell



phone. See your cell phonemanufacturer's user guide for moreinformation.

Voice Pass-Thru

Voice pass-thru allows access to thevoice recognition commands on thecell phone. See your cell phonemanufacturer's user guide to see ifthe cell phone supports this feature.

To access contacts stored in the cellphone:


2. Say “Bluetooth.” This commandcan be skipped.

3. Say “Voice.” The systemresponds “OK, accessing<phone name>.”

The cell phone's normal promptmessages will go through their cycleaccording to the phone's operatinginstructions.

Dual Tone Multi-Frequency(DTMF) Tones

The Bluetooth system can sendnumbers and the numbers stored asname tags during a call. You canuse this feature when calling amenu-driven phone system.Account numbers can also bestored for use.

Sending a Number or Name TagDuring a Call


2. Say “Dial.”

3. Say the number or name tagto send.

Clearing the System

Unless information is deleted out ofthe in-vehicle Bluetooth system, itwill be retained indefinitely. Thisincludes all saved name tags in thephone book and phone pairinginformation. For information on howto delete this information, see theprevious sections on “Deleting aPaired Phone” and “DeletingName Tags.”



Trademarks andLicense Agreements

Manufactured under license underU.S. Patent #'s: 5,451,942;5,956,674; 5,974,380; 5,978,762;6,487,535 & other U.S. andworldwide patents issued &pending. DTS and the Symbol areregistered trademarks and DTSDigital Surround and the DTS logosare trademarks of DTS, Inc. Productincludes software. © DTS, Inc. AllRights Reserved.

Manufactured under license fromDolby Laboratories. Dolby and thedouble-D symbol are trademarks ofDolby Laboratories.

“Made for iPod” means that anelectronic accessory has beendesigned to connect specifically toiPod and has been certified by thedeveloper to meet Appleperformance standards.

iPod is a trademark of AppleComputer, Inc., registered in theU.S. and other countries.

Fees and Taxes: Subscription fee,taxes, one time activation fee, andother fees may apply. Subscriptionfee is consumer only. All fees andprogramming subject to change.Subscriptions subject to CustomerAgreement available atwww.xmradio.com. XM™ serviceonly available in the 48 contiguousUnited States and Canada.

In Canada: Some deterioration ofservice may occur in extremenorthern latitudes. This is beyondthe control of XM™ Satellite Radio.

Explicit Language Notice: Channelswith frequent explicit language areindicated with an “XL” preceding thechannel name. Channel blocking isavailable for XM Satellite Radioreceivers by notifying XM at:. USA Customers — Visit

www.xmradio.com or call1-800-929-2100.

. Canadian Customers — Visitwww.xmradio.ca or call1-877-438-9677.



It is prohibited to copy, decompile,disassemble, reverse engineer,hack, manipulate, or otherwisemake available any technology orsoftware incorporated in receiverscompatible with the XM™ SatelliteRadio System or that support theXM website, the Online Service orany of its content. Furthermore, theAMBER voice compression softwareincluded in this product is protectedby intellectual property rightsincluding patent rights, copyrights,and trade secrets of Digital VoiceSystems, Inc.

General Requirements:

1. A License Agreement from XM™is required for any product thatincorporates XM Technologyand/or for use of any of the XMmarks to be manufactured,distributed, or marketed in theXM Service Area.

2. For products to be distributed,marketed, and/or sold inCanada, a separate agreement

is required with CanadianSatellite Radio Inc. (operating asXM Canada).

Music and video recognitiontechnology and related data areprovided by Gracenote®. Gracenoteis the industry standard in musicrecognition technology and relatedcontent delivery. For moreinformation, visitwww.gracenote.com.

CD and music data from Gracenote,Inc., copyright © 2000 to presentGracenote. One or more patentsowned by Gracenote apply to thisproduct and service. See theGracenote website for anon-exhaustive list of applicableGracenote patents. Gracenote andCDDB, MusicID, Media VOCS, the

Gracenote logo and logotype, andthe “Powered by Gracenote” logoare either registered trademarks ortrademarks of Gracenote in theUnited States and/or othercountries.

If you require more informationregarding the use of the GracenoteService, visit: www.gracenote.com/corporate.

For the data provided byGracenote® Music RecognitionService, the content is notnecessarily guaranteed 100%.

Regarding the use of GracenoteMusic Recognition Service, whenthis product is used, it is necessaryto agree to the following articles.

Gracenote® End User License

This application or device containssoftware from Gracenote, Inc. ofEmeryville, California (“Gracenote”).The software from Gracenote (the“Gracenote Software”) enables thisapplication to perform disc and/orfile identification and obtain



music-related information, includingname, artist, track, and titleinformation (“Gracenote Data”) fromonline servers or embeddeddatabases (collectively, “GracenoteServers”) and to perform otherfunctions. You may use GracenoteData only by means of the intendedEnd-User functions of thisapplication or device. You agree thatyou will use Gracenote Data, theGracenote Software, and GracenoteServers for your own personalnon-commercial use only. You agreenot to assign, copy, transfer ortransmit the Gracenote Software orany Gracenote Data to any thirdparty.

YOU AGREE NOT TO USE OREXPLOIT GRACENOTE DATA, THEGRACENOTE SOFTWARE, ORGRACENOTE SERVERS, EXCEPTAS EXPRESSLY PERMITTEDHEREIN. You agree that yournon-exclusive license to use theGracenote Data, the GracenoteSoftware, and Gracenote Serverswill terminate if you violate these

restrictions. If your licenseterminates, you agree to cease anyand all use of the Gracenote Data,the Gracenote Software, andGracenote Servers.

Gracenote reserves all rights inGracenote Data, the GracenoteSoftware, and the GracenoteServers, including all ownershiprights.

Under no circumstances willGracenote become liable for anypayment to you for any informationthat you provide. You agree thatGracenote, Inc. may enforce itsrights under this Agreement againstyou directly in its own name.

The Gracenote service uses aunique identifier to track queries forstatistical purposes.

The purpose of a randomlyassigned numeric identifier is toallow the Gracenote service tocount queries without knowinganything about who you are. For

more information, see the web pagefor the Gracenote Privacy Policy forthe Gracenote service.

The Gracenote Software and eachitem of Gracenote Data are licensedto you “AS IS.” Gracenote makes norepresentations or warranties,express or implied, regarding theaccuracy of any Gracenote Datafrom in the Gracenote Servers.

Gracenote reserves the right todelete data from the GracenoteServers or to change datacategories for any cause thatGracenote deems sufficient.

No warranty is made that theGracenote Software or GracenoteServers are error-free or thatfunctioning of Gracenote Softwareor Gracenote Servers will beuninterrupted.

Gracenote is not obligated toprovide you with new enhanced oradditional data types or categoriesthat Gracenote may provide in thefuture and is free to discontinue itsservices at any time.



Gracenote disclaims all warrantiesexpress or implied, including, butnot limited to, implied warranties ofmerchantability, fitness for aparticular purpose, title, andnon-infringement. Gracenote doesnot warrant the results that will beobtained by your use of theGracenote software or anyGracenote server. In no case willGracenote be liable for anyconsequential or incidentaldamages or for any lost profits orlost revenues.



2 NOTES


Climate Controls 8-1

Climate Controls

Climate Control SystemsDual Automatic Climate ControlSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1

Air VentsAir Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6

MaintenanceAir Intake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6Passenger Compartment AirFilter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6

Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6

Climate Control Systems

Dual Automatic Climate Control SystemThe heating, cooling, and ventilation for the vehicle can be controlled withthis system.

Dual Automatic Climate Control System, Non-eAssist Vehicles

1. Air Conditioning


3. Heated Seats


5. Climate Display

6. Defrost

7. Recirculation

8. Fan Controls


10. Rear Window Defogger


8-2 Climate Controls

Dual Automatic Climate Control System, eAssist Vehicles

1. Eco/Comfort Air Conditioning


3. Heated Seats


5. Climate Display

6. Defrost

7. Recirculation

8. Fan Controls


10. Rear Window Defogger

Climate Control Influence oneAssist Operation and FuelEconomy (If Equipped)

The climate control system isdependent upon other vehiclesystems for heat and power input.Certain climate control settings canlead to higher fuel usage and/orfewer Auto Stops.

The following are climate controlsettings that use more fuel:. Comfort air conditioning mode.. The defrost mode.. Extreme temperature settings,

such as 60°F (15°C) / 90°F(32°C).

. High fan speed settings.

To help reduce fuel usage:. Use the full automatic control as

described under AutomaticOperation.

. Use eco air conditioning, insteadof the comfort air conditioning.

. Select a temperature setting thatis higher in hot weather andlower in cold weather.

. Turn off the air conditioningwhen it is not needed.

. Only use defrost to clear thewindows.



Automatic Operation

The system automatically controlsthe fan speed, air delivery, airconditioning, and recirculation inorder to heat or cool the vehicle tothe desired temperature.

When the indicator light is on, thesystem is in full automatic operation.If the air delivery mode or fansetting is manually adjusted, theauto indicator turns off and displayswill show the selected settings.

To place the system inautomatic mode:

1. Press AUTO.

2. Set the temperature. Allow thesystem time to stabilize. Thenadjust the temperature asneeded for best comfort.

To improve fuel efficiency and tocool the vehicle faster, recirculationmay be automatically selected inwarm weather. The recirculationlight will not come on. Pressh toselect recirculation; press it again toselect outside air.

English units can be changed tometric units through the DriverInformation Center (DIC). SeeDriver Information Center (DIC) onpage 5‑24.

Manual Operation

Driver and PassengerTemperature Control: Thetemperature can be adjustedseparately for the driver andpassenger.

Turn the knob clockwise orcounterclockwise to increase ordecrease the driver or passengertemperature setting.

Fan Control: Press the left fanbutton to decrease the fan speed.Press the right fan button toincrease the fan speed. Theselected fan speed is indicated bythe number of segments shown inthe display.

Pressing the left fan button longerturns the fan off.

Press AUTO to return to automaticoperation.

Air Delivery Modes: Press[,Y,

or 8 to change the direction of theairflow. An indicator light comes onin the selected mode button.

Changing the mode cancels theautomatic operation and the systemgoes into manual mode. PressAUTO to return to automaticoperation.

[ (Floor): Air is directed to thefloor outlets.

Y (Vent): Air is directed to theinstrument panel outlets.

8 (Upper): Air is directed to thewindshield outlets.

0 (Defrost): Press to clear thewindshield of fog or frost morequickly. Air is directed to thewindshield.

For best results, clear all snow andice from the windshield beforedefrosting.



For eAssist vehicles, auto stops canoccur in defrost mode. In this mode,the auto stops are shorter and lessfrequent than other air deliverymodes to prevent flash fogging.

# (Comfort Air Conditioning):Press to turn the air conditioning onor off. The button indicator lightturns blue when the a/c is on. If thefan is turned off or the outsidetemperature falls below freezing, theair conditioner will not run.

Press AUTO to return to automaticoperation and the air conditionerruns as needed. When the indicatorlight is on, the air conditioner runsautomatically to cool the air insidethe vehicle or to dry the air neededto defog the windshield faster.

For eAssist vehicles, an auto stopmay occur if the climate controlsystem determines the a/ccompressor can be shut off and stillmaintain comfort levels with minimalwindshield fogging.

# (Eco Air Conditioning, IfEquipped): Press# to turn on theeco air conditioning. The buttonindicator light turns green when ecoa/c is on. This setting balances fueleconomy and air conditioningcomfort. In warm weatherconditions, auto stops may occurmore frequently and the vehicleinterior may be warmer ascompared to the comfort airconditioning. This setting allowshigher humidity inside the vehicleand window fogging before theengine restarts.

Pressing the0 button during anauto stop may restart the engine toprevent window fogging. To reachcomfort levels quickly during anauto stop, the engine will restart if:. The air conditioner is off and

AUTO, Eco# , or Comfort# isselected.

. The climate control power isturned on and the system is setto AUTO, Eco# , or Comfort# mode.

. The temperature control isadjusted cooler by more than0.5°C (1°F).

h (Recirculation): Press to turnon recirculation. An indicator lightcomes on. Air is recirculated toquickly cool the inside of the vehicleor prevent outside air and odorsfrom entering.

Auto Defog: The climate controlsystem may have a sensor toautomatically detect high humidityinside the vehicle. When highhumidity is detected, the climatecontrol system may adjust tooutside air supply and turn on theair conditioner. The fan speed mayslightly increase to help preventfogging. If the climate controlsystem does not detect possiblewindow fogging, it returns to normaloperation. For eAssist vehicles,when this mode is in use auto stops



are shorter and less frequent. Toturn Auto Defog off or on, see“Climate and Air Quality” underVehicle Personalization onpage 5‑34.

Rear Window Defogger

= (Rear Window Defogger):Press to turn the rear windowdefogger on or off.

The rear window defogger turns offautomatically after about10 minutes. If turned on again, itruns for about five minutes beforeturning off. At higher speeds, therear window defogger may stay oncontinuously.

For vehicles with heated outsiderearview mirrors, they turn on withthe rear window defogger and helpto clear fog or frost from the surfaceof the mirror. See Heated Mirrors onpage 2‑16.

Notice: Do not try to clear frostor other material from the insideof the front windshield and rearwindow with a razor blade oranything else that is sharp. Thismay damage the rear windowdefogger grid and affect theradio's ability to pick up stationsclearly. The repairs would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.

Remote Start Climate ControlOperation (If Equipped): Forvehicles with the remote startfeature, the climate control systemmay run when the vehicle is startedremotely. The system uses thedriver’s previous settings to heat orcool the inside of the vehicle. Therear defog may come on duringremote start based on cold ambientconditions. If the vehicle has heatedseats, they may come on during aremote start. The heated seatindicator lights do not come onduring a remote start. See RemoteVehicle Start on page 2‑8 andHeated Front Seats on page 3‑6.

Sensors

The solar sensor on top of theinstrument panel near thewindshield monitors the solar heat.

The climate control system uses thesensor information to adjust thetemperature, fan speed,recirculation, and air delivery modefor best comfort.

If the sensor is covered, the dualautomatic climate control systemmay not work properly.



Air VentsUse the louvers located on the airvents to change the direction of theairflow.

To open a vent, move thethumbwheel to | . To close the vent,move the thumbwheel to9.

Operation Tips. Keep all outlets open whenever

possible for best systemperformance.

. Keep the paths under all seatsclear of objects to help circulatethe air inside the vehicle moreeffectively.

. Use of non-GM approved hooddeflectors can adversely affectthe performance of the system.

Maintenance

Air IntakeClear away any ice, snow, or leavesfrom the air intake at the base of thewindshield that can block the flow ofair into the vehicle.

Passenger CompartmentAir FilterThe filter removes dust, pollen, andother airborne irritants from outsideair that is pulled into the vehicle.

The filter should be replaced as partof routine scheduled maintenance.See Maintenance Schedule onpage 11‑3 for replacement intervals.For more information, see yourdealer.

ServiceThis vehicle may have the newenvironmentally friendly refrigerant,R1234yf. This refrigerant has asignificantly reduced global warmingimpact on the environment,compared to the traditionalautomotive refrigerant, R-134a. Allvehicles have a label underhoodthat identifies the refrigerant used inthe vehicle.

The refrigerant system should onlybe serviced by trained and certifiedtechnicians. The air conditioningevaporator should never be repairedor replaced by one from a salvagevehicle. It should only be replacedby a new evaporator to ensureproper and safe operation.

During service, all refrigerantsshould be reclaimed with properequipment. Venting refrigerantsdirectly to the atmosphere is harmfulto the environment and may alsocreate unsafe conditions based oninhalation, combustion, frostbite,or other health-based concerns.


Driving and Operating 9-1

Driving andOperating

Driving InformationDistracted Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2Defensive Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3Drunk Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3Control of a Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4Off-Road Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5Racing or Other CompetitiveDriving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6

Driving on Wet Roads . . . . . . . . . 9-6Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . 9-7Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8If the Vehicle Is Stuck . . . . . . . . 9-10Vehicle Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . 9-10

Starting and OperatingNew Vehicle Break-In . . . . . . . . 9-14Ignition Positions (KeyAccess) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-15

Ignition Positions (KeylessAccess) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-17

Starting the Engine . . . . . . . . . . 9-19Engine Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-22Retained AccessoryPower (RAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-23

Shifting Into Park . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-24Shifting out of Park (AutomaticTransmission) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-25

Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-25Parking over ThingsThat Burn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-25

Engine ExhaustEngine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-26Running the Vehicle WhileParked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-26

Automatic TransmissionAutomatic Transmission . . . . . 9-27Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-29

Manual TransmissionManual Transmission . . . . . . . . 9-30

BrakesAntilock BrakeSystem (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-31

Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-32Brake Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-34Hill Start Assist (HSA) . . . . . . . 9-35

Ride Control SystemsTraction ControlSystem (TCS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-35

StabiliTrak® System . . . . . . . . . 9-36Interactive Drive ControlSystem (except GS) . . . . . . . . 9-38

Interactive Drive ControlSystem (GS Only) . . . . . . . . . . 9-40

Cruise ControlCruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-41

Object Detection SystemsUltrasonic Parking Assist . . . . 9-43

FuelFuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-45Recommended Fuel . . . . . . . . . 9-46Gasoline Specifications . . . . . . 9-46California FuelRequirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-46

Fuels in Foreign Countries . . . 9-47Fuel Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-47Fuel E85 (85% Ethanol) . . . . . 9-48Filling the Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-49Filling a Portable FuelContainer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-50


9-2 Driving and Operating

TowingGeneral TowingInformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-51

Conversions and Add-OnsAdd-On ElectricalEquipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-51

Driving Information

Distracted DrivingDistraction comes in many formsand can take your focus from thetask of driving. Exercise goodjudgment and do not let otheractivities divert your attention awayfrom the road. Many localgovernments have enacted lawsregarding driver distraction. Becomefamiliar with the local laws inyour area.

To avoid distracted driving, alwayskeep your eyes on the road, handson the wheel, and mind on the drive.. Do not use a phone in

demanding driving situations.Use a hands-free method toplace or receive necessaryphone calls.

. Watch the road. Do not read,take notes, or look upinformation on phones or otherelectronic devices.

. Designate a front seatpassenger to handle potentialdistractions.

. Become familiar with vehiclefeatures before driving, such asprogramming favorite radiostations and adjusting climatecontrol and seat settings.Program all trip information intoany navigation device prior todriving.

. Wait until the vehicle is parkedto retrieve items that have fallento the floor.

. Stop or park the vehicle to tendto children.

. Keep pets in an appropriatecarrier or restraint.

. Avoid stressful conversationswhile driving, whether with apassenger or on a cell phone.



{ WARNING

Taking your eyes off the road toolong or too often could cause acrash resulting in injury or death.Focus your attention on driving.

Refer to the infotainment section formore information on using thatsystem, including pairing and usinga cell phone.

If equipped, refer to the navigationmanual for information on thatsystem, including pairing and usinga cell phone.

Defensive DrivingDefensive driving means “alwaysexpect the unexpected.” The firststep in driving defensively is to wearthe safety belt. See Safety Belts onpage 3‑8.. Assume that other road users

(pedestrians, bicyclists, andother drivers) are going to be

careless and make mistakes.Anticipate what they might doand be ready.

. Allow enough following distancebetween you and the driver infront of you.

. Focus on the task of driving.

Drunk DrivingDeath and injury associated withdrinking and driving is a globaltragedy.

{ WARNING

Drinking and then driving is verydangerous. Your reflexes,perceptions, attentiveness, andjudgment can be affected by evena small amount of alcohol. Youcan have a serious — or evenfatal — collision if you drive afterdrinking.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

Do not drink and drive or ride witha driver who has been drinking.Ride home in a cab; or if you arewith a group, designate a driverwho will not drink.

Control of a VehicleBraking, steering, and acceleratingare important factors in helping tocontrol a vehicle while driving.

BrakingBraking action involves perceptiontime and reaction time. Deciding topush the brake pedal is perceptiontime. Actually doing it isreaction time.

Average driver reaction time isabout three-quarters of a second. Inthat time, a vehicle moving at100 km/h (60 mph) travels 20 m(66 ft), which could be a lot ofdistance in an emergency.



Helpful braking tips to keep in mindinclude:. Keep enough distance between

you and the vehicle in frontof you.

. Avoid needless heavy braking.

. Keep pace with traffic.

If the engine ever stops while thevehicle is being driven, brakenormally but do not pump thebrakes. Doing so could make thepedal harder to push down. If theengine stops, there will be somepower brake assist but it will beused when the brake is applied.Once the power assist is used up, itcan take longer to stop and thebrake pedal will be harder to push.

Steering

Variable Effort Steering

Some vehicles have a steeringsystem that varies the amount ofeffort required to steer the vehicle inrelation to the speed of the vehicle.

The amount of steering effortrequired is less at slower speeds tomake the vehicle moremaneuverable and easier to park. Atfaster speeds, the steering effortincreases to provide a sport-like feelto the steering. This providesmaximum control and stability.

If the vehicle seems harder to steerthan normal when parking or drivingslowly, there may be a problem withthe system. You will still have powersteering, but steering will be stifferthan normal at slow speeds. Seeyour dealer for service.

Electric Power Steering (2.4LL4 Engine)

If your vehicle has electric powersteering, it does not have powersteering fluid. Regular maintenanceis not required.

If power steering assist is lost dueto a system malfunction, the vehiclecan be steered, but may requireincreased effort. See your dealer ifthere is a problem.

If the steering wheel is turned until itreaches the end of its travel and isheld against that position for anextended period of time, powersteering assist may be reduced.

Normal use of the power steeringassist should return when thesystem cools down.

See specific vehicle steeringmessages under Vehicle Messageson page 5‑28.

Hydraulic Power Steering (2.0LL4 Engine)

If your vehicle has hydraulic powersteering it may require maintenance.See Power Steering Fluid (2.0L L4Engine) on page 10‑22 or PowerSteering Fluid (2.4L L4 Engine withor without eAssist) on page 10‑23.

If power steering assist is lostbecause the engine stops or asystem malfunctions, the vehiclecan be steered but may requiredincreased effort. See your dealer ifthere is a problem.



Curve Tips. Take curves at a reasonable

speed.. Reduce speed before entering a

curve.. Maintain a reasonable steady

speed through the curve. Wait until the vehicle is out of

the curve before acceleratinggently into the straightaway.

Steering in Emergencies. There are some situations when

steering around a problem maybe more effective than braking.

. Holding both sides of thesteering wheel allows you to turn180 degrees without removinga hand.

. Antilock Brake System (ABS)allows steering while braking.

Off-Road Recovery

The vehicle's right wheels can dropoff the edge of a road onto theshoulder while driving. Followthese tips:

1. Ease off the accelerator andthen, if there is nothing in theway, steer the vehicle so that itstraddles the edge of thepavement.

2. Turn the steering wheel aboutone-eighth of a turn, until theright front tire contacts thepavement edge.

3. Turn the steering wheel to gostraight down the roadway.

Loss of Control

Skidding

There are three types of skids thatcorrespond to the vehicle's threecontrol systems:. Braking Skid — wheels are not

rolling.. Steering or Cornering Skid —

too much speed or steering in acurve causes tires to slip andlose cornering force.

. Acceleration Skid — too muchthrottle causes the drivingwheels to spin.

Defensive drivers avoid most skidsby taking reasonable care suited toexisting conditions, and by notoverdriving those conditions. Butskids are always possible.



If the vehicle starts to slide, followthese suggestions:. Ease your foot off the

accelerator pedal and steer theway you want the vehicle to go.The vehicle may straighten out.Be ready for a second skid if itoccurs.

. Slow down and adjust yourdriving according to weatherconditions. Stopping distancecan be longer and vehiclecontrol can be affected whentraction is reduced by water,snow, ice, gravel, or othermaterial on the road. Learn torecognize warning clues — suchas enough water, ice, or packedsnow on the road to make amirrored surface — and slowdown when you have any doubt.

. Try to avoid sudden steering,acceleration, or braking,including reducing vehicle speedby shifting to a lower gear. Anysudden changes could causethe tires to slide.

Remember: Antilock brakes helpavoid only the braking skid.

Racing or OtherCompetitive DrivingRacing, track testing, or Competitivedriving may affect the vehiclewarranty. See the warranty bookbefore using the vehicle for racingor other competitive driving.

Notice: If the vehicle is used forracing, track testing, or othercompetitive driving, the enginemay use more oil than it wouldwith normal use. Low oil levelscan damage the engine. Checkthe oil level often and at theproper level.

For the 2.0L engine: Add and keepthe oil level at 1 L (1 quart) abovethe high mark when driving underthese conditions. For information onhow to check and add oil, seeEngine Oil on page 10‑10.

Driving on Wet RoadsRain and wet roads can reducevehicle traction and affect yourability to stop and accelerate.Always drive slower in these typesof driving conditions and avoiddriving through large puddles anddeep‐standing or flowing water.

{ WARNING

Wet brakes can cause crashes.They might not work as well in aquick stop and could causepulling to one side. You couldlose control of the vehicle.

After driving through a largepuddle of water or a car/vehiclewash, lightly apply the brakepedal until the brakes worknormally.

Flowing or rushing water createsstrong forces. Driving throughflowing water could cause thevehicle to be carried away. If this

(Continued)



WARNING (Continued)

happens, you and other vehicleoccupants could drown. Do notignore police warnings and bevery cautious about trying to drivethrough flowing water.

Hydroplaning

Hydroplaning is dangerous. Watercan build up under the vehicle'stires so they actually ride on thewater. This can happen if the road iswet enough and you are going fastenough. When the vehicle ishydroplaning, it has little or nocontact with the road.

There is no hard and fast rule abouthydroplaning. The best advice is toslow down when the road is wet.

Other Rainy Weather Tips

Besides slowing down, other wetweather driving tips include:. Allow extra following distance.

. Pass with caution.

. Keep windshield wipingequipment in good shape.

. Keep the windshield washer fluidreservoir filled.

. Have good tires with propertread depth. See Tires onpage 10‑41.

. Turn off cruise control.

Highway HypnosisAlways be alert and pay attention toyour surroundings while driving.If you become tired or sleepy, find asafe place to park the vehicleand rest.

Other driving tips include:. Keep the vehicle well ventilated.. Keep the interior

temperature cool.. Keep your eyes moving — scan

the road ahead and to the sides.. Check the rearview mirror and

vehicle instruments often.

Hill and Mountain RoadsDriving on steep hills or throughmountains is different than drivingon flat or rolling terrain. Tips fordriving in these conditions include:. Keep the vehicle serviced and in

good shape.. Check all fluid levels and brakes,

tires, cooling system, andtransmission.

. Shift to a lower gear when goingdown steep or long hills.

{ WARNING

If you do not shift down, thebrakes could get so hot that theywould not work well. You wouldthen have poor braking or evennone going down a hill. You couldcrash. Shift down to let the engineassist the brakes on a steepdownhill slope.



{ WARNING

Coasting downhill in N (Neutral)or with the ignition off isdangerous. The brakes will haveto do all the work of slowing downand they could get so hot thatthey would not work well. Youwould then have poor braking oreven none going down a hill.Steering may also be affectedwhen ignition is off. You couldcrash. Always have the enginerunning and the vehicle in gearwhen going downhill.

. Stay in your own lane. Do notswing wide or cut across thecenter of the road. Drive atspeeds that let you stay in yourown lane.

. Be alert on top of hills;something could be in your lane(stalled car, accident).

. Pay attention to special roadsigns (falling rocks area, windingroads, long grades, passing orno-passing zones) and takeappropriate action.

Winter Driving

Driving on Snow or Ice

Drive carefully when there is snowor ice between the tires and theroad, creating less traction or grip.Wet ice can occur at about 0°C (32°F) when freezing rain begins to fall,resulting in even less traction. Avoiddriving on wet ice or in freezing rainuntil roads can be treated with saltor sand.

Drive with caution, whatever thecondition. Accelerate gently sotraction is not lost. Accelerating tooquickly causes the wheels to spinand makes the surface under thetires slick, so there is even lesstraction.

Try not to break the fragile traction.If you accelerate too fast, the drivewheels will spin and polish thesurface under the tires even more.

The Antilock Brake System (ABS)improves vehicle stability duringhard stops on slippery roads, butapply the brakes sooner than whenon dry pavement. See AntilockBrake System (ABS) on page 9‑31.

Allow greater following distance onany slippery road and watch forslippery spots. Icy patches canoccur on otherwise clear roads inshaded areas. The surface of acurve or an overpass can remain icywhen the surrounding roads areclear. Avoid sudden steeringmaneuvers and braking whileon ice.

Turn off cruise control on slipperysurfaces.



Blizzard Conditions

Being stuck in snow can be aserious situation. Stay with thevehicle unless there is help nearby.If possible, use RoadsideAssistance. See RoadsideAssistance Program (Mexico) onpage 13‑7 or Roadside AssistanceProgram (U.S. and Canada) onpage 13‑11. To get help and keepeveryone in the vehicle safe:. Turn on the hazard warning

flashers.. Tie a red cloth to an outside

mirror.

{ WARNING

Snow can trap engine exhaustunder the vehicle. This maycause exhaust gases to getinside. Engine exhaust containscarbon monoxide (CO) which

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

cannot be seen or smelled. It cancause unconsciousness and evendeath.

If the vehicle is stuck in the snow:. Clear away snow from aroundthe base of your vehicle,especially any that is blockingthe exhaust pipe.

. Check again from time totime to be sure snow doesnot collect there.

. Open a window about 5 cm(2 in) on the side of thevehicle that is away from thewind to bring in fresh air.

. Fully open the air outlets onor under the instrumentpanel.

. Adjust the climate controlsystem to a setting thatcirculates the air inside thevehicle and set the fan speed

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

to the highest setting. See“Climate Control Systems” inthe Index.

For more information aboutcarbon monoxide, see EngineExhaust on page 9‑26.

To save fuel, run the engine for onlyshort periods as needed to warmthe vehicle and then shut the engineoff and close the window most ofthe way to save heat. Repeat thisuntil help arrives but only when youfeel really uncomfortable from thecold. Moving about to keep warmalso helps.

If it takes some time for help toarrive, now and then when you runthe engine, push the acceleratorpedal slightly so the engine runsfaster than the idle speed. Thiskeeps the battery charged to restartthe vehicle and to signal for helpwith the headlamps. Do this as littleas possible to save fuel.



If the Vehicle Is StuckSlowly and cautiously spin thewheels to free the vehicle whenstuck in sand, mud, ice, or snow.

If stuck too severely for the tractionsystem to free the vehicle, turn thetraction system off and use therocking method. See TractionControl System (TCS) onpage 9‑35.

{ WARNING

If the vehicle's tires spin at highspeed, they can explode, and youor others could be injured. Thevehicle can overheat, causing anengine compartment fire or otherdamage. Spin the wheels as littleas possible and avoid goingabove 56 km/h (35 mph).

Rocking the Vehicle to Getit Out

Turn the steering wheel left andright to clear the area around thefront wheels. Turn off any tractionsystem. Shift back and forthbetween R (Reverse) and a lowforward gear, spinning the wheelsas little as possible. To preventtransmission wear, wait until thewheels stop spinning before shiftinggears. Release the acceleratorpedal while shifting, and presslightly on the accelerator pedalwhen the transmission is in gear.Slowly spinning the wheels in theforward and reverse directionscauses a rocking motion that couldfree the vehicle. If that does not getthe vehicle out after a few tries, itmight need to be towed out. If thevehicle does need to be towed out,see Towing the Vehicle onpage 10‑89.

Vehicle Load LimitsIt is very important to know howmuch weight the vehicle cancarry. This weight is called thevehicle capacity weight andincludes the weight of alloccupants, cargo and allnonfactory-installed options.Two labels on the vehicle showhow much weight it mayproperly carry, the Tire andLoading Information label andthe Certification label.

{ WARNING

Do not load the vehicle anyheavier than the GrossVehicle Weight Rating(GVWR), or either themaximum front or rear GrossAxle Weight Rating (GAWR).This can cause systems tobreak and change the way the

(Continued)



WARNING (Continued)

vehicle handles. This couldcause loss of control and acrash. Overloading can alsoshorten the life of the vehicle.

Tire and Loading InformationLabel

Label Example

A vehicle-specific Tire andLoading Information label isattached to the vehicle's centerpillar (B-pillar). With the driver

door open, you will find the labelattached below the door lockpost. The Tire and LoadingInformation label shows thenumber of occupant seatingpositions (1), and the maximumvehicle capacity weight (2) inkilograms and pounds.

The Tire and LoadingInformation label also shows thetire size of the originalequipment tires (3) and therecommended cold tire inflationpressures (4). For moreinformation on tires and inflationsee Tires on page 10‑41 andTire Pressure on page 10‑48.

There is also important loadinginformation on the Certificationlabel. It tells you the GrossVehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)and the Gross Axle WeightRating (GAWR) for the front andrear axle. See “CertificationLabel” later in this section.

Steps for Determining CorrectLoad Limit

1. Locate the statement “Thecombined weight ofoccupants and cargo shouldnever exceed XXX kg orXXX lbs” on your vehicle'splacard.

2. Determine the combinedweight of the driver andpassengers that will be ridingin your vehicle.

3. Subtract the combinedweight of the driver andpassengers from XXX kg orXXX lbs.

4. The resulting figure equalsthe available amount of cargoand luggage load capacity.



For example, if the “XXX”amount equals 1400 lbs andthere will be five 150 lbpassengers in your vehicle,the amount of available cargoand luggage load capacity is650 lbs (1400 − 750 (5 x 150)= 650 lbs).

5. Determine the combinedweight of luggage and cargobeing loaded on the vehicle.That weight may not safelyexceed the available cargoand luggage load capacitycalculated in Step 4.

6. If your vehicle will be towinga trailer, the load from yourtrailer will be transferred toyour vehicle. Consult thismanual to determine how thisreduces the available cargoand luggage load capacity ofyour vehicle.

This vehicle is neither designednor intended to tow a trailer.

Example 1

1. Vehicle Capacity Weight forExample 1 = 453 kg(1,000 lbs).

2. Subtract Occupant Weight @68 kg (150 lbs) × 2 = 136 kg(300 lbs).

3. Available Occupant andCargo Weight = 317 kg(700 lbs).

Example 2


2. Subtract Occupant Weight @68 kg (150 lbs) × 5 = 340 kg(750 lbs).

3. Available Cargo Weight =113 kg (250 lbs).



Example 3


2. Subtract Occupant Weight @91 kg (200 lbs) × 5 = 453 kg(1,000 lbs).

3. Available Cargo Weight =0 kg (0 lbs).

Refer to the vehicle's Tire andLoading Information label forspecific information about thevehicle's capacity weight and

seating positions. The combinedweight of the driver, passengers,and cargo should never exceedthe vehicle's capacity weight.

Certification Label

Label Example

A vehicle-specific Certificationlabel is attached to the driverside center pillar (B-pillar). Thelabel tells the gross weightcapacity of the vehicle, calledthe Gross Vehicle Weight Rating(GVWR). The GVWR includesthe weight of the vehicle, all

occupants, fuel, and cargo.Never exceed the GVWR for thevehicle, or the Gross AxleWeight Rating (GAWR) for eitherthe front or rear axle.

And, if there is a heavy load, itshould be spread out. See“Steps for Determining CorrectLoad Limit” earlier in thissection.

{ WARNING

Do not load the vehicle anyheavier than the GrossVehicle Weight Rating(GVWR), or either themaximum front or rear GrossAxle Weight Rating (GAWR).This can cause systems tobreak and change the way thevehicle handles. This couldcause loss of control and acrash. Overloading can alsoshorten the life of the vehicle.



If you put things inside thevehicle— like suitcases, tools,packages, or anythingelse— they will go as fast as thevehicle goes. If you have to stopor turn quickly, or if there is acrash, they will keep going.

{ WARNING

Things inside the vehicle canstrike and injure people in asudden stop or turn, or in acrash.

. Put things in the cargoarea of the vehicle. In thecargo area, put them asfar forward as possible.Try to spread the weightevenly.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

. Never stack heavierthings, like suitcases,inside the vehicle so thatsome of them are abovethe tops of the seats.

. Do not leave anunsecured child restraintin the vehicle.

. Secure loose items in thevehicle.

. Do not leave a seat foldeddown unless needed.

Starting andOperating

New Vehicle Break-InNotice: The vehicle does notneed an elaborate break-in. But itwill perform better in the long runif you follow these guidelines:. Do not drive at any oneconstant speed, fast or slow,for the first 805 km (500mi).Do not make full-throttlestarts. Avoid downshifting tobrake or slow the vehicle.

. Avoid making hard stops forthe first 322 km (200mi) orso. During this time the newbrake linings are not yetbroken in. Hard stops withnew linings can meanpremature wear and earlierreplacement. Follow thisbreaking-in guideline everytime you get new brakelinings.



Following break‐in, engine speedand load can be graduallyincreased.

Ignition Positions (KeyAccess)

The ignition switch has four differentpositions.

Notice: Using a tool to force thekey to turn in the ignition couldcause damage to the switch orbreak the key. Use the correctkey, make sure it is all the way in,

and turn it only with your hand.If the key cannot be turned byhand, see your dealer.

The key must be fully extended tostart the vehicle.

To shift out of P (Park), turn theignition to ON/RUN and apply thebrake pedal.

1 (STOPPING THE ENGINE/LOCK/OFF): When the vehicle is stopped,turn the ignition switch to LOCK/OFF to turn the engine off. RetainedAccessory Power (RAP) will remainactive. See Retained AccessoryPower (RAP) on page 9‑23 for moreinformation.

This is the only position from whichthe key can be removed. This locksthe steering wheel, ignition, andautomatic transmission.

Do not turn the engine off when thevehicle is moving. This will cause aloss of power assist in the brakeand steering systems and disablethe airbags.

If the vehicle must be shut off in anemergency:

1. Brake using a firm and steadypressure. Do not pump thebrakes repeatedly. This maydeplete power assist, requiringincreased brake pedal force.

2. Shift the vehicle to neutral. Thiscan be done while the vehicle ismoving. After shifting to neutral,firmly apply the brakes and steerthe vehicle to a safe location.

3. Come to a complete stop. Shiftto P (Park) with an automatictransmission, or Neutral with amanual transmission. Turn theignition to LOCK/OFF.

4. Set the parking brake. SeeParking Brake on page 9‑32.



{ WARNING

Turning off the vehicle whilemoving may cause loss of powerassist in the brake and steeringsystems and disable the airbags.While driving, only shut thevehicle off in an emergency.

If the vehicle cannot be pulled over,and must be shut off while driving,turn the ignition to ACC/ACCESSORY.

The ignition switch can bind in theLOCK/OFF position with the wheelsturned off center. If this happens,move the steering wheel from rightto left while turning the key to ACC/ACCESSORY. If this does not work,then the vehicle needs service.

2 (ACC/ACCESSORY): Thisposition unlocks the steering wheel.Some accessories can be used inthis position.

3 (ON/RUN): The ignition switchstays in this position when theengine is running. This position canbe used to operate the electricalaccessories, as well as to displaysome warning and indicator lights.This position can also be used forservice and diagnostics, and toverify the proper operation of themalfunction indicator lamp as maybe required for emission inspectionpurposes.

The battery could be drained if thekey is left in the ON/RUN positionwith the engine off. The vehiclemight not start if the battery isallowed to drain for an extendedperiod of time.

4 (START): This position starts theengine. When the engine starts,release the key. The ignition switchwill return to ON/RUN for normaldriving.

If the ignition becomes difficult toturn, see Keys on page 2‑1.

Key Lock Release

Vehicles with an automatictransmission are equipped with anelectronic key lock release system.This system is to prevent ignitionkey removal unless the shift lever isin P (Park).



The key lock release will not work ifthe battery is charged less than9 volts, or uncharged. Try chargingor jump starting the battery. SeeJump Starting (On-board witheAssist Only) on page 10‑85 orJump Starting (with or withouteAssist) on page 10‑87

If charging or jump starting thebattery does not work, there is amanual key lock release. Locate thehole below the ignition lock. Insert atool or key into the opening. Locatethe lever, and press it toward thedriver while removing the key fromthe ignition.

Ignition Positions(Keyless Access)

The vehicle has an electronickeyless ignition with pushbuttonstart.

Pressing the button cycles it throughthree modes, ACC/ACCESSORY,ON/RUN/START, and Stopping theEngine/OFF.

The transmitter must be in thevehicle for the system to operate.If the pushbutton start is notworking, the vehicle may be near a

strong radio antenna signal causinginterference to the keyless accesssystem. See Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) System Operation onpage 2‑3 for more information.

To shift out of P (Park), the vehiclemust be in ON/RUN and the brakepedal must be applied.

Stopping the Engine/OFF (NoIndicator Lights): When thevehicle is stopped, press the engineSTART/STOP button once to turnthe engine off.

If the vehicle is in P (Park), theignition will turn off, and RetainedAccessory Power (RAP) will remainactive. See Retained AccessoryPower (RAP) on page 9‑23 for moreinformation.

If the vehicle is not in P (Park), theignition will return to ACC/ACCESSORY and display amessage in the Driver InformationCenter (DIC). See TransmissionMessages on page 5‑34 for more



information. When the vehicle isshifted into P (Park), the ignitionsystem will switch to OFF.

Do not turn the engine off when thevehicle is moving. This will cause aloss of power assist in the brakeand steering systems and disablethe airbags.

If the vehicle must be shut off in anemergency:

1. Brake using a firm and steadypressure. Do not pump thebrakes repeatedly. This maydeplete power assist, requiringincreased brake pedal force.

2. Shift the vehicle to N (Neutral).This can be done while thevehicle is moving. After shiftingto N (Neutral), firmly apply thebrakes and steer the vehicle to asafe location.

3. Come to a complete stop. Shiftto P (Park) with an automatictransmission, or Neutral with amanual transmission. Turn theignition to LOCK/OFF.

4. Set the parking brake. SeeParking Brake on page 9‑32.

{ WARNING

Turning off the vehicle whilemoving may cause loss of powerassist in the brake and steeringsystems and disable the airbags.While driving, only shut thevehicle off in an emergency.

If the vehicle cannot be pulled over,and must be shut off while driving,press and hold the engine START/STOP button for longer thantwo seconds, or press twice infive seconds.

ACC/ACCESSORY (AmberIndicator Light): This mode allowsyou to use some electricalaccessories when the engine is off.

With the ignition off, pressing thebutton one time without the brakepedal applied will place the ignitionsystem in ACC/ACCESSORY.

The ignition will switch from ACC/ACCESSORY to OFF afterfive minutes to prevent batteryrun down.

ON/RUN/START (Green IndicatorLight): This mode is for driving andstarting. With the ignition off, andthe brake pedal applied, pressingthe button once will place theignition system in ON/RUN/START.Once engine cranking begins,release the button. Engine crankingwill continue until the engine starts.See Starting the Engine onpage 9‑19 for more information. Theignition will then remain in ON/RUN.

Service Only Mode

This power mode is available forservice and diagnostics, and toverify the proper operation of themalfunction indicator lamp as maybe required for emission inspectionpurposes. With the vehicle off, andthe brake pedal not applied,pressing and holding the button formore than five seconds will placethe vehicle in Service Only Mode.



The instruments and audio systemswill operate as they do in ON/RUN,but the vehicle will not be able to bedriven. The engine will not start inService Only Mode. Push the buttonagain to turn the vehicle off.

Starting the EnginePlace the transmission in theproper gear.

Automatic Transmission

Move the shift lever to P (Park) orN (Neutral). The engine will not startin any other position. To restart thevehicle when it is already moving,use N (Neutral) only.

Notice: Do not try to shift toP (Park) if the vehicle is moving.If you do, you could damage thetransmission. Shift to P (Park)only when the vehicle is stopped.

Notice: If you add electrical partsor accessories, you could changethe way the engine operates. Anyresulting damage would not be

covered by the vehicle warranty.See Add-On Electrical Equipmenton page 9‑51.

Manual Transmission

The shift lever should be inN (Neutral) and the parking brakeengaged. Hold the clutch pedaldown to the floor and start theengine. The vehicle will not start ifthe clutch pedal is not all theway down.

Starting Procedure (Key Access)

1. With your foot off the acceleratorpedal, turn the ignition key toSTART. When the engine starts,let go of the ignition.

The idle speed will go down asyour engine gets warm. Do notrace the engine immediatelyafter starting it. Operate theengine and transmission gentlyto allow the oil to warm up andlubricate all moving parts.

The vehicle has aComputer-Controlled CrankingSystem. This feature assists in

starting the engine and protectscomponents. If the ignition key isturned to the START position,and then released when theengine begins cranking, theengine will continue cranking fora few seconds or until thevehicle starts. If the engine doesnot start and the key is held inSTART for many seconds,cranking will be stopped after15 seconds to prevent crankingmotor damage. To prevent geardamage, this system alsoprevents cranking if the engineis already running. Enginecranking can be stopped byturning the ignition switch toACC/ACCESSORY orLOCK/OFF.

Notice: Cranking the engine forlong periods of time, by returningthe key to the START positionimmediately after cranking hasended, can overheat and damagethe cranking motor, and drain the



battery. Wait at least 15 secondsbetween each try, to let thecranking motor cool down.

2. If the engine does not start afterfive to 10 seconds, especially invery cold weather (below −18°Cor 0°F), it could be flooded withtoo much gasoline. Try pushingthe accelerator pedal all the wayto the floor and holding it thereas you hold the key in START,or press the START button, forup to a maximum of 15 seconds.Wait at least 15 secondsbetween each try, to allow thecranking motor to cool down.When the engine starts, let go ofthe key or button, and theaccelerator. If the vehicle startsbriefly but then stops again, dothe same thing. This clears theextra gasoline from the engine.Do not race the engineimmediately after starting it.Operate the engine andtransmission gently until the oilwarms up and lubricates allmoving parts.

Starting Procedure (KeylessAccess)

1. If the vehicle has the keylessaccess system, the transmittermust be in the vehicle. Put yourfoot on the brake pedal andpush the START/STOP button.When the engine beginscranking, let go of the button.

The idle speed will go down asyour engine gets warm. Do notrace the engine immediatelyafter starting it. Operate theengine and transmission gentlyto allow the oil to warm up andlubricate all moving parts.

If the transmitter is not in thevehicle or something isinterfering with the transmitter,the Driver Information Center(DIC) will display a message.See Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) System Operation onpage 2‑3 and Key and LockMessages on page 5‑31.

If the battery in the keylessaccess transmitter needsreplacing, a DIC messagedisplays. The vehicle can still bedriven. See “Starting the Vehiclewith a Low Transmitter Battery”in Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System Operation on page 2‑3.

The vehicle has aComputer-Controlled CrankingSystem. This feature assists instarting the engine and protectscomponents. If the STARTbutton is pressed, and thenreleased when the enginebegins cranking, the engine willcontinue cranking for a fewseconds or until the vehiclestarts. If the engine does notstart and the button is pressedfor many seconds, cranking willbe stopped after 15 seconds toprevent cranking motor damage.To prevent gear damage, thissystem also prevents cranking ifthe engine is already running.



Engine cranking can be stoppedby pressing the START button asecond time.

Notice: Cranking the engine forlong periods of time, by pressingthe START button immediatelyafter cranking has ended, canoverheat and damage thecranking motor, and drain thebattery. Wait at least 15 secondsbetween each try, to let thecranking motor cool down.

2. If the engine does not start afterfive to 10 seconds, especially invery cold weather (below −18°Cor 0°F), it could be flooded withtoo much gasoline. Try pushingthe accelerator pedal all the wayto the floor and holding it thereas you press the START button,for up to a maximum of15 seconds. Wait at least15 seconds between each try, toallow the cranking motor to cooldown. When the engine starts,let go of the button, and theaccelerator. If the vehicle startsbriefly but then stops again, do

the same thing. This clears theextra gasoline from the engine.Do not race the engineimmediately after starting it.Operate the engine andtransmission gently until the oilwarms up and lubricates allmoving parts.

eAssist Automatic EngineStart/Stop

{ WARNING

Exiting the vehicle without firstshifting into P (Park) may causethe vehicle to move. You or othersmay be injured. Because thevehicle has the automatic enginestart/stop feature, the vehicle'sengine might seem to be shut off;however, once the brake pedal isreleased, the engine will start upagain.

Shift to P (Park) and turn theignition to LOCK/OFF, beforeexiting the vehicle.

Vehicles with eAssist have anautomatic engine start/stop feature.After the engine is started and hasreached operating temperature, theauto stop feature may cause theengine to turn off when the brakesare applied and the vehicle comesto a complete stop. The vehicle mayremain in auto stop for up totwo minutes. When the brake isreleased or the accelerator pedal isapplied, the engine will start. Theengine will continue to run until thenext auto stop.

AUTO STOP on the tachometersignifies that the engine is in autostop mode. See Tachometer onpage 5‑11. When the vehicle isturned off, the tachometer will moveto OFF. If the driver door is openedwhile in auto stop mode, a chimewill sound.

To restart the engine during autostop, release the brake pedal orpress the accelerator pedal. Theengine starts immediately. Thevehicle continues to run until thenext stop.



There are several conditions whichmay prevent an auto stop or causean auto start.

The Engine Will RemainRunning When:. The engine, transmission,

or high voltage battery is notwarmed up yet.

. The outside temperature is lessthan −20°C (−4°F).

. The air conditioning or defrostsystem need the compressor tomaintain vehicle comfort. SeeDual Automatic Climate ControlSystem on page 8‑1 The warmerit is outside, the shorter the timebefore the engine is restarted toprovide cabin cooling. Tomaximize fuel economy, use theeco air conditioning mode.

. The shift lever is in P (Park),N (Neutral), R (Reverse),or M (Manual Mode).

. The high voltage battery packcharge is low.

. The hood is not fully closed.

. Brake pedal pressure is low.

. If the MIL is on, auto stop maybe prevented.

. High humidity is detected.

The Engine Will Restart When:. The brake pedal is released.. The accelerator pedal is applied.. Shifting out of D (Drive) to any

other gear.. The air conditioning or defrost

system need the compressor tomaintain vehicle comfort. SeeDual Automatic Climate ControlSystem on page 8‑1. Thewarmer it is outside, the shorterthe time before the engine isrestarted to provide cabincooling. To maximize fueleconomy, use the eco airconditioning mode.

. The climate control system isturned from off to normal airconditioning or defrost. See DualAutomatic Climate ControlSystem on page 8‑1.

. The engine is required to run foreither heater or climate controlperformance. See DualAutomatic Climate ControlSystem on page 8‑1.

. The high voltage battery packcharge is low and requiresrecharging.

. Auto stop time is greater thantwo minutes.

. The hood is opened.

Engine HeaterThe engine coolant heater,if available, can help in cold weatherconditions at or below −18°C (0°F)for easier starting and better fueleconomy during engine warm-up.Plug in the coolant heater at leastfour hours before starting thevehicle. An internal thermostat in



the plug-end of the cord will preventengine coolant heater operation attemperatures above −18°C (0°F).

To Use the Engine CoolantHeater

1. Turn off the engine.

2. Open the hood and unwrap theelectrical cord.

The electrical cord is located onthe passenger side of the enginecompartment, between thefender and the air cleaner.

3. Plug it into a normal, grounded110-volt AC outlet.

{ WARNING

Plugging the cord into anungrounded outlet could cause anelectrical shock. Also, the wrongkind of extension cord couldoverheat and cause a fire. Youcould be seriously injured. Plugthe cord into a properly groundedthree-prong 110-volt AC outlet.If the cord will not reach, use aheavy-duty three-prong extensioncord rated for at least 15 amps.

4. Before starting the engine, besure to unplug and store thecord as it was before to keep itaway from moving engine parts.

The length of time the heater shouldremain plugged in depends onseveral factors. Ask a dealer in thearea where you will be parking thevehicle for the best advice on this.

Retained AccessoryPower (RAP)These vehicle accessories can beused for up to 10 minutes after theengine is turned off:. Audio System. Power Windows. Sunroof (If Equipped). Auxiliary Power Outlet

Power to the audio system willcontinue to operate for up to10 minutes or until the driver door isopened.

Power to the power windows andsunroof will continue to operate forup to 10 minutes or until any door isopened.

All of these features will work whenthe ignition is in ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY.



Shifting Into ParkUse this procedure to shift intoP (Park):

1. Hold the brake pedal down andset the parking brake.

See Parking Brake onpage 9‑32.

2. Hold the button on the shift leverand push the lever toward thefront of the vehicle into P (Park).


4. Remove the key.

Leaving the Vehicle with theEngine Running

{ WARNING

It can be dangerous to leave thevehicle with the engine running.It could overheat and catch fire.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

It is dangerous to get out of thevehicle if the shift lever is not fullyin P (Park) with the parking brakefirmly set. The vehicle can roll.

Do not leave the vehicle when theengine is running. If you have leftthe engine running, the vehiclecan move suddenly. You or otherscould be injured. To be sure thevehicle will not move, even whenyou are on fairly level ground,always set the parking brake andmove the shift lever to P (Park).See Shifting Into Park onpage 9‑24.

If you have to leave the vehicle withthe engine running, the vehicle mustbe in P (Park) and the parkingbrake set.

Release the button and check thatthe shift lever cannot be moved outof P (Park).

Torque Lock

Torque lock is when the weight ofthe vehicle puts too much force onthe parking pawl in thetransmission. This happens whenparking on a hill and shifting thetransmission into P (Park) is notdone properly; then it is difficult toshift out of P (Park). To preventtorque lock, set the parking brakeand then shift into P (Park). To findout how, see “Shifting Into Park”listed previously.

If torque lock does occur, thevehicle may need to be pusheduphill by another vehicle to relievethe parking pawl pressure, so youcan shift out of P (Park).



Shifting out of Park(Automatic Transmission)This vehicle is equipped with anelectronic shift lock release system.The shift lock release isdesigned to:. Prevent ignition key removal

unless the shift lever is inP (Park) with the shift leverbutton fully released.

. Prevent movement of the shiftlever out of P (Park) unless theignition is in ON/RUN and thebrake pedal is applied.

The shift lock release is alwaysfunctional except in the case of anuncharged or low voltage (less than9‐volt) battery.

If the vehicle has an unchargedbattery or a battery with low voltage,try charging or jump starting thebattery. See Jump Starting(On-board with eAssist Only) onpage 10‑85 or Jump Starting (withor without eAssist) on page 10‑87

To shift out of P (Park):

1. Apply the brake pedal.

2. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN.

3. Press the shift lever button.

4. Move the shift lever to thedesired position.

If still unable to shift out of P (Park):

1. Fully release the shift leverbutton.

2. Hold the brake pedal down andpress the shift lever buttonagain.

3. Move the shift lever to thedesired position.

If you still cannot move the shiftlever from P (Park), consult yourdealer or a professional towingservice.

ParkingIf the vehicle has a manualtransmission, before getting out ofthe vehicle, move the shift lever intoR (Reverse) if parking on a downhill

slope. On a level surface or anuphill slope, use 1 (First) gear.Firmly apply the parking brake. Turnthe wheels toward the curb for adownhill slope, or away from thecurb for an uphill slope. Once theshift lever has been placed into gearwith the clutch pedal pressed in,turn the ignition key to LOCK/OFF,remove the key, and release theclutch.

Parking over ThingsThat Burn

{ WARNING

Things that can burn could touchhot exhaust parts under thevehicle and ignite. Do not parkover papers, leaves, dry grass,or other things that can burn.



Engine Exhaust

{ WARNING

Engine exhaust contains carbonmonoxide (CO) which cannot beseen or smelled. Exposure to COcan cause unconsciousness andeven death.

Exhaust may enter the vehicle if:. The vehicle idles in areaswith poor ventilation (parkinggarages, tunnels, deep snowthat may block underbodyairflow or tail pipes).

. The exhaust smells orsounds strange or different.

. The exhaust system leaksdue to corrosion or damage.

. The vehicle exhaust systemhas been modified, damaged,or improperly repaired.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

. There are holes or openingsin the vehicle body fromdamage or aftermarketmodifications that are notcompletely sealed.

If unusual fumes are detected orif it is suspected that exhaust iscoming into the vehicle:

. Drive it only with the windowscompletely down.

. Have the vehicle repairedimmediately.

Never park the vehicle with theengine running in an enclosedarea such as a garage or abuilding that has no fresh airventilation.

Running the VehicleWhile ParkedIt is better not to park with theengine running.

If the vehicle is left with the enginerunning, follow the proper steps tobe sure the vehicle will not move.See Shifting Into Park on page 9‑24and Engine Exhaust on page 9‑26.If the vehicle has a manualtransmission, see Parking onpage 9‑25.



AutomaticTransmission

The automatic transmission has ashift lever located on the consolebetween the seats.

The mode or selected gear is shownin the instrument cluster.

P (Park): This position locks thedrive wheels. It is the best positionto use when starting the enginebecause the vehicle cannot moveeasily.

{ WARNING

It is dangerous to get out of thevehicle if the shift lever is not fullyin P (Park) with the parking brakefirmly set. The vehicle can roll.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

Do not leave the vehicle when theengine is running. If you have leftthe engine running, the vehiclecan move suddenly. You or otherscould be injured. To be sure thevehicle will not move, even whenyou are on fairly level ground,always set the parking brake andmove the shift lever to P (Park).See Shifting Into Park onpage 9‑24.

Make sure the shift lever is fully inP (Park) before starting the engine.The vehicle has an automatictransmission shift lock controlsystem. The regular brake must befully applied first and then the shiftlever button pressed before shiftingfrom P (Park) when the ignition keyis in ON/RUN. If you cannot shift outof P (Park), ease pressure on theshift lever, then push the shift leverall the way into P (Park) as youmaintain brake application. Then



press the shift lever button andmove the shift lever into anothergear. See Shifting out of Park(Automatic Transmission) onpage 9‑25.

Without the brake pedal applied, thecontrol indicator will be on.

If the shift lever is not in P (Park)when the ignition is turned to OFF,the control indicator and P will flash.

R (Reverse): Use this gear toback up.

Notice: Shifting to R (Reverse)while the vehicle is movingforward could damage thetransmission. The repairs wouldnot be covered by the vehiclewarranty. Shift to R (Reverse) onlyafter the vehicle is stopped.

To rock the vehicle back and forth toget out of snow, ice, or sand withoutdamaging the transmission, see Ifthe Vehicle Is Stuck on page 9‑10.

N (Neutral): In this position, theengine does not connect with thewheels. To restart the engine whenthe vehicle is already moving, useN (Neutral) only with the brake pedalapplied.

{ WARNING

Shifting into a drive gear while theengine is running at high speed isdangerous. Unless your foot isfirmly on the brake pedal, thevehicle could move very rapidly.You could lose control and hit

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

people or objects. Do not shiftinto a drive gear while the engineis running at high speed.

Notice: Shifting out of P (Park) orN (Neutral) with the enginerunning at high speed maydamage the transmission. Therepairs would not be covered bythe vehicle warranty. Be sure theengine is not running at highspeed when shifting the vehicle.

D (Drive): This position is fornormal driving. It provides the bestfuel economy. If more power isneeded for passing, and thevehicle is:. Going less than 56 km/h

(35 mph), push the acceleratorpedal about halfway down.

. Going about 56 km/h (35 mph) ormore, push the accelerator allthe way down.



Notice: If the vehicle seems toaccelerate slowly or not shiftgears when you go faster, andyou continue to drive the vehiclethat way, you could damage thetransmission. Have the vehicleserviced right away.

Manual Mode

Driver Shift Control (DSC)

Notice: Driving with the engine ata high rpm without upshiftingwhile using Driver Shift Control(DSC), could damage the vehicle.Always upshift when necessarywhile using DSC.

DSC allows you to shift anautomatic transmission similar to amanual transmission. To use theDSC feature:

1. Move the shift lever to the leftfrom D (Drive) into the side gatemarked with (+) and (−).

2. Press the shift lever forward toupshift or rearward to downshift.

While using the DSC feature, thevehicle will have firmer, quickershifting. You can use this for sportdriving or when climbing or

descending hills, to stay in gearlonger, or to downshift for morepower or engine braking.

The transmission will only allow youto shift into gears appropriate for thevehicle speed and enginerevolutions per minute (rpm). Thetransmission will not automaticallyshift to the next lower gear if theengine rpm is too high, nor to thenext higher gear when the maximumengine rpm is reached.

While in the DSC mode, thetransmission will automaticallydownshift when the vehicle comesto a stop. This will allow for morepower during take-off.

When accelerating the vehicle froma stop in snowy and icy conditions,you may want to shift into secondgear. A higher gear allows thevehicle to gain more traction onslippery surfaces. Vehicles with aturbocharged engine may also startin third gear.



Manual Transmission

This is the shift pattern for thesix-speed manual transmission.

To operate the transmission:

Notice: Do not rest your hand onthe shift lever while driving. Thepressure could cause prematurewear in the transmission. Therepairs would not be covered bythe vehicle warranty.

Notice: Do not rest your foot onthe clutch pedal while driving orwhile stopped. The pressure cancause premature wear in theclutch. The repairs would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.

1 (First): Press the clutch pedalfully to the pedal stop and shift into1 (First). Then slowly let up on theclutch pedal as you press theaccelerator pedal.

If you come to a complete stop andit is hard to shift into 1 (First), putthe shift lever in Neutral and let upon the clutch. Press the clutch pedalback down. Then shift into 1 (First).

2 (Second): Press the clutch pedalas you let up on the acceleratorpedal and shift into 2 (Second).Then, slowly let up on the clutchpedal as you press the acceleratorpedal.

3 (Third), 4 (Fourth), 5 (Fifth), and6 (Sixth): Shift into 3 (Third),4 (Fourth), 5 (Fifth), and 6 (Sixth) thesame way you do for 2 (Second).Slowly let up on the clutch pedal asyou press the accelerator pedal. Forthe best fuel economy, use 6 (Sixth)gear whenever vehicle speed anddriving conditions allow.

The vehicle may have an up-shiftlight in the instrument cluster. SeeUp-Shift Light on page 5‑20.

{ WARNING

If you skip a gear when youdownshift, you could lose controlof the vehicle. You could injureyourself or others. Do not shiftdown more than one gear at atime when you downshift.



Notice: Do not skip gears whileupshifting. This can causepremature wear in thetransmission. The repairs wouldnot be covered by the vehiclewarranty.

To stop, let up on the acceleratorpedal and press the brake pedal.Just before the vehicle stops, pressthe clutch pedal and the brakepedal, and shift to Neutral.

Neutral: Use this position whenyou start or idle the engine. Theshift lever is in Neutral when it iscentered in the shift pattern, not inany gear.

R (Reverse): To back up, with thevehicle at a complete stop, pressdown the clutch pedal. Then pull upon the button on the shift lever, andshift into R (Reverse). Let up on theclutch pedal slowly while pressingthe accelerator pedal. If R (Reverse)gear does not engage, shift thetransmission to Neutral, release theclutch pedal, and press it backdown. Repeat the gear selection.

Notice: Shifting to R (Reverse)while the vehicle is movingforward could damage thetransmission. The repairs wouldnot be covered by the vehiclewarranty. Shift to R (Reverse) onlyafter the vehicle is stopped.

Use R (Reverse) along with theparking brake to park the vehicle.

When operating, press the clutchpedal down completely. Do not usethe pedal as a foot rest.

Some vehicles have a DriverInformation Center (DIC) with anECO Drive Assist Menu thatcontains a shift indicator. See DriverInformation Center (DIC) onpage 5‑24.

Brakes

Antilock BrakeSystem (ABS)This vehicle has the Antilock BrakeSystem (ABS), an advancedelectronic braking system that helpsprevent a braking skid.

When the vehicle begins to driveaway, ABS checks itself.A momentary motor or clicking noisemight be heard while this test isgoing on, and it might even benoticed that the brake pedal movesa little. This is normal.

If there is a problem with ABS, thiswarning light stays on. See AntilockBrake System (ABS) Warning Lighton page 5‑19.



If driving safely on a wet road and itbecomes necessary to slam on thebrakes and continue braking toavoid a sudden obstacle, acomputer senses that the wheelsare slowing down. If one of thewheels is about to stop rolling, thecomputer will separately work thebrakes at each wheel.

ABS can change the brake pressureto each wheel, as required, fasterthan any driver could. This can helpyou steer around the obstacle whilebraking hard.

As the brakes are applied, thecomputer keeps receiving updateson wheel speed and controlsbraking pressure accordingly.

Remember: ABS does not changethe time needed to get a foot up tothe brake pedal or always decreasestopping distance. If you get tooclose to the vehicle in front of you,

there will not be enough time toapply the brakes if that vehiclesuddenly slows or stops. Alwaysleave enough room up ahead tostop, even with ABS.

Using ABS

Do not pump the brakes. Just holdthe brake pedal down firmly and letABS work. You might hear the ABSpump or motor operating and feelthe brake pedal pulsate, but this isnormal.

Braking in Emergencies

ABS allows you to steer and brakeat the same time. In manyemergencies, steering can helpmore than even the very bestbraking.

Parking Brake

The vehicle has an Electric ParkingBrake (EPB). The switch for theEPB is on the center console. TheEPB can always be activated, evenif the ignition is off. To preventdraining the battery, avoid repeatedcycles of the EPB system when theengine is not running.

The system has a parking brakestatus light and a parking brakewarning light. See Electric ParkingBrake Light on page 5‑18. There arealso three parking brake related



Driver Information Center (DIC)messages. See Brake SystemMessages on page 5‑29 for moreinformation. In case of insufficientelectrical power, the EPB cannot beapplied or released.

Before leaving the vehicle, checkthe parking brake status light toensure that the parking brake isapplied.

EPB Apply

The EPB can be applied any timethe vehicle is stopped. The EPB isapplied by momentarily lifting up onthe EPB switch. Once fully applied,the parking brake status light will beon. While the brake is being applied,the status light will flash until it isfully applied. If the light does notcome on, or remains flashing, youneed to have the vehicle serviced.Do not drive the vehicle if theparking brake status light is flashing.See your dealer. See ElectricParking Brake Light on page 5‑18for more information.

If the EPB is applied while thevehicle is in motion, a chime willsound, and a DIC message will bedisplayed. The vehicle willdecelerate as long as the switch isheld in the up position. Releasingthe EPB switch during decelerationwill release the parking brake. If theswitch is held in the up position untilthe vehicle comes to a stop, theEPB will remain applied.

If the parking brake status lightflashes continuously, then the EPBis only partially applied or released,or there is a problem with the EPB.A DIC message will be displayed.If this light flashes continuously,release the EPB, and attempt toapply it again. If this light continuesto flash, do not drive the vehicle.See your dealer.

If the parking brake warning light ison, the EPB has detected an errorin another system and is operatingwith reduced functionality. To applythe EPB when this light is on, lift upon the EPB switch and hold it in theup position. Full application of the

parking brake by the EPB systemmay take a longer period of timethan normal when this light is on.Continue to hold the switch until theparking brake status light remainson. If the parking brake warning lightis on, see your dealer.

For maximum EPB force whenparking on a hill, pull the EPBswitch twice.

If the EPB fails to apply, the rearwheels should be blocked toprevent vehicle movement.

EPB Release

To release the EPB, place theignition in the ACC/ACCESSORY orON/RUN position, apply and holdthe brake pedal, and push downmomentarily on the EPB switch.If you attempt to release the EPBwithout the brake pedal applied, achime will sound, and a DICmessage will be displayed. TheEPB is released when the parkingbrake status light is off.



If the parking brake warning light ison, the EPB has detected an errorin another system and is operatingwith reduced functionality. Torelease the EPB when this light ison, push down on the EPB switchand hold it in the down position.EPB release may take a longerperiod of time than normal when thislight is on. Continue to hold theswitch until the parking brake statuslight is off. If the light is on, see yourdealer.

Notice: Driving with the parkingbrake on can overheat the brakesystem and cause prematurewear or damage to brake systemparts. Make sure that the parkingbrake is fully released and thebrake warning light is off beforedriving.

Automatic EPB Release

The EPB will automatically release ifthe vehicle is running, placed intogear, and an attempt is made todrive away. Avoid rapid accelerationwhen the EPB is applied, topreserve parking brake lining life.

The EPB can also be used toprevent roll back for vehicles with amanual transmission taking off on ahill. In a situation where no roll backis desired, an applied EPB will allowboth feet to be used for the clutchand accelerator pedals inpreparation for starting the vehiclemoving in the intended direction.

In this situation, perform the normalclutch and/or accelerator actionsrequired to begin moving thevehicle. There is no need to pushthe switch to release the EPB.

Brake AssistThis vehicle has a brake assistfeature designed to assist the driverin stopping or decreasing vehiclespeed in emergency drivingconditions. This feature uses thestability system hydraulic brakecontrol module to supplement thepower brake system underconditions where the driver hasquickly and forcefully applied thebrake pedal in an attempt to quicklystop or slow down the vehicle. Thestability system hydraulic brakecontrol module increases brakepressure at each corner of thevehicle until the ABS activates.Minor brake pedal pulsation orpedal movement during this time isnormal and the driver shouldcontinue to apply the brake pedal asthe driving situation dictates. Thebrake assist feature willautomatically disengage when thebrake pedal is released or brakepedal pressure is quicklydecreased.



Hill Start Assist (HSA)Some vehicles have a Hill StartAssist (HSA) feature, which may beuseful when the vehicle is stoppedon a grade. This feature is designedto prevent the vehicle from rolling,either forward or rearward, duringvehicle drive off. After the drivercompletely stops and holds thevehicle in a complete standstill on agrade, HSA will be automaticallyactivated. During the transitionperiod between when the driverreleases the brake pedal and startsto accelerate to drive off on a grade,HSA holds the braking pressure toensure that there is no rolling. Thebrakes will automatically releasewhen the accelerator pedal isapplied within the two‐secondwindow. It will not activate if thevehicle is in a drive gear and facingdownhill or if the vehicle is facinguphill and in R (Reverse).

Ride Control Systems

Traction ControlSystem (TCS)The vehicle may have a TractionControl System (TCS) that limitswheel slip. The system operates if itsenses that one or both of the frontwheels are slipping or beginning tolose traction. When this happens,the system reduces engine powerand/or applies brake pressure to theslipping wheel(s).

The system may be heard or feltwhile it is working, but this isnormal.

TCS automatically comes onwhenever the vehicle is started. Tolimit wheel slip, especially inslippery road conditions, the systemshould always be left on. But, TCScan be turned off if needed.

d flashes to indicate that TCS isactive. See Traction Control System(TCS)/StabiliTrak® Light onpage 5‑20.

If there is a problem detected withTCS, the appropriate messagedisplays in the Driver InformationCenter (DIC). See Ride ControlSystem Messages on page 5‑32.When this message is displayedand d comes on and stays on, thevehicle is safe to drive but thesystem is not operational. Drivingshould be adjusted accordingly.

If d comes on and stays on, resetthe system. To reset:

1. Stop the vehicle.

2. Turn the engine off and wait15 seconds.

3. Start the engine.

If d still comes on and stays on, thevehicle needs service.

Notice: Do not repeatedly brakeor accelerate heavily when TCS isoff. The vehicle's driveline couldbe damaged.



With Interactive Drive ControlSystem

Without Interactive Drive ControlSystem

TCS can be turned off by pressingand releasing the TCS/StabiliTrakbutton. When TCS is turned off, icomes on, and the appropriate DICmessage displays. See Ride ControlSystem Messages on page 5‑32.With TCS turned off, the systemdoes not limit wheel slip. Drivingshould be adjusted accordingly. SeeTraction Off Light on page 5‑20.

Press and release the TCS/StabiliTrak button again to turn thesystem back on.

It may be necessary to turn thesystem off if the vehicle gets stuckin sand, mud, or snow and rockingthe vehicle is required. See If theVehicle Is Stuck on page 9‑10. Seealso Winter Driving on page 9‑8 forinformation on using TCS whendriving in snowy or icy conditions.

Adding non-GM accessories canaffect the vehicle performance. SeeAccessories and Modifications onpage 10‑3.

StabiliTrak® SystemThe vehicle may have a vehiclestability enhancement system calledStabiliTrak. It is an advancedcomputer-controlled system thatassists with directional control of thevehicle in difficult driving conditions.



StabiliTrak activates when thecomputer senses a differencebetween the intended path and thedirection the vehicle is actuallytraveling. StabiliTrak selectivelyapplies braking pressure to thevehicle brakes to help steer thevehicle in the intended direction.

StabiliTrak comes on automaticallywhenever the vehicle is started. Toassist with directional control of thevehicle, the system should alwaysbe left on.

When StabiliTrak activates, dflashes on the instrument cluster.A noise may be heard or vibrationmay be felt in the brake pedal. Thisis normal. Continue to steer thevehicle in the intended direction.See Traction Control System (TCS)/StabiliTrak® Light on page 5‑20.

If a problem is detected withStabiliTrak, the appropriatemessage is displayed in the DriverInformation Center (DIC). See RideControl System Messages onpage 5‑32. When this message isdisplayed and d comes on andstays on, the vehicle is safe to drivebut the system is not operational.Driving should be adjustedaccordingly.

If d comes on and stays on, resetthe system. To reset:

1. Stop the vehicle.

2. Turn the engine off and wait15 seconds.

3. Start the engine.

If d still comes on and stays on, thevehicle needs service.

With Interactive Drive ControlSystem



Without Interactive Drive ControlSystem

. To turn off both StabiliTrak andTCS, press and hold the TCS/StabiliTrak button until i and gilluminate and the appropriateDIC message is displayed. SeeRide Control System Messageson page 5‑32.

When StabiliTrak is turned off,the system will not assist withdirectional control of the vehicleor limit wheel spin. Drivingshould be adjusted accordingly.See StabiliTrak® OFF Light onpage 5‑20.

. Press and release the TCS/StabiliTrak button again to turnthe system back on.

If cruise control is being used whenStabiliTrak activates, cruise controlwill automatically disengage. Pressthe cruise control button toreengage when road conditionsallow. See Cruise Control onpage 9‑41.

Interactive Drive ControlSystem (except GS)

The vehicle may have theInteractive Drive Control System(IDCS). IDCS adapts to the drivingstyle and preference of the driverwithin one of three driving modes:

Standard: Use for normal city andhighway driving. This settingprovides precise, comfortablehandling. This is a fully automaticmode for city and highway driving.



Tour: Use for long-distancehighway driving. This settingprovides a smooth, soft ride. Pressand release the TOUR button andthe light on the button comes on.This mode provides a comfortable,smooth ride. Press the button againand the system returns to theStandard mode.

Sport: Use where personalpreference or road conditionsdemand more control. This settingprovides responsive, controlledhandling. Press and release theSPORT button. The light on thebutton comes on, and theappropriate message displays onthe DIC. Press the button again.The system returns to the Standardmode and the appropriate messagedisplays on the DIC.

IDCS automatically comes on in theStandard mode when the vehicle isstarted. When the Sport and Tourmodes are turned off, the systemreturns to the Standard mode.

Standard Mode. The shock absorbers allow a

normal ride.. The powertrain reacts normally

to the accelerator pedal.. Power steering assistance is

normal.

Tour Mode. The shock absorbers allow a

softer ride.. The powertrain reacts normally


normal.

Sport Mode. The shock absorbers stiffen to

provide better contact with theroad surface.

. The powertrain reacts morequickly to the accelerator pedal.

. Power steering assistance isreduced.

Drive Mode Control

Drive Mode Control (DMC) analyzesthe driving style and the active stateof the vehicle and automaticallychanges the settings within theselected driving mode. When thereis a more noticeable change indriving style or conditions, thedriving mode is changed to Sportuntil the previous driving stylereturns.

If Standard mode is selected andsport driving is detected, severalsettings of the Standard modechange to sport settings. If sportdriving increases, DMC changes toSport mode.

If Tour mode is selected and suddenbraking or cornering is necessary,DMC changes the suspensionsettings to Sport mode to increasevehicle stability.

When the driving characteristic orthe active state of the vehiclereturns to the previous style, DMCchanges the settings to thepreselected driving mode.



Interactive Drive ControlSystem (GS Only)

The vehicle may have theInteractive Drive Control System(IDCS). IDCS adapts to thepreference of the driver within oneof three driving modes:

Standard: Default mode used fornormal and long–distance highwaydriving. This setting provides asmooth soft ride.

Sport: Use for normal city andlong-distance highway driving. Thissetting provides precise,comfortable handling. Press andrelease the SPORT button and thelight on the button comes on. Pressthe button again and the systemreturns to the Standard mode.

GS: Use where personalpreference or road conditionsdemand more control. This settingprovides responsive, controlledsteering and handling. Press andrelease the GS button. The light onthe button comes on, and theappropriate message displays onthe DIC. Press the button again.The system returns to the Standardmode and the appropriate messagedisplays on the DIC.

IDCS automatically comes on in theStandard mode when the vehicle isstarted. When the Sport and GSmodes are turned off, the systemreturns to the Standard mode.

Standard Mode. The shock absorbers allow a

normal ride.. The powertrain reacts normally


normal.

Sport Mode. The shock absorbers stiffen to

provide better contact with theroad surface.

. The powertrain reacts normallyto the accelerator pedal.

. Power steering assistance isnormal.



GS Mode. Additional stiffness in the shock

absorbers for increased bodycontrol.

. The powertrain reacts morequickly to the accelerator pedal.

. Power steering assistance isreduced.

There is no automatic Drive ModeControl (DMC) in this vehicle.

Cruise ControlWith cruise control, the vehicle canmaintain a speed of about 40 km/h(25 mph) or more without keepingyour foot on the accelerator. Cruisecontrol does not work at speedsbelow 40 km/h (25 mph).

On vehicles with the TractionControl System (TCS) or StabiliTrak,the system may begin to limit wheelspin while you are using cruisecontrol. If this happens, the cruisecontrol will automatically disengage.See Traction Control System (TCS)on page 9‑35 or StabiliTrak® Systemon page 9‑36.

{ WARNING

Cruise control can be dangerouswhere you cannot drive safely ata steady speed. So, do not usethe cruise control on windingroads or in heavy traffic.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

Cruise control can be dangerouson slippery roads. On such roads,fast changes in tire traction cancause excessive wheel slip, andyou could lose control. Do not usecruise control on slippery roads.

1 (On/Off): Press to turn thecruise control system on and off. Anindicator light will turn on or off inthe instrument cluster.



* (Cancel): Press to disengagecruise control without erasing theset speed from memory.

RES/+ (Resume/Accelerate):Move the thumbwheel up to makethe vehicle resume to a previouslyset speed or to accelerate.

SET/− (Set/Coast): Move thethumbwheel down to set the speedand activate cruise control or makethe vehicle decelerate.

Setting Cruise Control

If the cruise button is on when not inuse, it could get bumped and go intocruise when not desired. Keep thecruise control switch off when cruiseis not being used.

1. Press 1 to turn the cruisecontrol system on. The indicatorlight in the instrument clustercomes on.

2. Get to the speed desired.

3. Move the thumbwheel downtoward SET/− and release it.The desired set speed brieflyappears in the instrumentcluster.

4. Take your foot off the acceleratorpedal.

Resuming a Set Speed

If the cruise control is set at adesired speed and then the brakesare applied or the* button ispressed, the cruise control isdisengaged without erasing the setspeed from memory.

Once the vehicle reaches about40 km/h (25 mph) or more, move thethumbwheel up toward RES/+briefly. The vehicle returns to theprevious set speed and stays there.

Increasing Speed While UsingCruise Control

If the cruise control system isalready activated:. Move the thumbwheel up toward

RES/+ and hold it until thevehicle accelerates to thedesired speed, then release it.

. To increase the speed in smallamounts, move the thumbwheelup toward RES/+ briefly andthen release it. Each time this isdone, the vehicle goes about1.6 km/h (1 mph) faster.

Reducing Speed While UsingCruise Control

If the cruise control system isalready activated:. Move the thumbwheel toward

SET/− and hold until the desiredlower speed is reached, thenrelease it.

. To slow down in small amounts,move the thumbwheel towardSET/− briefly and then release it.



Each time this is done, thevehicle goes about 1.6 km/h(1 mph) slower.

Passing Another Vehicle WhileUsing Cruise Control

Use the accelerator pedal toincrease the vehicle's speed. Whenyou take your foot off the pedal, thevehicle will slow down to theprevious set cruise control speed.

Using Cruise Control on Hills

How well the cruise control workson hills depends upon the vehicle'sspeed, load, and the steepness ofthe hills. When going up steep hills,you might have to step on theaccelerator pedal to maintain thevehicle's speed. When goingdownhill, you might have to brake orshift to a lower gear to maintain thevehicle's speed. When the brakesare applied, the cruise controlshuts off.

Ending Cruise Control

There are three ways to end cruisecontrol:. To disengage cruise control,

step lightly on the brake pedal orclutch; when cruise controldisengages, the indicator lightwill not be lit.

. Press* on the steering wheel.

. To turn off the cruise control,press 1 on the steering wheel.

Erasing Speed Memory

The cruise control set speed iserased from memory by pressing 1or if the ignition is turned off.

Object DetectionSystems

Ultrasonic Parking AssistIf available, the Ultrasonic Front andRear Parking Assist (UFRPA) orUltrasonic Rear Parking Assist(URPA) system assists the driverwith parking and avoiding objects.At speeds less than 8 km/h (5 mph),the system detects objects up to1.5 m (5 ft) behind the vehicle, andat least 25 cm (10 in) off the ground.If the vehicle has the UFRPAsystem, it also detects objects 1.2 m(4 ft) in front of the vehicle.

{ WARNING

The parking assist system doesnot detect children, pedestrians,bicyclists, animals, or objectslocated below the bumper or thatare too close or too far from thevehicle. It is not available at

(Continued)



WARNING (Continued)

speeds greater than 8 km/h(5 mph). To prevent injury, death,or vehicle damage, even withparking assist, always check thearea around the vehicle andcheck all mirrors before movingforward or backing.

How the System Works

When the shift lever is moved intoR (Reverse), the sensors areautomatically turned on. A singletone sounds to indicate the systemis working. After the vehicle isshifted out of R (Reverse), the rearsensors are turned off and the frontsensors (if equipped) stay on untilthe vehicle is above a speed of 8km/h (5 mph). For the front parkassist system to be active againwithout shifting into R (Reverse), thepark assist button next to the radiomust be pressed. See “Turning theSystem On and Off” later in thissection.

An obstacle is indicated by audiblebeeps. The interval between thebeeps becomes shorter as thevehicle gets closer to the obstacle.When the distance is less than30 cm (12 in) the beeping is acontinuous tone for five seconds.

Objects Detected by Both theFront and Rear Sensors (IfEquipped)

In general, if objects are detected atthe same time near both the frontand rear bumpers while backing up,the beeps only sound to indicatethat objects are close to the rearbumper.

However, if an object is very closeto the front bumper while the vehicleis backing up and at the same timethere is another object further not asclose to the rear bumper, then thebeeps only sound to indicate theobject that is closer to the frontbumper.

Turning the System On and Off

The URPA/UFRPA system can beturned on and off using the parkassist button located next to theradio.

The indicator light next to the parkassist button lights up when thesystem is on and turns off when ithas been disabled.

When the system is off, a messagedisplays on the Driver InformationCenter (DIC). The messagedisappears after a short periodof time.

The system defaults to the onsetting each time the vehicle isstarted.



When the System Does NotSeem to Work Properly

The following messages may bedisplayed on the DIC:

SERVICE PARK ASSIST: If thismessage occurs, check thefollowing conditions:. The ultrasonic sensors are not

clean. Keep the vehicle's rearbumper free of mud, dirt, snow,ice, and slush. For cleaninginstructions, see Exterior Careon page 10‑92.

. The park assist sensors arecovered by frost or ice. Frost orice can form around and behindthe sensors and may not alwaysbe seen; this can occur afterwashing the vehicle in coldweather. The message may notclear until the frost or ice hasmelted.

If the above conditions do not exist,take the vehicle to your dealer torepair the system.

PARK ASSIST OFF: If the systemdoes not activate due to atemporary condition, this messagedisplays. This can occur under thefollowing conditions:. The driver has disabled the

system.. An object was hanging out of the

trunk during the last drive cycle.Once the object is removed, thesystem will return to normaloperation.

. The bumper is damaged. Takethe vehicle to your dealer torepair the system.

. Other conditions, such asvibrations from a jackhammer orthe compression of air brakes ona very large truck, are affectingsystem performance.

FuelUse of the recommended fuel is animportant part of the propermaintenance of this vehicle. To helpkeep the engine clean and maintainoptimum vehicle performance, werecommend the use of gasolineadvertised as TOP TIER DetergentGasoline.

Look for the TOP TIER label on thefuel pump to ensure gasoline meetsenhanced detergency standardsdeveloped by auto companies. A listof marketers providing TOP TIERDetergent Gasoline can be found atwww.toptiergas.com. TOP TIERgasoline is only available in the U.S.and Canada.



The eighth digit of the VehicleIdentification Number (VIN) showsthe code letter or number thatidentifies the vehicle's engine. TheVIN is at the top left of theinstrument panel. See VehicleIdentification Number (VIN) onpage 12‑1.

Vehicles that have a yellow fuel capcan use either unleaded gasoline orethanol fuel containing up to 85%ethanol (E85). See Fuel E85 (85%Ethanol) on page 9‑48. For all othervehicles, use only the unleadedgasoline described underRecommended Fuel on page 9‑46.

Recommended FuelIf the vehicle has a 2.4L L4 engine,use regular unleaded gasoline witha posted octane rating of 87 orhigher. If the octane rating is lessthan 87, an audible knocking noise,commonly referred to as sparkknock, might be heard when driving.If this occurs, use a gasoline ratedat 87 octane or higher as soon aspossible. If heavy knocking is heardwhen using gasoline rated at87 octane or higher, the engineneeds service.

If the vehicle has the 2.0L L4engine, use premium unleadedgasoline with a posted octane ratingof 91 or higher. You can also useregular unleaded gasoline rated at87 octane or higher, but thevehicle's acceleration could beslightly reduced, and a slight audibleknocking noise, commonly referredto as spark knock, might be heard.If the octane is less than 87, aheavy knocking noise might beheard when driving. If this occurs,

use a gasoline rated at 87 octane orhigher as soon as possible.Otherwise, you could damage theengine. If heavy knocking is heardwhen using gasoline rated at87 octane or higher, the engineneeds service.

Gasoline SpecificationsAt a minimum, gasoline should meetASTM specification D 4814. Somegasolines contain anoctane-enhancing additive calledmethylcyclopentadienyl manganesetricarbonyl (MMT). We recommendagainst the use of gasolinescontaining MMT. See Fuel Additiveson page 9‑47.

California FuelRequirementsIf the vehicle is certified to meetCalifornia Emissions Standards, it isdesigned to operate on fuels thatmeet California specifications. Seethe underhood emission controllabel. If this fuel is not available in



states adopting California EmissionsStandards, the vehicle will operatesatisfactorily on fuels meetingfederal specifications, but emissioncontrol system performance mightbe affected. The malfunctionindicator lamp could turn on and thevehicle might fail a smog‐check test.See Malfunction Indicator Lamp onpage 5‑15. If this occurs, return toyour authorized dealer for diagnosis.If it is determined that the conditionis caused by the type of fuel used,repairs might not be covered by thevehicle warranty.

Fuels in ForeignCountriesIf planning to drive in countriesoutside the U.S. or Canada, theproper fuel might be hard to find.Check regional auto club or fuelretail brand websites for availabilityin the country where driving. Neveruse leaded gasoline, fuel containingmethanol, or any other fuel notrecommended. Costly repairs

caused by use of improper fuelwould not be covered by the vehiclewarranty.

Fuel AdditivesTo provide cleaner air, all gasolinesin the United States are nowrequired to contain additives thathelp prevent engine and fuel systemdeposits from forming, allowing theemission control system to workproperly. In most cases, nothingshould have to be added to the fuel.However, some gasolines containonly the minimum amount ofadditive required to meet U.S.Environmental Protection Agencyregulations. To help keep fuelinjectors and intake valves cleanand avoid problems due to dirtyinjectors or valves, look for gasolinethat is advertised as TOP TIERDetergent Gasoline. Look for theTOP TIER label on the fuel pump toensure gasoline meets enhanceddetergency standards developed bythe auto companies. A list of

marketers providing TOP TIERDetergent Gasoline can be found atwww.toptiergas.com.

For customers who do not use TOPTIER Detergent Gasoline regularly,one bottle of Fuel System TreatmentPLUS, part number 88861013,added to the fuel tank at everyengine oil change, can help cleandeposits from fuel injectors andintake valves. GM Fuel SystemTreatment PLUS is the onlygasoline additive recommended byGeneral Motors. It is available atyour dealer.

Gasolines containing oxygenates,such as ethers and ethanol, andreformulated gasolines might beavailable in your area. Werecommend that you use thesegasolines, if they comply with thespecifications described earlier.However, E85 (85% ethanol) andother fuels containing more than15% ethanol must not be used invehicles that were not designed forthose fuels.



Notice: This vehicle was notdesigned for fuel that containsmethanol. Do not use fuelcontaining methanol. It cancorrode metal parts in the fuelsystem and also damage plasticand rubber parts. That damagewould not be covered under thevehicle warranty.

Some gasolines that are notreformulated for low emissions cancontain an octane-enhancingadditive calledmethylcyclopentadienyl manganesetricarbonyl (MMT); ask the attendantwhere you buy gasoline whether thefuel contains MMT. We recommendagainst the use of such gasolines.Fuels containing MMT can reducespark plug life and affect emissioncontrol system performance. Themalfunction indicator lamp mightturn on. If this occurs, return to yourdealer for service.

Fuel E85 (85% Ethanol)Vehicles that have a yellow fuel capcan use either unleaded gasoline orethanol fuel containing up to 85%ethanol (E85). For all other vehicles,use only the unleaded gasolinedescribed under RecommendedFuel on page 9‑46.

We encourage the use of E85 invehicles that are designed to use it.The ethanol in E85 is a “renewable”fuel, meaning it is made fromrenewable sources such as cornand other crops.

Many service stations will not havean 85% ethanol fuel (E85) pumpavailable. The U.S. Department ofEnergy has an alternative fuelswebsite (www.afdc.energy.gov/afdc/locator/stations/) that can help youfind E85 fuel. Those stations that dohave E85 should have a labelindicating ethanol content. Do notuse the fuel if the ethanol content isgreater than 85%.

At a minimum, E85 should meetASTM Specification D 5798 orCGSB Specification 3.512. Fillingthe tank with fuel mixtures that donot meet ASTM or CGSBspecifications can affect driveabilityand could cause the malfunctionindicator lamp to come on. As theoutside temperature approachesfreezing, ethanol fuel distributorsshould supply winter grade ethanol,the same as with unleadedgasoline.

The starting characteristics of E85fuel make it unsuitable for use whentemperatures fall below −18°C(0°F). In the range of −18°C (0°F) to0°C (32°F), it may take more time tostart the engine.

E85 has less energy per liter(gallon) than gasoline, so you willneed to refill the fuel tank moreoften when using E85 than whenyou are using gasoline. See Fillingthe Tank on page 9‑49.



Notice: Some additives are notcompatible with E85 fuel and canharm the vehicle's fuel system.Do not add anything to E85.Damage caused by additiveswould not be covered by thevehicle warranty.

Notice: This vehicle was notdesigned for fuel that containsmethanol. Do not use fuelcontaining methanol. It cancorrode metal parts in the fuelsystem and also damage plasticand rubber parts. That damagewould not be covered under thevehicle warranty.

Filling the Tank

{ WARNING

Fuel vapors and fuel fires burnviolently and can cause injury ordeath.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

. To help avoid injuries to youand others, read and followall the instructions on the fuelpump island.

. Turn off the engine whenrefueling.

. Keep sparks, flames, andsmoking materials awayfrom fuel.

. Do not leave the fuel pumpunattended.

. Do not reenter the vehiclewhile pumping fuel.

. Keep children away from thefuel pump and never letchildren pump fuel.

. Fuel can spray out if the fuelcap is opened too quickly.This spray can happen if thetank is nearly full, and ismore likely in hot weather.Open the fuel cap slowly and

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

wait for any hiss noise to stopthen unscrew the cap allthe way

The tethered fuel cap is behind thefuel door on the vehicle's passengerside. Turn the fuel capcounterclockwise to remove.Reinstall the cap by turning itclockwise until it clicks.



Do not top off or overfill the tank.Wait a few seconds before removingthe nozzle. Clean fuel from paintedsurfaces as soon as possible. SeeExterior Care on page 10‑92.

{ WARNING

If a fire starts while you arerefueling, do not remove thenozzle. Shut off the flow of fuel byshutting off the pump or bynotifying the station attendant.Leave the area immediately.

Notice: If a new fuel cap isneeded, be sure to get the righttype of cap from your dealer. Thewrong type of fuel cap might notfit properly, might cause themalfunction indicator lamp tolight, and could damage the fueltank and emissions system. SeeMalfunction Indicator Lamp onpage 5‑15.

Filling a Portable FuelContainer

{ WARNING

Filling a portable fuel containerwhile it is in the vehicle can causefuel vapors that can ignite eitherby static electricity or othermeans. You or others could bebadly burned and the vehiclecould be damaged. Always:

. Use approved fuelcontainers.

. Remove the container fromthe vehicle, trunk, or pickupbed before filling.

. Place the container on theground.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

. Place the nozzle inside the fillopening of the containerbefore dispensing fuel, andkeep it in contact with the fillopening until filling iscomplete.

. Fill the container no morethan 95% full to allow forexpansion.

. Do not smoke, light matches,or use lighters whilepumping fuel.

. Avoid using cell phones orother electronic devices.



Towing

General TowingInformationThe vehicle is neither designed norintended to tow a trailer.

Conversions andAdd-Ons

Add-On ElectricalEquipmentNotice: Some electricalequipment can damage thevehicle or cause components tonot work and would not becovered by the warranty. Alwayscheck with your dealer beforeadding electrical equipment.

Add-on equipment can drain thevehicle's 12-volt battery, even if thevehicle is not operating.

The vehicle has an airbag system.Before attempting to add anythingelectrical to the vehicle, seeServicing the Airbag-EquippedVehicle on page 3‑27 and AddingEquipment to the Airbag-EquippedVehicle on page 3‑27.



2 NOTES


Vehicle Care 10-1

Vehicle Care

General InformationGeneral Information . . . . . . . . . . 10-2California Proposition65 Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2

California PerchlorateMaterials Requirements . . . . 10-3

Accessories andModifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3

Vehicle ChecksDoing Your OwnService Work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3

Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4Engine CompartmentOverview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5

Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10Engine Oil Life System . . . . . 10-12Automatic TransmissionFluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13

Manual TransmissionFluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-14

Hydraulic Clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-14Engine Air Cleaner/Filter . . . . 10-14Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-16Engine Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-17Engine Overheating . . . . . . . . 10-20

Power Steering Fluid (2.0LL4 Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-22

Power Steering Fluid (2.4LL4 Engine with or withouteAssist) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23

Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23Brake Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26Starter Switch Check . . . . . . . 10-27Automatic Transmission ShiftLock Control FunctionCheck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27

Ignition Transmission LockCheck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28

Park Brake and P (Park)Mechanism Check . . . . . . . . 10-28

Wiper BladeReplacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28

Headlamp AimingHeadlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . 10-29

Bulb ReplacementBulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-30Halogen Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30High Intensity Discharge(HID) Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30

Headlamps, Front TurnSignal and ParkingLamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30

Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-32Taillamps, Turn Signal,Stoplamps, and Back-UpLamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-32

License Plate Lamp . . . . . . . . 10-33Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . 10-33

Electrical SystemHigh Voltage Devices andWiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-34

Electrical SystemOverload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-34

Fuses and CircuitBreakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-35

Engine Compartment FuseBlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-35

Instrument Panel FuseBlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-39

Wheels and TiresTires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-41All-Season Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-42Winter Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-42Summer Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-42Tire Sidewall Labeling . . . . . . 10-43Tire Designations . . . . . . . . . . . 10-45


10-2 Vehicle Care

Tire Terminology andDefinitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-45

Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-48Tire Pressure for High-SpeedOperation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-49

Tire Pressure MonitorSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-50

Tire Pressure MonitorOperation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-51

Tire Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-54Tire Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-55When It Is Time for NewTires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-56

Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . 10-57Different Size Tires andWheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-58

Uniform Tire QualityGrading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-59

Wheel Alignment and TireBalance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-60

Wheel Replacement . . . . . . . . 10-61Tire Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-61If a Tire Goes Flat . . . . . . . . . . 10-62Tire Sealant andCompressor Kit . . . . . . . . . . . 10-64

Tire Sealant andCompressor Kit . . . . . . . . . . . 10-71

Storing the Tire Sealant andCompressor Kit . . . . . . . . . . . 10-78

Tire Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-79Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . 10-84

Jump StartingJump Starting (On-boardwith eAssist Only) . . . . . . . . . 10-85

Jump Starting (with orwithout eAssist) . . . . . . . . . . . 10-87

TowingTowing the Vehicle . . . . . . . . . 10-89Recreational VehicleTowing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-90

Appearance CareExterior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-92Interior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-95Floor Mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-98

General InformationFor service and parts needs, visityour dealer. You will receivegenuine GM parts and GM-trainedand supported service people.

Genuine GM parts have one ofthese marks:

California Proposition65 WarningMost motor vehicles, including thisone, contain and/or emit chemicalsknown to the State of California to


Vehicle Care 10-3

cause cancer and birth defects orother reproductive harm. Engineexhaust, many parts and systems,many fluids, and some componentwear by-products contain and/oremit these chemicals.

California PerchlorateMaterials RequirementsCertain types of automotiveapplications, such as airbaginitiators, safety belt pretensioners,and lithium batteries contained inRemote Keyless Entry transmitters,may contain perchlorate materials.Special handling may be necessary.For additional information, seewww.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.

Accessories andModificationsAdding non‐dealer accessories ormaking modifications to the vehiclecan affect vehicle performance andsafety, including such things asairbags, braking, stability, ride and

handling, emissions systems,aerodynamics, durability, andelectronic systems like antilockbrakes, traction control, and stabilitycontrol. These accessories ormodifications could even causemalfunction or damage not coveredby the vehicle warranty.

Damage to vehicle componentsresulting from modifications or theinstallation or use of non‐GMcertified parts, including controlmodule or software modifications, isnot covered under the terms of thevehicle warranty and may affectremaining warranty coverage foraffected parts.

GM Accessories are designed tocomplement and function with othersystems on the vehicle. See yourdealer to accessorize the vehicleusing genuine GM Accessoriesinstalled by a dealer technician.

Also, see Adding Equipment to theAirbag-Equipped Vehicle onpage 3‑27.

Vehicle Checks

Doing Your OwnService WorkeAssist Vehicles Only

{ WARNING

Never try to do your own serviceon eAssist components. You canbe injured and the vehicle can bedamaged if you try to do your ownservice work. Service and repairof these eAssist componentsshould only be performed by atrained service technician with theproper knowledge and tools.


10-4 Vehicle Care

All Vehicles

{ WARNING

It can be dangerous to work onyour vehicle if you do not havethe proper knowledge, servicemanual, tools, or parts. Alwaysfollow owner manual proceduresand consult the service manualfor your vehicle before doing anyservice work.

If doing some of your own servicework, use the proper servicemanual. It tells you much moreabout how to service the vehiclethan this manual can. To order theproper service manual, see ServicePublications Ordering Informationon page 13‑16.

This vehicle has an airbag system.Before attempting to do your ownservice work, see Airbag SystemCheck on page 3‑28.

Keep a record with all parts receiptsand list the mileage and the date ofany service work performed. SeeMaintenance Records onpage 11‑15.

Notice: Even small amounts ofcontamination can cause damageto vehicle systems. Do not allowcontaminants to contact thefluids, reservoir caps,or dipsticks.

HoodTo open the hood:

1. Pull up on the hood releasehandle with this symbol on it.It is located inside the vehicle tothe left of the steering column.

2. Go to the front of the vehicle andmove the secondary hoodrelease handle to the right.

To close the hood:

1. Before closing the hood, be sureall the filler caps are on properly.

2. Lower the hood 30 cm (12 in)above the vehicle and release itso it fully latches. Check tomake sure the hood is closedand repeat the process ifnecessary.


Vehicle Care 10-5

Engine Compartment Overview

2.0L L4 Engine


10-6 Vehicle Care

1. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter onpage 10‑14.

2. Engine Cover.

3. Engine Oil Dipstick. See EngineOil on page 10‑10.

4. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See EngineOil on page 10‑10.

5. Transmission Fluid Cap andDipstick. See AutomaticTransmission Fluid onpage 10‑13.

6. Power Steering Fluid Reservoirand Cap. See Power SteeringFluid (2.0L L4 Engine) onpage 10‑22 or Power SteeringFluid (2.4L L4 Engine with orwithout eAssist) on page 10‑23.

7. Brake Master Cylinder andHydraulic Clutch Reservoir (ifequipped with manualtransmission). See Brakes onpage 10‑23 or Hydraulic Clutchon page 10‑14.

8. Battery Cover. See Battery onpage 10‑26.

9. Coolant Surge Tank andPressure Cap. See EngineCoolant on page 10‑17.

10. Windshield Washer FluidReservoir. See Washer Fluidon page 10‑23.

11. Engine Compartment FuseBlock on page 10‑35.


Vehicle Care 10-7

2.4L L4 Engine without eAssist


10-8 Vehicle Care


2. Engine Cover.


4. Engine Oil Dipstick. See EngineOil on page 10‑10.

5. Transmission Fluid Cap andDipstick. See AutomaticTransmission Fluid onpage 10‑13.

6. Brake Master CylinderReservoir. See Brakes onpage 10‑23.


8. Battery Cover. See Battery onpage 10‑26.




Vehicle Care 10-9

2.4L L4 Engine with eAssist


10-10 Vehicle Care


2. Engine Cover.

3. Engine Cooling Fans (Out ofView). See Cooling System onpage 10‑16.


5. Engine Oil Dipstick (Out ofView). See Engine Oil onpage 10‑10.

6. High Voltage Cable (OrangeColor).

7. Transmission Fluid Cap. SeeAutomatic Transmission Fluid onpage 10‑13.

8. Brake Master CylinderReservoir. See Brakes onpage 10‑23.

9. Battery (Under Cover). SeeBattery on page 10‑26.




Engine OilTo ensure proper engineperformance and long life, carefulattention must be paid to engine oil.Following these simple, butimportant steps will help protectyour investment:. Always use engine oil approved

to the proper specification and ofthe proper viscosity grade. See“Selecting the Right Engine Oil”in this section.

. Check the engine oil levelregularly and maintain theproper oil level. See “CheckingEngine Oil” and “When to AddEngine Oil” in this section.

. Change the engine oil at theappropriate time. See Engine OilLife System on page 10‑12.

. Always dispose of engine oilproperly. See “What to Do withUsed Oil” in this section.

Checking Engine Oil

It is a good idea to check the engineoil level at each fuel fill. In order toget an accurate reading, the oilmust be warm and the vehicle mustbe on level ground. The engine oildipstick handle is a loop. SeeEngine Compartment Overview onpage 10‑5 for the location of theengine oil dipstick.

Obtaining an accurate oil levelreading is essential:

1. If the engine has been runningrecently, turn off the engine andallow several minutes for the oilto drain back into the oil pan.Checking the oil level too soonafter engine shutoff will notprovide an accurate oil levelreading.


Vehicle Care 10-11

{ WARNING

The engine oil dipstick handlemay be hot; it could burn you.Use a towel or glove to touch thedipstick handle.

2. Pull out the dipstick and clean itwith a paper towel or cloth, thenpush it back in all the way.Remove it again, keeping the tipdown, and check the level.

When to Add Engine Oil

If the oil is below the cross-hatchedarea at the tip of the dipstick, add1 L (1 qt) of the recommended oiland then recheck the level. See“Selecting the Right Engine Oil” inthis section for an explanation of

what kind of oil to use. For engineoil crankcase capacity, seeCapacities and Specifications onpage 12‑2.

Notice: Do not add too much oil.Oil levels above or below theacceptable operating rangeshown on the dipstick are harmfulto the engine. If you find that youhave an oil level above theoperating range, i.e., the enginehas so much oil that the oil levelgets above the cross-hatchedarea that shows the properoperating range, the engine couldbe damaged. You should drainout the excess oil or limit drivingof the vehicle and seek a serviceprofessional to remove theexcess amount of oil.

See Engine Compartment Overviewon page 10‑5 for the location of theengine oil fill cap.

Add enough oil to put the levelsomewhere in the proper operatingrange. Push the dipstick all the wayback in when through.

Selecting the Right Engine Oil

Selecting the right engine oildepends on both the proper oilspecification and viscosity grade.See Recommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11‑12.

Specification

Use and ask for licensed engine oilswith the dexos1® approvedcertification mark. Engine oilsmeeting the requirements for thevehicle should have the dexos1approved certification mark. Thiscertification mark indicates that theoil has been approved to the dexos1specification.


10-12 Vehicle Care

Notice: Failure to use therecommended engine oil orequivalent can result in enginedamage not covered by thevehicle warranty. Check with yourdealer or service provider onwhether the oil is approved to thedexos1 specification.

Viscosity Grade

SAE 5W-30 is the best viscositygrade for the vehicle. Do not useother viscosity grade oils such asSAE 10W-30, 10W-40, or 20W-50.

Cold Temperature Operation: In anarea of extreme cold, where thetemperature falls below −29°C(−20°F), an SAE 0W-30 oil may beused. An oil of this viscosity gradewill provide easier cold starting forthe engine at extremely lowtemperatures. When selecting an oilof the appropriate viscosity grade,always select an oil of the correctspecification. See “Specification”earlier in this section for moreinformation.

Engine Oil Additives/EngineOil Flushes

Do not add anything to the oil. Therecommended oils with the dexosspecification and displaying thedexos certification mark are all thatis needed for good performance andengine protection.

Engine oil system flushes are notrecommended and could causeengine damage not covered by thevehicle warranty.

What to Do with Used Oil

Used engine oil contains certainelements that can be unhealthy foryour skin and could even causecancer. Do not let used oil stay onyour skin for very long. Clean yourskin and nails with soap and water,or a good hand cleaner. Wash orproperly dispose of clothing or ragscontaining used engine oil. See themanufacturer's warnings about theuse and disposal of oil products.

Used oil can be a threat to theenvironment. If you change yourown oil, be sure to drain all the oilfrom the filter before disposal. Neverdispose of oil by putting it in thetrash or pouring it on the ground,into sewers, or into streams orbodies of water. Recycle it by takingit to a place that collects used oil.

Engine Oil Life System

When to Change Engine Oil

This vehicle has a computer systemthat indicates when to change theengine oil and filter. This is basedon a combination of factors whichinclude engine revolutions, enginetemperature, and miles driven.Based on driving conditions, themileage at which an oil change isindicated can vary considerably. Forthe oil life system to work properly,the system must be reset every timethe oil is changed.


Vehicle Care 10-13

When the system has calculatedthat oil life has been diminished, itindicates that an oil change isnecessary. A CHANGE ENGINEOIL SOON message comes on. SeeEngine Oil Messages on page 5‑31.Change the oil as soon as possiblewithin the next 1 000 km (600 mi).It is possible that, if driving underthe best conditions, the oil lifesystem might indicate that an oilchange is not necessary for up to ayear. The engine oil and filter mustbe changed at least once a yearand, at this time, the system mustbe reset. Your dealer has trainedservice people who will perform thiswork and reset the system. It is alsoimportant to check the oil regularlyover the course of an oil draininterval and keep it at the properlevel.

If the system is ever resetaccidentally, the oil must bechanged at 5 000 km (3,000 mi)since the last oil change.Remember to reset the oil lifesystem whenever the oil is changed.

How to Reset the Engine OilLife System

Reset the system whenever theengine oil is changed so that thesystem can calculate the nextengine oil change. To reset thesystem:

1. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN withthe engine off.

2. Press the DIC MENU button onthe turn signal lever to enter theVehicle Information Menu. Usethe thumbwheel to scroll throughthe menu items until you reachREMAINING OIL LIFE.

3. Press the SET/CLR button toreset the oil life at 100%.


The system is reset when theCHANGE ENGINE OIL SOONmessage is off and the REMAININGOIL LIFE 100% message isdisplayed.

If the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOONmessage comes back on when thevehicle is started, the engine oil lifesystem has not been reset. Repeatthe procedure.

Automatic TransmissionFluid

How to Check AutomaticTransmission Fluid

It is not necessary to check thetransmission fluid level.A transmission fluid leak is the onlyreason for fluid loss. If a leakoccurs, take the vehicle to yourdealer and have it repaired as soonas possible.

There is a special procedure forchecking and changing thetransmission fluid. Because thisprocedure is difficult, you shouldhave this done at your dealer.Contact your dealer for additionalinformation. The procedure can befound in the service manual. To


10-14 Vehicle Care

purchase a service manual, seeService Publications OrderingInformation on page 13‑16.

Change the fluid and filter at theintervals listed in MaintenanceSchedule on page 11‑3, and be sureto use the fluid listed inRecommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11‑12.

Manual TransmissionFluidIt is not necessary to check themanual transmission fluid level.A transmission fluid leak is the onlyreason for fluid loss. If a leakoccurs, take the vehicle to yourdealer and have it repaired as soonas possible. See RecommendedFluids and Lubricants on page 11‑12for the proper fluid to use.

Hydraulic ClutchFor vehicles with a manualtransmission, it is not necessary toregularly check brake/clutch fluidunless there is a leak suspected.

Adding fluid will not correct a leak.A fluid loss in this system couldindicate a problem. Have thesystem inspected and repaired.

When to Check and Whatto Use

The brake/hydraulic clutch fluidreservoir cap has this symbol on it.The common hydraulic clutch andbrake master cylinder fluid reservoiris filled with DOT 3 brake fluid asindicated on the reservoir cap. SeeEngine Compartment Overview onpage 10‑5 for reservoir location.

How to Check and Add Fluid

Visually check the brake/clutch fluidreservoir to make sure the fluid levelis at the MIN (minimum) line on the

side of the reservoir. The brake/hydraulic clutch fluid system shouldbe closed and sealed.

Do not remove the cap to check thefluid level or to top off the fluid level.Remove the cap only whennecessary to add the proper fluiduntil the level reaches the MIN line.

Engine Air Cleaner/FilterSee Engine Compartment Overviewon page 10‑5 for the location of theengine air cleaner/filter.

When to Inspect the Engine AirCleaner/Filter

Inspect the air cleaner/filter at thescheduled maintenance intervalsand replace it at the first oil changeafter each 80 000 km (50,000 mi)interval. See Maintenance Scheduleon page 11‑3 for more information.If you are driving in dusty/dirtyconditions, inspect the filter at eachengine oil change.


Vehicle Care 10-15

How to Inspect the Engine AirCleaner/Filter

To inspect the air cleaner/filter,remove the filter from the vehicleand lightly shake the filter to releaseloose dust and dirt. If the filterremains covered with dirt, a newfilter is required.

2.0L L4 Engine

1. Electrical Connector

2. Air Duct Clamp

3. Screws

To inspect or replace the engine aircleaner/filter:

1. Open the hood. See Hood onpage 10‑4.

2. Disconnect the outlet duct byloosening the air duct clamp (2).

3. Disconnect the electricalconnector (1).

4. Remove the screws (3) on top ofthe engine air cleaner/filterhousing.

5. Lift the filter cover housing awayfrom the air cleaner/filterhousing.

6. Pull out the filter.

7. Inspect or replace the engine aircleaner/filter.

8. Reverse Steps 2–4 to reinstallthe filter cover housing.

2.4L L4 Engine without eAssistShown, 2.4L L4 Engine with

eAssist Similar

1. Screws

2. Air Duct Clamp

3. Electrical Connector

To inspect or replace the engine aircleaner/filter:

1. Open the hood. See Hood onpage 10‑4.

2. Disconnect the outlet duct byloosening the air duct clamp (2).


10-16 Vehicle Care

3. Disconnect the electricalconnector (3).

4. Remove the screws (1) on top ofthe engine air cleaner/filterhousing.

5. Lift the filter cover housing awayfrom the engine air cleaner/filterhousing.

6. Pull out the filter.

7. Inspect or replace the engine aircleaner/filter.

8. Reverse Steps 2–4 to reinstallthe filter cover housing.

{ WARNING

Operating the engine with the aircleaner/filter off can cause you orothers to be burned. The aircleaner not only cleans the air; ithelps to stop flames if the enginebackfires. Use caution whenworking on the engine and do notdrive with the air cleaner/filter off.

Notice: If the air cleaner/filter isoff, dirt can easily get into theengine, which could damage it.Always have the air cleaner/filterin place when you are driving.

Cooling SystemThe cooling system allows theengine to maintain the correctworking temperature.

When it is safe to lift the hood:

2.0L L4 Engine

1. Engine Cooling Fans (Outof View)

2. Coolant Surge Tank andPressure Cap

2.4L L4 Engine without eAssist




Vehicle Care 10-17

2.4L L4 Engine with eAssist



{ WARNING

An electric engine cooling fanunder the hood can start up evenwhen the engine is not runningand can cause injury. Keephands, clothing, and tools awayfrom any underhood electric fan.

{ WARNING

Heater and radiator hoses, andother engine parts, can be veryhot. Do not touch them. If you do,you can be burned.

Do not run the engine if there is aleak. If you run the engine, itcould lose all coolant. That couldcause an engine fire, and youcould be burned. Get any leakfixed before you drive the vehicle.

Notice: Using coolant other thanDEX-COOL® can cause prematureengine, heater core, or radiatorcorrosion. In addition, the enginecoolant could require changingsooner, at 50 000 km (30,000mi)or 24months, whichever occursfirst. Any repairs would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.Always use DEX-COOL(silicate-free) coolant in thevehicle.

Engine CoolantThe cooling system in the vehicle isfilled with DEX-COOL® enginecoolant. This coolant is designed toremain in the vehicle for 5 years or240 000 km (150,000 mi), whicheveroccurs first.

The following explains the coolingsystem and how to check and addcoolant when it is low. If there is aproblem with engine overheating,see Engine Overheating onpage 10‑20.

What to Use

{ WARNING

Adding only plain water or someother liquid to the cooling systemcan be dangerous. Plain waterand other liquids, can boil beforethe proper coolant mixture will.The coolant warning system is setfor the proper coolant mixture.With plain water or the wrong

(Continued)


10-18 Vehicle Care

WARNING (Continued)

mixture, the engine could get toohot but you would not get theoverheat warning. The enginecould catch fire and you or otherscould be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkablewater and DEX-COOL coolant.

Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,drinkable water and DEX-COOLcoolant. If using this mixture,nothing else needs to be added.

This mixture:. Gives freezing protection down

to −37°C (−34°F), outsidetemperature.

. Gives boiling protection up to129°C (265°F), enginetemperature.

. Protects against rust andcorrosion.

. Will not damage aluminum parts.

. Helps keep the proper enginetemperature.

Notice: If improper coolantmixture, inhibitors, or additivesare used in the vehicle coolingsystem, the engine couldoverheat and be damaged. Toomuch water in the mixture canfreeze and crack engine coolingparts. The repairs would not becovered by the warranty. Use onlythe proper mixture of enginecoolant for the cooling system.See Recommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11‑12.

Never dispose of engine coolant byputting it in the trash, pouring it onthe ground, or into sewers, streams,or bodies of water. Have the coolantchanged by an authorized servicecenter, familiar with legalrequirements regarding usedcoolant disposal. This will helpprotect the environment and yourhealth.

Checking Coolant

The vehicle must be on a levelsurface when checking the coolantlevel.

Check to see if coolant is visible inthe coolant surge tank. If the coolantinside the coolant surge tank isboiling, do not do anything else untilit cools down.

If coolant is visible but the coolantlevel is not at or above the markpointed to, add a 50/50 mixture ofclean drinkable water andDEX-COOL coolant.

Be sure the cooling system is coolbefore this is done.


Vehicle Care 10-19

If no coolant is visible in the coolantsurge tank, add coolant as follows:

How to Add Coolant to theCoolant Surge Tank

Notice: This vehicle has aspecific coolant fill procedure.Failure to follow this procedurecould cause the engine tooverheat and be severelydamaged.

If no problem is found, check to seeif coolant is visible in the coolantsurge tank. If coolant is visible butthe coolant level is not at theindicated level mark, add a 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable waterand DEX-COOL coolant at thecoolant surge tank, but be sure thecooling system, including thecoolant surge tank pressure cap, iscool before you do it.

{ WARNING

Steam and scalding liquids from ahot cooling system can blow outand burn you badly. Never turnthe cap when the cooling system,including the surge tank pressurecap, is hot. Wait for the coolingsystem and surge tank pressurecap to cool.

Notice: In cold weather, watercan freeze and crack the engine,radiator, heater core and otherparts. Use the recommendedcoolant and the proper coolantmixture.

{ WARNING

You can be burned if you spillcoolant on hot engine parts.Coolant contains ethylene glycoland it will burn if the engine partsare hot enough. Do not spillcoolant on a hot engine.

2.0L L4 Engine Shown, 2.4L L4Engine with or without eAssist

Similar

1. Remove the coolant surge tankpressure cap when the coolingsystem, including the coolantsurge tank pressure cap andupper radiator hose, is nolonger hot.

Turn the pressure cap slowlycounterclockwise aboutone-quarter of a turn. If you heara hiss, wait for that to stop. Thiswill allow any pressure still left tobe vented out thedischarge hose.

2. Keep turning the pressure capslowly and remove it.


10-20 Vehicle Care

3. Fill the coolant surge tank withthe proper DEX-COOL coolantmixture to the indicatedlevel mark.

4. With the coolant surge tankpressure cap off, start theengine and let it run until youcan feel the upper radiator hosegetting hot. Watch out for theengine cooling fans.

By this time, the coolant levelinside the coolant surge tankmay be lower. If the level islower, add more of the properDEX-COOL coolant mixture to

the coolant surge tank until thelevel reaches the indicatedlevel mark.

5. Replace the pressure cap tightly.

Check the level in the coolant surgetank when the cooling system hascooled down. If the coolant is not atthe proper level, repeat Steps 1–3 and reinstall the pressure cap.If the coolant still is not at the properlevel when the system cools downagain, see your dealer.

Engine Overheating2.0L L4 Engine

The vehicle has an engine coolanttemperature warning light and anengine coolant temperature gaugeon the instrument panel to warn ofengine overheating. See EngineCoolant Temperature Warning Lighton page 5‑21 and Engine CoolantTemperature Gauge on page 5‑12.

2.4L L4 Engine with or withouteAssist

The vehicle has an engine coolanttemperature warning light on theinstrument panel to warn of engineoverheating. See Engine CoolantTemperature Warning Light onpage 5‑21.

If it is decided not to lift the hoodwhen this warning appears, butinstead get service help right away,see Roadside Assistance Program(Mexico) on page 13‑7 or RoadsideAssistance Program (U.S. andCanada) on page 13‑11.

If it is decided to lift the hood, makesure the vehicle is parked on a levelsurface.

Then check to see if the enginecooling fans are running. If theengine is overheating, both fansshould be running. If they are not,do not continue to run the engineand have the vehicle serviced.


Vehicle Care 10-21

Notice: Running the enginewithout coolant may causedamage or a fire. Vehicle damagewould not be covered by thewarranty.

If Steam Is Coming from theEngine Compartment

{ WARNING

Steam from an overheated enginecan burn you badly, even if youjust open the hood. Stay awayfrom the engine if you see or hearsteam coming from it. Just turn itoff and get everyone away fromthe vehicle until it cools down.Wait until there is no sign ofsteam or coolant before you openthe hood.

If you keep driving when theengine is overheated, the liquidsin it can catch fire. You or otherscould be badly burned. Stop the

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

engine if it overheats, and get outof the vehicle until the engineis cool.

If No Steam Is Coming fromthe Engine Compartment

If an engine overheat warning isdisplayed but no steam can be seenor heard, the problem may not betoo serious. Sometimes the enginecan get a little too hot when thevehicle:. Climbs a long hill on a hot day.. Stops after high-speed driving.. Idles for long periods in traffic.

If the overheat warning is displayedwith no sign of steam:

1. Turn the air conditioning off.

2. Turn the heater on to the highesttemperature and to the highestfan speed. Open the windows asnecessary.

3. In heavy traffic, let the engineidle in N (Neutral) while stopped.If it is safe to do so, pull off theroad, shift to P (Park) orN (Neutral), and let theengine idle.

2.0L L4 Engine

If the engine coolant temperaturegauge is no longer in the overheatzone or the engine coolanttemperature warning light no longerdisplays, the vehicle can be driven.Continue to drive the vehicle slowlyfor about 10 minutes. Keep a safevehicle distance from the vehicle infront. If the warning does not comeback on, continue to drive normally.

2.4L L4 Engine with or withouteAssist

If the engine coolant temperaturewarning light no longer displays, thevehicle can be driven. Continue todrive the vehicle slowly for about10 minutes. Keep a safe vehicledistance from the vehicle in front.If the warning does not come backon, continue to drive normally.


10-22 Vehicle Care

If the warning continues, pull over,stop, and park the vehicleright away.

If there is no sign of steam, idle theengine for three minutes whileparked. If the warning is stilldisplayed, turn off the engine until itcools down.

Power Steering Fluid(2.0L L4 Engine)

See Engine Compartment Overviewon page 10‑5 for reservoir location.

When to Check Power SteeringFluid

It is not necessary to regularlycheck power steering fluid unless aleak is suspected in the system,or an unusual noise is heard. A fluid

loss in this system could indicate aproblem. Have the system inspectedand repaired.

How to Check Power SteeringFluid

Notice: Extremely small amountsof contamination can causesteering system damage andcause it to not work properly. Donot allow contaminants to contactthe fluid side of the reservoir cap/dipstick or to enter the reservoir.

To check the power steering fluid:

1. Turn the key off and let theengine compartment cool down.

2. Wipe the cap and the top of thereservoir clean.

3. Unscrew the cap and wipe thedipstick with a clean rag.

4. Replace the cap and completelytighten it.

5. Remove the cap again and lookat the fluid level on the dipstick.

The fluid level should be betweenthe MIN (Minimum) and MAX(Maximum) marks when the engineis cold, and at the MAX mark whenthe engine is hot. If the fluid is at theMIN mark when the engine is coldor hot, power steering fluid shouldbe added.

If the fluid is at or below the MINmark on the dipstick, add justenough fluid to bring the levelbetween the MIN and MAX marks.


Vehicle Care 10-23

What to Use

To determine what kind of fluid touse, see Recommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11‑12. Alwaysuse the proper fluid.

Power Steering Fluid(2.4L L4 Engine with orwithout eAssist)The vehicle has electric powersteering and does not use powersteering fluid.

Washer Fluid

What to Use

When windshield washer fluid isneeded, be sure to read themanufacturer's instructions beforeuse. If operating the vehicle in anarea where the temperature may fallbelow freezing, use a fluid that hassufficient protection againstfreezing.

Adding Washer Fluid

Open the cap with the washersymbol on it. Add washer fluid untilthe tank is full. See EngineCompartment Overview onpage 10‑5 for reservoir location.

Notice. When using concentratedwasher fluid, follow themanufacturer instructions foradding water.

. Do not mix water withready-to-use washer fluid.Water can cause the solutionto freeze and damage thewasher fluid tank and otherparts of the washer system.

. Fill the washer fluid tank onlythree-quarters full when it isvery cold. This allows forfluid expansion if freezingoccurs, which could damagethe tank if it iscompletely full.

. Do not use engine coolant(antifreeze) in the windshieldwasher. It can damage thewindshield washer systemand paint.

BrakesThis vehicle has disc brakes. Discbrake pads have built-in wearindicators that make a high-pitchedwarning sound when the brake padsare worn and new pads are needed.The sound can come and go or beheard all the time the vehicle ismoving, except when applying thebrake pedal firmly.


10-24 Vehicle Care

{ WARNING

The brake wear warning soundmeans that soon the brakes willnot work well. That could lead toa crash. When the brake wearwarning sound is heard, have thevehicle serviced.

Notice: Continuing to drive withworn-out brake pads could resultin costly brake repair.

Some driving conditions or climatescan cause a brake squeal when thebrakes are first applied or lightlyapplied. This does not meansomething is wrong with the brakes.

Properly torqued wheel nuts arenecessary to help prevent brakepulsation. When tires are rotated,inspect brake pads for wear andevenly tighten wheel nuts in theproper sequence to torquespecifications in Capacities andSpecifications on page 12‑2.

Brake linings should always bereplaced as complete axle sets.

Brake Pedal Travel

See your dealer if the brake pedaldoes not return to normal height,or if there is a rapid increase inpedal travel. This could be a signthat brake service might berequired.

Brake Adjustment

Every time the brakes are applied,with or without the vehicle moving,the brakes adjust for wear.

Replacing Brake System Parts

The braking system on a vehicle iscomplex. Its many parts have to beof top quality and work well togetherif the vehicle is to have really goodbraking. The vehicle was designedand tested with top-quality brakeparts. When parts of the brakingsystem are replaced, be sure to getnew, approved replacement parts.If this is not done, the brakes mightnot work properly. For example,

installing disc brake pads that arewrong for the vehicle, can changethe balance between the front andrear brakes — for the worse. Thebraking performance expected canchange in many other ways if thewrong replacement brake parts areinstalled.

Brake Fluid

The brake/clutch master cylinderreservoir is filled with DOT 3 brakefluid as indicated on the reservoircap. See Engine CompartmentOverview on page 10‑5 for thelocation of the reservoir.


Vehicle Care 10-25

There are only two reasons why thebrake fluid level in the reservoirmight go down:. The brake fluid level goes down

because of normal brake liningwear. When new linings areinstalled, the fluid level goesback up.

. A fluid leak in the brake/clutchhydraulic system can also causea low fluid level. Have the brake/clutch hydraulic system fixed,since a leak means that sooneror later the brakes will notwork well.

Do not top off the brake/clutch fluid.Adding fluid does not correct a leak.If fluid is added when the linings areworn, there will be too much fluidwhen new brake linings areinstalled. Add or remove fluid, asnecessary, only when work is doneon the brake/clutch hydraulicsystem.

{ WARNING

If too much brake fluid is added, itcan spill on the engine and burn,if the engine is hot enough. Youor others could be burned, andthe vehicle could be damaged.Add brake fluid only when work isdone on the brake/clutchhydraulic system.

Checking Brake Fluid

The brake/clutch fluid can bechecked without taking off the capby looking at the brake/clutch fluidreservoir.

The fluid level should be aboveMIN. If it is not, have the brake/clutch hydraulic system checked tosee if there is a leak.

After work is done on the brake/clutch hydraulic system, make surethe level is above MIN but not overthe MAX mark.

When the brake/clutch fluid falls to alow level, the brake warning lightcomes on. See Brake SystemWarning Light on page 5‑18.

What to Add

Use only new DOT 3 brake fluidfrom a sealed container. SeeRecommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11‑12.

Always clean the brake/clutch fluidreservoir cap and the area aroundthe cap before removing it. Thishelps keep dirt from entering thereservoir.

{ WARNING

With the wrong kind of fluid in thebrake/clutch hydraulic system, thebrakes might not work well. Thiscould cause a crash. Always usethe proper brake/clutch fluid.


10-26 Vehicle Care

Notice. Using the wrong fluid canbadly damage brake/clutchhydraulic system parts. Forexample, just a few drops ofmineral-based oil, such asengine oil, in the brakehydraulic system candamage brake hydraulicsystem parts so badly thatthey will have to be replaced.Do not let someone put inthe wrong kind of fluid.

. If brake fluid is spilled on thevehicle's painted surfaces,the paint finish can bedamaged. Be careful not tospill brake fluid on thevehicle. If you do, wash it offimmediately.

BatteryThis vehicle has a standard 12-voltbattery. Refer to the replacementnumber on the original battery labelwhen a new standard 12-volt batteryis needed.

eAssist vehicles also have a highvoltage battery. Only a trainedservice technician with the properknowledge and tools should inspect,test, or replace the high voltagebattery. See your dealer if the highvoltage battery needs service. Thedealer has information on how torecycle the high voltage battery.There is also information availableat http://www.recyclemybattery.com.

The eAssist system high voltagebattery is cooled with air drawn fromthe vehicle interior. The cold air

intake for the battery is behind therear seat, on the filler panel. Do notcover the intake.

{ WARNING

Battery posts, terminals, andrelated accessories contain leadand lead compounds, chemicalsknown to the State of California tocause cancer and reproductiveharm. Wash hands after handling.

Vehicle Storage

{ WARNING

Batteries have acid that can burnyou and gas that can explode.You can be badly hurt if you arenot careful. See Jump Starting(On-board with eAssist Only) onpage 10‑85 or Jump Starting (withor without eAssist) on page 10‑87for tips on working around abattery without getting hurt.


Vehicle Care 10-27

Infrequent Usage: Remove the12-volt battery black, negative (−)cable from the battery to keep thebattery from running down.

Extended Storage: Remove the12-volt battery black, negative (−)cable from the battery or use abattery trickle charger.

Remember to reconnect the batterywhen ready to drive the vehicle.

Starter Switch Check

{ WARNING

When you are doing thisinspection, the vehicle couldmove suddenly. If the vehiclemoves, you or others could beinjured.

1. Before starting this check, besure there is enough roomaround the vehicle.

2. Firmly apply both the parkingbrake and the regular brake.See Parking Brake onpage 9‑32.

Do not use the acceleratorpedal, and be ready to turn offthe engine immediately if itstarts.

3. For automatic transmissionvehicles, try to start the enginein each gear. The vehicle shouldstart only in P (Park) orN (Neutral). If the vehicle startsin any other position, contactyour dealer for service.

For manual transmissionvehicles, put the shift lever inNeutral, push the clutch pedaldown halfway, and try to startthe engine. The vehicle shouldstart only when the clutch pedalis pushed down all the way tothe floor. If the vehicle startswhen the clutch pedal is notpushed all the way down,contact your dealer for service.

Automatic TransmissionShift Lock ControlFunction Check

{ WARNING

When you are doing thisinspection, the vehicle couldmove suddenly. If the vehiclemoves, you or others could beinjured.

1. Before starting this check, besure there is enough roomaround the vehicle. It should beparked on a level surface.

2. Firmly apply the parking brake.See Parking Brake onpage 9‑32.

Be ready to apply the regularbrake immediately if the vehiclebegins to move.


10-28 Vehicle Care

3. With the engine off, turn theignition on, but do not start theengine. Without applying theregular brake, try to move theshift lever out of P (Park) withnormal effort. If the shift levermoves out of P (Park), contactyour dealer for service.

Ignition TransmissionLock CheckWhile parked, and with the parkingbrake set, try to turn the ignition toLOCK/OFF in each shift leverposition.. For automatic transmission

vehicles, the ignition should turnto LOCK/OFF only when theshift lever is in P (Park). Theignition key should come outonly in LOCK/OFF.

. For manual transmissionvehicles, the ignition key shouldcome out only in LOCK/OFF.

Contact your dealer if service isrequired.

Park Brake and P (Park)Mechanism Check

{ WARNING

When you are doing this check,the vehicle could begin to move.You or others could be injuredand property could be damaged.Make sure there is room in frontof the vehicle in case it begins toroll. Be ready to apply the regularbrake at once should the vehiclebegin to move.

Park on a fairly steep hill, with thevehicle facing downhill. Keepingyour foot on the regular brake, setthe parking brake.. To check the parking brake's

holding ability: With the enginerunning and the transmission inN (Neutral), slowly remove footpressure from the regular brakepedal. Do this until the vehicle isheld by the parking brake only.

. To check the P (Park)mechanism's holding ability:With the engine running, shift toP (Park). Then release theparking brake followed by theregular brake.

Contact your dealer if service isrequired.

Wiper Blade ReplacementWindshield wiper blades should beinspected for wear or cracking. SeeMaintenance Schedule onpage 11‑3.

It is a good idea to clean the wiperblade assembly on a regular basis.When worn, or cleaning isineffective, replace the wiper blade.For proper windshield wiper bladelength and type, see MaintenanceReplacement Parts on page 11‑14.


Vehicle Care 10-29

Notice: Allowing the wiper arm totouch the windshield when nowiper blade is installed coulddamage the windshield. Anydamage that occurs would not becovered by your warranty. Do notallow the wiper arm to touch thewindshield.

To replace the wiper blade:

1. Pull the wiper assembly awayfrom the windshield.

2. Lift up on the latch in the middleof the wiper blade where thewiper arm attaches.

3. With the latch open, pull thewiper blade down toward thewindshield far enough to releaseit from the J-hooked end of thewiper arm.

4. Remove the wiper blade.

5. Reverse Steps 1–3 for wiperblade replacement.

Headlamp AimingHeadlamp aim has been preset andshould need no further adjustment.

If the vehicle is damaged in a crash,the headlamp aim may be affected.If adjustment to the headlamps isnecessary, see your dealer.


10-30 Vehicle Care

Bulb ReplacementFor the proper type of replacementbulbs, see Replacement Bulbs onpage 10‑33.

For any bulb‐changing procedurenot listed in this section, contactyour dealer.

Halogen Bulbs

{ WARNING

Halogen bulbs have pressurizedgas inside and can burst if youdrop or scratch the bulb. You orothers could be injured. Be sureto read and follow the instructionson the bulb package.

High Intensity Discharge(HID) Lighting

{ WARNING

The high intensity dischargelighting system operates at a veryhigh voltage. If you try to serviceany of the system components,you could be seriously injured.Have your dealer or a qualifiedtechnician service them.

After an HID headlamp bulb hasbeen replaced, the beam might be aslightly different shade than it wasoriginally. This is normal.

Headlamps, Front TurnSignal and ParkingLamps

Base Headlamp Assembly(Passenger Side Shown, DriverSide Similar)

1. High-Beam Headlamp

2. Turn Signal Lamp

3. Low-Beam Headlamp/DaytimeRunning Lamp (DRL)

4. Parking Lamp

5. Sidemarker Lamp


Vehicle Care 10-31

Uplevel Headlamp Assembly(Passenger Side Shown, DriverSide Similar)

1. High/Low-Beam Headlamp - Tobe replaced at the dealer only

2. Turn Signal Lamp

Low-Beam Headlamps/DaytimeRunning Lamps (DRL),High-Beam Headlamps (Base)

1. For the driver side bulb, removethe windshield washer bottlefiller neck by firmly pulling itstraight up and out of the bottle.

2. Remove the outside cap for thelow-beam headlamp/DRL bulbreplacement from the back of theheadlamp assembly.

3. Remove the inside cap for thehigh-beam headlamp bulbreplacement from the back of theheadlamp assembly.

4. Disconnect the electricalconnector.

5. Remove the bulb socket fromthe headlamp assembly.

6. Replace the bulb in the bulbsocket.

7. Install the bulb socket in theheadlamp assembly.

8. Reverse Steps 1–4 to reinstallthe outside or inside cap on theheadlamp assembly.

High/Low-Beam Headlamps(Uplevel)

The high/low-beam headlamps onthe uplevel headlamp system areHigh Intensity Discharge (HID) andshould be replaced at the dealer.

Front Turn Signal/Parking/Sidemarker Lamps (Base andUplevel)

To replace the front turn signal,parking lamp, or sidemarker lamp:

1. For the driver side bulb, removethe windshield washer bottlefiller neck by firmly pulling itstraight up and out of the bottle.

2. Remove the bulb socket fromthe headlamp assembly byturning it counterclockwise.

3. Remove the bulb from thesocket.

4. Replace the bulb in the bulbsocket.

5. Install the bulb socket in theheadlamp assembly by turning itclockwise.


10-32 Vehicle Care

6. For the driver side, reinstall thewindshield washer bottle fillerneck by firmly pushing it straightinto the bottle. Ensure that thefiller neck clip engages into theunderhood electrical centerretainer.

Fog LampsTo replace the fog lamp bulb:

1. Locate the bulb assembly underthe front fascia.

2. Disconnect the electricalconnector from the bulbassembly.

3. Remove the bulb by turning itcounterclockwise and pulling itstraight out of the assembly.

4. Install the new bulb by turning itclockwise into the assembly.

5. Reconnect the electricalconnector to the bulb assembly.

Taillamps, Turn Signal,Stoplamps, and Back-UpLamps

1. Taillamp

2. Taillamp/Sidemarker Lamp

3. Stop/Turn Signal Lamp

4. Back-up Lamp

To replace any one of these bulbs:

1. Open the trunk. See TrunkRelease on page 1‑5.

2. Remove the trunk trim panelpush pin.

3. Pull the trunk trim panel back togain access to the taillampassembly.

4. Remove the two nuts thatsecure the taillamp assembly.

5. Remove the taillamp assemblyand disconnect the wiringharness connector.

6. Turn the bulb socketcounterclockwise to remove it.

7. Pull the bulb from the socket.

8. Install a new bulb.

9. Turn the bulb socket clockwiseto install it.

10. Reverse Steps 2–4 to reinstallthe taillamp assembly.


Vehicle Care 10-33

License Plate Lamp

Lamp Assembly

Bulb Assembly

1. Bulb Socket

2. Bulb

3. Lamp Assembly

To replace one of these bulbs:

1. Push the release tab toward thelamp assembly.

2. Pull the lamp assembly down toremove.

3. Turn the bulb socket (1)counterclockwise to remove itfrom the lamp assembly (3).

4. Pull the bulb (2) straight out ofthe bulb socket (1).

5. Push the replacement bulbstraight into the bulb socket andturn the bulb socket clockwise toinstall it into the lamp assembly.

6. Push the lamp assembly backinto position until the release tablocks into place.

Replacement Bulbs

Exterior LampBulb

Number

Back-up Lamp 3157 K

Fog Lamp H10

Front TurnSignal Lamp

3457 NAK

Front SidemarkerLamp (Base)

194NA

High‐BeamHeadlamp (Base)

H7

License Plate Lamp 194

Low‐BeamHeadlamp/DaytimeRunningLamp (DRL)

H11

Stoplamp/TurnSignal Lamp

3157 K

Taillamp/Sidemarker Lamp

3157 K

For replacement bulbs not listedhere, contact your dealer.


10-34 Vehicle Care

Electrical System

High Voltage Devices andWiring

{ WARNING

Exposure to high voltage cancause shock, burns, and evendeath. The high voltagecomponents in the vehicle canonly be serviced by technicianswith special training.

High voltage components areidentified by labels. Do notremove, open, take apart,or modify these components.High voltage cable or wiring hasorange covering. Do not probe,tamper with, cut, or modify highvoltage cable or wiring.

Electrical SystemOverloadThe vehicle has fuses and circuitbreakers to protect against anelectrical system overload.

When the current electrical load istoo heavy, the circuit breaker opensand closes, protecting the circuituntil the current load returns tonormal or the problem is fixed. Thisgreatly reduces the chance of circuitoverload and fire caused byelectrical problems.

Fuses and circuit breakers protectpower devices in the vehicle.

Replace a bad fuse with a new oneof the identical size and rating.

If there is a problem on the road anda fuse needs to be replaced, thesame amperage fuse can beborrowed. Choose some feature ofthe vehicle that is not needed to useand replace it as soon as possible.

Headlamp Wiring

An electrical overload may causethe lamps to go on and off, or insome cases to remain off. Have theheadlamp wiring checked right awayif the lamps go on and off orremain off.

Windshield Wipers

If the wiper motor overheats due toheavy snow or ice, the windshieldwipers will stop until the motor coolsand will then restart.

Although the circuit is protectedfrom electrical overload, overloaddue to heavy snow or ice maycause wiper linkage damage.Always clear ice and heavy snowfrom the windshield before using thewindshield wipers.

If the overload is caused by anelectrical problem and not snow orice, be sure to get it fixed.


Vehicle Care 10-35

Fuses and CircuitBreakersThe wiring circuits in the vehicle areprotected from short circuits by acombination of fuses and circuitbreakers. This greatly reduces thechance of damage caused byelectrical problems.

To check a fuse, look at thesilver-colored band inside the fuse.If the band is broken or melted,replace the fuse. Be sure to replacea bad fuse with a new one of theidentical size and rating.

Fuses of the same amperage canbe temporarily borrowed fromanother fuse location, if a fuse goesout. Replace the fuse as soon aspossible.

To identify and check fuses, circuitbreakers, and relays, see EngineCompartment Fuse Block onpage 10‑35 and Instrument PanelFuse Block on page 10‑39.

Engine CompartmentFuse Block

To remove the fuse block cover,press the three retaining clips on thecover and lift it straight up.

Notice: Spilling liquid on anyelectrical component on thevehicle may damage it. Alwayskeep the covers on any electricalcomponent.


10-36 Vehicle Care

Engine Compartment Fuse Block

The vehicle may not be equippedwith all of the fuses, relays, andfeatures shown.

FuseNumber

Usage

1 TransmissionControl Module

FuseNumber

Usage

2 Engine ControlModule

3 SAI Solenoid (2.4LEngine RPO LEA)

4 Not Used

FuseNumber

Usage

5 Ignition,TransmissionControl Module,Engine ControlModule

6 Windshield Wiper

7 BPIM (eAssist Only)

8 Not Used

9 Fuel Injection,Ignition System

10 Engine ControlModule

11 Oxygen Sensor

12 Starter

13 Fuel System ControlModule

14 Trunk Release

15 MGU Coolant Pump(eAssist Only)


Vehicle Care 10-37

FuseNumber

Usage

16 Heated SteeringWheel

17 Airbag

18 BPIM (eAssist Only)

19 Not Used

20 Not Used

21 Rear PowerWindows

22 Antilock BrakeSystem Valve

23 Variable EffortSteering

24 Front PowerWindows

25 Power Outlets

26 Antilock BrakeSystem Pump

27 Electric ParkingBrake

FuseNumber

Usage

28 Heated RearWindow

29 Left-Hand SeatLumbar

30 Right-Hand SeatLumbar

31 A/C Clutch

32 Body ControlModule 6

33 Heated Front Seats

34 Sunroof

35 Infotainment System

36 Not Used

37 Right-HandHigh-BeamHeadlamp

38 Left-HandHigh-BeamHeadlamp

FuseNumber

Usage

39 Not Used

40 Not Used

41 Vacuum Pump

42 Radiator Fan

43 Passive Entry/Passive Start

44 TransmissionAuxiliary Pump(eAssist Only)

45 Radiator Fan

46 Terminal 87, MainRelay

47 Oxygen Sensor

48 Fog Lamps

49 Right-Hand LowBeam, High IntensityDischargeHeadlamp


10-38 Vehicle Care

FuseNumber

Usage

50 Left-Hand LowBeam, High IntensityDischargeHeadlamp

51 Horn

52 MotorIndicator Lamp

53 Inside RearviewMirror

54 Not Used

55 Power Windows/Mirrors

56 Windshield Washer

57 Not Used

58 Not Used

59 Secondary AirInduction (eAssistand 2.4L EngineRPO LEA)

FuseNumber

Usage

60 Heated Mirrors

61 Not Used

62 Canister VentSolenoid

63 Not Used

64 Heater, Ventilation,and Air ConditioningPump (eAssist Only)

65 Not Used

66 SAI Check Valve(eAssist Only)

67 Fuel System ControlModule

68 Not Used

69 Battery Sensor

70 Not Used

71 Not Used

RelayNumber

Usage

1 Air ConditioningControl

2 Starter

3 Cooling Fan

4 Front Wiper (Step 2)

5 Front Wiper (Step 1,Interval)

6 SAI Valve/Heater(eAssist and 2.4LEngine RPO LEA),Ventilation, and AirConditioning Pump(eAssist Only)

7 Main Relay

8 Not Used

9 Cooling Fan

10 Cooling Fan


Vehicle Care 10-39

RelayNumber

Usage

11 TransmissionAuxiliary Pump(eAssist Only)

12 Cooling Fan (2.0LEngine RPO LHU)

13 Cooling Fan

14 High IntensityDischarge Lamps

15 Ignition

16 Secondary AIRPump (eAssist and2.4L EngineRPO LEA)

17 Window/MirrorDefog

Instrument Panel FuseBlock

The instrument panel fuse block islocated in the instrument panel, onthe driver side of the vehicle.

To access the fuses, open thestorage compartment. Press in onthe sides of the compartment torelease it from the instrument panel.Pull the door toward you to releaseit from the hinge.

Instrument Panel Fuse Block

Number Usage

1 Suspension ControlModule/UniversalGarage DoorOpener/ESC



4 Radio


10-40 Vehicle Care

Number Usage

5 Radio Displays,Park Assist,Infotainment,Module TunnelControl

6 Instrument PanelPower Outlet

7 Console PowerOutlet




11 Front HeaterVentilation AirConditioning/Blower

Number Usage

12 Right-Hand PowerFront Seat

13 Left-Hand PowerFront Seat

14 Diagnostic LinkConnector

15 Airbag

16 Spare

17 Heating VentilationAir ConditioningController

18 Service Fuse,Logistic Relay

19 Spare

20 Automatic OccupantSensing

Number Usage

21 Instrument Cluster

22 Discrete LogicIgnitionSwitch/PEPS



25 OnStar

26 Spare


Vehicle Care 10-41

Wheels and Tires

TiresEvery new GM vehicle hashigh-quality tires made by aleading tire manufacturer. Seethe warranty manual forinformation regarding the tirewarranty and where to getservice. For additionalinformation refer to the tiremanufacturer.

{ WARNING

. Poorly maintained andimproperly used tires aredangerous.

. Overloading the tires cancause overheating as aresult of too much flexing.There could be a blowout

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

and a serious crash. SeeVehicle Load Limits onpage 9‑10.

. Underinflated tires posethe same danger asoverloaded tires. Theresulting crash couldcause serious injury.Check all tires frequentlyto maintain therecommended pressure.Tire pressure should bechecked when the tiresare cold.

. Overinflated tires are morelikely to be cut, punctured,or broken by a suddenimpact — such as whenhitting a pothole. Keeptires at the recommendedpressure.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

. Worn or old tires cancause a crash. If the treadis badly worn,replace them.

. Replace any tires thathave been damaged byimpacts with potholes,curbs, etc.

. Improperly repaired tirescan cause a crash. Onlythe dealer or anauthorized tire servicecenter should repair,replace, dismount, andmount the tires.

. Do not spin the tires inexcess of 56 km/h(35 mph) on slipperysurfaces such as snow,mud, ice, etc. Excessivespinning may cause thetires to explode.


10-42 Vehicle Care

See Tire Pressure forHigh-Speed Operation onpage 10‑49 for inflation pressureadjustment for high-speeddriving.

All-Season TiresThis vehicle may come withall-season tires. These tires aredesigned to provide good overallperformance on most road surfacesand weather conditions. Originalequipment tires designed to GM'sspecific tire performance criteriahave a TPC specification codemolded onto the sidewall. Originalequipment all-season tires can beidentified by the last two charactersof this TPC code, which willbe “MS.”

Consider installing winter tires onthe vehicle if frequent driving onsnow or ice-covered roads isexpected. All-season tires provideadequate performance for mostwinter driving conditions, but theymay not offer the same level of

traction or performance as wintertires on snow or ice-covered roads.See Winter Tires on page 10‑42.

Winter TiresThis vehicle was not, originally,equipped with winter tires. Wintertires are designed for increasedtraction on snow and ice-coveredroads. Consider installing wintertires on the vehicle if frequentdriving on snow or ice-coveredroads is expected. See your dealerfor details regarding winter tireavailability and proper tire selection.Also, see Buying New Tires onpage 10‑57.

With winter tires, there may bedecreased dry road traction,increased road noise, and shortertread life. After changing to wintertires, be alert for changes in vehiclehandling and braking.

If using winter tires:. Use tires of the same brand and

tread type on all four wheelpositions.

. Use only radial ply tires of thesame size, load range, andspeed rating as the originalequipment tires.

Winter tires with the same speedrating as the original equipment tiresmay not be available for H, V, W, Y,and ZR speed rated tires. If wintertires with a lower speed rating arechosen, never exceed the tire'smaximum speed capability.

Summer TiresThis vehicle may come with highperformance summer tires. Thesetires have a special tread andcompound that are optimized formaximum dry and wet roadperformance. This special tread andcompound will decreaseperformance in cold climates, andon ice and snow. We recommendinstalling winter tires on the vehicleif frequent driving in coldtemperatures or on snow or icecovered roads is expected. SeeWinter Tires on page 10‑42.


Vehicle Care 10-43

Tire Sidewall LabelingUseful information about a tire ismolded into its sidewall. Theexamples show a typicalpassenger vehicle tire and acompact spare tire sidewall.

Passenger (P-Metric) Tire Example

(1) Tire Size: The tire size is acombination of letters andnumbers used to define aparticular tire's width, height,aspect ratio, construction type,

and service description. See the“Tire Size” illustration later in thissection.

(2) TPC Spec (TirePerformance CriteriaSpecification): Originalequipment tires designed toGM's specific tire performancecriteria have a TPC specificationcode molded onto the sidewall.GM's TPC specifications meet orexceed all federal safetyguidelines.

(3) DOT (Department ofTransportation): TheDepartment of Transportation(DOT) code indicates that thetire is in compliance with theU.S. Department ofTransportation Motor VehicleSafety Standards.

DOT Tire Date ofManufacture: The last fourdigits of the TIN indicate the tiremanufactured date. The first two

digits represent the week(01–52) and the last two digits,the year. For example, the thirdweek of the year 2010 wouldhave a four-digit DOT dateof 0310.

(4) Tire Identification Number(TIN): The letters and numbersfollowing the DOT (Departmentof Transportation) code are theTire Identification Number (TIN).The TIN shows themanufacturer and plant code,tire size, and date the tire wasmanufactured. The TIN ismolded onto both sides of thetire, although only one side mayhave the date of manufacture.

(5) Tire Ply Material: The typeof cord and number of plies inthe sidewall and under the tread.

(6) Uniform Tire QualityGrading (UTQG): Tiremanufacturers are required tograde tires based on three


10-44 Vehicle Care

performance factors: treadwear,traction, and temperatureresistance. For more informationsee Uniform Tire QualityGrading on page 10‑59.

(7) Maximum Cold InflationLoad Limit: Maximum load thatcan be carried and themaximum pressure needed tosupport that load.

Compact Spare Tire Example

(1) Tire Ply Material: The typeof cord and number of plies inthe sidewall and under the tread.

(2) Temporary Use Only: Thecompact spare tire or temporaryuse tire should not be driven atspeeds over 80 km/h (50 mph).The compact spare tire is foremergency use when a regularroad tire has lost air and goneflat. If the vehicle has a compactspare tire, see Compact SpareTire on page 10‑84 and If a TireGoes Flat on page 10‑62.

(3) Tire Identification Number(TIN): The letters and numbersfollowing the DOT (Departmentof Transportation) code are theTire Identification Number (TIN).The TIN shows themanufacturer and plant code,tire size, and date the tire wasmanufactured. The TIN ismolded onto both sides of thetire, although only one side mayhave the date of manufacture.

(4) Maximum Cold InflationLoad Limit: Maximum load thatcan be carried and themaximum pressure needed tosupport that load.

(5) Tire Inflation: Thetemporary use tire or compactspare tire should be inflated to420 kPa (60 psi). For moreinformation on tire pressure andinflation see Tire Pressure onpage 10‑48.

(6) Tire Size: A combination ofletters and numbers define atire's width, height, aspect ratio,construction type, and servicedescription. The letter T as thefirst character in the tire sizemeans the tire is for temporaryuse only.

(7) TPC Spec (TirePerformance CriteriaSpecification): Originalequipment tires designed toGM's specific tire performance


Vehicle Care 10-45

criteria have a TPC specificationcode molded onto the sidewall.GM's TPC specifications meet orexceed all federal safetyguidelines.

Tire Designations

Tire Size

The following is an example of atypical passenger vehicletire size.

(1) Passenger (P-Metric) Tire:The United States version of ametric tire sizing system. Theletter P as the first character inthe tire size means a passenger

vehicle tire engineered tostandards set by the U.S. Tireand Rim Association.

(2) Tire Width: The three-digitnumber indicates the tire sectionwidth in millimeters fromsidewall to sidewall.

(3) Aspect Ratio: A two-digitnumber that indicates the tireheight-to-width measurements.For example, if the tire sizeaspect ratio is 60, as shown initem 3 of the illustration, it wouldmean that the tire's sidewall is60 percent as high as it is wide.

(4) Construction Code: A lettercode is used to indicate the typeof ply construction in the tire.The letter R means radial plyconstruction; the letter D meansdiagonal or bias plyconstruction; and the letter Bmeans belted-bias plyconstruction.

(5) Rim Diameter: Diameter ofthe wheel in inches.

(6) Service Description: Thesecharacters represent the loadindex and speed rating of thetire. The load index representsthe load carrying capacity a tireis certified to carry. The speedrating is the maximum speed atire is certified to carry a load.

Tire Terminology andDefinitionsAir Pressure: The amount ofair inside the tire pressingoutward on each square inch ofthe tire. Air pressure isexpressed in kPa (kilopascal)or psi (pounds per square inch).

Accessory Weight: Thecombined weight of optionalaccessories. Some examples ofoptional accessories areautomatic transmission, power


10-46 Vehicle Care

steering, power brakes, powerwindows, power seats, and airconditioning.

Aspect Ratio: The relationshipof a tire's height to its width.

Belt: A rubber coated layer ofcords between the plies and thetread. Cords may be made fromsteel or other reinforcingmaterials.

Bead: The tire bead containssteel wires wrapped by steelcords that hold the tire ontothe rim.

Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tirein which the plies are laid atalternate angles less than90 degrees to the centerline ofthe tread.

Cold Tire Pressure: Theamount of air pressure in a tire,measured in kPa (kilopascal)or psi (pounds per square inch)

before a tire has built up heatfrom driving. See Tire Pressureon page 10‑48.

Curb Weight: The weight of amotor vehicle with standard andoptional equipment including themaximum capacity of fuel, oil,and coolant, but withoutpassengers and cargo.

DOT Markings: A code moldedinto the sidewall of a tiresignifying that the tire is incompliance with the U.S.Department of Transportation(DOT) Motor Vehicle SafetyStandards. The DOT codeincludes the Tire IdentificationNumber (TIN), an alphanumericdesignator which can alsoidentify the tire manufacturer,production plant, brand, anddate of production.

GVWR: Gross Vehicle WeightRating. See Vehicle Load Limitson page 9‑10.

GAWR FRT: Gross Axle WeightRating for the front axle. SeeVehicle Load Limits onpage 9‑10.

GAWR RR: Gross Axle WeightRating for the rear axle. SeeVehicle Load Limits onpage 9‑10.

Intended Outboard Sidewall:The side of an asymmetrical tire,that must always face outwardwhen mounted on a vehicle.

Kilopascal (kPa): The metricunit for air pressure.

Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire: Atire used on light duty trucks andsome multipurpose passengervehicles.

Load Index: An assignednumber ranging from 1 to 279that corresponds to the loadcarrying capacity of a tire.


Vehicle Care 10-47

Maximum Inflation Pressure:The maximum air pressure towhich a cold tire can be inflated.The maximum air pressure ismolded onto the sidewall.

Maximum Load Rating: Theload rating for a tire at themaximum permissible inflationpressure for that tire.

Maximum Loaded VehicleWeight: The sum of curbweight, accessory weight,vehicle capacity weight, andproduction options weight.

Normal Occupant Weight: Thenumber of occupants a vehicleis designed to seat multiplied by68 kg (150 lb). See Vehicle LoadLimits on page 9‑10.

Occupant Distribution:Designated seating positions.

Outward Facing Sidewall: Theside of an asymmetrical tire thathas a particular side that facesoutward when mounted on avehicle. The side of the tire thatcontains a whitewall, bearswhite lettering, or bearsmanufacturer, brand, and/ormodel name molding that ishigher or deeper than the samemoldings on the other sidewallof the tire.

Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: Atire used on passenger cars andsome light duty trucks andmultipurpose vehicles.

Recommended InflationPressure: Vehiclemanufacturer's recommendedtire inflation pressure as shownon the tire placard. See TirePressure on page 10‑48 andVehicle Load Limits onpage 9‑10.

Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatictire in which the ply cords thatextend to the beads are laid at90 degrees to the centerline ofthe tread.

Rim: A metal support for a tireand upon which the tire beadsare seated.

Sidewall: The portion of a tirebetween the tread and the bead.

Speed Rating: Analphanumeric code assigned toa tire indicating the maximumspeed at which a tire canoperate.

Traction: The friction betweenthe tire and the road surface.The amount of grip provided.

Tread: The portion of a tire thatcomes into contact withthe road.


10-48 Vehicle Care

Treadwear Indicators: Narrowbands, sometimes called wearbars, that show across the treadof a tire when only 1.6 mm (1/16 in) of tread remains. SeeWhen It Is Time for New Tireson page 10‑56.

UTQGS (Uniform Tire QualityGrading Standards): A tireinformation system that providesconsumers with ratings for atire's traction, temperature, andtreadwear. Ratings aredetermined by tiremanufacturers usinggovernment testing procedures.The ratings are molded into thesidewall of the tire. See UniformTire Quality Grading onpage 10‑59.

Vehicle Capacity Weight: Thenumber of designated seatingpositions multiplied by

68 kg (150 lb) plus the ratedcargo load. See Vehicle LoadLimits on page 9‑10.

Vehicle Maximum Load on theTire: Load on an individual tiredue to curb weight, accessoryweight, occupant weight, andcargo weight.

Vehicle Placard: A labelpermanently attached to avehicle showing the vehiclecapacity weight and the originalequipment tire size andrecommended inflation pressure.See “Tire and LoadingInformation Label” under VehicleLoad Limits on page 9‑10.

Tire PressureTires need the correct amount ofair pressure to operateeffectively.

Notice: Neither tireunderinflation noroverinflation is good.Underinflated tires, or tiresthat do not have enough air,can result in:. Tire overloading andoverheating which couldlead to a blowout.

. Premature orirregular wear.

. Poor handling.

. Reduced fuel economy.

Overinflated tires, or tires thathave too much air, canresult in:. Unusual wear.. Poor handling.. Rough ride.. Needless damage fromroad hazards.


Vehicle Care 10-49

The Tire and LoadingInformation label on the vehicleindicates the original equipmenttires and the correct cold tireinflation pressures. Therecommended pressure is theminimum air pressure needed tosupport the vehicle's maximumload carrying capacity. SeeVehicle Load Limits onpage 9‑10.

How the vehicle is loadedaffects vehicle handling and ridecomfort. Never load the vehiclewith more weight than it wasdesigned to carry.

When to Check

Check the tires once a month ormore. Do not forget the compactspare, if the vehicle has one.The cold compact spare tirepressure should be at 420 kPa(60 psi). See Compact SpareTire on page 10‑84.

How to Check

Use a good quality pocket-typegauge to check tire pressure.Proper tire inflation cannot bedetermined by looking at the tire.Check the tire inflation pressurewhen the tires are cold, meaningthe vehicle has not been drivenfor at least three hours or nomore than 1.6 km (1 mi).

Remove the valve cap from thetire valve stem. Press the tiregauge firmly onto the valve toget a pressure measurement.If the cold tire inflation pressurematches the recommendedpressure on the Tire andLoading Information label, nofurther adjustment is necessary.If the inflation pressure is low,add air until the recommendedpressure is reached. If theinflation pressure is high, presson the metal stem in the centerof the tire valve to release air.

Recheck the tire pressure withthe tire gauge.

Return the valve caps on thevalve stems to prevent leaksand keep out dirt and moisture.

Tire Pressure forHigh-Speed Operation

{ WARNING

Driving at high speeds, 160 km/h(100mph) or higher, puts anadditional strain on tires.Sustained high-speed drivingcauses excessive heat buildupand can cause sudden tire failure.You could have a crash and youor others could be killed. Somehigh-speed rated tires requireinflation pressure adjustment forhigh-speed operation. Whenspeed limits and road conditionsare such that a vehicle can bedriven at high speeds, make sure

(Continued)


10-50 Vehicle Care

WARNING (Continued)

the tires are rated for high-speedoperation, in excellent condition,and set to the correct cold tireinflation pressure for thevehicle load.

Vehicles with P235/50R18 size tiresrequire inflation pressure adjustmentwhen driving the vehicle at speedsof 160 km/h (100 mph) or higher.Set the cold inflation pressure to40 kPa (6 psi) above therecommended cold tire pressureshown on the Tire and LoadingInformation label for the P235/50R18 tire.

Vehicles with P245/40R19 size tiresrequire inflation pressure adjustmentwhen driving the vehicle at speedsof 160 km/h (100 mph) or higher.Set the cold inflation pressure to40 kPa (6 psi) above therecommended cold tire pressure

shown on the Tire and LoadingInformation label for the P245/40R19 tire.

Return the tires to therecommended cold tire inflationpressure when high-speed drivinghas ended. See Vehicle Load Limitson page 9‑10 and Tire Pressure onpage 10‑48.

Tire Pressure MonitorSystemThe Tire Pressure Monitor System(TPMS) uses radio and sensortechnology to check tire pressurelevels. The TPMS sensors monitorthe air pressure in your tires andtransmit tire pressure readings to areceiver located in the vehicle.

Each tire, including the spare (ifprovided), should be checkedmonthly when cold and inflated tothe inflation pressure recommendedby the vehicle manufacturer on thevehicle placard or tire inflationpressure label. (If your vehicle hastires of a different size than the size

indicated on the vehicle placard ortire inflation pressure label, youshould determine the proper tireinflation pressure for those tires.)

As an added safety feature, yourvehicle has been equipped with atire pressure monitoring system(TPMS) that illuminates a low tirepressure telltale when one or moreof your tires is significantlyunder-inflated.

Accordingly, when the low tirepressure telltale illuminates, youshould stop and check your tires assoon as possible, and inflate themto the proper pressure. Driving on asignificantly under-inflated tirecauses the tire to overheat and canlead to tire failure. Under-inflationalso reduces fuel efficiency and tiretread life, and may affect thevehicle's handling and stoppingability.

Please note that the TPMS is not asubstitute for proper tiremaintenance, and it is the driver'sresponsibility to maintain correct tire


Vehicle Care 10-51

pressure, even if under-inflation hasnot reached the level to triggerillumination of the TPMS low tirepressure telltale.

Your vehicle has also beenequipped with a TPMS malfunctionindicator to indicate when thesystem is not operating properly.The TPMS malfunction indicator iscombined with the low tire pressuretelltale. When the system detects amalfunction, the telltale will flash forapproximately one minute and thenremain continuously illuminated.This sequence will continue uponsubsequent vehicle start-ups aslong as the malfunction exists.

When the malfunction indicator isilluminated, the system may not beable to detect or signal low tirepressure as intended. TPMSmalfunctions may occur for a varietyof reasons, including the installationof replacement or alternate tires orwheels on the vehicle that preventthe TPMS from functioning properly.Always check the TPMS malfunctiontelltale after replacing one or more

tires or wheels on your vehicle toensure that the replacement oralternate tires and wheels allow theTPMS to continue to functionproperly.

See Tire Pressure MonitorOperation on page 10‑51.

Federal CommunicationsCommission (FCC) Rules andwith Industry CanadaStandards

See Radio Frequency Statement onpage 13‑20 for informationregarding Part 15 of the FederalCommunications Commission (FCC)Rules and with Industry CanadaStandards RSS-GEN/210/220/310.

Tire Pressure MonitorOperationThis vehicle may have a TirePressure Monitor System (TPMS).The TPMS is designed to warn thedriver when a low tire pressurecondition exists. TPMS sensors aremounted onto each tire and wheel

assembly, excluding the spare tireand wheel assembly. The TPMSsensors monitor the air pressure inthe tires and transmits the tirepressure readings to a receiver inthe vehicle.

When a low tire pressure conditionis detected, the TPMS illuminatesthe low tire pressure warning lighton the instrument cluster. If thewarning light comes on, stop assoon as possible and inflate thetires to the recommended pressureshown on the Tire and LoadingInformation label. See Vehicle LoadLimits on page 9‑10.

A message to check the pressure ina specific tire displays in the DriverInformation Center (DIC). The lowtire pressure warning light and theDIC warning message come on at


10-52 Vehicle Care

each ignition cycle until the tires areinflated to the correct inflationpressure. Using the DIC, tirepressure levels can be viewed. Foradditional information and detailsabout the DIC operation anddisplays see Driver InformationCenter (DIC) on page 5‑24.

The low tire pressure warning lightmay come on in cool weather whenthe vehicle is first started, and thenturn off as the vehicle is driven. Thiscould be an early indicator that theair pressure is getting low andneeds to be inflated to the properpressure.

A Tire and Loading Informationlabel, attached to your vehicle,shows the size of the originalequipment tires and the correctinflation pressure for the tires whenthey are cold. See Vehicle LoadLimits on page 9‑10, for an exampleof the Tire and Loading Informationlabel and its location. Also see TirePressure on page 10‑48.

The TPMS can warn about a lowtire pressure condition but it doesnot replace normal tiremaintenance. See Tire Inspectionon page 10‑54, Tire Rotation onpage 10‑55 and Tires onpage 10‑41.

Notice: Tire sealant materials arenot all the same. A non-approvedtire sealant could damage theTPMS sensors. TPMS sensordamage caused by using anincorrect tire sealant is notcovered by the vehicle warranty.Always use only theGM-approved tire sealantavailable through your dealer orincluded in the vehicle.

Factory-installed Tire Inflator Kitsuse a GM approved liquid tiresealant. Using non-approved tiresealants could damage the TPMSsensors. See Tire Sealant andCompressor Kit on page 10‑64 orTire Sealant and Compressor Kit onpage 10‑71 for informationregarding the inflator kit materialsand instructions.

TPMS Malfunction Light andMessage

The TPMS will not function properlyif one or more of the TPMS sensorsare missing or inoperable. When thesystem detects a malfunction, thelow tire warning light flashes forabout one minute and then stays onfor the remainder of the ignitioncycle. A DIC warning message alsodisplays. The malfunction light andDIC warning message come on ateach ignition cycle until the problemis corrected. Some of the conditionsthat can cause these to comeon are:. One of the road tires has been

replaced with the spare tire. Thespare tire does not have aTPMS sensor. The malfunctionlight and DIC message shouldgo off after the road tire isreplaced and the sensormatching process is performedsuccessfully. See “TPMS SensorMatching Process” later in thissection.


Vehicle Care 10-53

. The TPMS sensor matchingprocess was not done or notcompleted successfully afterrotating the tires. Themalfunction light and the DICmessage should go off aftersuccessfully completing thesensor matching process. See"TPMS Sensor MatchingProcess" later in this section.

. One or more TPMS sensors aremissing or damaged. Themalfunction light and the DICmessage should go off when theTPMS sensors are installed andthe sensor matching process isperformed successfully. Seeyour dealer for service.

. Replacement tires or wheels donot match the original equipmenttires or wheels. Tires and wheelsother than those recommendedcould prevent the TPMS fromfunctioning properly. See BuyingNew Tires on page 10‑57.

. Operating electronic devices orbeing near facilities using radiowave frequencies similar to theTPMS could cause the TPMSsensors to malfunction.

If the TPMS is not functioningproperly it cannot detect or signal alow tire condition. See your dealerfor service if the TPMS malfunctionlight and DIC message comes onand stays on.

TPMS Sensor MatchingProcess

Each TPMS sensor has a uniqueidentification code. The identificationcode needs to be matched to a newtire/wheel position after rotating thevehicle’s tires or replacing one ormore of the TPMS sensors. TheTPMS sensor matching processshould also be performed afterreplacing a spare tire with a roadtire containing the TPMS sensor.The malfunction light and the DICmessage should go off at the nextignition cycle. The sensors arematched to the tire/wheel positions,

using a TPMS relearn tool, in thefollowing order: driver side front tire,passenger side front tire, passengerside rear tire, and driver side rear.See your dealer for service or topurchase a relearn tool.

There are two minutes to match thefirst tire/wheel position, andfive minutes overall to match all fourtire/wheel positions. If it takeslonger, the matching process stopsand must be restarted.

The TPMS sensor matchingprocess is:

1. Set the parking brake.

2. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN withthe engine off or place thevehicle power mode in ON/RUN/START. See Ignition Positions(Keyless Access) on page 9‑17or Ignition Positions (KeyAccess) on page 9‑15.

3. Use the MENU button to selectthe Vehicle Information Menu inthe Driver InformationCenter (DIC).


10-54 Vehicle Care

4. Use the thumbwheel to scroll tothe Tire Pressure Menu Itemscreen.

5. Press the SET/CLR button tobegin the sensor matchingprocess.

A message asking if the processshould begin should appear.

6. Press the SET/CLR button againto confirm the selection.

The horn sounds twice to signalthe receiver is in relearn modeand the TIRE LEARNINGACTIVE message displays onthe DIC screen.

7. Start with the driver sidefront tire.

8. Place the relearn tool againstthe tire sidewall, near the valvestem. Then press the button toactivate the TPMS sensor.A horn chirp confirms that thesensor identification code hasbeen matched to this tire andwheel position.

9. Proceed to the passenger sidefront tire, and repeat theprocedure in Step 8.

10. Proceed to the passenger siderear tire, and repeat theprocedure in Step 8.

11. Proceed to the driver side reartire, and repeat the procedurein Step 8. The horn sounds twotimes to indicate the sensoridentification code has beenmatched to the driver side reartire, and the TPMS sensormatching process is no longeractive. The TIRE LEARNINGACTIVE message on the DICdisplay screen goes off.

12. Turn the ignition to LOCK/OFFor press STOP to turn theignition off.

13. Set all four tires to therecommended air pressurelevel as indicated on the Tireand Loading Information label.

Tire InspectionWe recommend that the tires,including the spare tire, if thevehicle has one, be inspectedfor signs of wear or damage atleast once a month.

Replace the tire if:. The indicators at three or

more places around the tirecan be seen.

. There is cord or fabricshowing through the tire'srubber.

. The tread or sidewall iscracked, cut, or snaggeddeep enough to show cord orfabric.

. The tire has a bump, bulge,or split.


Vehicle Care 10-55

. The tire has a puncture, cut,or other damage that cannotbe repaired well because ofthe size or location of thedamage.

Tire RotationTires should be rotated every12 000 km (7,500 mi). SeeMaintenance Schedule onpage 11‑3.

Tires are rotated to achieve auniform wear for all tires. Thefirst rotation is the mostimportant.

Anytime unusual wear isnoticed, rotate the tires as soonas possible, check for proper tireinflation pressure, and check fordamaged tires or wheels. If theunusual wear continues after the

rotation, check the wheelalignment. See When It Is Timefor New Tires on page 10‑56and Wheel Replacement onpage 10‑61.

Use this rotation pattern whenrotating the tires.

Do not include the compactspare tire in the tire rotation.

Adjust the front and rear tires tothe recommended inflationpressure on the Tire andLoading Information label afterthe tires have been rotated. SeeTire Pressure on page 10‑48and Vehicle Load Limits onpage 9‑10.

Reset the Tire Pressure MonitorSystem. See Tire PressureMonitor Operation onpage 10‑51.

Check that all wheel nuts areproperly tightened. See “WheelNut Torque” under Capacitiesand Specifications onpage 12‑2.


10-56 Vehicle Care

{ WARNING

Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on theparts to which it is fastened, canmake wheel nuts become looseafter time. The wheel could comeoff and cause an accident. Whenchanging a wheel, remove anyrust or dirt from places where thewheel attaches to the vehicle. Inan emergency, a cloth or a papertowel can be used; however, usea scraper or wire brush later toremove all rust or dirt.

Lightly coat the center of thewheel hub with wheel bearinggrease after a wheel change ortire rotation to prevent corrosionor rust build-up. Do not getgrease on the flat wheelmounting surface or on thewheel nuts or bolts.

When It Is Time for NewTiresFactors such as maintenance,temperatures, driving speeds,vehicle loading, and road conditionsaffect the wear rate of the tires.

Treadwear indicators are one way totell when it is time for new tires.Treadwear indicators appear whenthe tires have only 1.6 mm (1/16 in)or less of tread remaining. See TireInspection on page 10‑54 and TireRotation on page 10‑55.

The rubber in tires ages over time.This also applies to the spare tire,if the vehicle has one, even if it isnever used. Multiple factorsincluding temperatures, loadingconditions, and inflation pressuremaintenance affect how fast agingtakes place. GM recommends thattires, including the spare ifequipped, be replaced after sixyears, regardless of tread wear. Thetire manufacturer date is the lastfour digits of the DOT TireIdentification Number (TIN) which ismolded into one side of the tiresidewall. The first two digitsrepresent the week (01–52) and thelast two digits, the year. Forexample, the third week of the year2010 would have a four-digit DOTdate of 0310.

Vehicle Storage

Tires age when stored normallymounted on a parked vehicle. Parka vehicle that will be stored for atleast a month in a cool, dry, cleanarea away from direct sunlight to


Vehicle Care 10-57

slow aging. This area should be freeof grease, gasoline, or othersubstances that can deterioraterubber.

Parking for an extended period cancause flat spots on the tires thatmay result in vibrations whiledriving. When storing a vehicle forat least a month, remove the tires orraise the vehicle to reduce theweight from the tires.

Buying New TiresGM has developed and matchedspecific tires for the vehicle. Theoriginal equipment tires installedwere designed to meet GeneralMotors Tire Performance CriteriaSpecification (TPC Spec)system rating. Whenreplacement tires are needed,GM strongly recommendsbuying tires with the same TPCSpec rating.

GM's exclusive TPC Specsystem considers over a dozencritical specifications that impactthe overall performance of thevehicle, including brake systemperformance, ride and handling,traction control, and tirepressure monitoringperformance. GM's TPC Specnumber is molded onto the tire'ssidewall near the tire size. If thetires have an all-season treaddesign, the TPC Spec numberwill be followed by MS for mudand snow. See Tire SidewallLabeling on page 10‑43.

GM recommends replacing worntires in complete sets of four.Uniform tread depth on all tireswill help to maintain theperformance of the vehicle.Braking and handlingperformance may be adverselyaffected if all the tires are notreplaced at the same time.

If proper rotation andmaintenance have been done,all four tires should wear out atabout the same time. See TireRotation on page 10‑55 forinformation on proper tirerotation. However, if it isnecessary to replace only oneaxle set of worn tires, place thenew tires on the rear axle.

Winter tires with the same speedrating as the original equipmenttires may not be available for H,V, W, Y and ZR speed ratedtires. Never exceed the wintertire's maximum speed capabilitywhen using winter tires with alower speed rating.


10-58 Vehicle Care

{ WARNING

Tires could explode duringimproper service. Attemptingto mount or dismount a tirecould cause injury or death.Only your dealer or authorizedtire service center shouldmount or dismount the tires.

{ WARNING

Mixing tires of different sizes,brands, or types may causeloss of control of the vehicle,resulting in a crash or othervehicle damage. Use thecorrect size, brand, and typeof tires on all wheels.

{ WARNING

Using bias-ply tires on thevehicle may cause the wheelrim flanges to develop cracksafter many miles of driving.A tire and/or wheel could failsuddenly and cause a crash.Use only radial-ply tires withthe wheels on the vehicle.

If the vehicle tires must bereplaced with a tire that does nothave a TPC Spec number, makesure they are the same size,load range, speed rating, andconstruction (radial) as theoriginal tires.

Vehicles that have a tirepressure monitoring systemcould give an inaccuratelow-pressure warning if non-TPCSpec rated tires are installed.See Tire Pressure MonitorSystem on page 10‑50.

The Tire and LoadingInformation label indicates theoriginal equipment tires on thevehicle. See Vehicle Load Limitson page 9‑10.

Different Size Tires andWheelsIf wheels or tires are installed thatare a different size than the originalequipment wheels and tires, vehicleperformance, including its braking,ride and handling characteristics,stability, and resistance to rollovermay be affected. If the vehicle haselectronic systems such as antilockbrakes, rollover airbags, tractioncontrol, electronic stability control,or All-Wheel Drive, the performanceof these systems can also beaffected.


Vehicle Care 10-59

{ WARNING

If different sized wheels are used,there may not be an acceptablelevel of performance and safety iftires not recommended for thosewheels are selected. Thisincreases the chance of a crashand serious injury. Only use GMspecific wheel and tire systemsdeveloped for the vehicle, andhave them properly installed by aGM certified technician.

See Buying New Tires onpage 10‑57 and Accessories andModifications on page 10‑3.

Uniform Tire QualityGradingQuality grades can be foundwhere applicable on the tiresidewall between tread shoulderand maximum section width. Forexample:

Treadwear 200 Traction AATemperature A

The following information relatesto the system developed by theUnited States National HighwayTraffic Safety Administration(NHTSA), which grades tires bytreadwear, traction, andtemperature performance. Thisapplies only to vehicles sold inthe United States. The gradesare molded on the sidewalls ofmost passenger car tires. TheUniform Tire Quality Grading(UTQG) system does not applyto deep tread, winter tires,compact spare tires, tires with

nominal rim diameters of10 to 12 inches (25 to 30 cm),or to some limited-productiontires.

While the tires available onGeneral Motors passenger carsand light trucks may vary withrespect to these grades, theymust also conform to federalsafety requirements andadditional General Motors TirePerformance Criteria (TPC)standards.

All Passenger Car Tires MustConform to Federal SafetyRequirements In Addition ToThese Grades.

Treadwear

The treadwear grade is acomparative rating based on thewear rate of the tire when testedunder controlled conditions on aspecified government testcourse. For example, a tire


10-60 Vehicle Care

graded 150 would wear one andone-half (1½) times as well onthe government course as a tiregraded 100. The relativeperformance of tires dependsupon the actual conditions oftheir use, however, and maydepart significantly from thenorm due to variations in drivinghabits, service practices anddifferences in roadcharacteristics and climate.

Traction – AA, A, B, CThe traction grades, fromhighest to lowest, are AA, A, B,and C. Those grades representthe tire's ability to stop on wetpavement as measured undercontrolled conditions onspecified government testsurfaces of asphalt andconcrete. A tire marked C mayhave poor traction performance.Warning: The traction gradeassigned to this tire is based on

straight-ahead braking tractiontests, and does not includeacceleration, cornering,hydroplaning, or peak tractioncharacteristics.

Temperature – A, B, CThe temperature grades are A(the highest), B, and C,representing the tire's resistanceto the generation of heat and itsability to dissipate heat whentested under controlledconditions on a specified indoorlaboratory test wheel. Sustainedhigh temperature can cause thematerial of the tire to degenerateand reduce tire life, andexcessive temperature can leadto sudden tire failure. The gradeC corresponds to a level ofperformance which allpassenger car tires must meetunder the Federal Motor SafetyStandard No. 109. Grades B andA represent higher levels of

performance on the laboratorytest wheel than the minimumrequired by law. Warning: Thetemperature grade for this tire isestablished for a tire that isproperly inflated and notoverloaded. Excessive speed,underinflation, or excessiveloading, either separately or incombination, can cause heatbuildup and possible tire failure.

Wheel Alignment and TireBalanceThe tires and wheels were alignedand balanced at the factory toprovide the longest tire life and bestoverall performance. Adjustments towheel alignment and tire balancingwill not be necessary on a regularbasis. However, check thealignment if there is unusual tirewear or if the vehicle is pulling toone side or the other. If the vehiclevibrates when driving on a smooth


Vehicle Care 10-61

road, the tires and wheels mightneed to be rebalanced. See yourdealer for proper diagnosis.

Wheel ReplacementReplace any wheel that is bent,cracked, or badly rusted orcorroded. If wheel nuts keep comingloose, the wheel, wheel bolts, andwheel nuts should be replaced.If the wheel leaks air, replace it.Some aluminum wheels can berepaired. See your dealer if any ofthese conditions exist.

Your dealer will know the kind ofwheel that is needed.

Each new wheel should have thesame load-carrying capacity,diameter, width, offset, and bemounted the same way as the one itreplaces.

Replace wheels, wheel bolts, wheelnuts, or Tire Pressure MonitorSystem (TPMS) sensors with newGM original equipment parts.

{ WARNING

Using the wrong replacementwheels, wheel bolts, or wheelnuts can be dangerous. It couldaffect the braking and handling ofthe vehicle. Tires can lose air,and cause loss of control, causinga crash. Always use the correctwheel, wheel bolts, and wheelnuts for replacement.

Notice: The wrong wheel canalso cause problems with bearinglife, brake cooling, speedometeror odometer calibration,headlamp aim, bumper height,vehicle ground clearance, and tireor tire chain clearance to thebody and chassis.

Used Replacement Wheels

{ WARNING

Replacing a wheel with a usedone is dangerous. How it hasbeen used or how far it has beendriven may be unknown. It couldfail suddenly and cause a crash.When replacing wheels, use anew GM original equipmentwheel.

Tire Chains

{ WARNING

Do not use tire chains. There isnot enough clearance. Tire chainsused on a vehicle without theproper amount of clearance cancause damage to the brakes,suspension, or other vehicle

(Continued)


10-62 Vehicle Care

WARNING (Continued)

parts. The area damaged by thetire chains could cause loss ofcontrol and a crash.

Use another type of tractiondevice only if its manufacturerrecommends it for the vehicle'stire size combination and roadconditions. Follow thatmanufacturer's instructions. Toavoid vehicle damage, drive slowand readjust or remove thetraction device if it contacts thevehicle. Do not spin the wheels.If traction devices are used, installthem on the front tires.

If a Tire Goes FlatIt is unusual for a tire to blow outwhile driving, especially if the tiresare maintained properly. See Tireson page 10‑41. If air goes out of atire, it is much more likely to leakout slowly. But if there is ever ablowout, here are a few tips aboutwhat to expect and what to do:

If a front tire fails, the flat tirecreates a drag that pulls the vehicletoward that side. Take your foot offthe accelerator pedal and grip thesteering wheel firmly. Steer tomaintain lane position, and thengently brake to a stop, well off theroad, if possible.

A rear blowout, particularly on acurve, acts much like a skid andmay require the same correction asused in a skid. Stop pressing theaccelerator pedal and steer tostraighten the vehicle. It may bevery bumpy and noisy. Gently braketo a stop, well off the road,if possible.

{ WARNING

Driving on a flat tire will causepermanent damage to the tire.Re-inflating a tire after it has beendriven on while severelyunderinflated or flat may cause ablowout and a serious crash.Never attempt to re-inflate a tirethat has been driven on whileseverely underinflated or flat.Have your dealer or an authorizedtire service center repair orreplace the flat tire as soon aspossible.

{ WARNING

Lifting a vehicle and getting underit to do maintenance or repairs isdangerous without theappropriate safety equipment andtraining. If a jack is provided withthe vehicle, it is designed only for

(Continued)


Vehicle Care 10-63

WARNING (Continued)

changing a flat tire. If it is used foranything else, you or others couldbe badly injured or killed if thevehicle slips off the jack. If a jackis provided with the vehicle, onlyuse it for changing a flat tire.

If a tire goes flat, avoid further tireand wheel damage by driving slowlyto a level place, well off the road,if possible. Turn on the hazardwarning flashers. See HazardWarning Flashers on page 6‑3.

{ WARNING

Changing a tire can bedangerous. The vehicle can slipoff the jack and roll over or fallcausing injury or death. Find alevel place to change the tire. Tohelp prevent the vehicle frommoving:

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

1. Set the parking brake firmly.

2. Put an automatictransmission in P (Park) or amanual transmission in1 (First) or R (Reverse).

3. Turn off the engine and donot restart while the vehicleis raised.

4. Do not allow passengers toremain in the vehicle.

5. Place wheel blocks on bothsides of the tire at theopposite corner of the tirebeing changed.

This vehicle may come with a jackand spare tire or a tire sealant andcompressor kit. To use the jackingequipment to change a spare tiresafely, follow the instructions below.

Then see Tire Changing onpage 10‑79. To use the tire sealantand compressor kit, see TireSealant and Compressor Kit onpage 10‑64 or Tire Sealant andCompressor Kit on page 10‑71.

When the vehicle has a flat tire (2),use the following example as aguide to assist you in the placementof wheel blocks (1).

1. Wheel Block

2. Flat Tire

The following information explainshow to repair or change a tire.


10-64 Vehicle Care

Tire Sealant andCompressor Kit

System Identification

If the vehicle has the tire sealantand compressor kit shown above,see the operating instructions thatfollow.

If the vehicle has the tire sealantand compressor kit shown above,follow the operating instructionsunder "Tire Sealant andCompressor Kit (With PressureDeflation Button).”

{ WARNING

Idling a vehicle in an enclosedarea with poor ventilation isdangerous. Engine exhaust mayenter the vehicle. Engine exhaustcontains carbon monoxide (CO)

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

which cannot be seen or smelled.It can cause unconsciousnessand even death. Never run theengine in an enclosed area thathas no fresh air ventilation. Formore information, see EngineExhaust on page 9‑26.

{ WARNING

Overinflating a tire could causethe tire to rupture and you orothers could be injured. Be sureto read and follow the tire sealantand compressor kit instructionsand inflate the tire to itsrecommended pressure. Do notexceed the recommendedpressure.


Vehicle Care 10-65

{ WARNING

Storing the tire sealant andcompressor kit or otherequipment in the passengercompartment of the vehicle couldcause injury. In a sudden stop orcollision, loose equipment couldstrike someone. Store the tiresealant and compressor kit in itsoriginal location.

If this vehicle has a tire sealant andcompressor kit, there may not be aspare tire and tire changingequipment, and on some vehiclesthere may not be a place to storea tire.

The tire sealant and compressorcan be used to temporarily sealpunctures up to 6 mm (0.25 in) inthe tread area of the tire. It can alsobe used to inflate anunderinflated tire.

If the tire has been separated fromthe wheel, has damaged sidewalls,or has a large puncture, the tire istoo severely damaged for the tiresealant and compressor kit to beeffective. See Roadside AssistanceProgram (Mexico) on page 13‑7 orRoadside Assistance Program (U.S.and Canada) on page 13‑11.

Read and follow all of the tiresealant and compressor kitinstructions.

The kit includes:

1. On/Off Button

2. Selector Switch (Sealant/Air orAir Only)

3. Pressure Relief Button

4. Pressure Gauge

5. Air Only Hose (Black)

6. Sealant/Air Hose (Clear)

7. Power Plug

Tire Sealant

Read and follow the safe handlinginstructions on the label adhered tothe compressor.

Check the tire sealant expirationdate on the sealant canister. Thesealant canister should be replacedbefore its expiration date.Replacement sealant canisters areavailable at your local dealer. See“Removal and Installation of theSealant Canister” later in thissection.

There is only enough sealant to sealone tire. After usage, the sealantcanister and sealant/air hoseassembly must be replaced. See


10-66 Vehicle Care

“Removal and Installation of theSealant Canister” later in thissection.

Using the Tire Sealant andCompressor Kit to TemporarilySeal and Inflate aPunctured Tire

Follow the directions closely forcorrect sealant usage.

When using the tire sealant andcompressor kit during coldtemperatures, warm the kit in a

heated environment for five minutes.This will help to inflate the tirefaster.

If a tire goes flat, avoid further tireand wheel damage by driving slowlyto a level place. Turn on the hazardwarning flashers. See HazardWarning Flashers on page 6‑3.

See If a Tire Goes Flat onpage 10‑62 for other importantsafety warnings.

Do not remove any objects thathave penetrated the tire.

1. Remove the tire sealant andcompressor kit from its storagelocation. See Storing the TireSealant and Compressor Kit onpage 10‑78.

2. Unwrap the sealant/air hose (6)and the power plug (7).

3. Place the kit on the ground.

Make sure the tire valve stem ispositioned close to the groundso the hose will reach it.

4. Remove the valve stem cap fromthe flat tire by turning itcounterclockwise.

5. Attach the sealant/air hose (6)onto the tire valve stem. Turn itclockwise until it is tight.

6. Plug the power plug (7) into theaccessory power outlet in thevehicle. Unplug all items fromother accessory power outlets.See Power Outlets on page 5‑6.

If the vehicle has an accessorypower outlet, do not use thecigarette lighter.

If the vehicle only has a cigarettelighter, use the cigarette lighter.

Do not pinch the power plugcord in the door or window.

7. Start the vehicle. The vehiclemust be running while using theair compressor.

8. Turn the selector switch (2)clockwise to the Sealant + Airposition.


Vehicle Care 10-67

9. Press the on/off button (1) toturn the tire sealant andcompressor kit on.

The compressor will injectsealant and air into the tire.

The pressure gauge (4) willinitially show a high pressurewhile the compressor pushes thesealant into the tire. Once thesealant is completely dispersedinto the tire, the pressure willquickly drop and start to riseagain as the tire inflates withair only.

10. Inflate the tire to therecommended inflationpressure using the pressuregauge (4). The recommendedinflation pressure can be foundon the Tire and LoadingInformation label. See TirePressure on page 10‑48.

The pressure gauge (4) mayread higher than the actual tirepressure while the compressoris on. Turn the compressor offto get an accurate pressurereading. The compressor maybe turned on/off until thecorrect pressure is reached.

Notice: If the recommendedpressure cannot be reached afterapproximately 25 minutes, thevehicle should not be drivenfarther. The tire is too severelydamaged and the tire sealant andcompressor kit cannot inflate thetire. Remove the power plug fromthe accessory power outlet andunscrew the inflating hose fromthe tire valve. See RoadsideAssistance Program (Mexico) onpage 13‑7 or Roadside AssistanceProgram (U.S. and Canada) onpage 13‑11.

11. Press the on/off button (1) toturn the tire sealant andcompressor kit off.

The tire is not sealed and willcontinue to leak air until thevehicle is driven and thesealant is distributed in the tire;therefore, Steps 12–18 must bedone immediately afterStep 11.

Be careful while handling thetire sealant and compressor kitas it could be warm afterusage.

12. Unplug the power plug (7) fromthe accessory power outlet inthe vehicle.

13. Turn the sealant/air hose (6)counterclockwise to remove itfrom the tire valve stem.

14. Replace the tire valvestem cap.

15. Return the sealant/air hose (6)and the power plug (7) back intheir original locations.


10-68 Vehicle Care

16. If the flat tire was able to inflateto the recommended inflationpressure, remove themaximum speed label from thesealant canister and place it ina highly visible location. Do notexceed the speed on this labeluntil the damaged tire isrepaired or replaced.

17. Return the equipment to itsoriginal storage location in thevehicle.

18. Immediately drive the vehicle8 km (5 mi) to distribute thesealant in the tire.

19. Stop at a safe location andcheck the tire pressure. Referto Steps 1–11 under “Using theTire Sealant and CompressorKit without Sealant to Inflate aTire (Not Punctured).”

If the tire pressure has fallenmore than 68 kPa (10 psi)below the recommendedinflation pressure, stop drivingthe vehicle. The tire is tooseverely damaged and the tiresealant cannot seal the tire.See Roadside AssistanceProgram (Mexico) onpage 13‑7 or RoadsideAssistance Program (U.S. andCanada) on page 13‑11.

If the tire pressure has notdropped more than 68 kPa(10 psi) from the recommendedinflation pressure, use thecompressor kit to inflate the tireto the recommended inflationpressure.

20. Wipe off any sealant from thewheel, tire, and vehicle.

21. Dispose of the used sealantcanister and sealant/air hose(6) assembly at a local dealeror in accordance with localstate codes and practices.

22. Replace it with a new canisteravailable from your dealer.

23. After temporarily sealing a tireusing the tire sealant andcompressor kit, take thevehicle to an authorized dealerwithin 161 km (100 mi) ofdriving to have the tire repairedor replaced.


Vehicle Care 10-69

Using the Tire Sealant andCompressor Kit withoutSealant to Inflate a Tire (NotPunctured)

To use the air compressor to inflatea tire with air only and not sealant:




2. Unwrap the air only hose (5) andthe power plug (7).



4. Remove the tire valve stem capfrom the flat tire by turning itcounterclockwise.

5. Attach the air only hose (5) ontothe tire valve stem by turning itclockwise until it is tight.






8. Turn the selector switch (2)counterclockwise to the Air Onlyposition.

9. Press the on/off button (1) toturn the compressor on.

The compressor will inflate thetire with air only.


10-70 Vehicle Care


The pressure gauge (4) mayread higher than the actual tirepressure while the compressoris on. Turn the compressor offto get an accurate reading. Thecompressor may be turned on/off until the correct pressure isreached. If the tire is inflatedhigher than the recommendedpressure, press the pressurerelief button (3), if equipped,until the proper pressurereading is reached. This optionis only functional when usingthe air only hose (5).




13. Disconnect the air onlyhose (5) from the tire valvestem, by turning itcounterclockwise, and replacethe tire valve stem cap.

14. Return the air only hose (5)and the power plug (7) back totheir original locations.


Removal and Installation of theSealant Canister

To remove the sealant canister:

1. Remove the plastic cover.

2. Unscrew the connector (2) fromthe canister (1).

3. Pull up on the canister (1) toremove it.

4. Replace with a new canisterwhich is available from yourdealer.

5. Push the new canister intoplace.


Vehicle Care 10-71

6. Screw the connector (2) to thecanister (1).

7. Slide the plastic cover back on.

Tire Sealant andCompressor Kit

System Identification

If the vehicle has the tire sealantand compressor kit shown above,see the operating instructions thatfollow.

If the vehicle has the tire sealantand compressor kit shown above,follow the operating instructionsunder "Tire Sealant andCompressor Kit (With PressureRelief Button).”

{ WARNING

Idling a vehicle in an enclosedarea with poor ventilation isdangerous. Engine exhaust mayenter the vehicle. Engine exhaustcontains carbon monoxide (CO)

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

which cannot be seen or smelled.It can cause unconsciousnessand even death. Never run theengine in an enclosed area thathas no fresh air ventilation. Formore information, see EngineExhaust on page 9‑26.

{ WARNING

Overinflating a tire could causethe tire to rupture and you orothers could be injured. Be sureto read and follow the tire sealantand compressor kit instructionsand inflate the tire to itsrecommended pressure. Do notexceed the recommendedpressure.


10-72 Vehicle Care

{ WARNING

Storing the tire sealant andcompressor kit or otherequipment in the passengercompartment of the vehicle couldcause injury. In a sudden stop orcollision, loose equipment couldstrike someone. Store the tiresealant and compressor kit in itsoriginal location.

If this vehicle has a tire sealant andcompressor kit, there may not be aspare tire and tire changingequipment, and on some vehiclesthere may not be a place to storea tire.

The tire sealant and compressorcan be used to temporarily sealpunctures up to 6 mm (0.25 in) inthe tread area of the tire. It can alsobe used to inflate anunderinflated tire.

If the tire has been separated fromthe wheel, has damaged sidewalls,or has a large puncture, the tire istoo severely damaged for the tiresealant and compressor kit to beeffective. See Roadside AssistanceProgram (Mexico) on page 13‑7 orRoadside Assistance Program (U.S.and Canada) on page 13‑11.

Read and follow all of the tiresealant and compressor kitinstructions.

The kit includes:

1. Selector Switch (Sealant/Air orAir Only)


Vehicle Care 10-73

2. On/Off Button

3. Pressure Gauge

4. Pressure Deflation Button(If equipped)

5. Tire Sealant Canister

6. Sealant/Air Hose (Clear)

7. Air Only Hose (Black)

8. Power Plug

9. Canister Release Button (UnderSealant/Air Hose)

Tire Sealant

Read and follow the safe handlinginstructions on the label adhered tothe sealant canister.

Check the tire sealant expirationdate on the sealant canister. Thesealant canister should be replacedbefore its expiration date.Replacement sealant canisters areavailable at your local dealer. See“Removal and Installation of theSealant Canister” following.

There is only enough sealant to sealone tire. After usage, the sealantcanister and sealant/air hoseassembly must be replaced. See“Removal and Installation of theSealant Canister” following.

Using the Tire Sealant andCompressor Kit to TemporarilySeal and Inflate aPunctured Tire

Follow the directions closely forcorrect sealant usage.

When using the tire sealant andcompressor kit during coldtemperatures, warm the kit in a


10-74 Vehicle Care

heated environment for five minutes.This will help to inflate the tirefaster.



Do not remove any objects thathave penetrated the tire.


2. Unwrap the sealant/air hose (6)and the power plug (8).



4. Remove the valve stem cap fromthe flat tire by turning itcounterclockwise.

5. Attach the sealant/air hose (6)onto the tire valve stem. Turn itclockwise until it is tight.






8. Press and turn the selectorswitch (1) counterclockwise tothe Sealant + Air position.

9. Press the on/off button (2) toturn the tire sealant andcompressor kit on.

The compressor will injectsealant and air into the tire.

The pressure gauge (3) willinitially show a high pressurewhile the compressor pushes thesealant into the tire. Once thesealant is completely dispersedinto the tire, the pressure willquickly drop and start to riseagain as the tire inflates withair only.



Vehicle Care 10-75

The pressure gauge (3) mayread higher than the actual tirepressure while the compressoris on. Turn the compressor offto get an accurate pressurereading. The compressor maybe turned on/off until thecorrect pressure is reached.

Notice: If the recommendedpressure cannot be reached afterapproximately 25 minutes, thevehicle should not be drivenfarther. The tire is too severelydamaged and the tire sealant andcompressor kit cannot inflate thetire. Remove the power plug fromthe accessory power outlet andunscrew the inflating hose fromthe tire valve. See RoadsideAssistance Program (Mexico) onpage 13‑7 or Roadside AssistanceProgram (U.S. and Canada) onpage 13‑11.


The tire is not sealed and willcontinue to leak air until thevehicle is driven and thesealant is distributed in the tire;therefore, Steps 12–18 must bedone immediately afterStep 11.



13. Turn the sealant/air hose (6)counterclockwise to remove itfrom the tire valve stem.

14. Replace the tire valvestem cap.

15. Replace the sealant/air hose(6), and the power plug (8)back in their original location.

16. If the flat tire was able to inflateto the recommended inflationpressure, remove themaximum speed label from thetire sealant canister (5) andplace it in a highly visiblelocation. Do not exceed thespeed on this label until thedamaged tire is repaired orreplaced.


18. Immediately drive the vehicle8 km (5 mi) to distribute thesealant in the tire.


10-76 Vehicle Care

19. Stop at a safe location andcheck the tire pressure. Referto Steps 1–11 under “Using theTire Sealant and CompressorKit without Sealant to Inflate aTire (Not Punctured).”

If the tire pressure has fallenmore than 68 kPa (10 psi)below the recommendedinflation pressure, stop drivingthe vehicle. The tire is tooseverely damaged and the tiresealant cannot seal the tire.See Roadside AssistanceProgram (Mexico) onpage 13‑7 or RoadsideAssistance Program (U.S. andCanada) on page 13‑11.

If the tire pressure has notdropped more than 68 kPa(10 psi) from the recommendedinflation pressure, inflate thetire to the recommendedinflation pressure.

20. Wipe off any sealant from thewheel, tire, and vehicle.

21. Dispose of the used tiresealant canister (5) andsealant/air hose (6) assemblyat a local dealer or inaccordance with local statecodes and practices.

22. Replace it with a new canisteravailable from your dealer.

23. After temporarily sealing a tireusing the tire sealant andcompressor kit, take thevehicle to an authorized dealerwithin a 161 km (100 mi) ofdriving to have the tire repairedor replaced.

Using the Tire Sealant andCompressor Kit withoutSealant to Inflate a Tire (NotPunctured)

To use the air compressor to inflatea tire with air only and not sealant:


Vehicle Care 10-77




2. Unwrap the air only hose (7) andthe power plug (8).



4. Remove the tire valve stem capfrom the flat tire by turning itcounterclockwise.

5. Attach the air only hose (7) ontothe tire valve stem by turning itclockwise until it is tight.






8. Press and turn the selectorswitch (1) clockwise to the AirOnly position.

9. Press the on/off button (2) toturn the compressor on.

The compressor will inflate thetire with air only.


The pressure gauge (3) mayread higher than the actual tirepressure while the compressoris on. Turn the compressor offto get an accurate reading. Thecompressor may be turned on/off until the correct pressure isreached.

If you inflate the tire higherthan the recommendedpressure you can adjust theexcess pressure by pressingthe pressure deflationbutton (4), if equipped, until theproper pressure reading isreached. This option is onlyfunctional when using the aironly hose (7).


10-78 Vehicle Care




13. Disconnect the air only hose(7) from the tire valve stem byturning it counterclockwise, andreplace the tire valve stem cap.

14. Replace the air only hose (7)and the power plug (8) andcord back in their originallocations.

15. Place the equipment in theoriginal storage location in thevehicle.

The tire sealant and compressor kithas an accessory adapter in acompartment on the bottom of itshousing that may be used to inflateair mattresses, balls, etc.

Removal and Installation of theSealant Canister

To remove the sealant canister:

1. Unwrap the sealant hose.

2. Press the canister releasebutton (9).

3. Pull up and remove the canister.

4. Replace with a new canisterwhich is available from yourdealer.

5. Push the new canister intoplace.

Storing the Tire Sealantand Compressor KitTo access the tire sealant andcompressor kit:

1. Open the trunk. See Trunk onpage 2‑11.

2. Lift the cover.


Vehicle Care 10-79

With Pressure Relief Button

With Pressure Deflation Button

3. Turn the wing nutcounterclockwise to remove it.

4. Remove the tire sealant andcompressor kit.

To store the tire sealant andcompressor kit, reverse the steps.

Tire Changing

Removing the Spare Tire andTools

1. Screwdriver

2. Tow Hook (If Equipped)

3. Jack

4. Wrench (In Bag)

5. Trim Removal (If Equipped)

6. Fastener (If Equipped)

To access the spare tire and tools:

1. Open the trunk.

2. Remove the spare tire cover.

3. Turn the retainer nutcounterclockwise and removethe spare tire. Place the sparetire next to the tire beingchanged.


10-80 Vehicle Care

4. The jack and tools are storedbelow the spare tire. Removethem from their container andplace them near the tire beingchanged.

Removing the Flat Tire andInstalling the Spare Tire

Take off the wheel cover or centercap, if the vehicle has one, to reachthe wheel bolts.

1. Do a safety check beforeproceeding. See If a Tire GoesFlat on page 10‑62.

2. Turn the wheel wrenchcounterclockwise to loosen andremove the wheel nut caps.

Do not try to remove plastic capsfrom the cover or center cap.

3. Pull the cover or center capaway from the wheel. Store thewheel cover in the cargo areauntil you have the flat tirerepaired or replaced.

4. Turn the wheel wrenchcounterclockwise to loosen allthe wheel nuts, but do notremove them yet.

5. Place the jack near the flat tire.

6. Put the compact spare tirenear you.

{ WARNING

Getting under a vehicle when it islifted on a jack is dangerous.If the vehicle slips off the jack,you could be badly injured orkilled. Never get under a vehiclewhen it is supported only bya jack.

{ WARNING

Raising the vehicle with the jackimproperly positioned candamage the vehicle and evenmake the vehicle fall. To helpavoid personal injury and vehicledamage, be sure to fit the jack lifthead into the proper locationbefore raising the vehicle.


Vehicle Care 10-81

{ WARNING

Lifting a vehicle and getting underit to do maintenance or repairs isdangerous without theappropriate safety equipment andtraining. If a jack is provided withthe vehicle, it is designed only forchanging a flat tire. If it is used foranything else, you or others couldbe badly injured or killed if thevehicle slips off the jack. If a jackis provided with the vehicle, onlyuse it for changing a flat tire.

7. Attach the jack lift assist tool tothe jack by fitting both ends ofthe jack and tool over oneanother.

8. Place the jack under the vehicle.

Notice: Make sure that the jacklift head is in the correct positionor you may damage your vehicle.The repairs would not be coveredby your warranty.

9. Position the jack lift head at thejack location nearest the flat tire.The location is indicated by amark near the bottom edge ofthe lower molding. The jackmust not be used in any otherposition.

10. Raise the vehicle by turning thejack handle clockwise. Raisethe vehicle far enough off theground so there is enoughroom for the road tire to clearthe ground.


10-82 Vehicle Care

11. Remove all of the wheel nuts.

12. Remove the flat tire.

{ WARNING

Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on theparts to which it is fastened, canmake wheel nuts become looseafter time. The wheel could comeoff and cause an accident. Whenchanging a wheel, remove anyrust or dirt from places where thewheel attaches to the vehicle. In

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

an emergency, a cloth or a papertowel can be used; however, usea scraper or wire brush later toremove all rust or dirt.

13. Remove any rust or dirt fromthe wheel bolts, mountingsurfaces, and spare wheel.

14. Place the compact spare tireon the wheel-mounting surface.

{ WARNING

Never use oil or grease on boltsor nuts because the nuts mightcome loose. The vehicle's wheelcould fall off, causing a crash.

15. Reinstall the wheel nuts.Tighten each nut by hand untilthe wheel is held againstthe hub.

16. Lower the vehicle by turningthe jack handlecounterclockwise.

{ WARNING

Wheel nuts that are improperly orincorrectly tightened can causethe wheels to become loose orcome off. The wheel nuts shouldbe tightened with a torque wrenchto the proper torque specificationafter replacing. Follow the torquespecification supplied by the

(Continued)


Vehicle Care 10-83

WARNING (Continued)

aftermarket manufacturer whenusing accessory locking wheelnuts. See Capacities andSpecifications on page 12‑2 fororiginal equipment wheel nuttorque specifications.

Notice: Improperly tightenedwheel nuts can lead to brakepulsation and rotor damage. Toavoid expensive brake repairs,evenly tighten the wheel nuts inthe proper sequence and to theproper torque specification. SeeCapacities and Specifications onpage 12‑2 for the wheel nuttorque specification.

17. Tighten the wheel nuts firmly ina crisscross sequence, asshown.

18. Lower the jack all the way andremove the jack from under thevehicle.

19. Tighten the wheel nuts firmlywith the wheel wrench.

When reinstalling the wheel cover orcenter cap on the full-size tire,tighten all five plastic caps handsnug with the aid of the wheelwrench and tighten them with thewheel wrench an additionalone-quarter of a turn.

Notice: Wheel covers will not fiton the vehicle's compact spare.If you try to put a wheel cover onthe compact spare, the cover orthe spare could be damaged.

Storing a Flat or Spare Tireand Tools

{ WARNING

Storing a jack, a tire, or otherequipment in the passengercompartment of the vehicle couldcause injury. In a sudden stop orcollision, loose equipment couldstrike someone. Store all these inthe proper place.

Store the spare or flat tire in one ofthe ways shown below. Storageinstructions will vary depending onthe bolt that came with the vehicleand how it attaches to the vehicle.This vehicle will have a slide infastener or a screw in fastener.


10-84 Vehicle Care

Storing a Flat or Spare Tire andTools With a Screw in Fastener

1. Turn the wrenchcounterclockwise to remove thefastener.

2. Replace the fastener with theone provided in the foam.

3. Turn the wrench clockwise totighten the fastener.

4. Replace the foam, jack andtools, and the tire.

5. Turn the retainer nut clockwiseto secure the tire.

6. Place the floor cover on thewheel.

Storing a Flat or Spare Tire andTools With a Slide In Fastener

1. If the flat tire is larger than thespare tire, use the longermounting bolt from the tool bag.

2. Slide the shorter bolt to removeit from the floor and insert thelonger one.

3. Replace the jack and tools intheir original storage location.

4. Place the tire, lying flat, facingup in the spare tire well.

5. Turn the retainer nut clockwiseto secure the tire.

6. Place the floor cover on thewheel.

To store the compact spare tire, usethe shorter mounting bolt.

The compact spare is for temporaryuse only. Replace the compactspare tire with a full-size tire assoon as you can.

Compact Spare Tire

{ WARNING

Driving with more than onecompact spare tire at a time couldresult in loss of braking andhandling. This could lead to acrash and you or others could beinjured. Use only one compactspare tire at a time.


Vehicle Care 10-85

If this vehicle has a compact sparetire, it was fully inflated when new;however, it can lose air over time.Check the inflation pressureregularly. It should be 420 kPa(60 psi).

Stop as soon as possible and checkthat the spare tire is correctlyinflated after being installed on thevehicle. The compact spare tire isdesigned for temporary use only.The vehicle will perform differentlywith the spare tire installed and it isrecommended that the vehiclespeed be limited to 80 km/h(50 mph). To conserve the tread ofthe spare tire, have the standard tirerepaired or replaced as soon asconvenient and return the spare tireto the storage area.

Notice: When the compact spareis installed, do not take thevehicle through an automatic carwash with guide rails. Thecompact spare can get caught onthe rails which can damage thetire, wheel, and other parts of thevehicle.

Do not use the compact spare onother vehicles.

Do not mix the compact spare tire orwheel with other wheels or tires.They will not fit. Keep the spare tireand its wheel together.

Notice: Tire chains will not fit thecompact spare. Using them candamage the vehicle and thechains. Do not use tire chains onthe compact spare.

Jump Starting

Jump Starting (On-boardwith eAssist Only)If the vehicle fails to crank, it maybe jump started by using the eAssistbattery to charge the 12-volt battery.Use the following procedure toactivate the on-board jump startusing the DIC controls.

DIC Buttons

1. SET/CLR

2. w /x (Thumbwheel)

3. MENU

The vehicle may be equipped withan ignition key or an electronickeyless ignition with pushbuttonstart.


10-86 Vehicle Care

Key Access

Place the ignition key in the ON/RUN position and proceed asfollows:

1. Press MENU (3) on the turnsignal lever until VehicleInformation Menu is displayed.Usew /x (Thumbwheel) (2) toscroll through the menu itemsuntil Jump Start is displayed.

2. Press SET/CLR (1) to activatethe jump start.

3. The system will then ask forconfirmation. If yes is selected,the jump start will begin and thedisplay will show JUMP STARTACTIVE WAIT TO START.

4. When the jump start is complete,the display will show JUMPSTART COMPLETE ATTEMPTSTART.

Keyless Access

With the brake pedal not applied,press and hold the ENGINE START/STOP button for more thanfive seconds. This will place thevehicle in the Service Only Mode.Proceed as follows:

1. Press MENU (3) on the turnsignal lever until VehicleInformation Menu is displayed.Usew /x (Thumbwheel) (2) toscroll through the menu itemsuntil Jump Start is displayed.

2. Press SET/CLR (1) to activatethe jump start.

3. The system will then ask forconfirmation. If yes is selected,the jump start will begin and thedisplay will show JUMP STARTACTIVE WAIT TO START.

4. When the jump start is complete,the display will show JUMPSTART COMPLETE ATTEMPTSTART.

If the vehicle is started, theon-board jump start function will beautomatically disabled. If the vehiclecranks but does not start, theprocedure may be repeated again.If the vehicle start is stillunsuccessful, the jump start can beattempted using the following jumpstarting procedure under “JumpStarting (with or without eAssist).”On-board jump starting may beunavailable due to the 12-voltbattery charge level, the eAssistbattery charge level, powercapability, or an issue with theeAssist system. In these cases, thedisplay will not be available becauseof the power issue, or the DIC willdisplay JUMP START DISABLEDSEE OWNERS MANUAL.


Vehicle Care 10-87

Jump Starting (with orwithout eAssist)For more information about thevehicle battery, see Battery onpage 10‑26.

If the battery has run down, try touse another vehicle and somejumper cables to start your vehicle.Be sure to use the following steps todo it safely.

{ WARNING

Batteries can hurt you. They canbe dangerous because:

. They contain acid that canburn you.

. They contain gas that canexplode or ignite.

. They contain enoughelectricity to burn you.

If you do not follow these stepsexactly, some or all of thesethings can hurt you.

Notice: Ignoring these stepscould result in costly damage tothe vehicle that would not becovered by the warranty.

Trying to start the vehicle bypushing or pulling it will notwork, and it could damage thevehicle.

2.0L Engine Shown, 2.4L EnginesSimilar

The jump start positive is under atrim cover in the enginecompartment on the driver side ofthe vehicle.

The jump start negative groundingpoint for the discharged battery isthe engine block or an enginemounting bolt. Connect to a spot asfar away from the discharge batteryas possible.

These locations are used instead ofa direct connection to the battery.

1. Check the other vehicle. It musthave a 12-volt battery with anegative ground system.

Notice: Only use a vehicle thathas a 12-volt system with anegative ground for jumpstarting. If the other vehicle doesnot have a 12-volt system with anegative ground, both vehiclescan be damaged.

2. Position the two vehicles so thatthey are not touching.


10-88 Vehicle Care

3. Set the parking brake firmly onboth vehicles involved in thejump start procedure. Put anautomatic transmission inP (Park) or a manualtransmission in Neutral beforesetting the parking brake.

Notice: If any accessories are lefton or plugged in during the jumpstarting procedure, they could bedamaged. The repairs would notbe covered by the vehiclewarranty. Whenever possible,turn off or unplug all accessorieson either vehicle when jumpstarting the vehicle.

4. Turn the ignition to LOCK/OFFand switch off all lights andaccessories in both vehicles,except the hazard warningflashers if needed.

{ WARNING

An electric fan can start up evenwhen the engine is not runningand can injure you. Keep hands,clothing and tools away from anyunderhood electric fan.

{ WARNING

Using a match near a battery cancause battery gas to explode.People have been hurt doing this,and some have been blinded.Use a flashlight if you need morelight.

Be sure the battery has enoughwater. You do not need to addwater to the battery installed inyour new vehicle. But if a batteryhas filler caps, be sure the rightamount of fluid is there. If it is low,

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

add water to take care of thatfirst. If you do not, explosive gascould be present.

Battery fluid contains acid thatcan burn you. Do not get it onyou. If you accidentally get it inyour eyes or on your skin, flushthe place with water and getmedical help immediately.

{ WARNING

Fans or other moving engineparts can injure you badly. Keepyour hands away from movingparts once the engine is running.

5. Connect one end of the redpositive (+) cable to thepositive (+) terminal on thedischarged battery. Use aremote positive (+) terminal if thevehicle has one.


Vehicle Care 10-89

6. Connect the other end of the redpositive (+) cable to thepositive (+) terminal of the goodbattery. Use a remotepositive (+) terminal if thevehicle has one.

7. Connect one end of the blacknegative (–) cable to thenegative (–) terminal of the goodbattery.

Do not let the other end touchanything until the next step. Theother end of the negative (–)cable does not go to the deadbattery. It goes to a heavy,unpainted metal engine part orto a remote negative (–) terminalon the vehicle with the deadbattery.

8. Connect the other end of theblack negative (–) cable to anunpainted heavy metal enginepart away from the dead battery,but not near engine partsthat move.

9. Start the engine in the vehiclewith the good battery and runthe engine at idle speed for atleast four minutes.

10. Try to start the vehicle that hadthe dead battery. If it will notstart after a few tries, itprobably needs service.

Notice: If the jumper cables areconnected or removed in thewrong order, electrical shortingmay occur and damage thevehicle. The repairs would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.Always connect and remove thejumper cables in the correctorder, making sure that thecables do not touch each other orother metal.

Jumper Cable Removal

Reverse the sequence exactly whenremoving the jumper cables.

Towing

Towing the VehicleNotice: Incorrectly towing adisabled vehicle may causedamage. The damage would notbe covered by the vehiclewarranty. Do not lash or hook tothe chassis componentsincluding the front and rearsubframes, suspension controlarms and links during towing andrecovery of a disabled vehicle orto secure the vehicle to a flatbedcar carrier. Use the proper nylonstrap harnesses around the tiresto secure the flatbed car carrier.

Have the vehicle towed on a wheellift tow truck. A flatbed car carriercould damage the vehicle. Thewheel lift tow truck must raise therear of the vehicle and wheel dolliesmust be used to lift the front wheelsoff the ground.

Consult your dealer or aprofessional towing service if thedisabled vehicle must be towed.


10-90 Vehicle Care

To tow the vehicle behind anothervehicle for recreational purposes,such as behind a motor home, see“Recreational Vehicle Towing” in thissection.

Recreational VehicleTowingRecreational vehicle towing meanstowing the vehicle behind anothervehicle, such as behind a motorhome. The two most common typesof recreational vehicle towing areknown as dinghy towing and dollytowing. Dinghy towing is towing thevehicle with all four wheels on theground. Dolly towing is towing thevehicle with two wheels on theground and two wheels up on adevice known as a dolly.

Here are some important things toconsider before recreational vehicletowing:. What is the towing capacity of

the towing vehicle? Be sure toread the tow vehiclemanufacturer'srecommendations.

. What is the distance that will betraveled? Some vehicles haverestrictions on how far and howlong they can tow.

. Is the proper towing equipmentgoing to be used? See yourdealer or trailering professionalfor additional advice andequipment recommendations.

. Is the vehicle ready to betowed? Just as preparing thevehicle for a long trip, make surethe vehicle is prepared to betowed.

Dinghy Towing (WithAutomatic Transmission)

Notice: If the vehicle is towedwith all four wheels on theground, the drivetraincomponents could be damaged.The repairs would not be coveredby the vehicle warranty. Do nottow the vehicle with all fourwheels on the ground.

Vehicles with an automatictransmission should not be towedwith all four wheels on the ground.


Vehicle Care 10-91

If the vehicle must be towed, a dollyshould be used. See "Dolly Towing"that follows.

Dinghy Towing (With ManualTransmission)

Use the following procedure todinghy tow the vehicle from the frontwith all four wheels on the ground:

1. Position the vehicle being towedbehind the tow vehicle.

2. Shift the transmission into1 (First) gear and turn theengine off.

3. Set the parking brake.

4. Following the manufacturer'sinstructions, attach the vehiclebeing towed to the tow vehicle.

5. Shift the transmission to Neutral.

6. Release the parking brake.

When towing the vehicle forextended periods of time, start thevehicle as often as possible toprevent battery drain. This shouldbe done when the tow vehicle isparked.

Dinghy Towing from the Rear

The vehicle was not designed to betowed from the rear with all fourwheels on the ground.

Dolly Towing from the Front

Vehicles with front-wheel drive canbe dolly towed from the front.

Use the following procedure to dollytow the vehicle from the front:

1. Attach the dolly to the towvehicle following the dollymanufacturer's instructions.

2. Drive the front wheels onto thedolly.


10-92 Vehicle Care

3. Shift the automatic transmissioninto P (Park) or a manualtransmission into 1 (First) gear.

4. Firmly set the parking brake.

5. Use an adequate clampingdevice designed for towing toensure that the front wheels arelocked into the straight-aheadposition.

6. Secure the vehicle to the dollyfollowing the manufacturer'sinstructions.

7. Release the parking brake onlyafter the vehicle being towed isfirmly attached to the towingvehicle.


Dolly Towing from the Rear

The vehicle cannot be dolly towedfrom the rear.

Appearance Care

Exterior Care

Locks

Locks are lubricated at the factory.Use a de-icing agent only whenabsolutely necessary, and have thelocks greased after using. SeeRecommended Fluids andLubricants.

Washing the Vehicle

To preserve the vehicle's finish,wash it often and out of directsunlight.

Notice: Do not usepetroleum-based, acidic,or abrasive cleaning agents asthey can damage the vehicle'spaint, metal, or plastic parts.If damage occurs, it would not becovered by the vehicle's warranty.Approved cleaning products canbe obtained from your dealer.


Vehicle Care 10-93

Follow all manufacturerdirections regarding correctproduct usage, necessary safetyprecautions, and appropriatedisposal of any vehicle careproduct.

Notice: Avoid usinghigh-pressure washes closer than30 cm (12 in) to the surface of thevehicle. Use of power washersexceeding 8,274 kPa (1,200 psi)can result in damage or removalof paint and decals.

Rinse the vehicle well, beforewashing and after, to remove allcleaning agents completely. If theyare allowed to dry on the surface,they could stain.

Dry the finish with a soft, cleanchamois or an all-cotton towel toavoid surface scratches and waterspotting.

Finish Care

Application of aftermarket clearcoatsealant/wax materials is notrecommended. If painted surfacesare damaged, see your dealer tohave the damage assessed andrepaired. Foreign materials such ascalcium chloride and other salts, icemelting agents, road oil and tar, treesap, bird droppings, chemicals fromindustrial chimneys, etc., candamage the vehicle's finish if theyremain on painted surfaces. Washthe vehicle as soon as possible.If necessary, use non-abrasivecleaners that are marked safe forpainted surfaces to remove foreignmatter.

Occasional hand waxing or mildpolishing should be done to removeresidue from the paint finish. Seeyour dealer for approved cleaningproducts.

Do not apply waxes or polishes touncoated plastic, vinyl, rubber,decals, simulated wood, or flat paintas damage can occur.

Notice: Machine compounding oraggressive polishing on abasecoat/clearcoat paint finishmay damage it. Use onlynon-abrasive waxes and polishesthat are made for a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish on thevehicle.

To keep the paint finish looking new,keep the vehicle garaged orcovered whenever possible.

Protecting Exterior Bright MetalParts

Regularly clean bright metal partswith water or chrome polish onchrome or stainless steel trim,if necessary.

For aluminum, never use auto orchrome polish, steam, or causticsoap to clean. A coating of wax,rubbed to a high polish, isrecommended for all bright metalparts.


10-94 Vehicle Care

Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses and Emblems

Use only lukewarm or cold water, asoft cloth, and a car washing soapto clean exterior lamps, lenses andemblems. Follow instructions under"Washing the Vehicle" in thissection.

Windshield and Wiper Blades

Clean the outside of the windshieldwith glass cleaner.

Clean rubber blades using a lint-freecloth or paper towel soaked withwindshield washer fluid or a milddetergent. Wash the windshieldthoroughly when cleaning theblades. Bugs, road grime, sap, anda buildup of vehicle wash/waxtreatments may cause wiperstreaking.

Replace the wiper blades if they areworn or damaged. Damage can becaused by extreme dustyconditions, sand, salt, heat, sun,snow, and ice.

Weatherstrips

Apply silicone grease onweatherstrips to make them lastlonger, seal better, and not stick orsqueak. Lubricate weatherstripsonce a year. Black marks fromrubber material on painted surfacescan be removed by rubbing with aclean cloth. See RecommendedFluids and Lubricants onpage 11‑12.

Tires

Use a stiff brush with tire cleaner toclean the tires.

Notice: Using petroleum-basedtire dressing products on thevehicle may damage the paintfinish and/or tires. When applyinga tire dressing, always wipe offany overspray from all paintedsurfaces on the vehicle.

Wheels and Trim—Aluminumor Chrome

Use a soft, clean cloth with mildsoap and water to clean the wheels.After rinsing thoroughly with cleanwater, dry with a soft, clean towel.A wax may then be applied.

Notice: Chrome wheels and otherchrome trim may be damaged ifthe vehicle is not washed afterdriving on roads that have beensprayed with magnesium,calcium, or sodium chloride.These chlorides are used onroads for conditions such as iceand dust. Always wash thechrome with soap and water afterexposure.

Notice: To avoid surface damage,do not use strong soaps,chemicals, abrasive polishes,cleaners, brushes, or cleanersthat contain acid on aluminum orchrome-plated wheels. Use onlyapproved cleaners. Also, neverdrive a vehicle with aluminum orchrome-plated wheels through an


Vehicle Care 10-95

automatic car wash that usessilicone carbide tire cleaningbrushes. Damage could occurand the repairs would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.

Steering, Suspension, andChassis Components

Visually inspect the front and rearsuspension and steering system fordamaged, loose, or missing parts orsigns of wear. Inspect the powersteering for proper hook-up, binding,leaks, cracks, chafing, etc. Visuallycheck constant velocity joints,rubber boots, and axle seals forleaks.

Body Component Lubrication

Lubricate all key lock cylinders,hood hinges, liftgate hinges, and thesteel fuel door hinge unless thecomponents are plastic. Applyingsilicone grease on weatherstripswith a clean cloth will make themlast longer, seal better, and not stickor squeak.

Underbody Maintenance

Use plain water to flush dirt anddebris from the vehicle's underbody.Your dealer or an underbody carwashing system can do this. If notremoved, rust and corrosion candevelop.

Sheet Metal Damage

If the vehicle is damaged andrequires sheet metal repair orreplacement, make sure the bodyrepair shop applies anti-corrosionmaterial to parts repaired orreplaced to restore corrosionprotection.

Original manufacturer replacementparts will provide the corrosionprotection while maintaining thevehicle warranty.

Finish Damage

Quickly repair minor chips andscratches with touch-up materialsavailable from your dealer to avoid

corrosion. Larger areas of finishdamage can be corrected in yourdealer's body and paint shop.

Chemical Paint Spotting

Airborne pollutants can fall uponand attack painted vehicle surfacescausing blotchy, ring-shapeddiscolorations, and small, irregulardark spots etched into the paintsurface.

Interior CareTo prevent dirt particle abrasions,regularly clean the vehicle's interior.Immediately remove any soils. Notethat newspapers or dark garmentsthat can transfer color to homefurnishings can also permanentlytransfer color to the vehicle'sinterior.


10-96 Vehicle Care

Use a soft bristle brush to removedust from knobs and crevices on theinstrument cluster. Using a mildsoap solution, immediately removehand lotions, sunscreen, and insectrepellent from all interior surfaces orpermanent damage may result.

Your dealer may have products forcleaning the interior. Use cleanersspecifically designed for thesurfaces being cleaned to preventpermanent damage. Apply allcleaners directly to the cleaningcloth. Do not spray cleaners directlyon any switches or controls.Cleaners should be removedquickly. Never allow cleaners toremain on the surface beingcleaned for extended periodsof time.

Cleaners may contain solvents thatcan become concentrated in theinterior. Before using cleaners, readand adhere to all safety instructionson the label. While cleaning theinterior, maintain adequateventilation by opening the doors andwindows.

To prevent damage, do not cleanthe interior using the followingcleaners or techniques:. Never use a razor or any other

sharp object to remove a soilfrom any interior surface.

. Never use a brush with stiffbristles.

. Never rub any surfaceaggressively or with excessivepressure.

. Do not use laundry detergents ordishwashing soaps withdegreasers. For liquid cleaners,use approximately 20 drops per3.78 L (1 gal) of water.A concentrated soap solution willleave a residue that createsstreaks and attracts dirt. Do notuse solutions that contain strongor caustic soap.

. Do not heavily saturate theupholstery when cleaning.

. Do not use solvents or cleanerscontaining solvents.

Interior Glass

To clean, use a terry cloth fabricdampened with water. Wipe dropletsleft behind with a clean dry cloth.Commercial glass cleaners may beused, if necessary, after cleaningthe interior glass with plain water.

Notice: To prevent scratching,never use abrasive cleaners onautomotive glass. Abrasivecleaners or aggressive cleaningmay damage the rear windowdefogger.

Notice: Cleaning the windshieldwith water during the first three tosix months of ownership willreduce tendency to fog.

Speaker Covers

Vacuum around a speaker covergently, so that the speaker will notbe damaged. Clean spots with justwater and mild soap.

Coated Moldings

Coated moldings should be cleaned.


Vehicle Care 10-97

. When lightly soiled, wipe with asponge or soft lint-free clothdampened with water.

. When heavily soiled, use warmsoapy water.

Fabric/Carpet/Suede

Start by vacuuming the surfaceusing a soft brush attachment. If arotating brush attachment is beingused during vacuuming, only use iton the floor carpet. Before cleaning,gently remove as much of the soilas possible using one of thefollowing techniques:. Gently blot liquids with a paper

towel. Continue blotting until nomore soil can be removed.

. For solid soils, remove as muchas possible prior to vacuuming.

To clean:

1. Saturate a clean lint-freecolorfast cloth with water or clubsoda. Microfiber cloth isrecommended to prevent linttransfer to the fabric or carpet.

2. Remove excess moisture bygently wringing until water doesnot drip from the cleaning cloth.

3. Start on the outside edge of thesoil and gently rub toward thecenter. Fold the cleaning cloth toa clean area frequently toprevent forcing the soil in to thefabric.

4. Continue gently rubbing thesoiled area until there is nolonger any color transfer fromthe soil to the cleaning cloth.

5. If the soil is not completelyremoved, use a mild soapsolution followed only by clubsoda or plain water.

If the soil is not completelyremoved, it may be necessary touse a commercial upholsterycleaner or spot lifter. Test a smallhidden area for colorfastness beforeusing a commercial upholsterycleaner or spot lifter. If ringformation occurs, clean the entirefabric or carpet.

Following the cleaning process, apaper towel can be used to blotexcess moisture.

Cleaning High Gloss Surfacesand Vehicle Information andRadio Displays

For vehicles with high glosssurfaces or vehicle displays, use amicrofiber cloth to wipe surfaces.Before wiping the surface with themicrofiber cloth, use a soft bristlebrush to remove dirt that couldscratch the surface. Then use themicrofiber cloth by gently rubbing toclean. Never use window cleanersor solvents. Periodically hand washthe microfiber cloth separately,using mild soap. Do not use bleachor fabric softener. Rinse thoroughlyand air dry before next use.

Notice: Do not attach a devicewith a suction cup to the display.This may cause damage andwould not be covered by thewarranty.


10-98 Vehicle Care

Instrument Panel, Leather,Vinyl, and Other PlasticSurfaces

Use a soft microfiber clothdampened with water to removedust and loose dirt. For a morethorough cleaning, use a softmicrofiber cloth dampened with amild soap solution.

Notice: Soaking or saturatingleather, especially perforatedleather, as well as other interiorsurfaces, may cause permanentdamage. Wipe excess moisturefrom these surfaces aftercleaning and allow them to drynaturally. Never use heat, steam,spot lifters, or spot removers. Donot use cleaners that containsilicone or wax-based products.Cleaners containing thesesolvents can permanently changethe appearance and feel of leatheror soft trim and are notrecommended.

Do not use cleaners that increasegloss, especially on the instrumentpanel. Reflected glare can decreasevisibility through the windshieldunder certain conditions.

Notice: Use of air fresheners maycause permanent damage toplastics and painted surfaces.If an air freshener comes incontact with any plastic orpainted surface in the vehicle,blot immediately and clean with asoft cloth dampened with a mildsoap solution. Damage caused byair fresheners would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.

Cargo Cover andConvenience Net

Wash with warm water and milddetergent. Do not use chlorinebleach. Rinse with cold water, andthen dry completely.

Care of Safety Belts

Keep belts clean and dry.

{ WARNING

Do not bleach or dye safety belts.It may severely weaken them. Ina crash, they might not be able toprovide adequate protection.Clean safety belts only with mildsoap and lukewarm water.

Floor Mats

{ WARNING

If a floor mat is the wrong size oris not properly installed, it caninterfere with the pedals.Interference with the pedals cancause unintended accelerationand/or increased stoppingdistance which can cause a crashand injury. Make sure the floormat does not interfere with thepedals.


Vehicle Care 10-99

Use the following guidelines forproper floor mat usage:. The original equipment floor

mats were designed for yourvehicle. If the floor mats needreplacing, it is recommendedthat GM certified floor mats bepurchased. Non-GM floor matsmay not fit properly and mayinterfere with the pedals. Alwayscheck that the floor mats do notinterfere with the pedals.

. Use the floor mat with thecorrect side up. Do not turnit over.

. Do not place anything on top ofthe driver side floor mat.

. Use only a single floor mat onthe driver side.

. Do not place one floor mat ontop of another.

Removing and Replacing theFloor Mats

Pull up on the rear of the floor matto unlock each retainer and remove.

Reinstall by lining up the floor matretainer openings over the carpetretainers and snapping into position.

Make sure the floor mat is properlysecured in place.

Verify the floor mat does notinterfere with the pedals.


10-100 Vehicle Care

2 NOTES


Service and Maintenance 11-1

Service andMaintenance

General InformationGeneral Information . . . . . . . . . . 11-1

Maintenance ScheduleMaintenance Schedule . . . . . . . 11-3

Special Application ServicesSpecial ApplicationServices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8

Additional Maintenanceand CareAdditional Maintenanceand Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-9

Recommended Fluids,Lubricants, and PartsRecommended Fluids andLubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-12

Maintenance ReplacementParts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-14

Maintenance RecordsMaintenance Records . . . . . . 11-15

General InformationYour vehicle is an importantinvestment. This section describesthe required maintenance for thevehicle. Follow this schedule to helpprotect against major repairexpenses resulting from neglect orinadequate maintenance. It mayalso help to maintain the value ofthe vehicle if it is sold. It is theresponsibility of the owner to haveall required maintenance performed.

Your dealer has trained technicianswho can perform requiredmaintenance using genuinereplacement parts. They have up‐to‐date tools and equipment for fastand accurate diagnostics. Manydealers have extended evening andSaturday hours, courtesytransportation, and onlinescheduling to assist with serviceneeds.

Your dealer recognizes theimportance of providingcompetitively priced maintenanceand repair services. With trainedtechnicians, the dealer is the placefor routine maintenance such as oilchanges and tire rotations andadditional maintenance items liketires, brakes, batteries, and wiperblades.

Notice: Damage caused byimproper maintenance can lead tocostly repairs and may not becovered by the vehicle warranty.Maintenance intervals, checks,inspections, recommended fluids,and lubricants are important tokeep the vehicle in good workingcondition.

The Tire Rotation and RequiredServices are the responsibility of thevehicle owner. It is recommended tohave your dealer perform theseservices every 12 000 km/7,500 mi.Proper vehicle maintenance helps tokeep the vehicle in good workingcondition, improves fuel economy,and reduces vehicle emissions.


11-2 Service and Maintenance

Because of the way people usevehicles, maintenance needs vary.There may need to be morefrequent checks and services. TheAdditional Required Services ‐Normal are for vehicles that:. Carry passengers and cargo

within recommended limits onthe Tire and Loading Informationlabel. See Vehicle Load Limitson page 9‑10.

. Are driven on reasonable roadsurfaces within legal drivinglimits.

. Use the recommended fuel. SeeRecommended Fuel onpage 9‑46.

Refer to the information in theMaintenance Schedule AdditionalRequired Services ‐ Normal chart.

The Additional Required Services ‐Severe are for vehicles that are:. Mainly driven in heavy city traffic

in hot weather.. Mainly driven in hilly or

mountainous terrain.. Frequently towing a trailer.. Used for high speed or

competitive driving.. Used for taxi, police, or delivery

service.

Refer to the information in theMaintenance Schedule AdditionalRequired Services ‐ Severe chart.

{ WARNING

Performing maintenance work canbe dangerous and can causeserious injury. Performmaintenance work only if therequired information, proper tools,and equipment are available.If they are not, see your dealer tohave a trained technician do thework. See Doing Your OwnService Work on page 10‑3.



MaintenanceScheduleOwner Checks and Services

At Each Fuel Stop. Check the engine oil level. See

Engine Oil on page 10‑10.

Once a Month. Check the tire inflation

pressures. See Tire Pressure onpage 10‑48.

. Inspect the tires for wear. SeeTire Inspection on page 10‑54.

. Check the windshield washerfluid level. See Washer Fluid onpage 10‑23.

Engine Oil Change

When the CHANGE ENGINE OILSOON message displays, have theengine oil and filter changed withinthe next 1 000 km/600 mi. If drivenunder the best conditions, theengine oil life system might notindicate the need for vehicle servicefor more than a year. The engine oiland filter must be changed at leastonce a year and the oil life systemmust be reset. Your trained dealertechnician can perform this work.If the engine oil life system is resetaccidentally, service the vehiclewithin 5 000 km/3,000 mi since thelast service. Reset the oil lifesystem when the oil is changed.See Engine Oil Life System onpage 10‑12.

Tire Rotation and RequiredServices Every 12 000 km/7,500 mi

Rotate the tires, if recommended forthe vehicle, and perform thefollowing services. See TireRotation on page 10‑55.. Check engine oil level and oil

life percentage. If needed,change engine oil and filter, andreset oil life system. See EngineOil on page 10‑10 and EngineOil Life System on page 10‑12.

. Check engine coolant level. SeeEngine Coolant on page 10‑17.

. Check windshield washer fluidlevel. See Washer Fluid onpage 10‑23.

. Visually inspect windshield wiperblades for wear, cracking,or contamination. See ExteriorCare on page 10‑92. Replaceworn or damaged wiper blades.See Wiper Blade Replacementon page 10‑28.



. Check tire inflation pressures.See Tire Pressure onpage 10‑48.

. Inspect tire wear. See TireInspection on page 10‑54.

. Visually check for fluid leaks.

. Inspect engine air cleaner filter.See Engine Air Cleaner/Filter onpage 10‑14.

. Inspect brake system.

. Visually inspect steering,suspension, and chassiscomponents for damaged, loose,or missing parts or signs ofwear. See Exterior Care onpage 10‑92.

. Check restraint systemcomponents. See Safety SystemCheck on page 3‑15.

. Visually inspect fuel system fordamage or leaks.

. Visually inspect exhaust systemand nearby heat shields forloose or damaged parts.

. Lubricate body components. SeeExterior Care on page 10‑92.

. Check starter switch. See StarterSwitch Check on page 10‑27.

. Check automatic transmissionshift lock control function. SeeAutomatic Transmission ShiftLock Control Function Check onpage 10‑27.

. Check ignition transmission lock.See Ignition Transmission LockCheck on page 10‑28.

. Check parking brake andautomatic transmission parkmechanism. See Park Brake andP (Park) Mechanism Check onpage 10‑28.

. Check accelerator pedal fordamage, high effort, or binding.Replace if needed.

. Visually inspect gas strut forsigns of wear, cracks, or otherdamage. Check the hold openability of the strut. See yourdealer if service is required.

. Check tire sealant expirationdate, if equipped. See TireSealant and Compressor Kit onpage 10‑64 or Tire Sealant andCompressor Kit on page 10‑71.

. Inspect sunroof track and seal,if equipped. See Sunroof onpage 2‑19.



Footnotes — MaintenanceSchedule Additional RequiredServices — Normal

(1) Or every two years, whichevercomes first. More frequentreplacement may be needed if thevehicle is driven in areas with heavytraffic, areas with poor air quality,or areas with high dust levels.Replacement may also be needed ifthere is a reduction in air flow,excessive window fogging, or odors.

(2) Check all fuel and vapor linesand hoses for proper hook-up,routing, and condition. Check thatthe purge valve, if the vehicle hasone, works properly. Replace asneeded.

(3) Or every four years, whichevercomes first.

(4) Or every five years, whichevercomes first. See Cooling System onpage 10‑16.

(5) Or every 10 years, whichevercomes first.

(6) Inspect for fraying, excessivecracking, or damage; replace,if needed.



Footnotes — MaintenanceSchedule Additional RequiredServices — Severe

(1) Or every two years, whichevercomes first. More frequentreplacement may be needed if thevehicle is driven in areas with heavytraffic, areas with poor air quality,or areas with high dust levels.Replacement may also be needed ifthere is a reduction in air flow,excessive window fogging, or odors.

(2) Check all fuel and vapor linesand hoses for proper hook-up,routing, and condition. Check thatthe purge valve, if the vehicle hasone, works properly. Replace asneeded.

(3) Or every four years, whichevercomes first.

(4) Or every five years, whichevercomes first. See Cooling System onpage 10‑16.

(5) Or every 10 years, whichevercomes first.

(6) Inspect for fraying, excessivecracking, or damage; replace,if needed.

Special ApplicationServices. Severe Commercial Use

Vehicles Only: Lubricate chassiscomponents every 5 000 km/3,000 mi.

. Have underbody flushing serviceperformed once a year.



AdditionalMaintenance and CareYour vehicle is an importantinvestment and caring for it properlymay help to avoid future costlyrepairs. To maintain vehicleperformance, additionalmaintenance services may berequired.

It is recommended that your dealerperform these services — theirtrained dealer technicians knowyour vehicle best. Your dealer canalso perform a thoroughassessment with a multi-pointinspection to recommend when yourvehicle may need attention.

The following list is intended toexplain the services and conditionsto look for that may indicateservices are required.

Battery

The battery supplies power to startthe engine and operate anyadditional electrical accessories.. To avoid break-down or failure to

start the vehicle, maintain abattery with full cranking power.

. Trained dealer technicians havethe diagnostic equipment to testthe battery and ensure that theconnections and cables arecorrosion-free.

Belts. Belts may need replacing if they

squeak or show signs ofcracking or splitting.

. Trained dealer technicians haveaccess to tools and equipmentto inspect the belts andrecommend adjustment orreplacement when necessary.

Brakes

Brakes stop the vehicle and arecrucial to safe driving.. Signs of brake wear may include

chirping, grinding, or squealingnoises, or difficulty stopping.

. Trained dealer technicians haveaccess to tools and equipmentto inspect the brakes andrecommend quality partsengineered for the vehicle.

Fluids

Proper fluid levels and approvedfluids protect the vehicle’s systemsand components. SeeRecommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11‑12 for GMapproved fluids.. Engine oil and windshield

washer fluid levels should bechecked at every fuel fill.

. Instrument cluster lights maycome on to indicate that fluidsmay be low and need to befilled.



Hoses

Hoses transport fluids and shouldbe regularly inspected to ensurethat there are no cracks or leaks.With a multi-point inspection, yourdealer can inspect the hoses andadvise if replacement is needed.

Lamps

Properly working headlamps,taillamps, and brake lamps areimportant to see and be seen onthe road.. Signs that the headlamps need

attention include dimming, failureto light, cracking, or damage.The brake lamps need to bechecked periodically to ensurethat they light when braking.

. With a multi-point inspection,your dealer can check the lampsand note any concerns.

Shocks and Struts

Shocks and struts help aid in controlfor a smoother ride.. Signs of wear may include

steering wheel vibration, bounce/sway while braking, longerstopping distance, or uneventire wear.

. As part of the multi-pointinspection, trained dealertechnicians can visually inspectthe shocks and struts for signsof leaking, blown seals,or damage, and can advisewhen service is needed.

Tires

Tires need to be properly inflated,rotated, and balanced. Maintainingthe tires can save money, fuel, andcan reduce the risk of tire failure.. Signs that the tires need to be

replaced include three or morevisible treadwear indicators; cordor fabric showing through the

rubber; cracks or cuts in thetread or sidewall; or a bulge orsplit in the tire.

. Trained dealer technicians caninspect and recommend the righttires. Your dealer can alsoprovide tire/wheel balancingservices to ensure smoothvehicle operation at all speeds.Your dealer sells and servicesname brand tires.

Vehicle Care

To help keep the vehicle looking likenew, vehicle care products areavailable from your dealer. Forinformation on how to clean andprotect the vehicle’s interior andexterior, see Interior Care onpage 10‑95 and Exterior Care onpage 10‑92.

Wheel Alignment

Wheel alignment is critical forensuring that the tires deliveroptimal wear and performance.



. Signs that the alignment mayneed to be adjusted includepulling, improper vehiclehandling, or unusual tire wear.

. Your dealer has the requiredequipment to ensure properwheel alignment.

Windshield

For safety, appearance, and thebest viewing, keep the windshieldclean and clear.. Signs of damage include

scratches, cracks, and chips.. Trained dealer technicians can

inspect the windshield andrecommend proper replacementif needed.

Wiper Blades

Wiper blades need to be cleanedand kept in good condition toprovide a clear view.. Signs of wear include streaking,

skipping across the windshield,and worn or split rubber.

. Trained dealer technicians cancheck the wiper blades andreplace them when needed.



Recommended Fluids, Lubricants, and Parts

Recommended Fluids and Lubricants

Usage Fluid/Lubricant

Engine Oil Use only engine oil licensed to the dexos1 specfication, or equivalent, ofthe proper SAE viscosity grade. ACDelco dexos1 Synthetic Blend isrecommended. See Engine Oil on page 10‑10.

Engine Coolant 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and use only DEX-COOL Coolant.See Engine Coolant on page 10‑17.

Hydraulic Brake/Clutch System DOT 3 Hydraulic Brake Fluid (GM Part No. 88862806, inCanada 88863462).

Windshield Washer Automotive windshield washer fluid that meets regional freeze protectionrequirements.

Hydraulic Power Steering System DEXRON®-VI Automatic Transmission Fluid.

Automatic Transmission (2.4L Engine) DEXRON®-VI Automatic Transmission Fluid.

Automatic Transmission (2.0L Engine) Automatic Transmission Fluid (GM Part No. 19256039, inCanada 19256040).

Manual Transmission See your dealer.



Usage Fluid/Lubricant

Key Lock Cylinders Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube (GM Part No. 12346241, inCanada 10953474).

Hood Latch Assembly, SecondaryLatch, Pivots, Spring Anchor, and

Release Pawl

Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol (GM Part No. 89021668, inCanada 89021674) or lubricant meeting requirements of NLGI #2,Category LB or GC-LB.

Hood and Door Hinges Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube (GM Part No. 12346241, inCanada 10953474).

Weatherstrip Conditioning Weatherstrip Lubricant (GM Part No. 3634770, in Canada 10953518) orDielectric Silicone Grease (GM Part No. 12345579, in Canada 10953481).



Maintenance Replacement PartsReplacement parts identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your dealer.

Part GM Part Number ACDelco Part Number

Engine Air Cleaner/Filter 55560894 A3128C

Engine Oil Filter

2.0L L4 Engine 12605566 PF457G

2.4L L4 Engine 12605566 PF457G

Passenger Compartment Air Filter Element 13271191 CF176

Spark Plugs

2.0L L4 Engine 12620540 41–108

2.4L L4 Engine 12620540 41–108

Wiper Blades

Driver Side – 60.0 cm (23.62 in) 13227404 —

Passenger Side – 45.0 cm (17.7 in) 13227405 —



Maintenance RecordsAfter the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, who performed the service, and thetype of services performed in the boxes provided. Retain all maintenance receipts.

DateOdometerReading

Serviced By Services Performed



DateOdometerReading

Serviced By Services Performed


Technical Data 12-1

Technical Data

Vehicle IdentificationVehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1

Service Parts IdentificationLabel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1

Vehicle DataCapacities andSpecifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2

Engine Drive Belt Routing . . . 12-4

Vehicle Identification

Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN)

This legal identifier is in the frontcorner of the instrument panel, onthe left side of the vehicle. It can beseen through the windshield fromoutside. The VIN also appears onthe Vehicle Certification and ServiceParts labels and certificates of titleand registration.

Engine Identification

The eighth character in the VIN isthe engine code. This codeidentifies the vehicle's engine,specifications, and replacementparts. See “Engine Specifications”under Capacities and Specificationson page 12‑2 for the vehicle'sengine code.

Service PartsIdentification LabelThis label, in either the glove box orthe trunk area, has the followinginformation:. Vehicle Identification

Number (VIN).. Model designation.. Paint information.. Production options and special

equipment.

Do not remove this label from thevehicle.


12-2 Technical Data

Vehicle Data

Capacities and Specifications

ApplicationCapacities

Metric English

Air Conditioning Refrigerant For the air conditioning system refrigerant type andcharge amount, see the refrigerant label under the

hood. See your dealer for more information.

Engine Cooling System

2.0L L4 Engine 7.8 L 8.2 qt


Engine Oil with Filter



Fuel Tank

2.0L L4 LHU Engine 70.4 L 18.6 gal

2.4L L4 LEA Engine 70.4 L 18.6 gal

2.4L L4 LUK Engine 59.8 L 15.8 gal


Technical Data 12-3

ApplicationCapacities

Metric English

Transmission Fluid* (Drain and Refill)

2.0L L4 Engine, 6–Speed Automatic (TransmissionRequires No Fluid Replacement)

— —

2.4L L4 Engine, 6–Speed Automatic 8.4 L 8.9 qt

Wheel Nut Torque 150Y 110 lb ft

*See Automatic Transmission Fluid on page 10‑13 for information on checking fluid level.

All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the approximate level, as recommended in thismanual. Recheck fluid level after filling.

Engine Specifications

Engine VIN Code Spark Plug Gap

2.0L L4 LHU Engine V 0.9 mm (0.035 in)

2.4L L4 LEA Engine R 0.9 mm (0.035 in)

2.4L L4 LUK Engine R 0.9 mm (0.035 in)


12-4 Technical Data

Engine Drive Belt Routing

2.0L LHU Engine

2.4L LUK Engine

Belt removal and installationrequires special tools. See yourdealer for service.

2.4L LEA Engine


Customer Information 13-1

CustomerInformation

Customer InformationCustomer SatisfactionProcedure (U.S. andCanada) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-2

Customer SatisfactionProcedure (Mexico) . . . . . . . . 13-4

Customer Assistance Offices(U.S. and Canada) . . . . . . . . . 13-5

Customer Assistance Offices(Mexico) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5

Customer Assistance for TextTelephone (TTY) Users (U.S.and Canada) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-6

Online Owner Center . . . . . . . . 13-6GM Mobility ReimbursementProgram (U.S. andCanada) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7

Roadside Assistance Program(Mexico) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7

Roadside AssistanceProgram (U.S. andCanada) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-11

Scheduling ServiceAppointments (U.S. andCanada) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-12

Courtesy TransportationProgram (U.S. andCanada) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13

Collision Damage Repair(U.S. and Canada) . . . . . . . . 13-14

Service PublicationsOrdering Information . . . . . . 13-16

Reporting Safety DefectsReporting Safety Defects tothe United StatesGovernment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-17

Reporting Safety Defects tothe CanadianGovernment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-18

Reporting Safety Defects toGeneral Motors . . . . . . . . . . . 13-18

Vehicle Data Recording andPrivacyVehicle Data Recording andPrivacy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-19

Event Data Recorders . . . . . . 13-19OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-20Infotainment System . . . . . . . . 13-20Radio FrequencyIdentification (RFID) . . . . . . . 13-20

Radio FrequencyStatement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-20


13-2 Customer Information

Customer Information

Customer SatisfactionProcedure (U.S. andCanada)Your satisfaction and goodwill areimportant to your dealer and toBuick. Normally, any concerns withthe sales transaction or theoperation of the vehicle will beresolved by your dealer's sales orservice departments. Sometimes,however, despite the best intentionsof all concerned, misunderstandingscan occur. If your concern has notbeen resolved to your satisfaction,the following steps should be taken:

STEP ONE: Discuss your concernwith a member of dealershipmanagement. Normally, concernscan be quickly resolved at that level.If the matter has already beenreviewed with the sales, service,or parts manager, contact the ownerof your dealership or the generalmanager.

STEP TWO: If after contacting amember of dealership management,it appears your concern cannot beresolved by your dealership withoutfurther help, in the U.S., call1-800-521-7300. In Canada, contactGeneral Motors of CanadaCustomer Care Centre at1‐800-263-3777 (English) or1-800-263-7854 (French).

We encourage you to call thetoll-free number in order to give theinquiry prompt attention. Have thefollowing information available togive the Customer Assistancerepresentative:. Vehicle Identification

Number (VIN). This is availablefrom the vehicle registration ortitle, or the plate at the top left ofthe instrument panel and visiblethrough the windshield.

. Dealership name and location.

. Vehicle delivery date andpresent mileage.

When contacting Buick, rememberthat your concern will likely beresolved at a dealer's facility. That iswhy we suggest following Step Onefirst.

STEP THREE — U.S. Owners:Both General Motors and yourdealer are committed to makingsure you are completely satisfiedwith the new vehicle. However,if you continue to remain unsatisfiedafter following the procedureoutlined in Steps One and Two, youcan file with the Better BusinessBureau (BBB) Auto Line® Programto enforce your rights.

The BBB Auto Line Program is anout-of-court program administeredby the Council of Better BusinessBureaus to settle automotivedisputes regarding vehicle repairs orthe interpretation of the New VehicleLimited Warranty. Although you maybe required to resort to this informaldispute resolution program prior tofiling a court action, use of theprogram is free of charge and yourcase will generally be heard within



40 days. If you do not agree with thedecision given in your case, youmay reject it and proceed with anyother venue for relief availableto you.

You may contact the BBB Auto LineProgram using the toll-freetelephone number or write them atthe following address:

BBB Auto Line ProgramCouncil of Better BusinessBureaus, Inc.4200 Wilson BoulevardSuite 800Arlington, VA 22203-1838

Telephone: 1-800-955-5100www.dr.bbb.org/goauto

This program is available in all50 states and the District ofColumbia. Eligibility is limited byvehicle age, mileage, and otherfactors. General Motors reservesthe right to change eligibilitylimitations and/or discontinue itsparticipation in this program.

STEP THREE — CanadianOwners: In the event that you donot feel your concerns have beenaddressed after following theprocedure outlined in Steps Oneand Two, General Motors of CanadaLimited wants you to be aware of itsparticipation in a no-chargeMediation/Arbitration program.General Motors of Canada Limitedhas committed to binding arbitrationof owner disputes involvingfactory-related vehicle serviceclaims. The program provides forthe review of the facts involved byan impartial third party arbiter, andmay include an informal hearingbefore the arbiter. The program isdesigned so that the entire disputesettlement process, from the timeyou file your complaint to the finaldecision, should be completed inapproximately 70 days. We believeour impartial program offersadvantages over courts in mostjurisdictions because it is informal,quick, and free of charge.

For further information concerningeligibility in the Canadian MotorVehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP),call toll-free 1-800-207-0685, or callthe General Motors Customer CareCentre, 1-800-263-3777 (English),1-800-263-7854 (French),or write to:

Mediation/Arbitration Programc/o Customer Care CentreGeneral Motors of Canada LimitedMail Code: CA1-163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

The inquiry should be accompaniedby the Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN).



Customer SatisfactionProcedure (Mexico)

Did you get the Warranty ExtensionPlan? This plan is recommended byGeneral Motors to supplement thewarranty included with the newvehicle purchase.

See your dealer for details.

Customer AssistanceProcedure

Owner satisfaction and goodwill arevery important to your dealer andGeneral Motors.

Normally, any problem with thetransaction, sale, or usage of thevehicle must be handled by yourdealer sales or service departments.However, we recognize that despite

the good intentions of all partiesinvolved, sometimes amisunderstanding may occur.

If you have a problem that has notbeen satisfactorily handled throughthe normal means, we suggest thefollowing steps:

STEP ONE

Explain your case to your dealerservice agent, service manager,dealer sales agent, or salesmanager, depending on your case.

Make sure that they have allnecessary information. They areinterested in your continualsatisfaction.

STEP TWO

If you are not satisfied, pleasecontact the general manager or yourdealership owner to ask for theirhelp. If they are not able to resolveyour case, ask them to contact theright people at General Motors forsupport, if needed.

STEP THREE

If your case is not resolved in areasonable amount of time by yourdealer, please call the GeneralMotors Customer AssistanceCenter (CAC) and provide thefollowing information:. Name. Address. Phone number. Model year. Brand. Vehicle Identification

Number (VIN). Mileage. Delivery date. Description of the problem. Dealership name. Dealership address

See Customer Assistance Offices(U.S. and Canada) on page 13‑5 orCustomer Assistance Offices(Mexico) on page 13‑5.



Customer AssistanceOffices (U.S. and Canada)Buick encourages customers to callthe toll-free number for assistance.However, if a customer wishes towrite or e-mail Buick, the lettershould be addressed to:

United States and Puerto Rico

Buick Customer Assistance CenterP.O. Box 33136Detroit, MI 48232-5136www.Buick.com

1-800-521-73001-800-832-8425 (For TextTelephone devices (TTYs))Roadside Assistance:1-800-252-1112

From U.S. Virgin Islands:

1-800-496-9994

Canada

General Motors of Canada LimitedCustomer Care Centre, Mail Code:CA1-163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7www.gm.ca

1-800-263-3777 (English)1-800-263-7854 (French)1-800-263-3830 (For TextTelephone devices (TTYs))Roadside Assistance:1-800-268-6800

All Overseas Locations

Please contact the local GeneralMotors Business Unit.

Customer AssistanceOffices (Mexico)To contact the Customer AssistanceCenter (CAC), use the phonenumbers listed in this section.Customer assistance is availableMonday through Friday, 08:00 to20:00 hours, and Saturdays from09:00 to 15:00 hours.

All e-mail inquiries to the CustomerAssistance Center (CAC) should besent to: [email protected].

Mexico

01-800-466-0818

United States and Canada

1-800-521-7300

Costa Rica

00-800-052-1005

Guatemala

1-800-999-5252

Panama

00-800-052-0001

Dominican Republic

1-888-751-5301

El Salvador

800-6273

Honduras

800-0122-6101



Customer Assistance forText Telephone (TTY)Users (U.S. and Canada)To assist customers who are deaf,hard of hearing, or speech-impairedand who use Text Telephones(TTYs), Buick has TTY equipmentavailable at its Customer AssistanceCenter. Any TTY user cancommunicate with Buick by dialing:1-800-832-8425. TTY users inCanada can dial 1‐800‐263-3830.

Online Owner Center

Online Owner Experience(U.S.) my.buick.com

The Buick online owner experienceis a one-stop resource that allowsinteraction with Buick and keepsimportant vehicle-specificinformation in one place.

Membership Benefits

E (Vehicle Information):Download owner manuals and viewvehicle-specific how-to videos.

G (Maintenance Information):View maintenance schedules,required alerts, OnStar onboardvehicle diagnostic information, andschedule service appointments.

I (Service History): Viewprintable dealer-recorded servicerecords and self-recorded servicerecords.

D (Preferred DealerInformation): Select a preferreddealer and view dealer location,maps, phone numbers, and hours.

J (Warranty TrackingInformation): Track the vehicle’swarranty information.

J (Recall Information): Viewactive recalls or search by VehicleIdentification Number (VIN). SeeVehicle Identification Number (VIN)on page 12‑1.

H (Other Account Information):View GM Card, SiriusXM Satelliteradio, and OnStar accountinformation.

F (Live Chat Support): Chat livewith online help representatives.

Visit my.buick.com to register yourvehicle.

Buick Owner Centre (Canada)buickowner.ca

Take a trip to the Buick OwnerCentre:. Chat live with online help

representatives.. Use the Vehicle Tools section.. Access third party enthusiast

sites and social media networks.. Locate owner resources such as

lease-end, financing, andwarranty information.

. Retrieve your favorite articles,quizzes, tips and multimediagalleries organized into theFeatures and Auto CareSections.

. Download the owner manual foryour vehicle, quickly and easily.



. Find the Buick-recommendedmaintenance services for yourvehicle.

GM MobilityReimbursement Program(U.S. and Canada)

This program is available toqualified applicants for costreimbursement of eligibleaftermarket adaptive equipmentrequired for the vehicle, such ashand controls or a wheelchair/scooter lift for the vehicle.

For more information on the limitedoffer, visit www.gmmobility.com orcall the GM Mobility AssistanceCenter at 1-800-323-9935. TextTelephone (TTY) users, call1-800-833-9935.

General Motors of Canada also hasa Mobility Program. Call1-800-GM-DRIVE (463-7483) fordetails. TTY users call1-800-263-3830.

Roadside AssistanceProgram (Mexico)As a new owner, your vehicle isautomatically enrolled in theRoadside Assistance program. Theservices are available at no costunder the terms and conditions ofthe program. The RoadsideAssistance program is not part of,or included, in the coverageprovided by the new vehicle limitedwarranty.

Roadside Assistance providesassistance to the driver andpassengers while driving the vehiclewithin your city of residence or onany passable road in Mexico, theUnited States, and Canada.Services are subject to the

limitations described in the followingpages. Program coverage varies bycountry.

Roadside Assistance is available24 hours a day, 365 days ofthe year.

This program expires two yearsfrom the date of the invoice for thevehicle, regardless of vehiclemileage and changes in vehicleownership.

For more information about therenewal of this program at the endof its term, contact the BuickCustomer Assistance Center at01-800-466-0818.

Services Provided. Flat Tire Change: If unable to

change a flat tire, RoadsideAssistance will provide towingservice to the nearest authorizedBuick dealership. It is theowner's responsibility for therepair or replacement of the tire.



This service is limited to thetransfer of the vehicle to therepair facility.

. Emergency Fuel Delivery:Delivery of enough fuel for thevehicle to get to the nearestservice station.

. Lock-Out Service: Service tounlock the vehicle if you arelocked out.

. Battery Jump Start: Service tojump start a dead battery.

. *Emergency Messages:Transmission of urgent phonemessages.

. *Emergency Calls: Call foremergency services.

. *Dealership LocationAssistance: Informationregarding addresses andtelephone numbers for Buickdealers.

. Emergency Towing: Tow to thenearest dealer for warrantyservice if the vehicle cannot bedriven.

If the vehicle is involved in anaccident during the commissionof a crime, administrativeviolation, or breach of trafficregulations, RoadsideAssistance will not provideservice. When the vehicle is notaccessible to be towed, allmaneuvers required to access itwill be at the owner's expense.

If the vehicle is in another cityoutside of your residence,Roadside Assistance is limitedto moving the vehicle to thenearest dealer. If you would likethe vehicle moved to a differentdealer, you will be asked tocover the difference in cost atthe time of the move.

If the vehicle cannot be receivedby the nearest Buick dealer dueto scheduling conflicts, thevehicle will be taken to a safeplace where it will remain for upto 48 hours until it can be takento the dealer. If the storage costsexceed the amount authorized,the owner is responsible to paythe difference at the time ofservice. Contact RoadsideAssistance for more informationon authorized amounts.

. *Trip Interruption: This serviceis provided if you are preventedfrom further usage of yourvehicle while traveling and it isnot possible for the nearestBuick dealership to repair thevehicle the same day, requiringthe vehicle to stay at thedealership for a night or more.



If this happens, in addition to thepreviously listed services andprior to confirmation by thedealership, you are entitled tochoose one of the followingalternatives, within the limits ofexisting Roadside Assistanceprogram guidelines. If the costsexceed the amount authorizedfor these services, you must paythe difference at the time ofservice.

Roadside Assistance willcoordinate hotelaccommodations for all vehicletravelers for up to two nights.

A rental car will be provided forup to two days and the vehiclemust be returned to its originaldestination, excluding vehicleswith a carrying capacity greaterthan 3.5 tons.

Complimentary Transportation: Ifyou prefer to continue your tripto the intended destination orreturn to your place ofresidence, and the trip requiresmore than eight hours driving onthe road, transportation for thedriver and passengers by firstclass bus or coach commercialairline will be provided to alocation chosen by RoadsideAssistance, depending onavailability at the chosendestination. Restrictions applybased on vehicle specifications.

If you are on the road, taxiservice to the nearest busstation or airport will beprovided.

. *ComplimentaryTransportation for Vehicle PickUp: Transportation to pick upyour vehicle after repairs arecomplete. Once the dealer hasreported that the vehicle hasbeen repaired, RoadsideAssistance will provide bus orcommercial airline one-wayservice (subject to availability)for the person designated by youto collect your vehicle at thedealership's location if you or thedesignated person are not in thesame town or city as thedealership.

*These services are not provided forU.S. or Canada residents. Allservices provided in the U.S. andCanada are at the owner's expenseand will be reimbursed by RoadsideAssistance.



Services Not Included in RoadsideAssistance

Roadside Assistance does notcover or reimburse services for thefollowing:. Events caused by fraud or bad

faith by the driver.. Vehicle immobilization situations

due to a major force orunforeseen circumstances, suchas natural phenomena of anextraordinary nature,earthquakes, volcanic eruptions,and other cyclonic storms.

. Vehicle immobilization situationsarising from car accidentscaused by the driver of thevehicle or third parties. Thismeans any occurrence thatcauses physical injury to theoccupants and/or the vehiclecaused by external forces.

. Acts of terrorism, riot or uproar,armed forces or police actionswhich prevent timely delivery ofassistance services.

. Food service, beverages,telephone calls, or other extracosts. Accommodation costsapply only to Mexico per theterms and conditions of theRoadside Assistance program.

. Any damage to the vehiclewithout intent, derived from theservices provided.

. Cost of towing a trailer whenchoosing a Buick dealer that isnearest to the temporary storagefacility for the disabled vehicle.

. Cost of all maneuvers requiredto access the vehicle when it isnot available to be towed.

. Cost of fuel provided.

Routine vehicle repair costs are notcovered by the RoadsideAssistance program. For moreinformation, see your new vehiclewarranty.

Contacting Roadside Assistance

Roadside Assistance services are ofno cost to you and available24 hours a day, 365 days a year.Costs are only incurred in situationsthat exceed the limits of theprogram, some of which are listedpreviously in this section.

To contact Roadside Assistance byphone, use the following numbers:

Mexico

01-800-466-0818

United States

1-866-466-8197

Canada

1-800-268-6800

E-mail

[email protected]

Buick reserves the right to makeany changes or discontinue theRoadside Assistance program atany time without notification.



Roadside AssistanceProgram (U.S. andCanada)For U.S.-purchased vehicles, call1-800-252-1112; (Text Telephone(TTY): 1-888-889-2438).

For Canadian-purchased vehicles,call 1-800-268-6800.

Service is available 24 hours a day,365 days a year.

Calling for Assistance

When calling Roadside Assistance,have the following informationready:. Your name, home address, and

home telephone number.. Telephone number of your

location.. Location of the vehicle.. Model, year, color, and license

plate number of the vehicle.

. Odometer reading, VehicleIdentification Number (VIN), anddelivery date of the vehicle.

. Description of the problem.

Coverage

Services are provided up to 6 years/110 000 km (70,000 mi), whichevercomes first.

In the U.S., anyone driving thevehicle is covered. In Canada, aperson driving the vehicle withoutpermission from the owner is notcovered.

Roadside Assistance is not a part ofthe New Vehicle Limited Warranty.Buick and General Motors ofCanada Limited reserve the right tomake any changes or discontinuethe Roadside Assistance program atany time without notification.

Buick and General Motors ofCanada Limited reserve the right tolimit services or payment to anowner or driver if they decide the

claims are made too often, or thesame type of claim is made manytimes.

Services Provided. Emergency Fuel Delivery:

Delivery of enough fuel for thevehicle to get to the nearestservice station.

. Lock-Out Service: Service tounlock the vehicle if you arelocked out. A remote unlock maybe available if you haveOnStar®. For security reasons,the driver must presentidentification before this serviceis given.

. Emergency Tow from a PublicRoad or Highway: Tow to thenearest Buick dealer forwarranty service, or if the vehiclewas in a crash and cannot bedriven. Assistance is also givenwhen the vehicle is stuck insand, mud, or snow.



. Flat Tire Change: Service tochange a flat tire with the sparetire. The spare tire, if equipped,must be in good condition andproperly inflated. It is the owner'sresponsibility for the repair orreplacement of the tire if it is notcovered by the warranty.

. Battery Jump Start: Service tojump start a dead battery.

Services Not Included inRoadside Assistance. Impound towing caused by

violation of any laws.. Legal fines.. Mounting, dismounting,

or changing of snow tires,chains, or other traction devices.

. Towing or services for vehiclesdriven on a non-public road orhighway.

Services Specific toCanadian-Purchased Vehicles. Fuel delivery: Reimbursement

is approximately $5 Canadian.Diesel fuel delivery may berestricted. Propane and otherfuels are not provided throughthis service.

. Lock-Out Service: Vehicleregistration is required.

. Trip Interruption Benefits andAssistance: Must be over250 kilometers from where yourtrip was started to qualify.General Motors of CanadaLimited requirespre-authorization, originaldetailed receipts, and a copy ofthe repair orders. Onceauthorization has been received,the Roadside Assistance advisorwill help you make arrangementsand explain how to receivepayment.

. Alternative Service: Ifassistance cannot be providedright away, the RoadsideAssistance advisor may givepermission to get localemergency road service. You willreceive payment, up to $100,after sending the original receiptto Roadside Assistance.Mechanical failures may becovered, however any cost forparts and labor for repairs notcovered by the warranty are theowner responsibility.

Scheduling ServiceAppointments (U.S. andCanada)When the vehicle requires warrantyservice, contact your dealer andrequest an appointment. Byscheduling a service appointmentand advising the service consultantof your transportation needs, yourdealer can help minimize yourinconvenience.



If the vehicle cannot be scheduledinto the service departmentimmediately, keep driving it until itcan be scheduled for service,unless, of course, the problem issafety related. If it is, please callyour dealership, let them know this,and ask for instructions.

If your dealer requests you to bringthe vehicle for service, you areurged to do so as early in the workday as possible to allow forsame-day repair.

Courtesy TransportationProgram (U.S. andCanada)To enhance your ownershipexperience, we and our participatingdealers are proud to offer CourtesyTransportation, a customer supportprogram for vehicles with theBumper-to-Bumper (Base WarrantyCoverage period in Canada),extended powertrain, and/orwarranties specific to e-Assist inboth the U.S. and Canada.

Several Courtesy Transportationoptions are available to assist inreducing inconvenience whenwarranty repairs are required.

Courtesy Transportation is not apart of the New Vehicle LimitedWarranty. A separate bookletentitled “Limited Warranty andOwner Assistance Information”furnished with each new vehicleprovides detailed warranty coverageinformation.

Transportation Options

Warranty service can generally becompleted while you wait. However,if you are unable to wait, GM helpsto minimize inconvenience byproviding several transportationoptions. Depending on thecircumstances, your dealer can offerone of the following:

Shuttle Service

Shuttle service is the preferredmeans of offering CourtesyTransportation. Dealers may provideshuttle service to get you to your

destination with minimal interruptionof your daily schedule. This includesone-way or round-trip shuttle servicewithin reasonable time and distanceparameters of your dealer's area.

Public Transportation or FuelReimbursement

If the vehicle requires overnightwarranty repairs, and publictransportation is used instead ofyour dealer's shuttle service, theexpense must be supported byoriginal receipts and can only be upto the maximum amount allowed byGM for shuttle service. In addition,for U.S. customers, should youarrange transportation through afriend or relative, limitedreimbursement for reasonable fuelexpenses may be available. Claimamounts should reflect actual costsand be supported by originalreceipts. See your dealer forinformation regarding the allowanceamounts for reimbursement of fuelor other transportation costs.



Courtesy Rental Vehicle

Your dealer may arrange to provideyou with a courtesy rental vehicle orreimburse you for a rental vehiclethat you obtain if the vehicle is keptfor an overnight warranty repair.Rental reimbursement will be limitedand must be supported by originalreceipts. This requires that you signand complete a rental agreementand meet state/provincial, local, andrental vehicle provider requirements.Requirements vary and may includeminimum age requirements,insurance coverage, credit card, etc.You are responsible for fuel usagecharges and may also beresponsible for taxes, levies, usagefees, excessive mileage, or rentalusage beyond the completion of therepair.

It may not be possible to provide alike vehicle as a courtesy rental.

Additional ProgramInformation

All program options, such as shuttleservice, may not be available atevery dealer. Please contact yourdealer for specific information aboutavailability. All CourtesyTransportation arrangements will beadministered by appropriate dealerpersonnel.

General Motors reserves the right tounilaterally modify, change,or discontinue CourtesyTransportation at any time and toresolve all questions of claimeligibility pursuant to the terms andconditions described herein at itssole discretion.

Collision Damage Repair(U.S. and Canada)If the vehicle is involved in acollision and it is damaged, have thedamage repaired by a qualifiedtechnician using the properequipment and quality replacementparts. Poorly performed collision

repairs diminish the vehicle resalevalue, and safety performance canbe compromised in subsequentcollisions.

Collision Parts

Genuine GM Collision parts are newparts made with the same materialsand construction methods as theparts with which the vehicle wasoriginally built. Genuine GMCollision parts are the best choice toensure that the vehicle's designedappearance, durability, and safetyare preserved. The use of GenuineGM parts can help maintain the GMNew Vehicle Limited Warranty.

Recycled original equipment partsmay also be used for repair. Theseparts are typically removed fromvehicles that were total losses inprior crashes. In most cases, theparts being recycled are fromundamaged sections of the vehicle.A recycled original equipment GMpart may be an acceptable choice tomaintain the vehicle's originallydesigned appearance and safety



performance; however, the history ofthese parts is not known. Such partsare not covered by the GM NewVehicle Limited Warranty, and anyrelated failures are not covered bythat warranty.

Aftermarket collision parts are alsoavailable. These are made bycompanies other than GM and maynot have been tested for the vehicle.As a result, these parts may fitpoorly, exhibit premature durability/corrosion problems, and may notperform properly in subsequentcollisions. Aftermarket parts are notcovered by the GM New VehicleLimited Warranty, and any vehiclefailure related to such parts is notcovered by that warranty.

Repair Facility

GM also recommends that youchoose a collision repair facility thatmeets your needs before you everneed collision repairs. Your dealermay have a collision repair centerwith GM-trained technicians andstate‐of‐the‐art equipment, or be

able to recommend a collision repaircenter that has GM-trainedtechnicians and comparableequipment.

Insuring the Vehicle

Protect your investment in the GMvehicle with comprehensive andcollision insurance coverage. Thereare significant differences in thequality of coverage afforded byvarious insurance policy terms.Many insurance policies providereduced protection to the GMvehicle by limiting compensation fordamage repairs through the use ofaftermarket collision parts. Someinsurance companies will notspecify aftermarket collision parts.When purchasing insurance, werecommend that you ensure that thevehicle will be repaired with GMoriginal equipment collision parts.If such insurance coverage is notavailable from your currentinsurance carrier, consider switchingto another insurance carrier.

If the vehicle is leased, the leasingcompany may require you to haveinsurance that ensures repairs withGenuine GM Original EquipmentManufacturer (OEM) parts orGenuine Manufacturer replacementparts. Read the lease carefully, asyou may be charged at the end ofthe lease for poor quality repairs.

If a Crash Occurs

If there has been an injury, callemergency services for help. Do notleave the scene of a crash until allmatters have been taken care of.Move the vehicle only if its positionputs you in danger, or you areinstructed to move it by a policeofficer.

Give only the necessary informationto police and other parties involvedin the crash.

For emergency towing seeRoadside Assistance Program(Mexico) on page 13‑7 or RoadsideAssistance Program (U.S. andCanada) on page 13‑11.



Gather the following information:. Driver name, address, and

telephone number.. Driver license number.. Owner name, address, and

telephone number.. Vehicle license plate number.. Vehicle make, model, and

model year.. Vehicle Identification

Number (VIN).. Insurance company and policy

number.. General description of the

damage to the other vehicle.

Choose a reputable repair facilitythat uses quality replacement parts.See “Collision Parts” earlier in thissection.

If the airbag has inflated, see WhatWill You See after an AirbagInflates? on page 3‑21.

Managing the Vehicle DamageRepair Process

In the event that the vehicle requiresdamage repairs, GM recommendsthat you take an active role in itsrepair. If you have a pre-determinedrepair facility of choice, take thevehicle there, or have it towed there.Specify to the facility that anyrequired replacement collision partsbe original equipment parts, eithernew Genuine GM parts or recycledoriginal GM parts. Remember,recycled parts will not be covered bythe GM vehicle warranty.

Insurance pays the bill for the repair,but you must live with the repair.Depending on your policy limits,your insurance company mayinitially value the repair usingaftermarket parts. Discuss this withthe repair professional, and insist onGenuine GM parts. Remember,if the vehicle is leased, you may beobligated to have the vehiclerepaired with Genuine GM parts,even if your insurance coveragedoes not pay the full cost.

If another party's insurancecompany is paying for the repairs,you are not obligated to accept arepair valuation based on thatinsurance company's collision policyrepair limits, as you have nocontractual limits with that company.In such cases, you can have controlof the repair and parts choices aslong as the cost stays withinreasonable limits.

Service PublicationsOrdering Information

Service Manuals

Service Manuals have the diagnosisand repair information on theengines, transmission, axle,suspension, brakes, electrical,steering, body, etc.

Service Bulletins

Service Bulletins give additionaltechnical service informationneeded to knowledgeably serviceGeneral Motors cars and trucks.



Each bulletin contains instructionsto assist in the diagnosis andservice of the vehicle.

Owner Information

Owner publications are writtenspecifically for owners and intendedto provide basic operationalinformation about the vehicle. TheOwner Manual includes theMaintenance Schedule for allmodels.

In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio,Owner Manual, and WarrantyManual.

RETAIL SELL PRICE:$35.00 (U.S.) plus handling andshipping fees.

Without Portfolio: OwnerManual only.

RETAIL SELL PRICE:$25.00 (U.S.) plus handling andshipping fees.

Current and Past Models

Technical Service Bulletins andManuals are available for currentand past model GM vehicles.

ORDER TOLL FREE:1-800-551-4123 Monday – Friday8:00 AM – 6:00 PM Eastern Time

For Credit Card Orders Only(VISA-MasterCard-Discover), seeHelm, Inc. at: www.helminc.com.

Or write to:

Helm, IncorporatedAttention: Customer Service47911 Halyard DrivePlymouth, MI 48170

Prices are subject to change withoutnotice and without incurringobligation. Allow ample time fordelivery.

All listed prices are quoted in U.S.funds. Make checks payable in U.S.funds.

Reporting SafetyDefects

Reporting Safety Defectsto the United StatesGovernmentIf you believe that your vehiclehas a defect which could causea crash or could cause injury ordeath, you should immediatelyinform the National HighwayTraffic Safety Administration(NHTSA) in addition to notifyingGeneral Motors.

If NHTSA receives similarcomplaints, it may open aninvestigation, and if it finds thata safety defect exists in a groupof vehicles, it may order a recalland remedy campaign.However, NHTSA cannotbecome involved in individualproblems between you, yourdealer, or General Motors.



To contact NHTSA, you may callthe Vehicle Safety Hotlinetoll-free at 1-888-327-4236(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go tohttp://www.safercar.gov; orwrite to:

Administrator, NHTSA1200 New Jersey Avenue, S.E.Washington, D.C. 20590

You can also obtain otherinformation about motorvehicle safety fromhttp://www.safercar.gov.

Reporting Safety Defectsto the CanadianGovernmentIf you live in Canada, and youbelieve that the vehicle has a safetydefect, notify Transport Canadaimmediately, and notify GeneralMotors of Canada Limited. CallTransport Canada at1-800-333-0510 or write to:

Transport CanadaRoad Safety Branch80 rue NoelGatineau, QC J8Z 0A1

Reporting Safety Defectsto General MotorsIn addition to notifying NHTSA (orTransport Canada) in a situation likethis, please notify General Motors.

Call 1-800-521-7300, or write:

Buick Customer Assistance CenterP.O. Box 33136Detroit, MI 48232-5136

In Canada, call 1-800-263-3777(English) or 1-800-263-7854(French), or write:

General Motors of Canada LimitedCustomer Care Centre, Mail Code:CA1-163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7



Vehicle DataRecording andPrivacyThe vehicle has a number ofcomputers that record informationabout the vehicle’s performance andhow it is driven. For example, thevehicle uses computer modules tomonitor and control engine andtransmission performance, tomonitor the conditions for airbagdeployment and deploy them in acrash, and, if equipped, to provideantilock braking to help the drivercontrol the vehicle. These modulesmay store data to help the dealertechnician service the vehicle.Some modules may also store dataabout how the vehicle is operated,such as rate of fuel consumption oraverage speed. These modules mayretain personal preferences, such asradio presets, seat positions, andtemperature settings.

Event Data RecordersThis vehicle is equipped with anevent data recorder (EDR). Themain purpose of an EDR is torecord, in certain crash or nearcrash-like situations, such as an airbag deployment or hitting a roadobstacle, data that will assist inunderstanding how a vehicle’ssystems performed. The EDR isdesigned to record data related tovehicle dynamics and safetysystems for a short period of time,typically 30 seconds or less. TheEDR in this vehicle is designed torecord such data as:. How various systems in your

vehicle were operating;. Whether or not the driver and

passenger safety belts werebuckled/fastened;

. How far (if at all) the driver wasdepressing the accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,

. How fast the vehicle wastraveling.

These data can help provide abetter understanding of thecircumstances in which crashes andinjuries occur. NOTE: EDR data arerecorded by your vehicle only if anon-trivial crash situation occurs; nodata are recorded by the EDR undernormal driving conditions and nopersonal data (e.g., name, gender,age, and crash location) arerecorded. However, other parties,such as law enforcement, couldcombine the EDR data with the typeof personally identifying dataroutinely acquired during a crashinvestigation.

To read data recorded by an EDR,special equipment is required, andaccess to the vehicle or the EDR isneeded. In addition to the vehiclemanufacturer, other parties, such aslaw enforcement, that have thespecial equipment, can read theinformation if they have access tothe vehicle or the EDR.



GM will not access this data orshare it with others except: with theconsent of the vehicle owner or,if the vehicle is leased, with theconsent of the lessee; in responseto an official request by police orsimilar government office; as part ofGM's defense of litigation throughthe discovery process; or, asrequired by law. Data that GMcollects or receives may also beused for GM research needs or maybe made available to others forresearch purposes, where a need isshown and the data is not tied to aspecific vehicle or vehicle owner.

OnStar®

If the vehicle is equipped withOnStar® and has an activesubscription, additional data may becollected through the OnStarsystem. This includes informationabout the vehicle’s operation; aboutcollisions involving the vehicle; theuse of the vehicle and its features;and, in certain situations, thelocation and approximate GPS

speed of the vehicle. Refer to theOnStar Terms and Conditions andPrivacy Statement on the OnStarwebsite.

Infotainment SystemIf the vehicle is equipped with anavigation system as part of theinfotainment system, use of thesystem may result in the storage ofdestinations, addresses, telephonenumbers, and other trip information.See the infotainment manual forinformation on stored data and fordeletion instructions.

Radio FrequencyIdentification (RFID)RFID technology is used in somevehicles for functions such as tirepressure monitoring and ignitionsystem security, as well as inconnection with conveniences suchas Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitters for remote door locking/unlocking and starting, andin-vehicle transmitters for garage

door openers. RFID technology inGM vehicles does not use or recordpersonal information or link with anyother GM system containingpersonal information.

Radio FrequencyStatementThis vehicle has systems thatoperate on a radio frequency thatcomply with Part 15 of the FederalCommunications Commission (FCC)rules and with Industry CanadaStandards RSS‐GEN/210/220/310.

Operation is subject to the followingtwo conditions:

1. The device may not causeharmful interference.

2. The device must accept anyinterference received, includinginterference that may causeundesired operation of thedevice.



Changes or modifications to any ofthese systems by other than anauthorized service facility could voidauthorization to use this equipment.



2 NOTES


OnStar 14-1

OnStar

OnStar OverviewOnStar Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1

OnStar ServicesEmergency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-3Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-5

OnStar Additional InformationOnStar AdditionalInformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-5

OnStar Overview

If equipped, this vehicle has acomprehensive, in-vehicle systemthat can connect to a live Advisorfor Emergency, Security, Navigation,Connection, and DiagnosticServices.

The OnStar system status light isnext to the OnStar buttons. If thestatus light is:. Solid Green: System is ready.. Flashing Green: On a call.. Red: Indicates a problem.

PressQ or call 1-888-4ONSTAR(1-888-466-7827) to speak to anAdvisor.

Press= to:

. Make a call, end a call,or answer an incoming call.

. Give OnStar Hands-Free Callingvoice commands.

. Give OnStar Turn-by-TurnNavigation voice commands.Requires the available Directionsand Connections service plan.

PressQ to connect to a liveAdvisor to:. Verify account information or

update contact information.. Get driving directions. Requires

the available Directions andConnections service plan.

. Receive On-DemandDiagnostics for a check of thevehicle’s key operating systems.

. Receive Roadside Assistance.


14-2 OnStar

Press the OnStar Emergencybutton> to get a priorityconnection to an EmergencyAdvisor available 24/7 to:. Get help for an emergency.. Be a Good Samaritan or

respond to an AMBER Alert.. Get crisis assistance and

evacuation routes.

OnStar Services

EmergencyWith Automatic Crash Response,the built-in system can automaticallyconnect to help in most crashes,even if help cannot be requested.

Press> to connect to anEmergency Advisor. GPStechnology is used to identify thevehicle location and can providecritical information to emergencypersonnel. The Advisor is alsotrained to offer critical assistance inemergency situations before firstresponders arrive.

SecurityOnStar provides services like StolenVehicle Assistance, Remote IgnitionBlock, and Roadside Assistance,if the vehicle is equipped. OnStarcan unlock the vehicle doorsremotely, if it is equipped with

automatic door locks, and can helppolice locate the vehicle if it isstolen.

NavigationOnStar navigation requires theDirections and Connectionsservice plan.

PressQ to receive directions orhave them sent to the vehiclenavigation screen, if equipped.Destinations can also be forwardedto the vehicle from MapQuest.com.The OnStar mapping database iscontinuously updated. For coveragemaps, see www.onstar.com (U.S.)www.onstar.ca (Canada).

Turn-by-Turn Navigation

1. PressQ to connect to a liveAdvisor.

2. Request directions.

3. Directions are downloaded to thevehicle.

4. Follow the voice-guidedcommands.


OnStar 14-3

Using Voice CommandsDuring a Planned Route

Cancel Route

1. Press=. System responds:“OnStar ready,” then a tone. Say“Cancel route.” Systemresponds: “Do you want tocancel directions?”

2. Say “Yes.” System responds:“OK, request completed, thankyou, goodbye.”

Route Preview

1. Press=. System responds:“OnStar ready,” then a tone.

2. Say “Route preview.” Systemresponds with the next threemaneuvers.

3. Say “Goodbye.” Exits voicecommands.

Repeat


2. Say “Repeat.” System respondswith the last direction given, thenresponds with “OnStar ready,”then a tone.


Get My Destination


2. Say “Get my destination.”System responds with addressand the distance to thedestination, then responds with“OnStar ready,” then a tone.


Other Navigation ServicesAvailable from OnStar

OnStar eNav: Allows subscribersto send destinations fromMapQuest.com to their Turn-by-TurnNavigation or screen-basednavigation system. When ready, thedirections will be downloaded to thevehicle.

Destination Download: PressQ,then request the Advisor todownload directions to thenavigation system in the vehicle.After the call ends, press the “Go”button on the navigation screen tobegin driving directions.

Destinations can also bedownloaded on the go. Forinformation about eNav, DestinationDownload, and coverage maps seewww.onstar.com (U.S.),www.onstar.ca (Canada).

ConnectionsOnStar Hands-Free Calling allowscalls to be made and received fromthe vehicle. The vehicle can also becontrolled from a cell phone throughthe OnStar RemoteLink mobile app.For coverage maps, seewww.onstar.com (U.S.),www.onstar.ca (Canada).


14-4 OnStar

Hands-Free Calling

1. Press=. System responds:“OnStar ready.”

2. Say “Call.” System responds:“Please say the name or numberto call.”

3. Say the entire number withoutpausing, including a “1” and thearea code. System responds:“OK calling.”

Calling 911 Emergency

1. Press=. The system responds“OnStar Ready,” followed bya tone.

2. Say “Call.” The system responds“Please say the name or numberto call.”

3. Say “911” without pausing. Thesystem responds “911.”

4. Say “Call.” The system responds“OK, dialing 911.”

Retrieve My Number


2. Say “My number.” Systemresponds: “Your OnStarHands-Free Calling number is.”

End a Call

Press=. System responds: “Callended.”

Store a Name Tag for SpeedDialing


2. Say “Store.” System responds:“Please say the number youwould like to store.”

3. Say the entire number withoutpausing. System responds:“Please say the name tag.”

4. Pick a name tag. Systemresponds: “About to store <nametag>. Does that sound OK?”

5. Say “Yes” or say “No” to tryagain. System responds: “OK,storing <name tag>.”

Place a Call Using a StoredNumber


2. Say “Call <name tag>.” Systemresponds: “OK, calling<name tag>.”

Verify Minutes and Expiration

Press= and say “Minutes” then“Verify” to check how many minutesremain and their expiration date.


OnStar 14-5

OnStar Mobile App

Download the OnStar RemoteLinkmobile app to select Apple, Androidand BlackBerry devices to checkvehicle fuel level, oil life, or tirepressure; to start the vehicle (ifequipped) or unlock it; or to connectto an OnStar Advisor. For OnStarRemoteLink information andcompatibility, see www.onstar.com(U.S.), www.onstar.ca (Canada).

DiagnosticsOnStar Vehicle Diagnostics willperform a vehicle check everymonth. It will check the engine,transmission, antilock brakes, andmajor vehicle systems. It alsochecks the tire pressures, if thevehicle is equipped with the TirePressure Monitoring System. If adiagnostics check is neededbetween e-mails, press Q, and anAdvisor can run a check.

OnStar AdditionalInformationTransferring Service

PressQ to request account transfereligibility information. The Advisorcan assist in canceling or removingaccount information. If OnStarreceives information that vehicleownership has changed, OnStarmay send a voice message to thevehicle, requesting updated accountinformation.

Reactivation for SubsequentOwners

PressQ and follow the prompts tospeak to an Advisor as soon aspossible after acquiring the vehicle.The Advisor will update vehiclerecords and will explain the OnStarservice offers and options available.

How OnStar Service Works

Automatic Crash Response,Emergency Services, Crisis Assist,Stolen Vehicle Assistance, VehicleDiagnostics, Remote Door Unlock,Roadside Assistance, Turn-by-TurnNavigation, and Hands-Free Callingare available on most vehicles. Notall OnStar services are availableeverywhere or on all vehicles. Formore information, a full descriptionof OnStar services, systemlimitations, and OnStar terms andconditions:. In the U.S. see www.onstar.com

(U.S.) or call 1-888-4-ONSTAR.(1-888-466-7827).

. In Canada see www.onstar.ca(Canada) or call1-888-4-ONSTAR.(1-888-466-7827).

. TTY 1-877-248-2080.

. PressQ to speak with anAdvisor.


14-6 OnStar

OnStar services require a vehicleelectrical system, wireless service,and GPS satellite technologies to beavailable and operating for featuresto function properly. These systemsmay not operate if the battery isdischarged or disconnected.

OnStar service cannot work unlessyour vehicle is in a place whereOnStar has an agreement with awireless service provider for servicein that area, and the wirelessservice provider has coverage,network capacity, reception, andtechnology compatible with OnStarservice. Service involving locationinformation about the vehicle cannotwork unless GPS signals areavailable, unobstructed, andcompatible with the OnStarhardware. OnStar service may notwork if the OnStar equipment is notproperly installed or it has not beenproperly maintained. If equipment orsoftware is added, connected,or modified, OnStar service may notwork. Other problems beyond thecontrol of OnStar may prevent

service such as hills, tall buildings,tunnels, weather, electrical systemdesign and architecture of thevehicle, damage to the vehicle in acrash, or wireless phone networkcongestion or jamming.

See Radio Frequency Statement onpage 13‑20 for informationregarding Part 15 of the FederalCommunications Commission (FCC)rules and Industry CanadaStandards RSS-GEN/210/220/310.

Services for People withDisabilities

Advisors provide services to helpsubscribers with physical disabilitiesand medical conditions.

PressQ for help with:

. Locating a gas station with anattendant to pump gas.

. Finding a hotel, restaurant, etc.,that meets accessibility needs.

. Providing directions to theclosest hospital or pharmacy inurgent situations.

TTY Users

OnStar has the ability tocommunicate to the deaf,hard-of-hearing, or speech-impairedcustomers while in the vehicle. Theavailable dealer-installed TTYsystem can provide in-vehicleaccess to all of the OnStar services,except Virtual Advisor and OnStarTurn-by-Turn Navigation.

OnStar.com (U.S.) or OnStar.ca(Canada)

The website provides access toaccount information, allowsmanagement of the OnStarsubscription, and viewing of videosof each service. Get subscriptionplan pricing and sign up for OnStarVehicle Diagnostics. Click on the“My Account” tab on the homepage. The website navigation andservices provided may vary bycountry.


OnStar 14-7

OnStar Personal IdentificationNumber (PIN)

A PIN is needed to access some ofthe OnStar services, like RemoteDoor Unlock and Stolen VehicleAssistance. You will be prompted tochange the PIN the first time whenspeaking with an Advisor. Tochange the OnStar PIN, call OnStarand provide the Advisor with thecurrent number.

Warranty

OnStar equipment may bewarranted as part of the NewVehicle Limited Warranty. Themanufacturer of the vehiclefurnishes detailed warrantyinformation.

Languages

The vehicle can be programmed torespond in English, French orSpanish. PressQ and ask anAdvisor. Advisors can speakEnglish, French or Spanish.

Potential Issues

OnStar cannot perform RemoteDoor Unlock or Stolen VehicleAssistance after the vehicle hasbeen off continuously for five days.After five days, OnStar can contactRoadside Assistance and alocksmith to help gain access to thevehicle.

Global PositioningSystem (GPS). Obstruction of the GPS can

occur in a large city with tallbuildings; in parking garages;around airports; in tunnels,underpasses, or parkinggarages; or in an area with verydense trees. If GPS signals arenot available, the OnStar systemshould still operate to callOnStar. However, OnStar couldhave difficulty identifying theexact location.

. In emergency situations, OnStarcan use the last stored GPSlocation to send to emergencyresponders.

. A temporary loss of GPS cancause loss of the ability to senda Turn-by-Turn Navigation route.The Advisor may give a verbalroute or may ask for a call backafter the vehicle is driven into anopen area.

Cellular and GPS Antennas

Avoid placing items over or near theantenna to prevent blocking cellularand GPS signal reception. Cellularreception is required for OnStar tosend remote signals to the vehicle.

Unable to Connect to OnStarMessage

If there is limited cellular coverageor the cellular network has reachedmaximum capacity, this messagemay come on. PressQ to try thecall again or try again after driving afew miles into another cellular area.


14-8 OnStar

Vehicle and Power Issues

OnStar services require a vehicleelectrical system, wireless service,and GPS satellite technologies to beavailable and operating for featuresto function properly. These systemsmay not operate if the battery isdischarged or disconnected.

Add-on Electrical Equipment

The OnStar system is integratedinto the electrical architecture of thevehicle. Do not add any electricalequipment. See Add-On ElectricalEquipment on page 9‑51. Addedelectrical equipment may interferewith the operation of the OnStarsystem and cause it to not operate.

Privacy

The complete OnStar PrivacyStatement may be found atwww.onstar.com (U.S.),or www.onstar.ca (Canada).Privacy-sensitive users of wirelesscommunications are cautioned thatthe privacy of any information sentvia wireless cellular communications

cannot be assured. Third partiesmay unlawfully intercept or accesstransmissions and privatecommunications without consent.

OnStar - libcurl and unzipacknowledgments

Certain OnStar components includelibcurl and unzip software. Beloware the notices and licensesassociated with this software:

libcurl:

COPYRIGHT AND PERMISSIONNOTICE

Copyright (c) 1996 - 2010, DanielStenberg, <[email protected]>.

All rights reserved.

Permission to use, copy, modify,and distribute this software for anypurpose with or without fee ishereby granted, provided that theabove copyright notice and thispermission notice appear in allcopies.

THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED“AS IS,” WITHOUT WARRANTY OFANY KIND, EXPRESS ORIMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOTLIMITED TO THE WARRANTIESOF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESSFOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSEAND NONINFRINGEMENT OFTHIRD PARTY RIGHTS. IN NOEVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS ORCOPYRIGHT HOLDERS BELIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM,DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY,WHETHER IN AN ACTION OFCONTRACT, TORT OROTHERWISE, ARISING FROM,OUT OF OR IN CONNECTIONWITH THE SOFTWARE OR THEUSE OR OTHER DEALINGS INTHE SOFTWARE.

Except as contained in this notice,the name of a copyright holder shallnot be used in advertising orotherwise to promote the sale, useor other dealings in this Softwarewithout prior written authorization ofthe copyright holder.


OnStar 14-9

unzip:

This is version 2005-Feb-10 ofthe Info-ZIP copyright and license.The definitive version of thisdocument should be availableat ftp://ftp.info-zip.org/pub/infozip/license.html indefinitely.

Copyright (c) 1990-2005 Info-ZIP. Allrights reserved.

For the purposes of this copyrightand license, “Info-ZIP” is defined asthe following set of individuals:

Mark Adler, John Bush, Karl Davis,Harald Denker, Jean-Michel Dubois,Jean-loup Gailly, Hunter Goatley, EdGordon, Ian Gorman, ChrisHerborth, Dirk Haase, Greg Hartwig,Robert Heath, Jonathan Hudson,Paul Kienitz, David Kirschbaum,Johnny Lee, Onno van der Linden,Igor Mandrichenko, Steve P. Miller,Sergio Monesi, Keith Owens,George Petrov, Greg Roelofs, KaiUwe Rommel, Steve Salisbury,Dave Smith, Steven M. Schweda,

Christian Spieler, Cosmin Truta,Antoine Verheijen, Paul von Behren,Rich Wales, Mike White

This software is provided “as is,”without warranty of any kind,express or implied. In no event shallInfo-ZIP or its contributors be heldliable for any direct, indirect,incidental, special or consequentialdamages arising out of the use of orinability to use this software.

Permission is granted to anyone touse this software for any purpose,including commercial applications,and to alter it and redistribute itfreely, subject to the followingrestrictions:

1. Redistributions of source codemust retain the above copyrightnotice, definition, disclaimer, andthis list of conditions.

2. Redistributions in binary form(compiled executables) mustreproduce the above copyrightnotice, definition, disclaimer, and

this list of conditions indocumentation and/or othermaterials provided with thedistribution. The sole exceptionto this condition is redistributionof a standard UnZipSFX binary(including SFXWiz) as part of aself-extracting archive; that ispermitted without inclusion ofthis license, as long as thenormal SFX banner has notbeen removed from the binary ordisabled.

3. Altered versions–including, butnot limited to, ports to newoperating systems, existing portswith new graphical interfaces,and dynamic, shared, or staticlibrary versions–must be plainlymarked as such and must not bemisrepresented as being theoriginal source. Such alteredversions also must not bemisrepresented as beingInfo-ZIP releases–including, butnot limited to, labeling of the


14-10 OnStar

altered versions with the names“Info-ZIP” (or any variationthereof, including, but not limitedto, different capitalizations),“Pocket UnZip,” “WiZ” or“MacZip” without the explicitpermission of Info-ZIP. Suchaltered versions are furtherprohibited frommisrepresentative use of theZip-Bugs or Info-ZIP e-mailaddresses or of theInfo-ZIP URL(s).

4. Info-ZIP retains the right to usethe names “Info-ZIP,” “Zip,”“UnZip,” “UnZipSFX,” “WiZ,”“Pocket UnZip,” “Pocket Zip,”and “MacZip” for its own sourceand binary releases.


INDEX i-1

AAccessories andModifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3

Accessory Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-23Add-On ElectricalEquipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-51

Additional InformationOnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-5

AdjustmentsLumbar, Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4

Air Cleaner/Filter, Engine . . . . . 10-14Air Filter, PassengerCompartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6

Air Intake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6Air Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6Airbag SystemCheck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-28How Does an AirbagRestrain? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-21

Passenger SensingSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-23

What Makes an AirbagInflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-21

Airbag System (cont'd)What Will You See after anAirbag Inflates? . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-21

When Should an AirbagInflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-20

Where Are the Airbags? . . . . . .3-19AirbagsAdding Equipment to theVehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-27

Passenger Status Indicator . . .5-14Readiness Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-14Servicing Airbag-EquippedVehicles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-27

System Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-17AlarmVehicle Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13

AM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9AntennaSatellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-15

Antilock BrakeSystem (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-31Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-19

Appearance CareExterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-92Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-95

Assistance Program,Roadside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7, 13-11

Audio Players . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15CD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-15MP3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-16

Audio SystemBackglass Antenna . . . . . . . . . . .7-14Radio Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-13Theft-Deterrent Feature . . . . . . . . 7-2

AutomaticHeadlamp System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-27Transmission Fluid . . . . . . . . . 10-13

Automatic TransmissionManual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-29Shift Lock ControlFunction Check . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27

AuxiliaryDevices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-18


i-2 INDEX

BBattery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26Jump Starting . . . . . . . . 10-85, 10-87Power Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6Voltage and ChargingMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-29

Blade Replacement, Wiper . . . 10-28Bluetooth . . . . . . . . . . 7-22, 7-24, 7-27BrakeSystem Warning Light . . . . . . . .5-18

Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23Antilock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-31Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-34Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-32System Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .5-29

Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3Break-In, New Vehicle . . . . . . . . . 9-14Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-33Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-32, 6-4Halogen Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30Headlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . 10-29Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30Headlamps, Front TurnSignal, and ParkingLamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30

Bulb Replacement (cont'd)High Intensity Discharge(HID) Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30

License Plate Lamps . . . . . . . 10-33Taillamps, Turn Signal,Stoplamps, andBack-up Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . 10-32

Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-57

CCalibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4CaliforniaFuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . .9-46Perchlorate MaterialsRequirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-3

Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2Canadian Vehicle Owners . . . . . . . . iiiCapacities andSpecifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2

Carbon MonoxideEngine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-26Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8

Cargo Net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3Cautions, Danger, andWarnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv

CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15Center Console Storage . . . . . . . . 4-3Chains, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-61Charging System Light . . . . . . . . 5-15CheckEngine Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-15IgnitionTransmission Lock . . . . . . . . 10-28

Child RestraintsInfants and YoungChildren . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-31

Lower Anchors andTethers for Children . . . . . . . . .3-37

Older Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-29Securing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-44, 3-46Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-34

Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-35CleaningExterior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-92Interior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-95

Climate Control SystemsDual Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1

Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5Cluster, Instrument . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9Clutch, Hydraulic . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-14Collision Damage Repair . . . . . 13-14


INDEX i-3

Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . 10-84Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-29

Competitive Driving, Racingor Other . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6

Compressor Kit,Tire Sealant . . . . . . . . . .10-64, 10-71

ConnectionsOnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-3

Control of a Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3Convenience Net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3Convex Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15CoolantEngine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-17Engine TemperatureGauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-12

Engine TemperatureWarning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-21

Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-16Engine Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .5-30

Courtesy TransportationProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13

Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-41Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-24

Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1

Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . 13-6Offices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-5Text Telephone (TTY)Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-6

Customer InformationService PublicationsOrdering Information . . . . . . 13-16

Customer SatisfactionProcedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-2, 13-4

DDamage Repair, Collision . . . . . 13-14Danger, Warnings, andCautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv

Data Recorders, Event . . . . . . . 13-19Daytime RunningLamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

Defensive Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3DevicesAuxiliary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-18

DiagnosticsOnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-5

Distracted Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2Dome Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5

DoorAjar Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-24Ajar Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-30Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-10Power Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-10

Drive Belt Routing, Engine . . . . . 12-4Driver Efficiency Gauge . . . . . . . 5-12Driver InformationCenter (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24

DrivingDefensive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3Drunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3For Better Fuel Economy . . . . .1-23Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . . 9-7If the Vehicle is Stuck . . . . . . . . .9-10Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5Off-Road Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5Vehicle Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . .9-10Wet Roads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6Winter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8

Dual Automatic ClimateControl System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1


i-4 INDEX

EE85 Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-48Electric Parking Brake Light . . . 5-18Electrical Equipment,Add-On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-51

Electrical SystemEngine CompartmentFuse Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-35


Instrument Panel FuseBlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-39

Overload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-34EmergencyOnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-2

EngineAir Cleaner/Filter . . . . . . . . . . . 10-14Check and Service EngineSoon Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-15

Compartment Overview . . . . . . .10-5Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-17Coolant TemperatureGauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-12

Coolant TemperatureWarning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-21

Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-16

Engine (cont'd)Cooling System Messages . . .5-30Drive Belt Routing . . . . . . . . . . . .12-4Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-26Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-22Oil Life System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-12Oil Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-31Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-20Power Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-31Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22Running While Parked . . . . . . . .9-26Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-19

Entry Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6Event Data Recorders . . . . . . . . 13-19Exit Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6Extender, Safety Belt . . . . . . . . . . 3-15Exterior Lamp Controls . . . . . . . . . 6-1Exterior Lamps Off Reminder . . . 6-2

FFilter,Engine Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . 10-14

Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2Flashers, Hazard Warning . . . . . . 6-3Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-62Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-79

Floor Mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-98FluidAutomatic Transmission . . . . 10-13Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24Power Steering . . . . . . 10-22, 10-23Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23

Fog LampsBulb Replacement . . . . . .10-32, 6-4

Folding Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16Front Fog LampLight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-23

Front SeatsAdjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6

Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-45Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-47E85 (85% Ethanol) . . . . . . . . . . .9-48Economy Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-23Filling a Portable FuelContainer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-50

Filling the Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-49Foreign Countries . . . . . . . . . . . .9-47Gasoline Specifications . . . . . . .9-46Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11Low Fuel Warning Light . . . . . . .5-23


INDEX i-5

Fuel (cont'd)Recommended . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-46Requirements, California . . . . .9-46System Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .5-31

FusesEngine CompartmentFuse Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-35


Instrument Panel FuseBlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-39

GGarage Door Opener . . . . . . . . . . 5-39Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-39

GasolineSpecifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-46

GaugesDriver Efficiency . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-12Engine CoolantTemperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-12

Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11

Gauges (cont'd)Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11Warning Lights andIndicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8

General InformationService and Maintenance . . . . . 11-1Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-51Vehicle Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2

Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1GM Mobility ReimbursementProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7

HHalogen Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . . . 6-3Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2HeadlampsAiming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-29Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-30Daytime RunningLamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2High Intensity Discharge(HID) Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30

Headlamps (cont'd)High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . .5-23High/Low Beam Changer . . . . . . 6-2Lamps On Reminder . . . . . . . . .5-24

HeatedSteering Wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3

Heated Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16HeaterEngine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-22

High Voltage Devices andWiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-34

High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23High-Speed Operation . . . . . . . . 10-49Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . . . 9-7Hill Start Assist (HSA) . . . . . . . . . 9-35Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3How to Wear Safety BeltsProperly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10

Hydraulic Clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-14


i-6 INDEX

IIgnition Positions . . . . . . . . 9-15, 9-17Ignition Transmission LockCheck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28

Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14Infants and Young Children,Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31

Infotainment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1Infotainment System . . . . . . . . . . 13-20Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9Instrument PanelStorage Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1

InteractiveDrive Control System . . .9-38, 9-40

Interactive DriveControl System . . . . . . . . . 9-38, 9-40

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii

JJump Starting . . . . . . . . . .10-85, 10-87

KKey and Lock Messages . . . . . . . 5-31Keyless EntryRemote (RKE) System . . . . . . . . 2-3

Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1

LLabeling, Tire Sidewall . . . . . . . . 10-43LampsDaytime Running (DRL) . . . . . . . 6-2Dome . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5Exterior Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1Exterior Lamps OffReminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

Headlamps, Front TurnSignal, and ParkingLamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30

License Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-33Malfunction Indicator . . . . . . . . .5-15On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-24Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5

Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11LATCH SystemReplacing Parts after aCrash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-44

LATCH, Lower Anchors andTethers for Children . . . . . . . . . . 3-37

LightingEntry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6Exit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6Illumination Control . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4

LightsAirbag Readiness . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-14Antilock Brake System(ABS) Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-19

Brake System Warning . . . . . . .5-18Charging System . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-15Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-24Door Ajar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-24Electric Parking Brake . . . . . . . .5-18Engine CoolantTemperature Warning . . . . . . .5-21

Engine Oil Pressure . . . . . . . . . .5-22Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2Front Fog Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-23High-Beam On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-23High/Low Beam Changer . . . . . . 6-2Low Fuel Warning . . . . . . . . . . . .5-23Safety Belt Reminders . . . . . . . .5-13Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-23


INDEX i-7

Lights (cont'd)Service Electric ParkingBrake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-19

StabiliTrak® OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-20Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22Traction Control System(TCS)/StabiliTrak® . . . . . . . . . .5-20

Traction Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-20Up-Shift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-20

LocksDoor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-10Power Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-10Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11

Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5Low Fuel Warning Light . . . . . . . . 5-23Lower Anchors and Tethersfor Children (LATCHSystem) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-37

Lumbar Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4

MMaintenanceRecords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-15

Maintenance ScheduleRecommended Fluidsand Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-12

Malfunction Indicator Lamp . . . . 5-15Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-29Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . . 9-30Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-14

MessagesBattery Voltage andCharging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-29

Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-29Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-29Door Ajar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-30Engine Cooling System . . . . . . .5-30Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-31Engine Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-31Fuel System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-31Key and Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-31Object Detection System . . . . .5-32Ride Control System . . . . . . . . . .5-32

Messages (cont'd)Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-33Starting the Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . .5-33Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-33Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-34Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-28Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-34

MirrorsAutomatic DimmingRearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-16

Convex . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-15Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-16Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-16Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-16

Monitor System, TirePressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-50

MP3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-16

NNavigationOnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-2

NetCargo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3

Net, Convenience . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3New Vehicle Break-In . . . . . . . . . . 9-14


i-8 INDEX

OObject Detection SystemMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-32

Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11

Off-RoadRecovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5

OilEngine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10Engine Oil Life System . . . . . 10-12Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-31Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22

Older Children, Restraints . . . . . 3-29Online Owner Center . . . . . . . . . . 13-6OnStar®

System, In Brief . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-24OnStar® AdditionalInformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-5

OnStar® Connections . . . . . . . . . . 14-3OnStar® Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . 14-5OnStar® Emergency . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2OnStar® Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2OnStar® Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1OnStar® Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2OrderingService Publications . . . . . . . . 13-16

OutletsPower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6

Overheating, Engine . . . . . . . . . . 10-20Overview, InfotainmentSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2

PParkShifting Into . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-24Shifting Out of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-25

Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-25Assist, Ultrasonic . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-43Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-32Brake and P (Park)Mechanism Check . . . . . . . . 10-28

Over Things That Burn . . . . . . .9-25Passenger Airbag StatusIndicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14

Passenger Compartment AirFilter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6

Passenger Sensing System . . . 3-23Perchlorate MaterialsRequirements, California . . . . . 10-3

PersonalizationVehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-34

PhoneBluetooth . . . . . . . . . 7-22, 7-24, 7-27

PowerDoor Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-10Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-16Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6Protection, Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6Retained Accessory (RAP) . . .9-23Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4Steering Fluid . . . . . . . . 10-22, 10-23Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-17

Pregnancy, Using SafetyBelts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15

PrivacyRadio FrequencyIdentification (RFID) . . . . . . . 13-20

ProgramCourtesy Transportation . . . . 13-13

Proposition 65 Warning,California . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2


INDEX i-9

RRacing or Other CompetitiveDriving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6

Radio FrequencyIdentification (RFID) . . . . . . . . 13-20Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-20

RadiosAM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-13Satellite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11

Reading Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7Rear Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2Rearview MirrorsAutomatic Dimming . . . . . . . . . . .2-16

Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5RecommendedFuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-46

Recommended Fluids andLubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-12

RecordsMaintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-15

Recreational VehicleTowing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-90

Reimbursement Program,GM Mobility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7

Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) System . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-2, 2-3

Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . 10-33Replacement PartsAirbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-28Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-14

Replacing Airbag System . . . . . . 3-28Replacing LATCH SystemParts after a Crash . . . . . . . . . . . 3-44

Replacing Safety BeltSystem Parts after a Crash . . . 3-16

Reporting Safety DefectsCanadian Government . . . . . . 13-18General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-18U.S. Government . . . . . . . . . . . 13-17

RestraintsWhere to Put . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-35

Retained AccessoryPower (RAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-23

Ride Control SystemsMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-32

RoadsDriving, Wet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6

Roadside AssistanceProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7, 13-11

RoofSunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-19

Rotation, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-55Routing, Engine Drive Belt . . . . . 12-4Running the Vehicle WhileParked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-26

SSafety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-16Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-15How to Wear Safety BeltsProperly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-10

Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11Reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13Replacing after a Crash . . . . . .3-16Use During Pregnancy . . . . . . . .3-15

Safety Defects ReportingCanadian Government . . . . . . 13-18General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-18U.S. Government . . . . . . . . . . . 13-17

Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11Safety System Check . . . . . . . . . . 3-15Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11Scheduling Appointments . . . . . 13-12Sealant Kit, Tire . . . . . . .10-64, 10-71


i-10 INDEX

SeatsAdjustment, Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2Heated Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6Lumbar Adjustment, Front . . . . . 3-4Power Adjustment, Front . . . . . . 3-4Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5

Securing ChildRestraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-44, 3-46

SecurityLight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-23Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-33OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-2Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13Vehicle Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13

Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6Accessories andModifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-3

Doing Your Own Work . . . . . . . .10-3Engine Soon Light . . . . . . . . . . . .5-15Maintenance Records . . . . . . .11-15Maintenance, GeneralInformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1

Service (cont'd)Parts Identification Label . . . . .12-1Publications OrderingInformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-16

Scheduling Appointments . . . 13-12Service Electric ParkingBrake Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19

Servicing the Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27Shift Lock Control FunctionCheck, AutomaticTransmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27

ShiftingInto Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-24Out of Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-25

Signals, Turn andLane-Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3

Spare TireCompact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-84

Specifications andCapacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2

Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11StabiliTrakOFF Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-20System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-36

Start Assist, Hills . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-35

Start Vehicle, Remote . . . . . . . . . . 2-8Starter Switch Check . . . . . . . . . 10-27Starting the Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-19Starting the VehicleMesssages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-33

Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4Fluid, Power . . . . . . . . . 10-22, 10-23Heated Wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3Wheel Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2Wheel Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2

Stoplamps and Back-up LampsBulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-32

StorageRear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2

Storage AreasCenter Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3Convenience Net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1

Storing the Tire Sealantand Compressor Kit . . . . . . . . . 10-78

Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10Sun Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv


INDEX i-11

SystemInfotainment . . . . . . . . . . . .13-20, 7-1Interactive DriveControl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-38, 9-40

TTachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11TaillampsBulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-32

Text Telephone (TTY) Users . . . 13-6Theft-Deterrent Systems . . . . . . . 2-14Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14

Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5TiresBuying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . 10-57Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-61Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-79Compact Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-84Designations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-45Different Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-58If a Tire Goes Flat . . . . . . . . . . 10-62Inflation Monitor System . . . . 10-51Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-54Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-33Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-49Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22

Tires (cont'd)Pressure Monitor System . . . 10-50Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-55Sealant andCompressor Kit . . . . 10-64, 10-71

Sealant and CompressorKit, Storing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-78

Sidewall Labeling . . . . . . . . . . . 10-43Terminology andDefinitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-45

Uniform Tire QualityGrading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-59

Wheel Alignment and TireBalance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-60

Wheel Replacement . . . . . . . . 10-61When It Is Time for NewTires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-56

Winter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-42TowingGeneral Information . . . . . . . . . .9-51Recreational Vehicle . . . . . . . . 10-90Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-89

TractionControl System (TCS) . . . . . . . .9-35Control System (TCS)/StabiliTrak® Light . . . . . . . . . . . .5-20

Off Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-20

TransmissionAutomatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-27Fluid, Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13Fluid, Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-14Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-34

Transportation Program,Courtesy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13

Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11Turn and Lane-ChangeSignals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3

Turn SignalBulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-32

UUltrasonic Parking Assist . . . . . . 9-43Uniform Tire QualityGrading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-59

Universal Remote System . . . . . 5-39Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-42Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-39

Up-Shift Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20Using This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv


i-12 INDEX

VVehicleAlarm System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13Canadian Owners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iiiControl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3IdentificationNumber (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-1

Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-10Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-28Personalization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-34Remote Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-89

Vehicle CareStoring the Tire Sealantand Compressor Kit . . . . . . . 10-78

Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-48Ventilation, Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19Voltage Devices andWiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-34

WWarningBrake System Light . . . . . . . . . . .5-18

Warning Lights, Gauges, andIndicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8

Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ivCautions and Danger . . . . . . . . . . . .ivHazard Flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3

Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23WheelsAlignment and TireBalance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-60

Different Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-58Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-61

When It Is Time for NewTires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-56

Where to Put the Restraint . . . . 3-35Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-34Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-17

WindshieldWiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3

WinterDriving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8

Winter Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-42Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . 10-28Wiring, High VoltageDevices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-34

2013 Buick Regal Owner Manual M...Buick Regal Owner Manual - 2013 - crc - 11/5/12 Black plate (3,1)...

Documents

Transcript of 2013 Buick Regal Owner Manual M...Buick Regal Owner Manual - 2013 - crc - 11/5/12 Black plate (3,1)...